The Canva Master Course for 2022 & Beyond: Create Better Graphics & Marketing Assets in Less Time!

1. 1 - Course Introduction: Hi. My name is Greg and a discourse. I'm going to teach you everything you need to know about Canada and how to use Campbell A smart way so you can create better designs and so that you can crush your content marketing . For the past two decades, I've made my living as a designer, a programmer, a photographer, a blogger and an entrepreneur during that same time have gone from single guy to marry guy , the father to father of two and now father of free. So believe me, I understand the struggle of getting everything done in a given day. It's a struggle we all share. That's why in this course I want to help you achieve camp a mastery. But also I want to help you adopt the smart work low that will continually give you back time. Most precious resource we all have. When I first discovered Camba, I was skeptical with years and years of experience in programs like Photoshopped, Illustrator and in Design. I wasn't sure Canada had anything awful, but I decided to give it a try anyway. And I was instantly hooked. Don't get me wrong. I still love those other programs But it's about finding the right tool for the right job. And when it comes to creating high quality designs and marketing assets quickly, Campbell really excels. We'll start in this course by first laying a foundation for success by going over all the little things that commonly trip people up and slow down their workflow. Then we'll move on to mastering each element of the project interface and on from there to tackling lots of real world projects, from media kits to social media. Graphics to e books, toe animations to videos will cover everything that matters on When the course is completed , you'll be able to use Campbell to create any sort of design that you need for your blog's for business or your clients. Just as importantly, throughout the course will continually learn and reinforce smart workflow tricks that will take you from just using Kampe templates to creating your own custom templates that you can use again and again to create better designs in better marketing assets and less time. So if you're tired of the time, suck of the dreaded blank page, the steep learning curve of other design software creating designs that well just aren't very good, and you're ready to create better designs, better marketing assets and you're ready to have the match Campbell, which allows you to create all the assets you need in support of your business. And this is the course for you. It's not just about mastering camp for your business. It's about taking back time for the things that really matter if you're ready to take that step, that I look forward to seeing you on the inside. 2. 1 - Getting the Most From this Course: Hey, This is Greg, and thanks for checking out my Canva master course. As I record this now nearly 2 thousand students have gone through this course. And the course has grown from around 60 lessons and 7.5 hours of content when I first launched the course to now over a 100 lessons in nearly 15 hours of content. Now I really care about making regular updates to this course so it stays the best possible resource for you all as students in this course. However, I do understand it that much content can be a little overwhelming. In this video, I'm going to give you an idea of how these course lessons are structured, how they're organized, and give you a good feel for how you can get the most possible out of this course, because that is what I want for you. Now, once you clicked on the course, you're gonna see a user interface in Skillshare that looks a little bit like this. Before I jump in and start talking about how these lessons are organized, let me just talk very briefly about this user interface itself. First of all, you can click the save button here, and that's gonna save your course. And then anytime when you're in logged into Skillshare, if you just go under my classes and you're gonna be able to find this class, jump back in and pick up where you left off. Now when you click on any of these videos over to the left, it's going to play over here in this window to the right. And if you want a bigger view here and really be able to see things, I recommend using this full-screen button, which is going to make it so the video itself takes up the full screen of your computer that just makes it even easier to see what's going on. So I always like to watch my classes inside of this full screen mode. And then when you want to see that class menu, you can just exit out of full-screen mode or just like this. And you're back here and you have this menu. Now you can also just go into expanded view out here by clicking this icon in the top corner. And then you also get another icon there when you want to bring this menu back out. And that just makes for easy navigating through the lessons here inside this course. Along the bottom here, where you have this full-screen button. So you can see when you hover over the video here, that's what this menu pops up, and that's the full-screen button here. This is the ability to turn on captions. And you also have volume, volume controls here. And then you have this little toggle switch, which lets you view all your notes. So anytime when you're watching this course and you want to leave a note for yourself or a note for the other people watching this class, you can click on this button here. You can add a note and you have the ability to make your note public, or you can make it private for just you. And it's going to attach a note to this video. So this is very helpful if you just want to leave a note for yourself, or even if you want to leave a note for someone else in the class, something that you think might be helpful. Of course, to get out of this, you can just hit the X button there and the other things here when you're over here on the video and you bring up this hover menu. It just shows you the time of the video, how much you've watched, how much is the total time is. And then you can go back 15 seconds. You can change the playback speed and I probably leave this at normal. But if you wanted to try 1.25, if you're really trying to be productive, you could do that. I would probably leave it as normal as I tend to talk a little fast sometimes I think anyways, then of course play and pause button here. Now we're going to get to these, but before I do that, let me just mention down here, you can leave reviews, you can check out the discussions going on in the class. You can check out projects and resources, and you can check out transcripts for this course. Now under the Review tab, you do have to watch a little bit of the course, a few lessons before you can leave a review. But reviews are helpful for other viewers. Obviously, it's helpful for me as an instructor. So positive reviews are great, but anything you have to say, even if it's constructive criticism, is all going to be helpful for myself and for others. So if you get a chance, please feel free to leave a review under the discussion section, you can start a conversation, ask a question, or share a project. Then of course we have projects and resources. These are the projects in this class and so you can post your project to this section here. And then under transcripts, you can just see a transcript of all the dialogue in this course. So long to talk anymore about that. You can add to your calendar, you can save. I mentioned saving, that's good because then you can bring it up at anytime in my classes at your calendar if you want to post reminders for yourself, all that stuff share. If you want to share it with someone else, share it to social media, whatever, that's all stuff you can do. But now let's get to what I really want to talk about. And this is gonna be just how this is organized and how you might want to tackle such a large body of content. Because I know you're not gonna sit here. I know you're not going to watch 14 plus hours of content all at once. You're really going to have to set up a schedule and then you're going to have to work through this in a manner that makes sense for you. I really want you to get the most possible out of this course. Now by default, Skillshare just numbers each lesson you have. So if I have a 100 videos in the course, it's going to number them one-to-one hundred. So you see on the left there are numbers here. So what I have done is I have gone in and I have added an additional number. So after the first number, you have this additional number that is indicating the section of the course, because I've tried to organize this course intersections so you can better get around, so you can better understand the content that is gonna be in each section, which I'm going to discuss right now. So you can see here you have section one and then section two, and then here's section three, and then four and then five and so on. So as you go on down now, even though you see there are a 100 videos here, they are actually organized in structured into 12 different course sections. And I want to talk about all those sections now. You may want to skip around. You don't have to go through these lessons in order. I want you to do whatever you think is going to be the best for you, whatever is going to be appropriate and give you the results you are looking for. So to help you with that, let's talk about these different sections of the course now and how I have this structured in this first getting started section of the course, I'm just covering some of the basic things like the difference between free and pro Canva, how to launch projects from the home screen. Now these are of course, important things to know. But if you're someone who is entering the course with some prior knowledge of Canva. And you feel like you can skip a few of these lectures for now. Of course, that is your prerogative. Everyone is entering this course with a unique background. So approach these lessons in an order that makes sense for you. I've attempted to organize the course with a lot of important foundational information and skills upfront. So you can benefit from and build from that base as you go forward in the course. But there's no rule that says you can't skip ahead to the future lessons if there's something you really want to see. And of course you can always double back to sections lessons as you need to do so. Section two of the course I've titled Foundations for success and helpful tools. And this section is all about going over some of the workflow tips, tricks, and tools that I feel like you might use again and again in Canva, recovering them first just with the idea that learning these things upfront will save you a lot of time and headaches going forward. In this section, we'll go over things like aligning texts and elements, grouping elements, positioning elements, the quick search feature, the background removal, the power of templating, because these are all things that will benefit you greatly if you make them apart of your regular Canada workflow. So we're trying to learn these sorts of things first, just with the idea, it's going to help us with everything we do going forward. Session three is titled graphic design one-on-one and a few helpful resources. And this is meant to be a quick overview on some graphic design principles, as well as some helpful tools and strategies that can help you create better designs. If you're entering this course with a solid background in graphic design, then maybe you'll decide to skip over some of these lessons. But if you're relatively new to graphic design, then some of these lessons might be a good primer that may benefit all of your design work going forward, Canada is a program that is certainly helpful to beginners because it offers lots and lots of high-quality pre-made designs as starting points. But still, having at least a basic idea of design principles will help you better understand why a certain element might be working or not working in your design. And it will give you more ideas of things you may want to try. It's just going to generally be helpful to you and help you create better designs as you move forward. Section four is about creating and storing brand assets. And this is a section is just designed to help you get organized and to help you save time going forward as you create marketing assets for your personal or professional brand. From there we move this section five, mastering the project interface. So this section is just that we'll go over the project interface and make sure you understand where everything is located and how to use everything. Again, we go over this first before really going in depth into specific projects because it just gives you that solid base which you can draw from in all future projects you tackle in Canva. But again, if you feel like you already know the project interface pretty well, or if you're someone that picks up things quickly on the fly, then of course you're welcome to skip ahead and you can always circle back if needed. The next section is just a short section on using Canva on mobile. Since when you do work on a mobile, you do get a different interface. The tools are pretty much the same, but it is an adjustment and comes with a few quirks. If you're used to working on desktop, we'll go over what you need to know and make sure you're ready to go. Personally, I mostly work on desktop, especially when creating new designs. But there is something pretty satisfying about being able to just pull out your phone and then quickly make use of a template and published something to one of your marketing channels. So I definitely encourage you to adopt whatever workflow works for you. And in this section we'll make sure you're ready to go on mobile as well as desktop. The next section is called more helpful tips and resources. And that's just what they are. Just a few more things that didn't make it into the earlier section of the course, but that I felt would be helpful to your workflow. So things like filters and presets, how to resize projects, how to change all instances of colors at once, and a few other things. Next is the real-world projects section of the course. The goal with these lessons is not to go over every single possible type of real-world project you might face. But rather to give you enough in-depth real-world examples of how to tackle the project so that you'll come away from these projects feeling like you could tackle any type of real-world project, whatever it may be. The next section of the course is all about working with animation in Canvas while working with audio and video and Canada and taking advantage of the presentation modes and Canva, I think for many of you at least, this might be the most valuable section of the course as video and animation plays such a huge role in today's marketing and social media driven world. So if you're excited about this type of content and you want to make this the first section of the course that you watch, then sure, absolutely. Skip ahead and watch this section of the course. None of the other content is going anywhere. And the whole point is for you to get the most value of this course that you possibly can. So if you think this section of the course is going to be super valuable for you, then go ahead and watch this section first. And then again, you can always look back to all of the other course content afterwards. This is the section of the course that has undergone the most changes and updates since the course first launched. As Canva has continued to introduce new tools. We'll cover everything in this section from getting the most out of the canvas, animation assets and options. So all of the different presentation modes and there are benefits to recording your own audio and video and even doing screen capture all within Canva, I think Canva, It's advancements in animation, audio, and video really might be game changers for content marketers. And in this section of the course will cover it all and make sure you're in good position to take advantage. So make sure you check out this section of the course. The next section of the course is about special effects in getting creative. Now everyone loves special effects. Sure, but even more than that, this section is just about exploration, getting creative, and seeing how far we can push the tools in Canvas to get interesting results. In the next section of the course, we just go over all the different ways you can share an export your designs from Canada, including taking advantage of the relatively new content planner in Canada, which allows you to schedule out your designs from Canva directly to a variety of social media platforms. Now the content planar is a pro feature, but it is potentially super valuable to content marketers. So make sure you check out this section of the course and see everything that is possible, sharing your designs directly from Canva to all these different places. Finally, in the last section of the course, I talked about extending Canvas with a free software called photoperiod. Now if you are a Photoshop user, then use Photoshop to compliment Canva, not Futopia. But in this section I really wanted to find in highlight a free tool that could complement Canada in certain situations. As amazing tool is Canva is, I think people sometimes get caught up in the idea that it is the tool for everything. When I think the reality is, you should always be on the lookout for soft the software or the tool that represents the best solution for the problem you're facing and for you in your situation, for graphic design and social media marketing, I think Canada is often going to be that tool. But the beautiful thing about Canva is just the simplicity of the program, how easy it is to use. And if they did try to do everything that I think suddenly you see that simplicity and add easy, ease of use, fade away. So use it as often as you'd like for the things that excels at. But then I also want to encourage you to stay aware of the other tools out there and don't be afraid to invest in them and yourself when it is appropriate to do so. Okay, So that gives you an idea of how the course is laid out. And hopefully that helps you figure out the best way for you to approach this course. I'll finish by just saying that I really do care about making this one of the best Canva learning resources that you're going to find anywhere. But I still understand that this course can always be improved like all of you. I have a lot of things vying for my time. I have three kids, I have a wife and a busy professional life beyond this course. So it can't always instantly reply to questions or instantly record new videos for this course. But absolutely, I do read all of the course messages and reply to questions as soon as I can. And I'm committed to recording course updates whenever I can. So don't be shy about asking questions and keep making suggestions about new content you'd like to see, I'm committed to supporting you the best that I can. So thanks again and I look forward to helping you on your Canvas learning journey. 3. 1 - Creating a Canva account: If you already have a can of account, you can ignore this lesson and go on to another one. But for anybody that doesn't have a canvas account yet, will we will. We will quickly go over how to set up a camp account. Don't worry, it is super super easy. So all you're gonna do is head over to canvass dot com and then you have a number of ways to sign up with a free account. Now, if you're wondering about free vs paid, I'm going to cover all of that and one of the lessons coming up so you can check that out. But first, just sign up with a free account. It's the right way to start. You can upgrade very easily. So sign up with Facebook, Sign up with Google. These air really easy options. You probably already have those accounts. So if you want to sign up with one of those, that's fine on my my main account. I did just sign up with Google, and I like that because I used Gmail. I use a lot of the Google app, so I'm of long logged in on my work computer a lot and So if I go over to Campbell, I'm gonna find that I'm pretty much logged in and ready to go. So for me, that just makes sense. But you can also sign up with an email. So all you gotta do is come over here, can vote dot com, sign up with Google, sign up with email. It's gonna go ahead and ask you to create your count. You're gonna put in your name email password. You're not a robot. Boom. Then you're done. Now, the one thing I'll say about password is that it's always good and smart toe have a password that is a secure password, and I use something called Last Pass. It stores all my passwords and one secure place. I've done a lot of Web design and a lot of stuff like that in the past, but I had to memorize lots and lots of passwords. You're just gonna make your life away simple. Or if you have some sort of some sort of password management software, I use something called Last Pass. Then I can install in my browser, and it's gonna automatically take care of all that for me. So that's just a little aside from someone that knows what it's like to have lots of passwords. If you want to make your life simpler, you're probably doing this already. But if you're not, find the password management thing, so secure password. Name, email. Go ahead and create your account and then you are good to go. It's really that easy, so I'll see you in the next lesson. 4. 1 - Free Canva vs Pro Canva (Which is Right for You?): in this lesson. We're talking about Camba pricing so you can figure out what is the right solution for you . So they offer three tiers of packages. There's the free plan. There is the pro play it and the enterprise plan. The Enterprise is really only going to come into play for a larger team, so I'm not really gonna talk about that here. What we are going to talk about is the difference between free and pro. So first free is free, obviously. And then for the pro plane, you can either get billed monthly words 12 95 from a month or if you get billed yearly and pay all at once for a year. That breaks down toe only 9 95 per month now does talk about some of the differences here. But if I jump into can for here, I can show you even Maura the differences between the free and the PLO pro plan. So any time you're in the free plan and you see this little icon here, this crown that's usually going to tell you that that feature is a pro feature and you need a pro plan to access that now If I click that here, it's gonna bring this up and show you all the elements that are part of pro Canada. So I'm gonna talk about thes, and then I'll talk about the differences between that and the free plan. So the first year is this brand kit. Under the probe plan, you have a brand clip. They let you storebrand colors. You can store unlimited color palettes. You can store logos, you can upload fonts, and you can do some other things With your brand off brand kit and a free plan, you can do some very basic things, but you cannot do is many things. I think it limits the number of colors and things like that. So the brand Kate gives you a few more features. Ah, the on that pro plan. Then you get with a free plan. Ah, photos pro on the same thing for elements here, you just have mawr free options, including it included in Camp a Pro. When it comes to illustrations when it comes to photos now, there still are paid elements in camp a pro. There are some photos that still cost money, but you have mawr of those free options in the camp. A pro, I will say, Even in the free Campbell. There's lots and lots and lots of free stuff. So it's not like you're gonna get in free, Camba, and find out you have no options. You're still gonna have lots of options. It's just that you have even Mawr and that pro plan next, the magic resize pro. Basically, if you're creating a document here, let's see you're creating something with these wits. And then you wanted to take that graphic and try to convert it instantly to ah, maybe something that's a square graphic, maybe something for mobile. It will let you select all those different settings for, like, the different sides projects in camera. And it will attempt to magically resize your project and spawn those new projects, so that can be helpful. And that can save time. Now this tool isn't perfect. Sometimes you'll still have to move things around a little bit, but it does say some time, so if you find yourself doing that, will you create a graphic and then you wanna have it across multiple platforms where it's gonna need to be a different size than that could be a helpful tool, and that is only available in the pro plan. And we talked about this year. Publishing. When you go to export your graphic, there are some high res options and the ability to save with transparent backgrounds that are only part of that pro plan animation. Pro. Ah, in the pro camera, you have the ability to take something. We have multiple different pages and almost build out like a slide show or it animation, where you can choose fade in effects between those slides so you could actually animate the transition between those different slides was different pages. That is not something you can do with the free plan. You could only do that in camp a pro. So templates Ah, sit on the boards, A number of templates you get. And so whenever you start a project, there are lots and lots of templates, which is basically sort of completed projects, that act of starting points. You're gonna launch a template, and then you're going to still go in there and make changes to that template. But it gives you a good starting point again in free camera. There are lots of options but you have more options once again in the pro version. Same thing for ah fonts. You have even more fonts in the pro Camba. Almost a ridiculous amount. Almost to many. Ah, but you have lots of fonts in the free camera, but you have even Maurin the pro camera folders pro. This is a pretty big difference where, if you have the pro plan, you can have as many folders as you want, and in those folders you can have your designs, and you can also upload your own graphics into that folder. And in the free plan, you are limited to two folders. Ah, but the other big difference is in the pro plan. You can have sub folders, and then when you're working in the project view when you're working over here in the screen and upload pro one, you can access those folders. So have you stored assets? Ah, by themes. So maybe if you have something where you're creating a Thanksgiving graphic, maybe you have a folder with those assets, and you can pull that right up in project view and see those photos photos. Now, if you have the free plan, you cannot do that. You're limited to the two folders. Now you can still upload a group of photos for assets, and you're going to see those in the up loads tab. So it's not like you can't get to anything in the free version. There's still lots of options. It's just if you are creating lots of collections that you're going to reuse over time, then the folders give you a nice way of doing that in the free version. I mean, excuse me in the pro version. In the free version, you got a sort of have to come up with another way to do that Extra storage assist. You have extra storage with the pro plan, although I have not run into any storage limits with out of the free plant or the pro plan at this point. So I'm not sure what those limits are off the top of my head, but that may be another difference. Ah, backgrounds pro again, like the other elements and photos you have even mawr of the free options in the pro version, and one thing that they do not that I have listed here when the newer tools in camera is the background removal tool. So basically it will take a photo, and with one click, it attempts to isolate the subject and remove that subject for the background. So that could be a really helpful tool and that is only available in the pro version of camera. Now, if you hear all these differences and you know you want to go pro, that's great. If you're unsure about whether you wanna be pro or free, you can always start free, and you can always upgrade later. And inside the course, we pretty much talk about a lot of these, most of these in more detail, so you can always get into the course, and then you'll see more of the real world examples and get a real feel of the difference between the free camera and pro camera, and you can upgrade at any time, so it's not a big deal, all right, so that's free versus pro camera, and I will see you in the next section 5. 1 - The Home Screen & Launching New Projects: This is the Canva home screen. This is the screen you first get when you log into Canva. And from this screen you can launch all sorts of different projects. In this lesson, we're gonna go over how to do all of that, how to launch all these different types of new projects, as well as a few other things you need to know about this home screen. Now I am re-recording this lesson of the course in April of 2022 just to reflect the latest changes to this page. But if you're watching sometime in the future, just know that your home screen could be a little different from what you're seeing on screen now. But functionally it's gonna be the same. The whole idea of this screen is just an easy place for you to launch all the different projects. Project types that you have in Canada, also a way to see your own work and there are few other things on the page. Even if your screen looks a little different functionally, it should be the same. Of course, if it drastically changes, all jump back in here and I will rerecord this video. Let's just go over this page quickly. You have on the left here you have a bar on menu bar on the left, and then you have another one along top. And then you have this big featured area here. What will you design? And then below that we have some sort of images of our recent designs and some designs they are suggesting to us. So we're gonna go over all this, but let's start right up here. What will you design? Right here? You can type something into the search box, and Canada will start to look for that. If I go ahead and I know want to design something for Pinterest, I could start to type in Pinterest. And as I type, it's going to look for both templates if I have this selected. So templates that Canada has like an start a project from, or it will search your projects. And so if you have something you've named with that Pinterest in the name, it's going to find that as well. So you, as you search, you can switch between these two tabs here. And it's going to show you sort of templates that it has. And then below that it's going to have all these suggested templates, the actual visual representation. And you can click the See All button if you want to jump in there farther and see those templates. So I hit clicked, see all. And now it's taking me all these interests in. It's taking me into all these Pinterest templates. Now let me just go back. You can go back to the home screen a number of different ways. First of all, I could just use the back arrow in my browser because I just left it. Or I could click Home here, or I could just click on the Canva logo and doing any of those things, it's taking me back to the home screen. You can search up here. So if I search for Instagram, it's going to start to tell me the different types of Instagram post. I have Instagram Live Instagram grid, Instagram real Instagram posts. And then I can do to see off, I want to see the suggested templates and so on and so on. But that is only one of many ways you can start a project in Canva, basically on this home screen, they give you a bunch of different options. A lot of times to do the same thing, but they're just trying to make it really easy. So there isn't going to be a way that you get in there and you just can't figure out a launch a project because they make it super easy. For example, right below the search box, you also have all these little icons right here. This first one for you is what's usually checked on by default. And you can see the little triangle here sort of pointing up towards that. And it's sort of highlighted in white here. So this is the one that is currently selected. And basically once you start to use Canva little bit, it's going to get an idea of the type of projects you'd like to create, what you've created recently and then went for you is selected. It's going to give you, you might want to try in all these options below. So it's saying I might want to create a video or a flyer or post, or a postcard and so on. And it'll show me even more options if I go to the right and click this little arrow oligomers to the even more options. Now, if you want to get into one of these other categories like presentations, I would just click on that and then you'll notice below at how this content is now changing below. So now it's showing me presentations that I might want to try if I go into social media, again, It's going to update this below. And if I go down below, I have popular Instagram, Facebook. And with all of these, I can click to see more by using an arrow there. If I see an arrow like that on the side, again, video, print products and on and on. And you can even use this more tab and it's going to have even more options. So again, you can search up here for the type of project you want to do. You can search down here. If you have this for you option, it's going to show you projects you might want to try, but then it's also going to show you your recent designs. When for you is selected, you're gonna see projects they're suggesting you might want to try, you might want to launch, but then you also have all your recent designs below here. If you just scroll downward. Now again, there are lots of different ways to launch things in Canva. So there are still even more ways we can launch a project. I could also go up here under this templates menu, and I could see the different types of templates that they have in here. And I could go under personal, I could go under resumes, I could click on that. And then when I click on that, it's going to open up this page here with even more resume, resume templates. And so I could click on one of these and then it's going to tell me all about it. It's going to give me a little preview. It's gonna give me some ideas about this design. It's gonna show me more designs that are similar to this. And I can click on one of these. Any of these. And then if you do want to launch it, you can also just click right here and customize this template. And when you do that is actually going to launch the project. If I click customize template, it's actually launching in a new tab on my browser. And now I have this project open. I'm starting with this template, but now I can come in here and I can customize this. I can change the content within this project to whatever I want now that opened in a new tab so I can navigate back to the old Tab and it still has this. I can close back out of here. I can go back to my home screen. I can continue to search. So again, there are lots of different ways. So launch projects. When you launch a project, it's going to open in a new tab on your browser. Just how I launched up here. I could also have launched by typing in down here, or maybe I come down here and I say, What are actually want to create as a fire? So I'm gonna create a blank flyer. Or if you actually come up here in New type in flyer, then I can type in flyer. And I could search my project if I had a previous flyer or something or designed. Now I think here it's finding things that I designed that maybe don't have flyer and a name, but maybe they have the same dimensions as this project, but also under Templates. If I do this, I can see all these suggested templates if I just click See All. And then again, when I do that, it takes me to a similar screen where now I'm seeing templates for sort of pre-made projects that represent a starting point where you can start with the design basically put together. But then you can still come in there and customize it any way you want. So if I want this one, I could just launch this project. So I'm watching this flyer project that's coming in with all these premade content. And now I can come in here and I can customize this anywhere I want. So I will be doing things like taking out those pictures, swapping in my own picture, swaption in my own titles, texts, colors, etc. But it all starts by launching from this home screen. So again, I'll go back to that home screen again and we'll continue to talk about the home screen. But you're getting the idea for launching the projects. There are lots of different ways you can search. You can search here in this content box, you can search for the templates up here. You can use any of these menus here to get into a more discrete category. It's gonna show you options below and you can launch them and what some of these, you're just creating a blank project. So for example, right here you'll see it says Create blank, create blank YouTube video. If I click on that, it's going to incidently launched a project. And now I'm just in this blank template. Now a lot of times you want to start with a blank template like this because you're putting your own design spin on it and you're starting from scratch. But even if you do start with a blank project, you can still come in here once you're in your project, you can look under the templates. You can still see in search templates in here. So you can still decide after you launched the blank project, hey, I want to start with this pre-existing content as a starting point. You can still apply a template to your project once it's already open, even if you started as a blank project. Okay, So let me just zip it back to the home screen one more time. We've talked about this, we've talked about launching projects. Let's just go over the top bar here and then we'll go over this left bar. And then you'll pretty much have this home screen down and know all the different ways you can use it. So up here on the left here you see three bars here that just lets you hide and show this left-hand menu. So it's not a big deal, but if you want a little bit more screen real estate to see all your possible templates you can start with, you can show and hide that there. And of course, this just links to the Canvas home screen as, as this under templates we saw that where you can go in all the Arnold or all these different categories and check it out. If you go under Features, it's similar, but sometimes you're not looking now at a particular project or a project template. You might be looking at a specific item like social media icons. If I wanted to come in here and see all the social media icons that template other kinda has to offer. I can just go under features, I can click on that. Now it's showing me all the social media icons. I can come in here if I want, I can filter this, just see the pro ones, just to see the free icons. And then something I'm going to go over later in this course. But if you see something you like, you can always come in here and you can store it. And what that's gonna do is gonna, it's gonna make that a standard item for you. And then when you're working within a camp, a project, you have an easy way to access all those items that you've started. This is a good way to store your favorites. Store your favorite things that you might reuse that you want to easily be able to access later. That was under the features tab. You can check out the other things under the features tab. Let me just go back to the home screen here. You have the Features tab and then you have this Learn tab here. Under the Learn tab, there's just some more learning resources. So they have some tutorials and some other things that you can go check out. I'm not gonna talk too much about that, but feel free to explore and see what is under this Learn tab. Okay, We're going to the side menu in a second, but let's just finish off this top menu by going up to the right here. If you click on this question mark, it just takes you to the Canvas Help Center. This course. Hopefully it has you covered. But if you come into all the other questions you want to ask something specifically to the Canvas team. You can come in here and you can look for help articles and you can ask questions and search under this page. So let me just back out of that. That is that little help of question mark there. Then with your gear icon. It takes you to your account settings. If you click on this gear icon, it's gonna come in here. It's going to show you your email, your login, your other stuff, your other stuff related to your account, who's on your team, you're building things. I'm not gonna go through all these, but you can check that out. That is all here under your Canva account settings. Then let me just go back to the home screen and just to make sure we're going to the same thing. But you'll notice when I'm on other pages, I still get this top menu bar and a lot of these items, notifications, you'll sometimes get things up here. If you have a notification, if one of your team members says something to you about one of your designs, things like that are gonna show up here under this bell icon. And you'll get little sort of a blue icon that shows up here to show you the app, a new notification. Now of course, to create a design, I just mentioned before how there's lots of different ways to do things on the home's home screen here. So we know we can search here, we can launch design by clicking on one of these, by going through the templates up here. You can also just click this, create a Design button up here. And once again, it's going to show you some options. Once again, it's gonna let you search. If I start to type in Facebook and I want to create a Facebook ad, I can just click on that. And it's going to launch a Facebook ad project, which is going to have those dimensions, something that's gonna be appropriate as a Facebook ad. And then of course in here, it could still go through templates, apply templates to the page you're getting the hang of all of that will back out to the home screen again. So the last thing up here on the top is just here. You have your little picture icon. And if you click in on this thing and once again, you can get to your account settings, which we can also do with this gear here, right? So there are always multiple ways to do things, but Account Settings and get help. You can switch between different teams if you're a part of different Canada teams, and then get the canvas apps. We'll talk about that in a minute. There's multiple apps that work with Canva, refer friends, privacy policy, and you can sign out here. So again, that's just the basics. You find all of that here under your little picture icon in the upper right. That leaves us with this left menu here. Again, once again, we have yet another link to the home screen. From this left menu, you can always click on this button and you can return to the home screen. It's not gonna do anything right now because we're already on the homepage. But if I go to a different page and I have this left menu up and I click on that home, I can get back to the home screen, your projects. So if I click on your projects, then it's gonna take you to where all your Canva projects are stored and organized. You'll see some of your recent projects on your homepage. But if you really want to get into them, you can come over here to this, Your Projects tab. Now, when you're on the shore projects tab over here to the right, you're gonna see your recent projects across the screen. But then you're also going to be able to comment, come in here and go to just your folders and see your folder structure. Now if you have a free account, you're just going to have two folders. If you have the pro account, you can create more and more folders. So if you want to see your folders, click on this tab. And then of course, if you just want to search gesture designs, you can go over to this tab. If you want to look at just images. You're on this tab and just videos on this tab. So again, this is just another way to come in here and search your projects. So you go for your projects tab and then you can come in here and either search for projects or design elements. If you go to templates that under this Templates tab right here, if I click on that, then it's going to once again be another way to get in and search all of those different Canva templates. Now you can search by type like Facebook posts or a book cover, or you could search by a theme. So if I typed in something like Easter than you can see, I start to get some Easter themed posts across these different platforms. You can search either way. And then as you search, you'll start to get these filters where you can come in here and you can filter your search even farther to really hone in and get that specific canva template you're looking for as a starting point. Now anytime you want to, you can click on at home and get back to this home screen. They have all this redundant sort of navigation and everything built-in just to make sure you don't get lost, just to make sure you can always get back to your homebase here, your home screen. Okay, so we talked about home, we talked about your projects and templates shared with you would be a tab where if you clicked on this, any projects that are shared with you from other Canvas users, you're gonna see those projects in here. And then trash. If you click on this trash, if you click on that, it's gonna show you anything that you recently deleted. You can delete something within Canva and you'll have 30 days to restore that before it's permanently deleted. After 30 days, it's gone for good. So if you do delete something, you have 30 days just to confirm that yes, you really want it to be gone from your Canva account. So after that, if you have any team members, then you're going to have your team tools right here under team. So this would be your team. You can invite more members using this. Then below that you have some tools, you have discover apps, you have your brand kit and your content planner. Now the brand kit in the content planar are pro features and we're gonna talk more about those in depth in this course. So I'm not gonna go over them specifically right now. This is where you can access these tools over in this left menu. We also have this discover apps option. And if you click on this, you're gonna see all the apps that developers have created to work in concert with Canva. You can go through and you can look at these by different category. So if I want to see the photo editing ones, I can click on this tab. Then if I wanted to learn anymore about any one of these, I could read the little blurb, but then I could also click on it to bring up even more information. And if I click on User nude as a new design, it actually would launch my project window and I would be able to use this particular app. Now, as you use apps, they then become available. So they're always gonna be there in your project interface. And we'll get more into using these apps along with Canva, there are some cool ones. I don't think all of them are super-helpful, but there are some ones that definitely are helpful to figure out what ones you might want to use. You could just spend a little time and you could come in here and explore around. And again, you can see all the apps or you can search by these different categories. And so you can see this is all of them. There are a fair amount in here. And there will be more and more as more developers sort of pair with Canva and come up with these little apps that work in concert with Canva. So this is just another way that Canva is working with developers to make their product even better and better. So you can check these out. We're not going to spend any more time on them now, but we will talk about some of these within the course as we go along here. Then the last thing over in this left menu is as you started in folders, they will start to show up here as sort of quick links that you can access quickly. I of course have way too much start and turned on. So I need to do some organizing. But just to show you how this works, if I come under my your projects tab and then I come on here under folders. Let me just go into one of my folders here. So we have this social media templates. Let me just come down so we can see all these things here. So I can see this social media templates is currently stored, and because it started, I can see it over quickly in my menu here. I think I just saw a minute ago. Of course I have too many stored here it is right here, social media templates, I mean, this folder. And so it's getting turned gray here, but if I OnStar it, then suddenly it disappears from my quick menu over here. But if I store it, it's going to put it back in and it'll put it at the bottom because I turned it off and then turn it back on. So again, you can just use this star sort of on your folders. When you're within a folder, you can hit the star and then it'll show up in the left menu. That's just the last thing you're going to have over here on this left menu. But now we'll just sit back to the home screen and I think that pretty much covers it. So the main purpose of the home screen here is just to launch your designs. Actually, one thing I didn't mention is that you can choose from all these templates, launch projects. You can search for projects. But if you just know the custom size, like if you know, like I want something that's 1080 by 1080 pixels, you can just come in here and you can type in whatever custom size you want. So I would type in 1080 by 1080 if I wanted 1080 by 1080 and px for pixels. In order to give you some suggestions here. But again, you can type it directly into here. You can also change your units from pixels to inches or millimeters or centimeters of pixels is usually going to make the most sense. Click this little locking icon and then it'll whatever you type in one field, it's gonna show up in the other one because it's going to lock to constraints like that. So again, that's just if you automatically know the size you want to start with, you can just click on this custom size, launch a break blank project, and off you go. But otherwise, all those different methods I mentioned for searching and finding, starting templates or whatever document format you want. You're just gonna do that very easily on the home screen. Everything on this home screen, it's just going to become second nature to you. It's very intuitive. It's very easy to launch projects. That's the home screen in Canada. And I will see you in the next lesson. 6. 2 - Tips for Positioning and Spacing Elements: a few more tips on objects Basing. We know that we have these guide that will show up automatically, but you can also then just click on an object and you have this position up here. We talked about sending it forward and back the layers stack, but you can also use thes buttons. Position it at the top, middle or bottom of the document, the left of the document, the center of the document or they right. So if we wanted to absolutely center it, we could go center and middle, and we would have it centered perfectly in a document. Now, that's with one object. When you have one object, it's going to show you these, and it's gonna position it in relation to the page. However, let me make this smaller, and I'm gonna go ahead and make a couple copies of this, and I'm gonna have a couple of different occupy objects now. And so now when you have multiple objects, if you select multiple objects and then you use this position now you can position these objects altogether and they are positioning. Relate in relationship to one another. So you're aligning their tops. You're aligning their bottoms. You're lying there. Middles? Of course, these objects were the same size. So let me just make these a little different size so we can see how that top, middle and bottom would work. So if I do this like this and now I come to position, I can align their tops there. All the tops were lined. I could align the middle's their middle line. I can align the bottoms. And of course, you could also do something where you space them. Ah, so they're equally space. We have equal spacing between those. And then, of course, you have all these. Were you left the line? Um, you send our line and you're right a line. So all these things come into play. I'm gonna go ahead and delete these for a second, and I'll just go ahead, make a couple of copies of this again. Control C control V control. See? And there we go. And so again, if I said all these and you want to position and I want to space them evenly So Aiken, space them evenly, horizontally. I want to make sure they're all lined. I can make sure that they are all aligned. And then, of course, you can move them around together. And so just know, with one object, if you select one object and you come in here, then you were doing it in relation to the page. Right? But if you select multiple objects than when you come in under position, you're going to do it in relation to the other objects that are selected very important tricks. If you know these positioning tricks, they're going to save you some headaches and save you a lot of time. Okay, so let's talk a little bit more about positioning elements in your design. OK, we've already covered this position menu up here, so you can the line things using that, but you can also just click and drag directly on images. Now, if you need even more precise control, that's when you can use the keyboard shortcuts. Just your positional arrows on your keyboard. So if you use the left key the right key, the up key in the down key, you can nudge any object by one pixel, and you'll have that very precise control to put it anywhere you want. Now, if you want a little bit less control. But you want a little bit more than you can use left right up and down with the shift key. And when you combine those, then you're nudging something 10 pixels at a time, so that could be really helpful. Now, let me just talk about a couple other issues you may run into. So I'm gonna make this really pretty thin there and you'll notice when I make it. Then all of a sudden I get this a new icon right here. Any object in Camba by defaults gonna have this rotational icon. But as objects start to get smaller than they will eventually reach a point where they add in this other icon. And this is just another helpful handle. Where now you no longer have to click on the object. You can click directly on that and just move that around and then position it using that handle. So it actually is a really, really helpful tool because those things get smaller and camera and they're harder to click on. And you may select a heading, and then you may be stuck in here, or you maximally click something else having this handle where you can just click and grab it, and moving it around is very helpful. Another thing I want to show you here is let me change the color of this. So this is a little bit more obvious. I'm gonna make that any color. Really? I'll just change its yellow. And now, as I move this here, it's gonna snap to the edge. But then also snapped to the center. Okay, so that's giving me both options. But let me bring in a new line here because it's not always like that. And I'll show you a situation that you can get into and then talk about what I would do in that situation. So I was gonna come under elements. I'm gonna come on the lines. I'm gonna add this line here. I'll make this line smaller. Just bring it down a fair amount, and then I'm gonna bring it up here. And now, as I move this, you'll see now that I can no longer really get it to snap to that edge. If I zoom in here, man 100%. But it's it's leaving a white space or its snapping to the center so you'll find sometimes that you just can't quite get it right. And in those situations, what I want you to do is just don't be afraid to zoom in, go ahead and zoom in so you can really see what you're doing and then just use those positional arrow keys and then when you're pretty sure you haven't going back to 100% because you always want to double check things at 100% to make sure it's looking good, and then you should have your alignment in good shape. So don't forget to zoom in if you're really struggling. So that is just a few more tips for moving things around and precisely positioning them where you want them. OK, I'll see you in the next lesson. 7. 2 - Using Rulers and Guides (NEW): I wanted to record this quick update because once I've since I first launched this course, Canva has added a few more things to help with your positioning and your layout here. So if you just go under the File menu, you see now that you can show rulers and it will add rulers both horizontally and vertically. And then you're also have margins which are just don't find that helpful because it's just sort of a fixed margin there. But you can use that if you want to. You also have the print bleed. And so print bleed is basically if this was going to be something that you're going to send to be printed. The little area beyond this margin here, that's probably going to be chopped off when the trim that. So that's sort of your safe area inside that. Any part of the design that goes outside of that is probably going to be trimmed off. So if you add text to the edge, you want to watch for that. But all of these, I think rulers is probably the most helpful. And again, you can come in here and you can show guides, and then you can also just come in here and turn off Show Guides and it'll hide any additional guides you have on there. Now it's not doing anything right now because they don't have any rule was dragged out. Now to drag out a ruler, you can just click and drag down like this. And then you'll see there on the edge that little blue number is showing you exactly where you are. This is 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0. So if I wanted to come in here and sort of break this into quarters, I could sort of position it there. Now, if you need to get a little bit more precise, you can zoom in and just let you see a little bit better and have a little bit more precision here when you're moving back and forth. So that's right at 250. If I wanted one right at 250 this way, I could drag out and see it at 250. Now would be nice if you could just add a new guide and type in, in inches or in pixels where you wanted it to be on the screen horizontally and vertically, but they don't have that yet. So I think there are ways to improve this, but it just does let you just come in and add those guides and then when you something to the screen. So I'll take r to throw a rectangle on the screen. Now that I have those guides, it will snap to those guides and I can make use of those guides. So it's just another way to sort of add guides to help with your page layout. And again, you can come up here and you can use this show guys to turn them on and off. Maybe I don't want to see the margins. Maybe I don't want to see the print bleed. So usually those are things I have turned off. But I usually to keep Show Guides on because if I do dragged out rulers, it is helpful. Now you can also just use Control plus semicolon to turn those guides on and off. So that's just a helpful keyboard shortcut. That's on Windows on Mac, that would be command and the semicolon to turn it on and off. So there's a ruler's inside of Canva, just something new they've added in it is and other new helpful way for sort of laying out your design and positioning things on screen. So because it's pixels here, you may have to do a little math so you could pull up the calculator and say, okay, how wide is my entire document? What's 30% of that? If you're 33 percent of you wanted to do like third columns. So you can do the basic math, uses a little calculator owning computer, whatever is helpful. But then you can drag out those guides in it. It really is a way when you have a more complicated layout, just to take a little bit more control over where things are placed. All right, I'll see you in the next lesson. 8. 2 - Tips for Precisely Aligning Text: Okay. In the last lesson, we talked about moving things around one pixel. The time with those keyboard shortcuts. We talked about how you can zoom in when you need precise control. But let's just mention a few more things when it comes to aligning text. So I have the green bar here, and let's imagine I want to a line of this so that it perfectly spans the full distance of this green bar. So you have a lot of options. Okay, so option one, I'm just going to click and drag this and get right until it snaps to this edge over here. And then I can click and drag out on this side and it will expand out. And then, boom, I'm locked into place. Okay, that's great. But what if I didn't actually want to size up my texts? So let me just hit control Z to undo that. Another option here would be letter spacing. Remember, if I want to keep this the same time, I'm willing to play with the spacing in between the letters there. Then I could come up here and I could fool with this letter spacing, So just come up here and slowly drag out that letter spacing. Now, as I do this notice that is it expanding out from the center, And that's because this is several center lined. So it's important point, because when you start to play with something like a letter spacing and you're trying to keep alignment a lying to a particular edge, as I am this right age here, then you will want to pay attention up here to how you have this a set. So if I set this to left age now, now when I come and I play with my letter spacing now I can drag this spacing and it's going to start to expand out just on that one side, and it's anchored on this side so I can more precisely align things they way I want. So there's just two tips there. Remember, pay attention to where you're anchoring the side. If I am doing the shift click, I would first want to anchor it on the opt it sit side, and then I pull out on the opposite side and it stays anchored to that side. Now if I come in and do a letter spacing and it's going to depend precisely on what it set here, and that is decide it's going to stay. Anchors stay anchored down when I do letter spacing now. Ah, one more thing I'll mention and then we'll move on from here. But so when you aligned subheadings, the same sort of rules applied. So I just wanted to set a center line this campus pretty good about snapping to the center so you could just do that if I wanted to come over here. It's fairly good at snapping to the edge there. But what if I wanted to position this just under the word heading? Or maybe I want a position this under awesome heading? Well, the same rules we just went over. Still apply with this so you could get it lined up with this left edge. Now it's telling me that's precisely aligned there. But if you decided to nudge it, then you could use your keyboard shortcuts. And then, of course, you could either drag in the position it directly under heading or you could drag out and have positioned under this. Of course, No, When you do this, you're affecting the size of this obviously up or down. So your other options would be to play around with things like letter spacing. If you didn't mind changing the spacing of this again If I go to do this now with letter spacing, it's not gonna work because it's gonna expand out on both sides because of this center alignment. So again, get that to it, right? Aligned that way, the right side is going to stay right there. As I full of this facing. Now I can come up with this letter spacing and start to space it out. And then I can use that trick too. Align things under this awesome heading eso it really lines up now if you find you can't get it quite right. The last thing I'm going to mention is that yes, you can come up here and you can put in fractional values. So that 603 right now all type in 602 Ah, and that looks pretty good. But let's say I found that it did not quite match up. Well, you could come in here and you could put 601 0.5 because, yes, you can put in fractional values. So whenever you're dealing with line height. Ah, letter spacing, font size. All of those fields will take fractional values. So if you're really, really trying to be precise, don't forget you can put in those fractional values. Okay, so those are just a few tips. They may not seem like big deals because you're talking about getting in here, getting super precise, but a lot of times you're gonna want your designs to be super precise. So it's good to know these tricks. And if you just know these little rules, you're really gonna save yourselves from headaches, and you're gonna end up with a design that looks really awesome. All right, I'll see in the next section. 9. 2 - Selecting and Grouping Elements: let me give you a few quick tips on selecting objects and grouping objects. So with any item in your thing, if you hover over it, you'll see that selection box. You can click on a once, and you will select that element. You can also click and drag and select the multiple elements at once, which you can then move around together. You could also shift click. So with something selected, you could ship click on something else that added to the CLECs selection ship. Click again. Now they're all selected anywhere outside, and it's un selected. Everything. Also again number, click and drag. Anything that you dragged over becomes part of the selection. Then you could move it together. Click anywhere else and it's un selected Now. You can also group objects together. But before we do that, remember, I said before, you could also have something selected, and they have used the tab key. It will just cycle through the different objects and select the different objects within your document. So again, now, if you wanted to move things together here, so I'll go ahead and bring that up in line. This up here. Ah, line this up somewhere below it like that. Get everything nice once you have things. Position. Do you play you want. If you want to keep things, space together and group together, you can select everything at once, and then you can use this group here. Or you can use the keyboard shortcut, which is controlled G to group command Geoana, Mac and then Toe on Group. It would be controlled, shifty or command shifty, but I'll just go ahead and click this group button for this example. And now, with with a grouped, I can move it around together. But even if I click off of it when I click back on, all the elements are still together and part of the group. If I want to have individual elements again, you just on group and then suddenly I could move things again by themselves. But I'll reposition here again. Get that lined up the way I want it in there, and then I'll go ahead again. Select all this and hit group. Now this is very helpful just for positioning things in keeping them in a position relative to each other when you have things you want grouped together. But It can also change the way elements in your document Behave. Let me just show you an example of this Someone on group all this real quick. And so with all this ungroomed, if I came up here to my header and I decided this header was gonna have a line to in a line three. You see the way this spills outside of that yellow box that I have behind here. But I'm gonna go ahead and delete that. Go back up. So just one line again. But this time, I'll first come back and I will select everything. I will group this, and now I'm gonna come down to this Hettel header. You can double click to get inside. Even when it's part of a group. You can still select and edit an individual element. But so now I'm gonna come lying to and look what happens now. Every time I do a new line, that background box expands because when you group elements in one of the elements is contained within the other element, then as you expand it, that background element it's also part of the group will expand to include that element. That's part of the group. So I just want you to know that grouping elements how you select element, it's gonna be very important part of your workflow, so make sure you know these tricks. 10. 2 - Object Stacking and Selecting Hidden Elements: as you start to get multiple elements in your project, then you will need to be concerned with objects stacking. In other words, what object appears in front or behind of the other object? So here in this document here I just have four circles on screen. And right now this pink circle is on top. But you have to be able to send objects forward and backwards in your layer stack. So to do that, you would just select the object in question. And then you come up here under this position tab and you see you can move it backwards and it'll walk backwards in the layer stack, or you can move it forward. Or, if you want to send it all the way to the back all the way to the front, you can do it just like that. And of course, you have these keyboard shortcuts. I always like to pay attention to those. So if I use control in my bracket keys on my keyboard with the object highlighted, I can just walk it back and forth with my keyboard or control Ault and I can walk it all the way back or all the way forward all at once, and that would be command plus your bracket. Keep keys or command pleasure option key on the Mac for sending something backwards, one layer at a time or all the way to the back are all way forward. But so again, select the object in question. Either used this position. Tab up here and walk it back or walk it forward. Or you can use these keyboard shortcuts. But understanding how to move your objects around in the layers stack is going to be very important to your designs. And just one more thing related to object. Stacking is objects can sometimes be hidden behind each other. So if I were to send this heading back here, it's now behind here. Now I can bring it back to the front if I know it's there by sending this backwards. But if I wanted to actually select the text itself, I cannot select the text while it is behind this other shape. However, another trick that is very helpful is the tacky will let you cycle betweens elements within your document. So if I just hit the tab key, you see it's cycling between those different elements. And so if I hit it, it does select the text, and then that gives me the ability to drag that text out. Now, what happened right there is when I try to actually drag it out it then, ah selected this spox on top. So again, tab key. And if I wanted to, I could just use the keyboard. Ah, shortcut shift, plus the arrows to move it around. Or, of course, you also at that point could just use your keyboards. Ah, shortcuts to bring it back to the top. Obviously, you could send this to the bottom as well, and you would then see the text and be able to select it. Whoever just you run into those situations sometimes where you have an element that's in your document, it's hidden, and you do not even know if it's there. So if you just hit the tab keyboard shortcut, then it will cycle through the different elements in your document. So that lets you know if you do have any hidden elements in there. All right, that's all for this lesson. 11. 2 - Snapping and Locking: in this love scene. We're talking about snapping and locking. Now, if you understand how snapping works in Canada and you understand how the lock elements, then you're really gonna have a lot of help in a head. Start on positioning your elements where you want to position them and then locking them down and make sure you don't lose, making sure you don't lose those positions once you have things where you want them. So let's just start by talking about snapping and snapping. Just refers to the fact that Can Va has smart guides that will help you align to both the document and then aligning elements toe other elements. So I'm going to grab this yellow circle, and then as we drag this, you'll see as I drag it around. Screen has certain points in time. You start to see these guides. Basically, this guy here tells me if I wanted a line, it just left of center. I see where that center line is. If I wanted, line it exactly on that center line, I can feel it snap into place and I'll see that if I drag down, I can also snapped directly to the center, where I then see the horizontal and vertical guides. So this snapping feature just allows you to drag around. And then Campbell will show you these guides, and then when it gets close to one of the guides, it will snap so you can snap to the edges. You can snap to the center. You can step exactly to the vertical and horizontal center, So look for these blue guides that appear on screen, and they will help you snap objects into place. It's very helpful now, in this example, with just one object I am snapping to the guides that are in relation to the document itself. However, if I use control, see to copy this and Control V, so they have two copies now. Now I can see that not only can I snapped a document still, but it will also start to align objects and snap objects to each other. So I see these lines showing up right now, and those guys are just allowing me to perfectly lineup thes two different circles, and so just bear in mind. If you want to snap objects together, you can just pull around screen. And if objects are the same size. You're going to see these guides now. Even if they're different like this, you may not be a line them perfectly top and bottom right, but you can. It's still a lying to the top. You can align to the center. You can align to the bottom. So when you're aligning different elements to the page or aligning elements in relation to each other in these guides that Campbell will pop up automatically are very helpful. So just pay attention and they will help you position things exactly as you want. Once you do have things position the way you want, then you should know that you can lock that position so you don't accidentally mess it up or drag it a little bit this way or that way. That could be very frustrating, so you can lock element. So what you do is you just highlight something by clicking on it. Then once it's highlighted, you just come up here to this lock icon right there and then it is locked and enough I try to move it. I cannot move it so lets you select it, but you cannot lock it toe, unlock it just hit that lock icon again. So again, drag things around. Once you have it in the position you want and you want to lock that position, you can use this lock icon up there. 12. 2 - Free vs. Premium Elements: Theo. Next thing you need to know while working inside Camba is the difference between free and premium elements. Now, this comes into play whether you have Kimba pro or whether you have the free Camba with Camp a pro, you do get access to more photos, more elements, more things that are free. But you still will run into premium elements. And with the free version, you get lots of free stuff also. But there are more premium elements. So right now I just have a project open. I'm just going to jump into this photos tab and coming through this photos tab, you can see there are lots of photos that have this little crown in this free icon. That means I can drag that. I could add that to my project, and I can use that in my project, and that's a free image. You can look at the Campbell licensing on how you're allowed to use it, but that's free. I can use that in my project. However, I get rid of that for now. Eventually you're gonna come down here, and lots of these have the free. But eventually you're gonna run into things that are not free and that have a little premium icon. So let me keep coming down farther and farther, usually by the fall it will show the free elements. The higher up you are there, lots of free elements. But when I get down to here and I start to run into elements were instead of free, I start to see a dollar amount down here. Usually it's just a dollar, so that's not really that big of a deal for using something for a project. But now if I add this to my project, you will see that it shows up with this can ball watermark. So the little dollar sign down. Here is your first indication right? And as you hover over, it shows you the dollar amount. That's for a dollar and then once is in your project. You see the candle water mark on that image, and if I go to download this project right now, let me go ahead and click download. Then it's going to show me that I have one premium image and that that image costs a dollar . So one design you can come down here, and if you want to go from one design, you can select multi use, and if you want to read more about these licenses, you can. I'm not gonna get into them completely here. But you can go to campus website and you can read about the difference between one design, multi use and extended use. Basically, if you pay a dollar for an image, you have right to use that in one final design, right and you can read about that and what that allows you to do with that design. But if you want to use it in multiple projects than you have to get a multi use license, and if you want to just have even more rights, which you can read about you need is extended use. So for most things you can use free elements, right, that's great. And then, for a lot of things, $1 for one photo and one design is going to be a great deal. But just understand that you do have these premium images, and with the premium in the images, you do have to pay for each use of that image, and you know it's premium because it will have the dollar sign down here and then it's gonna show up with this Can vote. What are Mark when you load it into your project? So this year is a premium photo. But if you come in under some of the elements here, So if you get into the vector, artwork will just go under illustrations. For example, you can see again lots of free items, lots of free items. But then you come down. Okay, here's one that costs a dollar. So let's that one of that is part of my design. It's got the Campbell watermark. And now, if I tried to download this project, I would see $2 right for two premium images that wanted to change. The uses writes, I could always drop down and do that. Okay, So just understand the difference between free and premium images. Ah, elements. Because you're gonna have images, you're gonna photos. You're gonna have vectors, different artwork. All are gonna have this where they have free versions and then they have some premium items . So I'm going to delete that. The last thing I want to say with free versus premium is that you have the same thing come into play when you get into templates. Now, a lot of these templates are gonna show that free at the bottom left. Excuse me, The bottom right. But as I come down, let me find one here. That doesn't say free. So this one saying, free. This one's not saying free. So right, This one doesn't say free. So if it doesn't say free, the chances are it has something premium. That's part of that template. So I come in here and I see that, OK, this element here, this Rubik's Cube that showing or whatever this is supposed to be here, that is a premium element. So if I try to download this, it's gonna be a dollar now. I think that's because I want you to realize you can start with a premium template of the words a template that has a premium piece of artwork in it. But then, if you don't want that, you can go ahead and elite that, and you can still make use of the other template and the rest of the template, and then if you come down, load it. Then suddenly you're downloading free thing because you've taken the pay premium element out of that. Okay, so remember their premium elements. Sometimes those premium elements are part of a template. And then if you use that template, you're gonna have to pay for any premium element. It is in there, and the same goes for your own. Start from scratch projects when you bring in a premium element. But do not fear. There is tons and tons of free pictures, Artwork, Icahn's vector artwork roster our work within Camba. So you're not gonna run into this situation very often, and often times if you do, you're paying for some things better. And paying a dollar for that use within a project is not gonna be a big deal. So that's fee free versus primi elements in Camba. Make sure you understand the difference and make sure you watch out for those items that are pay items 13. 2 - The Power of Templating: this'll s and I want to talk briefly about 10 plating. Now, 10 plating is something we're gonna be covering A lot of this course, especially as we get into the real World Projects section because I really want you to start to train your brain, to think about repetitive design projects you have and to think about how you can build templates in a smart way so that you start to save yourself time, the ideas you put in a little bit more work up front. But then you have an asset you can reuse, and every time you reuse it, it's going to save time, and that's really gonna add up. So the basic idea behind template ing is this. You're gonna build out your design, but then you're gonna build some slight design variations that you know are gonna account for some of the variation you know you're gonna face as you have future projects where you use this type of design style. So ah, great way to do this is to build out your design, and then you can just spawn a copy of your page. You can use this little icon appear. It's gonna immediately create a copy of your page. You want the reader that work, but then you can come in here and you can start to make these subtle changes. And that's going to save you a lot of time and it's gonna give you some different starting points when you re use this template. Now, I wouldn't do things like very basic, like just coming in here and changing a color, because that's something you know you can do with one click and very quickly. So you don't need to say that time now if it's gonna be such a minute amount of time. But even if it's just gonna be like 30 seconds, if you know you can do it now and then you don't have to do it 100 times. You redo this type of project, those 30 seconds that's gonna multiply across this 100 times, and so that really, really starts to add up. So I do want you to think about creating variation that makes sense and that is going to save you time in the long run so I'll just scroll down here and give you some example. So this 1st 1 is just a graphic where it's a collage of six images. But I might know that hey, sometimes they only have two images, so I might have a variation where I have to images in here I may have other variations. Where have different number of images? So three images, maybe Sometimes I want to use different font faces. So if I know I have different fonts that I use and I want to have those options built into different templates, even though it's not gonna take me a lot of time to click over and go over to the Fatman, you make that fund change. It is gonna take long enough that if I know I do those different styles, I may build that into my template just cause it's gonna save me time each time I do a project and so other ones here where you're moving some of the graphical elements and changing some of the graphical things. Do that up front if you can. If you know it's gonna save your time in the long run so you can build all the out all these different options, right? And so you may have a template that has like this eight pages with eight different variations. But when you come to do your project, you're not gonna worry about half of these. You're gonna find the one that makes sense for you. So if I know I'm gonna do these two images here, I would just come over to my folders. I would jump into the folder or the upload wherever, Wherever I have put my images, then you can just grab your images. You can grab out. You can drag him in. You can reposition, however you need. Teoh also, I'll drop this other one here and this is really easy because I've done that work up front . So now I'm just repositioning, getting it the way I want. And then I can ignore all these other options because those were just there if I needed them, if I was gonna do something with three images, if I was gonna do something with a lot more images, But so you just do the one you want. And then when you come to download your project, you don't have to download all those other pages. Just go find the one you want. So if you use this page six right here, you would check that box and download that. So the whole idea is template in. You're gonna put in a little bit more work up front, but you're gonna build an asset that's really going to save you time in the long run. So as we get into this course, we're just gonna hammer template ing again and again. It's gonna be somewhat repetitive, but I just want to drill it into your brain that if you develop this smart workflow, you're really gonna save time. All right, I'll see in the next section. 14. 2 -The 1-Click Background Remover: this'll s when we're talking about the can va background removal tool. This is one of the newer tools at the time of this recording that Campbell offers. It is only available for the pro account. So let me just cushion you with that ahead of time. You might not wanna watch this if you have a free account, because right now, this is on Lee a pro feature. Ah, but I struggled at first where to put this inside the course. But I decided to put this within the foundations for success because when I first tried this, I was blown away by how well this worked. So what it is, it's a one click button. When you have a photo selected, it's gonna attempt to find the subject and then get rid of the background. And it really does work well. And what it does is going to open up even more graphics for you to use them in different ways and have even mawr assets in your library. Because a lot of photos you may want to use them into design, but it's not really gonna work because of the background in the photo. But now, when you have the ability to remove the background and just cut out a person or another element within the photo, then you really have another way to use an asset. So I thought this was an important tool. And so we're gonna cover it here in the foundations for success. And it's really, really easy to use. So all you're going to dio is at a photo to your project, and then when you have that photo selected, you will then see this effects menu option up here. So all you do then is click on these effects option here, and you have a bunch of different options for things you can do, Ah, to your photo. But the one we're going to focus on is this background removal right here. And it even says, Remove the background of your image with one click. So you click this in the artificial intelligence and the algorithms that Campbell has built behind the scenes are gonna goto work. And so I'm gonna click, and we'll let it turn away. Now, this actually works pretty quickly, especially for something like this, as complicated as it as it is. So I've had this take between five seconds and maybe 20 to 30 seconds. Depends on the photo, but it does work quickly. Sometimes it's only like five seconds. And so what it does is it turns away here, and then you'll see the background at one point flashier and shows one of the mask of the area is going to get rid of. And then it's gonna attempt to return to you just that subject with the background removed . So look at that. Look at how nice of a job it did. I've worked in tons of other programs. I love Photoshopped. Photo shop is a great program, but they have a one click button like this, and it does not work nearly as well. Especially when we zoom in here someone a zoom in and we look at, like, the area of this girl's hair. So let me just drag down here. Look at how nice of a job it did at thes complicate it did with these complicated edges. So this is a tool that works really, really well. Let me fit this back to screen. Now, Is this going to be a magic perfect tool and work perfect every time? No, It's not obviously things where the background is more simple. It's going to do a better job. But I've done some testing on this, and I am surprised at how often it does work and does return a very, very high quality result. So you will have to just experiment around. But we'll go through a couple examples here. So here's one here where the girl's hair, this red hair. It's not that distinct from the background here, but let's watch and see with a photo like this again, I click on the photo. I come up to effects, so try that again. Photo effects have this back on removal tool, so I click on that one click. It's going to start to goto work. It's gonna attempt to isolate what it thinks is the means subject, and it's going to attempt to remove that background so we'll let it turn away and again, it may depend on the day it may depend on your computer, but I found that this works pretty quickly, and I've never really had it take more than 20 or 30 seconds, no matter how complicated the photo. But so give it a try and you see how it works on your machine? But you see, it flashes there and then it's about to return results. And so look at that. Is this absolutely perfect? No, it's not absolutely perfect, but it did a really good job. So if I come in here and we zoom around a little bit, yeah, these edges are not absolutely perfect. But I'm still surprised at that high quality result, because again, we're at 200% now. If I go back to 100% this is really, really a good job, and it's gonna be a very usable asset. So just for example, now, if I went and I grabbed the different background, I could just drop in a background to this design here and now you have your subject isolated on new background. Now, obviously something like this, where the girl's shoulders will were cut off because that's just the way the photograph is shot. You're gonna have to pay attention to what you're starting asked, that is and how you want to use it. But very effectively. You can come in here and you can remove the background, and then you can start to put it into your own design. So this is a really, really powerful tool. Now, let me give you one additional trick to see. Show you how you can use this Ah, even more effectively and have even more options with it. So if you're bringing in a photo and you're new, you're just using that photo one time without one design. So then you may just click it and you may be done with it. However, if it's something a picture of yourself, maybe that you want to use for branding, that you want to isolate yourself in the background or something along those lines where you want to reuse that asset again and again, then what you might want to do is use this tool to remove yourself from the background, save out that image with transparency and then bring it back into Canada as a PNG. So you have that transparency, and that's stored somewhere with your brand assets or whatever, so you can use it again and again. And I'm gonna show you a trick that lets you sort of take some images that may be background removal doesn't do a perfect job with, and how then you can maybe even still clean them up and return an image that then really works for you. So I will take this one as an example here and again, I'll click on it. I'll come up here to effects, and then once again, we're gonna run this background removal. So this one here, even with three people here, it is going to be smart enough to figure out what the subject is that the subject is thes three people Now again, If it didn't do a perfect job, you could always do a trick of, like, cropping the photo and then running it on half of the photo at a time or something like that. So you could isolate your subject with another trick first and then run this tool. But so if you look at this, actually, this is not what I expected. Also let you know a little secret. I ran this photo last week, and when I ran this photo last week, I was getting this artifact here by the shoe, so it could be the camp has already improved this algorithm. I don't know if they're improving things that quickly, but this result is even better than when I got last week. But I wanted to use that last one as an example. So what I'm gonna do now is I'll just load in my footage from last week because I was running a tutorial and a test on this last week, and I was getting an artifact here. So let me load that now so you can see how you might attack something like this. If you do get that artifact, we'll go ahead and try this again. It's like the image effects go to this background removal, and we're going to click on that and let it turn away for a 2nd 2nd And we will see what type of result we get. Now. I'm gonna show you a couple tricks years to make sure. Stay tuned fast. Board this video if you need to. I'm gonna show you a couple tricks because sometimes this will result in artifacts. Ah, and then you still can make improvements of that. So again, right here. You see, this worked really, really well. Except by this shoe here. It looks like we do have some sort of artifact that was carried through. Let's look here at some of the ways you can improve your results when you get things in Camba like these little artifacts here. Okay, So one option would be if I'm working on a solid color background like AM now would just be to cover and high that Click off that for a second, and I will come over here and I will go under elements. And then I'm just gonna choose a circle here, a regular circle. But then I will change that toe white, which is the color of my background. And then if I go ahead and resize that down, I can take that circle and position it over there. And now, if I want to move in position, all of this within my designed here, it would be helpful to group these together. So I'm just going to click and drag so they're both selected will click the group button. And now if I move this and I resize this, the circle is moving and re sizing with that. So now I no longer have that annoying little artifact and I could go ahead and do and add that there and then I could come in and add whatever other elements I want to add to my design. So if I was putting in some texture something I could go ahead and put that in now and then resize this and again, that is one way to do it. Now that is effective. If you're just working with that image one time and creating design there on the fly and you have a solid color background, however, a better solution would be to get that artifact out of there completely. Now, can you do that? There are no tools directly associated with the removed background tool that lets you edit artifacts like that or a race artifacts. But there is a trick that will let you get rid of some artifacts if they're on the edge just beyond your image and let me show you how you do that now. So I'm just gonna go ahead and I'm gonna go through. It may be a series of undoes here just to get back before size down my image before I put that circle just so again, we see that artifact down here. So one thing I tried was I tried adding that white circle and then exporting as a transparent peach PNG file because you can have P and G's and export them with transparency . That may be a pro feature. I'm not sure I think it is. Ah, so exporting with transparency, however, it recognizes that that white circle is there and that weight circle will come through on your image and you will remove the rest of the background, be transparent, but you'll get that white circle, so that does not work. What I really need to do is have this not be within the frame at all. But the problem is, if I just tried to crop here, I'm going to cut it off, right, cause I'm gonna cut off a shoe. Ah, so here's the solution. I want to rotate this, okay? And I'm gonna try to rotate this in such a manner that I can then move it off the screen. So again, the way circle is still there, let me just get rid of that. I'm gonna take this and I'm gonna bring it down. And I want to rotate this so that my rotate tools on the body so that I can then move it and have everything except that artifact be in the frame. So you see the way everything is in the frame now, But that artifact is not there. Okay, So now if I go ahead And now, if I were to export this and that artifact out of the frame so I should be able to just get this image with transparency. So let's try this. So I will go ahead and I will download this now and again. This is page five. So download. I want this to be a PNG high quality transparent yes, pages. I just want page five. So let me just come down here and click on page five. So it's just gonna be downloading that. I will click done. I will click download. I'm gonna tell it where I wanted to download. So it says your design has been published. So here's on splash. Look, here's the one I tempted and that white circle came through that did not work. So I will just call this test to something really simple, and I will go ahead and click, save continuing it and continue waiting. So there we go. So it should have downloaded that. Now there it is. So let me up open up a new graphic. So let me just show you here I have this animated social media and actually create this from scratch just to show you how you can reuse. Ah, these assets, once you save them this way, and you've done that removed background so again you can use them for a project. But if you want to use them again and again, it makes sense to save off transparent assets. So let me show you first. Ah, we'll show you how you create this one's all hit control and then home. And I'm holding down Control just would open up a new tab for me here, and so is open up. A new tab will show you how you create a project for scratch. So maybe you're exporting some of those transparent assets that you're dead going to use in a different project or maybe multiple projects. So animated social media, that is one of the new ah can va ah types of graphic you can create. It's pretty cool that they have animated graphics now, so I will just grab this one here and then anything you don't want this part of the templates you can get rid off. So I'm gonna get rid of this circle and everything behind it. I'm gonna keep the rest of that, but I want a new background elements. Ah, so first beef. Well, let me just Okay, I'll click on background. Let me just pick one. That's a really solid color just to see first. So this one here may just put this one in first. Ah, just so I can show you. Ah, some covert up loads. This is the one that I had previously uploaded. And again, I showed you that white circle. See how that came through? Because I tried to hide the artifact, so that does not work. So get rid of that. But now let's upload that latest one. That test to that I just did. So here it is, test to open. And so if I bring this in, it is gonna be at a slight angle because of how I created it. Because I wanted to get rid of the artifact. But it's super, super easy just to come in here and rotate it again and again. Look, I have no issues with any sort of artifact, So this now becomes a great asset that I can reuse and any man or I want. So again, let me swap out this background That again, if I come over to my Ah, actually I'll use a grade. So if I come back to my elements here elements and I drag in Ah, grid here is my background. And then that lets me put any photos in. And I have searched before for this happy birthday one. So you can put that in and again. Now that you have this in here as an element you can reposition, it has the transparency, it has no artifacts, and I can move it up and down in the layer stack. So with that selected, if I hit control and my bracket keys, you can see I can move it up and down in the layer stack, put it behind the text, all sorts of things. So this is just an idea of how amazing this removed background tool is and just giving you another way to asset to access and use even more graphics and you can take something with the background and if you like the main subject, you can export out that out removed the background. You can save it with transparency, and then you have assets you can use again and again in different projects. So check it out. Campus Remove background tool background, Eraser. It's really cool it out. Performs the remove background Photoshopped button. So it really does have some good AI behind it, and I think it's only going to get better and better and better so just another reason to love Camba. 15. 2 - Quick Search Box (/Magic): In this video, I'm gonna show you another newish feature in Canada, and this I call forward slash magic. And it's basically a way to save a lot of time in Canada when you creating your designs. This is best shown through examples. So I'm just going to jump in here. I'm going to choose Instagram ad as my starting point. And I'm going to go ahead and jump in here. It's launching a new Instagram ad project. I will look at my templates. I'm gonna do a search for maybe Valentine's Day, we'll make this a theme tutorial here. So Valentine's Day, it's clearly getting close to Valentine's Day as I create this all grab something here. And I'll just pull this one here in here as a starting point. Now, in the past, whenever you have something like this and you want to add elements such as something from the photos. You would come over here, you would go under elements if you wanted to look on your graphic elements. But there is actually a quicker way to actually sort of design on the fly where you don't have to spend as much time going over here into the menus. And that is if you're anywhere in your project and you're not inside a textbox or anything, and you just hit the forward slash on your keyboard. It's going to bring up this little element contextual search box right on your screen. You can see already right here, you can scroll down here and see things like texts, line arrows, circles, square. In other words, if I just hit the texts, I could go ahead and bring some new texts into my design just like that. Just by using this little contextual menu, we use that forward slash on your keyboard. Now if you come down here, you see other things. You'll see tables, emojis, and so on and so on. You can look through that, but you can also just search in here. If I wanted to search for Valentine's Day, I could just type it right into this search box right here. Type in Valentine's Day, go ahead and hit Enter. But before I do, I could even come in here and limit my search even farther. I could search for just photos. So if I search for Valentine's Day and just photos, suddenly here in the search box, I can preview all these photos. So maybe I like this one. I want this to be my new background, so I'll drag that over into my design. Boom, just like that. So again, using this forward slash little search thing, if you leak come back on your screen, it'll disappear, but then you can bring it back up anytime, but just using that forward slash on your keyboard. Now if I just want to type in r for rectangle, rectangle, bring up rectangle. Maybe I want a new rectangle as part of my design. So maybe I'm going to make this sort of a sale promotional thing for my storefront. So I'll resize this and then I'll reposition this. So let me just grab this and drag it out. Drag it out. Now I have this text behind, they're getting in the way. So let me just move this up to the top. Now this text here, I want to make this smaller. So let me just drag this down to a size. I think it's going to work. And I'll come in here, double-click on the text and I'll do something like shop our Valentine's Day specials. I can drag that and position it up here. I might want to come in here and change the font color. So again, all the other stuff works the same, but I'm just showing you that really quickly. You can come in here and really quickly find new elements or photos for your design using that forward slash trick to bring up this contextual menu here. So maybe I'll type in something like heart again, and you can combine keyboard. So maybe I'm gonna do animated this time also because I'm looking for animated elements that wouldn't be under photo. So I'm going to search under graphics and right away, I like this guy a lot. So let me pop this guy into my design. I'm going to move him here to the side for a second. I want to reorganize the text. Now, if I wanted to just grab all these texts here, the problem is if I try to drag a box around it, I'm also getting my heart potential, my background. So one thing you can do is you can start to lock things down. So if I have my background the way I like it, I can lock it down. I could lock this guy down temporarily using this lock icon up here. And then I'm just going to drag and grab everything else. And that should just be the text elements. So then I didn't group those. I will size those down. I didn't realize there were the little flower, flower, flower elements, but we can go ahead and drag that back up. Now I'm not sure if I loved those flower elements, someone to ungroup and I'm going to actually get rid of those. But let me just grab all these again and group. Just position that up here. And then now this guy here just come over here and I will unlock him and drag him and he's going to look really cool. I think maybe we can even make them stand right on top of the heart like that. Again, use your arrow keys if you want to nudge him up in the perfect position. So that is really cool. So I'm not gonna design as any farther. I think it is a pretty cool little design, but the idea is just making design process easier by using this forward slash trick on your keyboard where you're bringing up this contextual menu. It just saves you time looking for elements in photos where you don't have to go over through all these menus. You can just really quickly do it right here. Alright, I hope that helps again, that's the forward slash on your keyboard. Bring up this contextual menu and lets you search for things and add them to your design really easily. 16. 2 - Easy PDF Import & Editing: Okay, on screen I have a PDF open. Now this is Adobe Acrobat. And if you've ever opened a PDF in the past, there's a decent chance that you've opened it with Adobe Acrobat or some other free PDF reader. That's great if you just want to view and read the PDF. But what if you actually want to make edits to the PDF, updates the content and updates to the design. Well, right now I'm actually in the Pro version of Adobe Acrobat. And even though it's a great program for certain things, it is not user-friendly when it comes to updating the content and the design of a PDF, I can click over here on Edit PDF. And it's gonna take me into this edit mode. And I can see that down here, these are all individual letters. This is a single word. So already there's problem and it's just it's just gonna be a pain. It is a headache that I don't want to get into. There has to be an easier way. Well, luckily now there is a much better solution thanks to the relatively new Canvas PDF in Port feature, canva excels at taking the complex and making it simple, and they've done it again with this feature. So let's jump over to Canvas and see how it works. Okay, So here I am on my Canva home screen. What I'm gonna do is drag over Windows File Explorer just so you can see what I'm doing here. I'm working on Windows PC, so I'm using Windows File Explorer, but if you're on a Mac, you would just use the finder and Mac. Same, same idea. I'm gonna do is I've navigated to where I have the PDF I want to work with. I'm just going to grab that PDF. I'm gonna drag it over anywhere on my own home screen and then I'm just going to release it. And when I release it, you're gonna see that Canva automatically takes it PDF, it parses that PDF and it's automatically building a new design under my design section, It's automatically looking at that PDF. It's looking for texts elements, it's looking for images, and it's looking at the layout and it's building out a new project based on that PDF right here under my design step. Now once it's done, I can just click on it. And now suddenly I'm launching into that new project which Canada just created based on the PDF all had to do again was grab a file and drag it onto my Canva home screen. And the great thing was Canva was able to find all that embedded formatting into PDF. Now suddenly if I scroll into the design, I realized that these are individual elements. This is a text element, this is an image, this is a graphic, this is an image. Now you can come in here and you can work in Canada in your normal workflow. So for example, if I wanted to change the title, I could just go and call it something like PDF in port. The easy way. If I didn't like this graphic, I could delete this graphic. I'm going to use that forward slash magic trick. So if we type a forward slash on your keyboard, brings up this contextual menu where you can do a search. So I'll do something like PDF. I'll search just under graphics. I'll find a graphic I like. I'll just pop that out. Suddenly I have that my design. So the idea is that it makes PDF Import really easy. And now you're in the native Canada format where you used to making quick edits. You notice it's a user-friendly environment. Now you can come in here and very easily make changes and update this design to whatever you want it to be. Just a quick, few quick notes on this. First of all, in this example, I'm using a PDF from another entrepreneur. If you're starting with someone else's design, make sure you come in here and you make it your own use the designer's inspiration, don't steal their design. You'd want to come in here and make sure you don't have any copyrighted material that you can't use, you'd want to come in here and change some of the colors to your own brand colors, make it your own. But you can imagine in other situations where you're starting with something you've created on your own, then you're just coming in here and you're making content updates. The other thing I'll mention is that as you scroll here through here, every now and then, you may find something where stylistically Canva didn't translate it perfectly from the original PDF. So do comment here, check for those things. Make sure everything's as you want it, go through, make your changes. And then once everything's ready to go and you've made all those changes, It's just like you would normally do. You can come back under here, you can export it. You can choose PDF Standard or PDF for print. Export it. There you go. So it really is easy now that you can import PDFs directly into Canva, make the changes work in the native Canada environment and then save them off as a new updated PDF. 17. 2 - Class Project - Show Your Canva Skills Challenge #1: okay, It's class. Project time in this project is coming in the form of a can of a challenge that you will complete right over in Canada. So don't think of this as homework. Think of it as one of the best ways you can really lock in your learning. And that's by getting in the camera and actually demonstrating some of the skills we've learned in this section of the course. So what you're gonna do is you're gonna go over to the class project setting off this settings of this course and underneath that class projects Tab, you're gonna find a link that's gonna allow you to open this camp a document. It's a template. Then you'll have your own version and you can come in here and you can take on these challenges exercises. So they're gonna go through some things like positioning objects. It's going to make you do things like finding hidden elements, aligning objects, dealing with the object, stacking order some cool challenges like that just to make sure you've really locked in those things that we learned in this section of the course. Because again, this is really about the foundations of success. those building blocks that are really going to help you succeed when you get into your design work. So take on these challenges and then go to the next lesson in this course when you're ready to see the solutions. 18. 2 - Class Project - Challenge #1 Solutions: But if they don't understand that, they indicate there must be competence. But to the public believed that the challenges of societies. But in other places. 19. 3 - Graphic Design 101 - Layout and Composition: and this last time we're gonna go over some basics of layout and composition, so your layout and composition are crucial to getting your message across. They both provide structure and help guide the reader easily through the design. You can think of it as being broken down into five basic principles. Proximity, whitespace, alignment, contrast and repetition. Now proximity is simply the use of visual space to show relationships, so you might position similar items together and you might separate unrelated items. So in this basic business card example, you can see they've attempted to group together all the contact information down here. So things like address, email, website, mobile phone, these air related. So their position together. Now, up on the page. Here you have the name and then what the person is an expert in and what they're offering now, I actually think they could have done an even better job. This is one of the Canada templates for business cards, so I think they even could have separated out a little bit farther and really group these items together here. And then if he added, in something like social media icons down there, well, that is also sort of contact information, so I sort of grouped together here. But I gave it its own space down here. So it's just helpful to think about how things are related, because it will start to give you clues about how you might want a group things in your design. It's gonna make sense to the reader, and it's gonna help there I and it's gonna help them understand your design. Whitespace white spaces, the negative space in areas around your design elements. So not just the white areas but any negative space in your design. It helps a separate different sections, gives the design room to breathe, and it gives the viewer's eye a chance to rest. So look at the same slide as the last one. If it's like this, it's just really too cluttered. And it's hard for the viewer's eye to really focus. So you don't wanna have designs like this where you just don't have enough whitespace. White space is very important. So again, here's that guitar business card example again, if I just expanded things out now and take away some of the white space, it is harder to understand just because you're there is no space for your idol rest, and that negative space also helps to push the viewer's eye into the design. So without that, you don't really get pushed into design. And it's just not as well designed as say something like this where you have all this white space and it gives the I can't the rest and all these errors also showing that it's really also pushing the viewer into the design, guiding the I in. And so that's very helpful. So remember, include white space in your designs. It is an important element of design alignment. Alignment is lining up certain things, and it establishes relationships, and it also helps lead the viewer's eye through the design. So almost all designs are built around a grid system that relies heavily on alignment. So not something as literal as this right here. But if you break down any design, you're usually going to see that yes, it is broken down into some sort of bridge contrast. Contrast means things are visually different. Contrast can accomplish a number of things in a design. They can attract the viewer's eye. It can emphasize what's important, and it can reinforce relationships. Contracts can take many forms, from color to size to style, so it could be a simple as having the same thought in different thickness. So this is the same find here. But this is the final bold, and this is a thin version of that same fucked. Or maybe it's a totally different style fun. And that's how you have contrasts. Or maybe it's color or can even be simply the size or weight of an object. Repetition. Repetition helps give a design a consistent look and feel. This is helpful to the viewers, and it makes the design easier to navigate and understand. So in that business card example, here's an example of the front of the card, and or maybe this is the front. But so these are two sides of the business cards, and so they used repeated elements like this guitar, of course, the color and then the colors of the font, the types of the fund. So all of these consistent, repetitious use of elements helped the viewer. They give it a Mork consistent feel and just make it easier to understand have done the same thing in this presentation. So just by being consistent with my design elements. It gives you a za viewer, an idea of what to expect. It helps you know where your eyes gonna go, and it just adds to the overall strength of the design. So, in an upcoming lesson, we are gonna talk about how you can use grids within Canada to take control of your layout and composition. They also want you to just remember, when you're thinking about layout and composition, think about proximity. Think about whitespace. Think about alignment. Think about contrast. And remember repetition. These are things that are just gonna become second nature. But if you're just getting into graphic design, it does take a little practice. So hang in there, you'll get it. 20. 3 - Using Canva Grids to Power your Layouts: okay. In the first lesson in this graphic design 101 section of the course. We talked about layout and composition. Now I want to talk about how you could create a layout like this, which is maybe a little bit more dynamic, then some of the default layout. So you're gonna find in the camp a templates were really how you can create any layout and how you can really use can book grids to your advantage when creating these layouts. So this is a layout where I just found a magazine for inspiration so that I was outside of Canada, and then you can just take a little snapshot of that picture and bring it into Canada, or you could just have it on your desk as a reference, but so you're not limited to just can't a template. You can start from scratch and use your own imagination. Or you can draw inspiration from something else and use something else as a reference. And then what? You start to get the hang of how these grids work and how you can use his use grids to sort of add structure to layouts and build layouts. Then it's gonna become easier and easier, and you're gonna get better at creating your designs in your layouts, your layouts in your composition. So let's just sort of walk through how I laid this out and how you can use grids, because I think it's gonna be helpful to you to see how grids can be used as a tool. Because right now I think a lot of people just think of grids is a way you can drop in image in the background boom. That's how you use a grade. You drop in immature, our color. But they really are even more effective for, you know, that underlying structure and layout of your design. So So let's just go through this as an example. So if we look at this here, this is basically a three column layout. So 123 across the page. And so this is sort of facing pages here. So you can imagine this coming, you know, coming down and dividing this into two pages. So it's sort of both pages together here. Ah, but you sometimes if you open a pdf, you'll get those pages side by side, obviously, in the magazine, their book. You're gonna get those pages side by side, but like this. So let's say we want to create both pages like this and so on each individual page. What are we talking about? We're really talking about three columns, write three columns, but then here we also have this basically divided here into two rows. And then up here we have this heading this other things here. So let's just look at how we could use grids. Toe lay this out. So first, I'm gonna add that new page just so we can work. But I'll scroll back and forth like this every now and then, just so I can use this as a reference. So first I want to think about dividing my page in half here, right, Because half for this page and then half for this page so I'll just come in under elements . And again, this is where using these grades is going to be very helpful. So I'll just come in under grids for a second, just so we can see you have the single grades. You have these double grids, and then you have all these other configurations here. So these ones where you have the equal distant divisions here. Ah, you. These are gonna be the most helpful. So this, for example, if I wanted to divide my design into two page two pages, I chose this double one here because that lets me know I can divide it into two columns. So each column is gonna be one of my pages, so they don't just come up to the corner. And I wanted to go exactly to add it to my page. So I'm gonna hold down the all key so it's dragging both sides and get it just so it snaps . And so now I haven't basically divided into two pages except that have this spacing in the middle. Well, I don't want the spacing right now. I want to exactly divide by two pages, so I'll just come in and I'll take this down. Ah, so my spacing is gone now, this next opponent, this next point is kind of important, because as you start to overlay greats like this, I'm gonna want to use multiple grids If I don't want to be clicking on them and having you know, my cursor getting confused and selecting the wrong grid even though I just wanted to be sort of a visual guy. I need to lock down my grids, so I'm gonna lock down my grids. But first, before I do that, I'm gonna come into this one, and I'm going to select a background color for this grid at all of doing here is, um, selecting different colors for each side of my cred. Just because I want that visual separation, I'm not necessarily gonna have this gray in this white in my final design. I can if I want, But I want that visual separation because I want this grid to be a guide. Ah, guide for my design. So then I'm gonna come and I'm gonna lock that down. So now I have my two pages right here is my left page. And here's my right page. So if I come back up here healthy older, my break page that I'm gonna want three columns in my design here, and then I'm gonna have also about 2/3 of the page I'm gonna have for an image basically a square image on the top of the page and then my three columns down here. And then if we look in the middle, there is a fair of amount of white space around the outside. So I'm gonna want some margins so I could start with either of these elements. But I guess I'll start with this image here. So this is basically another just square. And so I could just click on the single grid and I'll bring it down. And as your great dragging out ah, grids, you'll notice you'll see that little number two telling you the width of that is nine. So I'll just bring it up here and let's see, let's bring this down and let's bring it in So I will bring it into seven, and then I'm gonna bring it up until seven. So I have square to mentions. And then once I have a square dimensions now, I'm gonna not drag by the sides anymore. Miss who use my corners. And so I have my square. And so now I'm just thinking about my margin. So if I come up here, let's see, I want to have margins, and I don't have to exactly follow this design up here, but so what I'm gonna do is sort of have my margins be sort of equal on the top in the side so I can get it roughly where I want it. There would have to use my all to drag out together and of getting the side margins the way I want Halt! And then down. So something like that, um, eyeballing it like that and then I can see right now that I don't like that, because if I look here, I just don't have enough space for the text. I won't here, So I think I need to make this smaller. So I'm gonna drag in from the sides and again when you're doing image, I think you can just drag in and you won't lose those proportions. But when you're doing grids, I think you have to hold down ship. So, yeah, if I hold down shift now, it's constraining it to that square. So holding down shift to constrain whatever portions I have set, maybe I'll go with something like that because I want a fair amount of space even here on this. Ah, so I'll go like I'll position it something like that. Then I want the three columns down here so I will find this one here, that is three columns and I will click and then I will drag over. I will drag down. I'm gonna get it matching with this here, matching with this right. Then I'm gonna look and see my spacing. Maybe about that much space in between. And then I want that much space on the bottom at least. And I want space in between the words also and I mean spacing between the columns. So the words in the different columns of text here something dragged that spacing out and you could be consistent here and set this number and remember this number. It said it with all your things. But 25 looks pretty good. I also think that I had thought I wanted this to be a square, but I don't want this to just be a little bit wider. So actually, let me undo that last thing. So I want all one drag out just to make those equal distant. So something like that, and then this here again, I'm gonna drag it out. So that's matching there. And I will take this up and drag there. So if you drag it all to just dragging out from both sides. So trying to get that So it's about the same as in between. So you could see it does take a little tinkering here, but the ah, but the script system is basically letting me layout whatever I want in terms of my design here and again, I'm not gonna fill this with an image here. I just want it to be in my background. So now if I come in here and since I have this side, Gray and I would make this white and see if I can select all these at once. I think actually, what you can do is select one and come on their color white. And then if you click on the next one, you just have the white white click click. Okay, so that has that side of the page. And so I basically have locked in. Now, if I wanted to lock these down now, I could so lock lock them down once you have them, Basically where you want him if you don't want them to get moved around. And so I have that. And then I would come over to my other side of my page, and it's basically three columns. So I might take this because I want to keep the spacing the same on both sides of the pay to actually let me unlock that for a second. And I will call to drag this out and I will get it centered on the other page. So right like that. Now I'm gonna change the color of this since they were over on the other side. Now, this one, I'll bring back that light gray, and I actually want this to go all the way up. Just so I have a reference up here. So it goes up the page a fair amount. So I would drag out from the top and decide where I wanted to end. Maybe right there. And then my headings gonna be up here So then you could come under your text. Can I just clicked at and heading. We'll take this heading and will position it up here because you're heading is gonna match with a side. Now it's not gonna be this big, so let's just drag it in, and maybe you will try to get it matching there and then we have other things here So I'm not concerned about the fact that these columns go up beyond, ah, what I want them to If I'm gonna have an image here, it's just really about having a placeholder. And so I can still come in and drag and drop other elements below this. So, for example, right here, we know we're gonna have another little square grid. So I will just come in here because this is a single grid, so actually could lock this one back down over here. I'll come in here and unlock this one. I'll use my all key to make a copy of that. I will come in here and what's get rid of the color for SEC. Actually, since we know this is gonna be an image, let's put an image placeholder, cause this is actually gonna be an image, so we'll go under photos. I think I was doing some sort of outdoor wilderness adventure before, but so I'm still type in wilderness. Pretending like that was the article I was writing. Something about wilderness. This is just, for example, purposes. So it doesn't really matter what I put in here, but let's just dragging an image so we have an image placeholder, and I think I wanted that to be just in the center column here. So something like that, we'll drag it over. Now, I think I wanted this to be a square image. So let's see what we have. Let's get the height of 2.2 the width. What is the width of these columns? So expect the width of this column is about 2.2, So that's pretty good. So let me just dragged that up now. And so we have a placeholder for that now, and below that, I think I wanted to have sort of an article pull quote something that was gonna come out of the text so again, come under elements. Ah, get rid of those grids. We're just gonna go actually go back to texts, not elements pull out of subheading. Let's make this smaller. And so all now move this over. So this is gonna be somewhere over here and it's gonna go. Did I have to go all the way across? No, I just had it go as far as the center column because it's gonna be text here, and it's probably a little big take it down a little bit. Maybe maybe something like this, but so I don't know what I tell you what I type. You can put your quote here. You can put you're a pull quote here. It might span a few lines to get the idea. What you're doing is you're just mocking up your design and your layout and you're building in this structure So again over here was gonna be my big image so I could add another image placeholder. So again, photos. Wilderness, any of these is is fine. We're just making sort of, ah, mock up article here. So drop that in. And then I think I went and found some line elements for this frame here. So I'll just show you how I did that real quick. Ah, that's not really part of the structure of the design. But again, you can add in these little elements. Is Ugo. It's really, you know, designing with this grid system here, that is the really powerful thing I want to take away. But so I'll go ahead and do the elements just just because and so just going down to my lines and see all and see if we could figure out when I dragged out. So I think was this one here. So I did something like this where I got it to the width. I wanted so something like that drag down and into position. And then I think I said, OK, we'll make that black But you could make the color whatever you want, And then it was just a matter of drag it out and then it was making copies of vault drag up trick Rotate 90 degrees, bring it down here blocking position, drag it up, drag it up all to drag out a copy. I get that all the way up. I think it it. And then again, rotate 90 degrees. So a little bit a 1 80 and again into position. Drag it out one more time, Bolt dragged down, rotate that we get back to minus 90 and then for that into position. So that was just how I added that framing element. And so for text, I've done this before, but so Lauren Ipsum is the site I usually go to. Some just can't see it now because it's just beyond a screen part I'm recording. But I just typed in Laura Ipsum into my browser. Generate some text and I'll describe that real quick. Copy a few paragraphs of that and I'll come back over here. And so you see, this is just text down below here. And so these all are gonna be body text boxes, so I don't have that yet, So I would just come back to my text at a little body texts. And then this is where you would make decisions. About what fun are you going to use and things like that? Why it stuck it way over here in this corner. I can barely move it. But luckily, it gives you that little handle sometimes, doesn't it? That is helpful. Let's grab that and control a control. V paste that out. That's way bigger than I want it. Let's try 10. We can probably do 12 12 but then I'm gonna bring it in. And again, this is more text than I need. But let's just sort of get it positioned in here, and you would position it where you want it. And then I wanna have a margin within here. But I already have those margins built in right, Because these boxes, I'm gonna get rid off so the boxes actually represent where I want the text to actually sit in my design. So I actually do have it the way I want it. But I do just want to be fully justified. Text like that and I just come down here and get rid of some this extra that I don't want in my design. Probably take another line or to only just copy a little bit more. You'll see troll, the I don't want to repeat like that. That looks that looks good. Eso let me just grab a little bit more of this back because I want to just a little bit more at the end. So something like this you'll see control V And again, this is this is all just, you know, placeholder text. So this doesn't really matter. And you could come in and make sure it was all different if you really wanted to. You could do whatever you want, but normally you just be creating your final design. I'm just doing this as sort of an exercise to show you how you could get your design and build it in this grid like this. Now, this page here, you can see is basically fully designed. And I might add my page number here. You could do that. I'm not gonna worry about that. But let me just show you once you have it designed, you have these grids behind the scene. So I may have trouble selecting my grid. But if I just use my tab key, Let's see. Can I get to those grids? Even they're locked behind everything. So there's a great which I can unlock. That's the one that has Thea Gray and the white. But here I tabbed again. And see, Now I can see the lock icon incident. I know I am on that grid. So about unlocked that great, I could just delete it, but I may want to keep it there for structure in case I'm gonna use it again. So you just take the transparency and boom and now, suddenly I don't have those boxes there. And if I did want this to be a white page, well, okay, let's find this other great element. Here it is. Unlock that one transparency, boom. And of course, you could lock it back after you said transparency to zero it zest there as a guide for you . So use it, make use of it, and then when you're done, you can keep it. If you think you're gonna go back and use it again, you can throw it out. You can lock it back, but have it be transparent so you can overlay these grids on top of each other and grids within grids. And then suddenly they go beyond this tool where you can just drop a picture and then suddenly there really powerful and helping you build out of design. So you get the idea. I'm not gonna finish everything I did here. But you can see this is the type of final results you can get, and it doesn't take that much work. You just have to play around with these ideas of alignment and structure. And then you're trying to create pages that have a high archy where the reader is gonna go , his eyes going to go, his or her eyes gonna go to where you want them to start, and then there's gonna be a flow down the page and with grids, it just helps you build in that structure very easily. So I hope this is helpful, and I will see you in the next lesson. 21. 3 - Graphic Design 101 - Typography: in this lesson. Let's just talk a little bit about the basics of typography. So typography is just a style in appearance of text. And knowing a little bit about typography can really go a long way in helping you with your design work. So they're all types of different fonts you can choose from on your design projects and their different fund classes. So one classes, just Sarah fonts and Sarah fonts have these extra decorative strokes at the end of letters . This is a classic look that's great for traditional projects, and it's found often in print, print publications and things like magazines and newspapers. So be careful, though, because Sarah fonts can be harder to read. Sometimes they're great for headlines, but they might not look so great as body text sans serif fonts. On the other hands are fonts that do not have these decorative elements at the end of letters. They're more clean and modern. They are often easier to read in large blocks of text and commonly used on things like computer screen smartphones, tablets, etcetera. You also have display funds. Display fonts are fonts. They're very decorative in nature, and they may look great on things like headlines, but not so good on things like body text, where they may just make it difficult on the reader's. So keep in mind, bonds are very important part of your design, and different fonts can convey different tones, so fonts might be playful or serious or elegant, and you want to try to match your font with your message and the feeling you're trying to invoke in the reader. So elegant, playful Siri's Keep this in mind. Let's talk briefly about font parents. One simple rule you can follow is the rule that opposites attract so tall with short decorative ascent with simple, thick within pay attention. Because opposites usually attract like this. And this could be a great way to draw the readers I by having some contrasts and drawing their attention. So obviously you're not gonna have things like this and paragraph texture body text. But for headlines and things like that, when you're really trying to call out the read reader's attention, that simple rule of opposites attract can really be helpful. Let's talk about a few more typography terms that you may hear, and so you should be aware of tracking letting in current. Okay, tracking just means character, spacing the space between letters. A lot of time you leave this alone, but you can do justice in can. But and it might be useful for things like aligning headlines for achieving a certain look . Letting letting is to space between line two texts again. Oftentimes, you'll leave this alone, but you can adjust this within Canada, and the goal is just to make it as comfortable as possible for the reader you don't want your text appears to squash. You also don't want to spaced out where it's hard for. The readers either jump from one line to the next. Finally, we have turning. Turning is the space between individual characters, and it varies over the course of the word because each letter fits together differently. It's best to just avoid Fonds with bad turning. And those will be the ones that just look on natural because the spacing just isn't quite right. Okay, here are my top tips for working with fonts and canvas. First, just focus on readability. Don't pick those crazy crazy finds just because they're crazy. If you're sacrificing readability, readability is the first thing you should consider before moving on to your creative decisions. So without without readability, your message might be harder for the reader to understand. And then you're missing the first point of design. Good design should first and foremost be easy to understand, and the message should get across second along the same lines. Less is more trying to limit yourself to one or two fonts. At most. It's easy to see all the options and get carried away, but really less is more so to money. Fonts or the wrong fonts can become confusing for the reader, and again, it just hurts the overall impact and message of the design. So remember, less is more. You can bury the same font. A lot of fonts will have different weights you can choose from, or sometimes maybe it's a simple is making the headline bold and then just regular for the body text, you can sometimes adding a second fund. But don't go crazy and put different fonts for each element of your project. Three. Inspiration, design and topography are all around you, so always be on the lookout for inspiration so you can start to identify pairings or fonts that you like things that work well together, things that don't things that convey a certain tone. So along those lines start directly within Canada. So Camba has all sorts of templates. You have magazine designs, you have e books. You just have the font pairing underneath the tech tab over there on the left. So really start to pay attention. Pick out some of things you like, and that brings me to my final tip, which is just collect and organized. In other words, collect your favorite fonts, your favorite fought pairings, your favorite headers, your favorite body text. And then I want you to start to organize that within Camba so that you can start to make use of it on future projects. So you don't spend too much time getting lost on what funds to use because you have already made set of things you like and things that work, and then you can move on with getting your work done. So in the next lesson, right after this, we're gonna jump in, and I'm going to show you how you would go about doing this in Canada and then how you can use it in future projects. So that lessons coming right up and I'll see you in just a second 22. 3 - Strategies for Choosing and Organizing Fonts: In this lesson, I just want to talk about a few methods for choosing fonts for your designs, font pairings for your designs, and also some resources that can be really helpful. The first method is just exploring around in Canva. You, if you're in under any of the templates or within any file, and you'll notice fonts you like. You can make note of those fonts and then you can obviously start a collection of your own. And I'll show you how to do that in a second. I'm just going in here under posters for a second. You'd have them going through the posters in on like I'm interested to see what these fonts are here. Of course, I could just click and open that and go ahead and use this as a template. I'm just trying to open it up so I can see what those fonts are. And so anytime you're working anywhere within Canva and you notice fonts that you like. You can just click on them and say, okay, this is this Vida Loca font here. You can see the complimentary font and you can see that, okay, that is also the same layer. And so that works pretty well as a font combination, just varying the color and the size of that font there. Then what I'd recommend you do is I would recommend that you start a Canva document and call it something like favorite fonts inhabitant a folder or a place where you can access this easily. And then you could come in here and you can start to write out different categories of fonts. Fonts you like for headlines, maybe fonts that are more decorative. You can come up with whatever categories makes sense for you. But I have things like classic fonts and then of course things like font pairings. Now the one thing I'll say is, as you do this, I think it makes sense to name the font. You have the example of the font in that font, but then also have it named. Because if I go to copy this, for example, I'll just come in here and Control a and Control C. And then if I come over to this document here, if I were pasting in this font Control a, Control V to paste over that name. But this is now in the font-style that was here. You're not pasting over the style itself. You're pasting over the name. But the reason why you name it is because then you can be like, okay, I know what this font is. It's this Alerion heavy. And so then you can very easily come in and you can type that in. It will find that font for you. There we go. We're layering on heavy. Go ahead and make that change. So again, this is why having to stay favorite fonts file like this where you store your favorites and you can curate this collection so it doesn't get too big. And you can add to it periodically, take fonts that you're not using out of it periodically. But it is just helpful because then when you start a new design project and you want to quickly have some fonts that you know are good jumping off points for you. You don't have to start totally from scratch. You can come in here. You can grab one of these fonts. You can bring it over. You can try it out in your design, such as one strategy in one technique. So that's just looking at other Canva documents, finding fonts that you like, and then adding them in here. Now of course, you're not limited to just kinda projects themselves. You may see fonts out in the real world. Maybe it's on a magazine, maybe it's on a billboard. Well, another strategy I like to use is this little iPhone app. Or actually you can get this on any mobile device, I think, I think it's available on Android also. But so certainly on iPhone and iPad, It's called Adobe Capture, and it's just a free little application. It does more than just what I'm gonna describe. But one thing it does is if you just point it at a font and take a picture of it, then it's going to attempt to identify that font. And it's also going to give you a lot of similar fonts. And you may be able to find those within Canva or they may be on Google fonts are other places where if you have that Pro version of Canva, you can download that font and import it, assuming it's a font, you have rights too, but it's called Adobe Capture. It does other things as well where you can turn images into vector shapes. So that might also be something that's very helpful for Canva. You can also do collect gradients and color palettes and things like that, generate color palettes for images, images. So these are all things that actually might be helpful when working with Canva. But specifically for this lesson, I liked the feature of this, pointing it at a font that you see in the real-world, you can take a picture. It's going to identify that font, identify some similar fonts. And then of course, what you could do is if you find those similar, similar fonts in Canva and you could come in here and add them to your collection if it's something you really like, that's very helpful. So find fonts and font pairings that you like within Canva. Find pot for font pairings and combinations that you like in the real-world. And then let me show you yet another resource which may be helpful to you. And so this comes from Canva itself. Let's see if I still have this open. I may have, I may have closed this, but here it is right here. Canva.com font combinations. Just jumping into the middle of this video with a quick update for you. When I originally launched this, I was recommending this canva.com font combinations, combinations page where you used to be able to generate font pairings by choosing a starter font and then it gives you some fonts that pair well with it. However, if I hit Enter now to go to this site, it now rerouted to Canvas Ultimate Guide to font pairing. You can still go here and you can still read this if you want to watch or read their advice on font pairings, some things you consider. This is still a helpful article if you're new to font pairing, but they no longer have that canva.com font generations or font combinations, I guess it was called the no longer have that page where you could generate a font pairings in has now been retired. So that's not gonna work any longer, but I'm gonna give you another option that is new in Canva. So back here under your designs, Once you have a design on screen, you can come under this Styles tab. And if you're under the Styles tab, the first thing you can do is automatically apply whatever fonts are in your brand kit. If you're a pro user and you have that brand kit in your brand kit, you can set a default style for headings, for subtitles and for body texts. And so if I click on this now, it's going to change all of the fonts here automatically to what I have set in my brand kit. So that's helpful for branding just to really quickly be able to change fonts to your brand font. The other option that they have now is I'm under this Styles tab. So you have this Styles tab now, you can do things on here where you can automatically set your brand colors if you have that pro account and you have those brand colors, I think you can even set a color palette if you're not a pro user. But you get more color palette options if you're a pro user. And then they also have all these color combinations down here. Or you can choose one and you can have it automatically apply. They'll make color pallets suggestions. And down, down here they have these combinations between colors and fonts where you can click on one. It's going to automatically change fonts and colors. And it even has this Shuffle button. If you're just looking for inspiration and ideas, you can go in here and you can just randomly try stuff and see if you find things that you like. Now maybe even more useful for that if you want to be more involved in the process of actually choosing, they have this font sets option again, all this is under the styles menu, but under this font sets, if I choose a c, all I can see a whole bunch of pairings that Canva has preset. What you're seeing here is basically the font that's gonna be applied to all your headings, the font that's going to be applied to subheadings, and the font that's going to be applied to your body ticks. So keep that in mind as you add text to a project, you can add headings, subheadings, and body text. So you want to think about what type of content it is. And you want to have that hierarchy and structure, but you do have headings, subheadings, and body texts as appropriate. And then once you have a design on screen and you have those elements within your design, you can come under these font sets. Font sets under the styles menu, and they had these pre-made pairings. We've now if I click on this, it's going to automatically apply these fonts respectively to my titles, my subheadings, and to my headings and subheadings that my body text. So I can go through now and I can try these different pairings. So these are pairings that Canva thinks these fonts work pretty well together. So if you're stuck on a project, you're not just not sure what fonts you want to use. You can come in here and you can click through some of these. And it's just a good way to get fonts that pair reasonably well together. You know, you're starting from a decent starting point. And you can go in here and try these different options just by clicking once seeing it applied to your whole design. It can save you time versus going in and having to restyle all of these. So this is a good option if you find yourself lost some time. So again, this is under the styles menu and it is under font sets. And you can click these different options and have it auto apply to all of the texts within your document. When you find something you like, of course, then you'd come over to your favorite fonts file here. And you would paste into here. And again, this file here, I will just create categories that makes sense to you. Obviously pairings, but then other categories if you want to get more specific and you just want to have your headlines are certain types of fonts that you may use. You can pare things that way. And then again, this is a document where you just store somewhere in one of your folders on Canva. And then you can open this if you're starting a new project. And you just need some inspiration. And then of course you can copy it from here, paste it over to your actual design. And then when you paste it over, remember, you're still gonna go in and have to change that font. But here you have to come in here, and you actually have to go up here and change the font once you pasted it. But since you have the title written out, then all you have to do is go search for that and find it and it's really easy. These are just a few resources and techniques that I think are really helpful for choosing fonts and it'll help get you, it will help you from just becoming stuck and wasting time searching through this long list of fonts over here when you're not quite sure what you're looking for. All right, hope that is helpful. 23. 3 - The Canva Design Size Guide: this lesson. I just wanted to point out one more can of a resource that's gonna be very helpful to you when it comes to choosing design sizes. So we've talked about before how you can come in here, and you can choose any of these pre made templates, and it's going to give you a good idea of a starting point. So poster Pinterest pain. It's going to give you that starting dimensions that you need. Or you could come up here to create a design, and you can choose your own custom dimensions. But what if you're looking for a little bit more information? So let's say you you're creating a poster, but you know it's gonna be for a larger display. Can you get more information? We'll that is where Canada has this size guide, So design size guide. So you just come to camba dot com sizes and then you can browse through here and they have all types of different documents so you can go through here. You can see lots of different document sizes. You can come in here and see social media. You can see paper all these different final designs that you may be going for. So then, if you find the design silent, you're going for a poster, for example. You can click on that, and it will come up with even Mawr information. So in here, it's giving you if you want an eating half by 11. That's the smallest poster that it's giving you all these other posts or sizes, which are standard poster size is even up to like what size poster you might want if you were creating something for, like a bus stop. So this just give you even more information about the different design sizes and then the output that those air common for So you can read all these different things and get even mawr information and up here If you wanted to see OK, this is Inches. What is their recommendation for pixels? You can go ahead and you can change the unit up here, and it's gonna automatically change over there. So this is just another great resource. If a this is not enough information for you here just choosing one of these now, a lot of times, just choosing something here is gonna be fine. You're going to be good to go with the size that they have their. But if you are looking to get even more information and think about an output, that's a little bit different, but you're not quite sure what to start with. And this is where this design size guide is gonna be helpful to you. So let me just go back here and give me another example. So, Social Media, if you wanted all at once see Facebook and see what the common sizes are for Facebook could come in here and you could see this is what it recommends for a profile picture, a cover photo image post and so on and so on and so on. And then it talks a little bit about each down here. I just wanted to point you out this out to you as another resource. So again you would come to camera that com sizes, and that's going to take you to this design size guide where it's gonna show you all these different categories. You can click on any given category and then see all the recommended sizes for the items within that category. Hope this is helpful and I'll see you in the next lesson. 24. 4 - Adding to Your Canva Brand Kit: and this lesson, we're gonna be talking about the brand kit, which is campus solution, basically restoring assets related to your brand that you can use again and again. So logos, colors, fonts. Ah, now I will say the brand kit is basically a premium camp a pro feature, so I just bring up the other one here. We can see that under the free can va if you try to add more logos if you try to add upload funds. And if you try to add more than just the one color palette, they're gonna want you to go to the pro version. But don't worry if that's you. If you're on the free version in the next lesson, we're gonna talk about how to create a canvas style guide, basically a brain style guide within Canada, and that will allow you to have a place where you can organize assets related to your brand again. That's the whole goal is for you to organize your assets that you're going to use again and again with your brand so that you save time. So if you do not have access to this brand kit, the premium features for Camp a pro. Then in the next lesson in the style guy, we will still talk about a strategy which you can use by creating a style guide to have those assets where you can easily access them. But in this lesson, we're going over the brand kit. So I'm just gonna jump back now to that camp a pro. And here is the brand kit under can of a pro, so you have the ability to upload different logo. So I just have a logo here for my purpose. Blogger brand. And then here's another simple logo for our food block site. So again you just hit the plus icon. Then you can navigate on your computer and you can upload more logo. She can upload J. Peg. You can upload a PNG files. So you see here this does let you upload Ah, logo's with transparency, which is what you're gonna want with most U two designs. And then down here you can generate color palettes, and it's very easy to add new color palettes. So I just hit the plus and then I put in a new palette there, and then I can start to build out new colors within that pallet, and if you click on the color, then you can come in here and you can mainly choose a color like this, or you can actually use that hex code. Now, if you worked at all with colors before, you probably understand that every coat has every color has this hex code associated with it? And so if you work in other programs, you can find those hex codes for the colors you want. I'll just point out to websites now that if you're not familiar with, might be helpful for choosing colors. So first you have adobe color and so color dot adobe dot com. So if you have an adobe subscription, ah, you may be able to use this even without an adobe log, and I'm not sure if you're logged in under a year adobe account. I know that. Then you can save some of these toe use within your adobe library within adult other adobe software. But it's also just a great way for exploring colors. And then you can see different color themes. You can type in something, so if you wanted, like a ah, Thanksgiving or like a fall theme Ah, you would do that. And it would bring up whatever colors sort of are tagged with that theme. And then if you click on any of these colors, you export, explore farther, and then here is this hex code here. So if you're copying that hex code and then you come back over to your brand kit, you were just highlight and that I would try to see you try that again. Highlight told me the pace. I don't think it worked there. Let me let me jump back here. But again, this is color dot adobe dot com. It's a good way for ah, picking up. So it's copy to Clipboard. Let's see if it works this time. Control of the U. S. So there we go. All right. So you can build out color palettes in this manner, and then you can easily access those colors from within a project. When you're working on the design. Of course, the most obvious use of this is for your brand colors, colors that are representative of your brand that you may use again and again and again. It makes sense to have a color palette for them. But then if there are any other seasonal pallets or other callin color palettes that you want to build out and have easy access to, you can do that under your brand kit here under brand colors. I mentioned the adobe dot color, but there are other sites like that to like this coolers DOT CEO. So there are other sites you confined that will help you generate color palettes. If you want to have a starting point, you could do this from scratch also and come up with your other colors. But just know within his brand kit, you can store color palettes. So besides uploading logos and then brand colors, the other thing you can do underneath here is upload your brand fonts so you can choose fonts that exist within Canada. Or you can also come in here and upload fonts directly to Canada. So basically what they do is they let you set a default font for your headings, your subheadings and then your body text. So if I came on here under headings and I could come in here and then I could see all the fonts within Canada along with my uploaded fonts, and I could choose any one of these have wanted to use this fire sans font, which was the thought that I uploaded. Then I could come within here, and I could make adjustments to what size I want my main headlines to be. So if I said that the 28 send it, sending it to something slightly smaller than it was before, I could make it bold. I could make a metallic if the fund has that those capabilities and then also seem thing for subheading. Same things for your body text. So what it lets you do is change those defaults so that within your when you're within a project and you launch a header or a subheading or body text, it's automatically going. Come inform attitude the text that is the your default setting here within your brand funds . So that is just something that see if you time now again. If you want upload funds, you can do that right here, and you'll navigate to somewhere on your ah computer and your uploaded font. And Campbell uses all this standard font formats. So if you're not familiar with that, you might want to read here over on support this little ah blurb about what font file formats are accepted and so open type fonts, true type fonts, Web fonts. You may or may not be familiar with those. If you've worked with typography before, you probably are, but it's not that complicated. Basically, you downloaded text file to your computer, and then you can upload it to Canada. If it's within one of these file formats are, the biggest thing you have to do is worry about whether it's a fun you can get for free and you have usage rights to There are other some other font packages where you have to pay and download those premium funds. So just get familiar with that. Ah, but a couple of sites you might want to check into. Ah, this. The font dot com has a lot of free royalty free fonts, which you can download and use in your projects. Just pay attention when you're downloading a font as to what the uses rights are. The other thing is adobe fonts, and it used to be adobe type kit. They've changed it now, so if you do have ah, go be creative cloud membership, which I suspect a lot of you might. But if you do, then definitely take advantage of fonts dot adobe dot com because from here you can explore all the different fonts that you get as part of your adobe subscription, your creative Cloud subscription. And then from here on this site, you can download those fonts and then you should have something in a file format which you can use within your adobe software. Or you can also upload it to your brand kit here on can va. So again, the brand kit just gives you a way. So organized, your logos, your colors. Ah, what you want to be your default header Tex and body text. And then also those fonts. You know, if you have any that you want to upload that aren't part of the canvas package already, then you can do that here. Ah, but if you don't upload font, just know there tons and tons of fonts within campus, so you're still gonna have a lot of good options. But if you have a specific find that you use as part of your brand and it's not part of Camba, then you can still upload it here. So this can be very helpful. All right. I think that covers the brand kit. And in the next section, we're gonna talk about just creating a brand style guide, which again it We're gonna do a lot of the same things here. So if you're a freak and a user, the next section might be helpful to you because we're just gonna talk about basically an alternate way toe. Organize those things. Those assets related to your brand on will go beyond. Just this, too. Would talk about how if you have certain images that you want to use, you can organize those as well into a brand style guide, so I'll see you in the next lesson. 25. 4 - Creating a Brand Style Guide: in this lesson, we're gonna be talking about creating a simple brand style guide that can govern the visual identity of your blogger business. And this is very similar to the other lessons where the an end goal is just to have your assets organized into a particular space and define some rules to help govern your visual identity. Just so you're consistent and you start to establish your brand with strong visual assets, it's also just the way to save time. So we're gonna look at an example here, something's gonna click over, and this is alien where, and this is an example of their brand style guide. Someone go ahead, expand us out and just flip through this quickly. And so a lot of companies will create style guides like this that just talks about their mission, their audience. And then it gets into design aspects like their logo the different ways it may be set up in a line. So they're different alignment choices, and it gets into more detail. It talks about the color palette, typography, So these are things we've covered in the brand kit, and we've looked at before. But the style guide is just yet another way to create a document where all of this is housed in one space. Now, for something like a bigger brand like this, it can get really, really in depth. They may go into what photography and things make sense for the brand. What type of partners that might wanna work with all escape out of this now and come back to our own document. So you're not gonna create something on the same level of complexity as like a big brand might. But you still want to think in terms of your brand? Okay, what's my mission statement? Who is the audience I'm trying to reach? And then how do I just create a collection here within my style, guys of the rules I follow in terms of my different logo options that I may use on different platforms. What are the typography choices? I may make so simple things like this just to build out those assets that they're going to save you time and help. You have sort of a consistent voice in the consistent look for your final assets. Obviously, if you're just using camera and you're creasing creating an asset for a another brand, you know, for a client, then maybe it's gonna be there Visual style guy that you want to see that comes into play. But if you're working on you're blogging and or or your business and your creating assets for your blogger business that having your own style guy just to govern some of the decisions and just to save you time is a really good idea. So I have created a very simple style guide here just that you can use sort of as a jumping off point. And I would say to you, I encourage you to start simple. And then over time, you can sort of build to the complex, build the complexity of your style guy, when you think of more things that really make sense to include but start simple. So here I've just created a new document, and I think I just did a standard letter had document here. It doesn't really matter what format you use for your document. You could make it a standard let standard letter document like this. But any sort of document where you can add more pages and bring in these assets is gonna be just fine. So the front page here, I just have my primary logo and then just the mission statement. So for this Brian, my my mission statement is ordered to help bloggers, photographers and designers learned to skills and software that will help them save time, deliver better results and grow their income. So just a very basic statement. That sort of is the overriding sort of core of your value system and what governs your business or your blogged. So it's a good idea to have something like that. So you might put something like that in your your style. Guide your brand style guide. Then it's really going to get into those visual assets that you're gonna use again and again. So I've created another page and to create new pages. Obviously, you can come up here and you can copy a page. Or you could just hit plus, to add a new page, your document. So it's really easy to build out these multi page documents. Just where your house, your assets like this so well, those on one page again. I only have two options here, but you can ADM or I'm a ADM. Or if you re do your logo. You can update this, whatever your current logos are. And then also what logos you use in certain situations. You may use something on one platform that's not gonna work on letterhead or a business card. So have the choice is here in the variety. So when you go to create new assets, you can have all your logos right here in an easy space where you can access it. Image assets. And here I just put this image of me, which I use before on my about section. I probably should create a few more and bring them in here, too. So have them easy access to get to also things like icon sets that you use on a regular basis. So I've put a few in here. Social media icons also icons for software that I do tutorials about a lot. Now I could add to this, or I could also organize it anyway, I want I could separate it out. So I sort of have the pictures of myself for the about section, and then maybe I have a whole nother page that's icon sets so you don't have to set it up like I set it up. You really want to set it up? Whatever is intuitive than what makes sense for you and whatever you think is going to be the right organist organisational strategy for your blog's your business. That's how you want to set it up and again start simple. And then you can always modify and expand this as you go. So I have something for image, assets and color. Of course, we talked about color before, and if you're a pro, can va ah, user than you have access to making those pallets within the brand kit and you could make a many as you want. However, if you are on the free camera and you can only create that one pallet, you won't have multiple pallets. Here is a very easy spot way to ah have access to all those color palettes. I just put them in here. Ah, and then also, you always include that hex code. Just so if you want to know that hex code, you can always copy that as well to get access to that color. So you're just really organizing assets so you can get to them quickly, later and I will talk about how you can bring this brand style guide up and then make use of it in another project in the lesson coming up immediately following this. Because again, the whole goal here is just to save you time. Maybe it's good to have a style guide like this that you can send out to, you know, other brains if you're gonna work with them. And if somebody's gonna make use of your assets, that's a good idea. But just for your own personal reference. And then also, I think the most important thing in terms of creating new s assets for your business it's just being able to really quickly incorporate those into your camp A projects. So we're gonna talk about how you can copy assets from one project to another, easily coming up in the next lesson. So then color typography. So the fault headings We talked about how you can do that in the brand kit, but you can also have them here. Maybe you want to throw in some of your other favorite fonts or font pairings that you like . You can store those here just so you don't have the you know. Remember, off the top of your head, you can have them all here where you can get to them easily. Same thing for things like the fault page layouts. If you have a default layout used for, you know, kind of a newsletter or whatever. Whatever documents you creating on a regular basis, if you want to put some default layouts and here you can. Now, in future lessons, we're gonna talk about real world projects and template ing. So maybe you have different templates for different social media platforms where you create assets and other things, and you're not necessarily gonna store all of those in your style guide. But the style guide is just another opportunity to organize assets. So you want to think about how in depth do you want to get and then something Instances you may think. Okay, I'm gonna do this, but it's gonna be another template, so I'm not gonna put that in my style. Guide. These just come down to your personal decisions in the best way for you to organize for your business. So that's basically it anchored. You create a simple style guide, start simple, put in the colors you use put in some basic choices in terms of fonts, Ah, paragraph layouts, logo layouts, things like that, and then also image assets that you use on a regular basis. And then over time you can build. You can modify, you can update it, and it just becomes another way to stay consistent with your visual design. And also another way for you to save time because you have everything in this place where you can easily access it. All right, I'll see in the next lesson. 26. 4 - Organizing Assets with Folders: in this lesson. We're talking about organizing with folders, and this is really just a continuation of the previous lessons. We're talking about organizing your brand assets, and of course, it just doesn't have to be those theme the brand assets. It can also be any theme if you want to keep certain marketing times of the year, we have all the assets related to that, uh, particular theme in an organized structure than folders are a great way to do that. Now, the method I'm gonna show you here first is one that's only available on canvas pro. But then I'm gonna talk about work around you can use. If you are on a free account, something's gonna go ahead and jump over to the folders tap here under my can of account. Now, I am gonna talk about uploads and folders in the next section of this course as well, so I'm not gonna go into crazy detail here. But how you organize can really save you time. So I don't mind repeating myself a little bit when I feel like it's something really important that can give you back time and make you more efficient. So under this folder section. If you have a pro account, you can create as many folders as you want. And so that's an opportunity opportunity. The store assets under a particular marketing theme. So it could just be all your brand assets that you're going to use on a regular basis that you want to be able to access easily, easily. Or you can create whatever theme you want for different times of the year. Different marketing channels you might have, so I'll just jump into this brand assets folder now. You can have projects in here as well, but they will separate out your photos and your projects. So you see them separately and you sort of interact with them differently. And when you're actually in a design, then you're only gonna be able to bring up your photos from within that design. That sort of makes sense. You're not gonna bring up a project within a project, but photos that you might use in that project. You could access those easily, and I'll show you an example of that. I just want also point out that now in camera and this is relatively new, you can also create sub folders that gives you even mawr ability to organize. You can create sub folders, sub folders within those sub folders. So you really do have an opportunity to organize things any way you want. So to show you really quickly how this works. So this is brand Assets folder that I created just some things I might use on a regular basis. And then any time I'm in a design and I'm working in a design here, I'll have this folders tab here. And if I just click that open that I'm going to see all my folders, I could jump in that brand assets voters. And so you can see you can jump then into that sub border. No, I don't have anything in that sub border, but I just want to show you that those sub folders are accessible when you're in design view like this. But I just don't back out here. And so then I have these assets that I can is very easily grab whatever I want and drag it into my project. Now I noticed it's not showing everything over here, but if you click that show all button that is going to show you everything that's in that folder, and then you have access to everything you can drag and you can resize it. You can use it however you need to very easily in your project. So not just spend a little time on this because it's pretty self explanatory. I just wanted to show you in this lesson that yes, you can use folders And if, as an effective means of storing different channels of marketing and then being able to very easily access those when you're working in different projects and then that can save you a lot of time and real quick, let me just talk about free accounts in case you are someone who does have a free account. Of course, you do not have this folders option. If you have a free account, let me jump from this paid account over to an account that is a free account here. Under this free account, you'll see that if I go under folders, all it's going to show you is your purchase folders. If I try to create folders or view like a brand asset folder or something I created, or even one of my two folders that you have. You cannot see those folders here within the free version. They want you to go to the paid version. So what do you do? Well, you could upgrade. You could go to the paid version. Or you could also store things locally on your computer and have an organized structure there. So you're still saving time. You would just have to do the upload process each time. So that's maybe not as convenient, but it will work that way. And also, you could come down here under the more tab. And if you hook up something like Dropbox, you can connect Dropbox and then you're gonna be able to see your folder structure within Dropbox and drag stuff over this way. So obviously, with the paint account, you get a little bit more. But there still are work arounds if you have a free account, so think about having a folder structure, whether it's on camp itself, whether it's on your own personal computer or whether it's in a cloud solution like Dropbox or Google Drive. Think about organizing in a smart way. So you organize your assets, and then when you build projects, you're gonna work more quickly. And, of course, that is what it's all about. Working efficiently in saving time. All right, I will see you in the next lesson. 27. 4 - How to Make Quick Use of Your Brand Assets: in the previous lessons, we've talked about how you create a brand kit, how you create a brand assets folder and how you can create a brand style guide. Now, in this lesson, I want to put into practice how we take those things and how we use them to really speed up our work flow. This is sort of the payoff one that sort of builds upon what we did before. And now we see how we use those to save time. So what I'm gonna do is just start any document here. So go ahead into an instagram post. And so now, within here, we're going to see how we can start to make use of those assets that we've built up using those different strategies. You could do the brand. Kate. You can do a brand Assets folder. You can do a brand style guide. So here, with a blank screen here in in this project, if I come to add text elements, you'll see that you immediately have access to those brand styles. So if I add a heading, I add a subheading. Um, we separate those out that they come in here. You can see that these are immediately drawing upon the styles that I have in that brand kit. So some things like that you put in the brand kit. If you're a camp a pro user, you can immediately see those than when you go to add text or did going to make changes. Now the same thing applies to colors that you put in your brand kit. So if I just drag out any simple shape here, so just a circle on screen, I'll go ahead and send that to the back. Just so it's behind that. And so again, I can do that just by doing my control on bracket keys. Send things forward or backwards, and you can also position things. There was no Now I have in the back. If I want to go up here and change the color again, your brand colors are going to show up here at the top. Now again, if you're using free Campbell, you're only going to see that one brand palette. But you'll still have that up here. And if you have multiple pallets, they're all gonna show here within this section here. So again, it's just another way to really save you time because now you have quick access to those brand colors. You have quick access to the heading, default heading the fault subheading you set up. And then if you go in and change these farther and you actually want to change the text up here, all those things you've uploaded, you upload bonds, your brand phones, they're all gonna show up at the top here. So it really can see view on a lot of time and a lot of searching because one of the great things about Canberra is you have lots and lots of fun choices. But one of the difficult things is you have lots and lots of fun choices, so you can really get lost down here. So if you set those up as you know, favorites and brand fonts, then you are going to save a lot of time. So some of these options ah, are not available on the free account for some of these limitations that come into play with a free account. That's one again you can use something like people and style guy, which we just set up. Ah, First, let me just scare with this for a second, and I'm gonna maybe go back to my templates and they don't drag in this design here. So let's say I was using this design here, and I like the design, but I want to make use of my brand colors. And let's say I have a palette that is not available within my brand kit. Because maybe I'm afraid, user. And this is a different palette that I'm using. Ah, sort of during the fall or whenever. And so I want to be able to quickly access that. And I know I have in my style guide. So all you do is have that style guide window open and I'll come down in that project. I'll find the color said I want to use I'm just gonna drag around. It will hit control C And then I'm going to come back to my design here that I'm currently working on. We'll go ahead and just add a new page, and what I'm gonna do is just paste in my colors. So again, I used command. See, actually control, See on windows that would be command see on Mac just to cut and copy those items. Copy those items and then command Veer control V. Depending on whether your Mac or Windows to pace that, I would make this a little bigger. And so now I have this here and now I have the colors I want to use. So if I come up here to change colors now, I'm actually gonna go down the 50% just so I can see mawr in the screen at the same time. So a lot of times when you have colors, color palette in a document like this, it's gonna automatically find those colors. So when I select this element here and I come up here, I might automatically start to see these colors up here. It looks like maybe they did copy in, so you can make use of them right now from there. But if for some reason you don't see those colors Ah, you have these hex codes here. So all I need to do really is hit this and double click and then control, See to copy that hex code and I'll come over here, I'll do this and in the search box will just hit Control V. And there is that color. So using this method where I just double click down here and make sure I get this highlighted control. See, then back up to this document and come up here, and it's just a really easy way to find and use the colors. So again, I'm gonna come down here on the font. I'll just make sure I highlight it. Copy that, control. See, to copy again, Control. See, on a PC would be command Siona, Mac. Then you come up here, you select this, you click on the color palette and then up here in the search bar, just go ahead and pace that in so control V or come man V to paste. And then there it's giving you that color. And so very quickly I can take advantage of this color set because I just brought it right over from my style guide. So again, the trick you're going to do is open up your design project and you're working on and one window, and in the next window, you'll just have that style guide. And that way you can copy and paste elements in between. When you find something you want to use, so do that come up here to this last color and one more time control V to paste. And they're just like that. I've taken this design and have been able to use my style guide and bring in those colors really easily. So it is a way to save a lot of time Now, if I try to do the same thing with my fonts, it's not gonna work quite the same. Because if I come over here to my brand style guide and I tried to ah, you know, take this Pacific Oh, font and cut and paste it. What happens is your your copying the letters. But you're not actually pasting the formatting, the fonts. So if I come back into my design now and I just hit control V to pay set in somewhere, you'll see that it pace it This in here. But it is actually just using the font. Whatever font was currently working here, so are hawrami. No. So excuse me, Romo. It is not pasting over the font itself. It's just pacing the letters. But so what you do in that case is you're just using the brand style guide as a reference so pacific Oh, that's the font you want, then you would come in here. You would highlight this font and question you would come over here, you would come to your drop down, and then you will find that as you use fonts and funds Ah, the most recent font tends to show up up top, so you might find it there. But now also, since your style guy just very easily remind you of the name of the font, you know, you like, you can start to type it in, and it's gonna show up very quickly. And then when you type it there, boom, it's instantly going to show up. So it doesn't look very good for this design, so it wouldn't actually use this. But just, for example, purposes, you can see how again your style guy just serves as a reference to save you time. So you don't search down through fonts going through that whole list of fonts. Trying to remember what the fund is you can is very quickly look at your style guide and remind yourself of the fonts that you like to use. But you can remind yourself the fonts like that you can paste over these colors so you can make use of your colors in your design. And of course, you can also paste over assets. So I just come up here to my images. Let's say I wanted to use some of these. I could just copy those, and then that is something that would paste directly over. So just paste them over here. And then, of course, any one of these I want to use you could drag up into your project, right? So, again, this is just how you take something like the brand kit that Campbell let you set up something like setting up your own brand assets folder and then also setting up something like a style guide are very useful because they give you a reference to help you do two things one just safe time. And to let you, you know, maintain that consistency with your your brand image and you're styling. So think about these things. Take advantage of those. And if you do this work up front to set up a few of these things, it's really gonna pay off in the future. So I hope that's helpful, and I'll see you in the next section 28. 4 - Class Project - Create a Brand Style Guide: Welcome to the next class project. This project is simply creating a brand style guide, So I want you to create a style guide for your brand or your business. Now you saw in the last lesson lots of things that you might want to include in your brand sale guide. But what you actually could include I'll leave up to you as well as leaving up to you. What format? In other words, what size what dimensions you want to use for your project in Canberra, but create a style guide and then go ahead and downloaded as a PdF or just some J peg screenshots and upload a few of those to the Class project section of this course. So just use that green, create project button and go ahead and upload something and show us what you came up with. All right, good luck. See in the next lesson. 29. 5 - Overview of the Canva Project Interface: in this lesson, we're gonna get a quick overview of the project interface and then in future lessons in this section, we really gonna dive into the different parts of the project interface. But I would just want to go over the overview real quick in this lesson. So it doesn't matter what I open. So I'm just gonna open a social media graphic here. And any time you open a project, what you see is the project over here to the right. This is your workspace course of the mentions air gonna change based on what project you chose. And then you have all these different tabs to the left, and then you have a file menu bar across the top and then at the bottom. You have some things here for adding new pages, changing your zoom, and if you need to get help, So we're just gonna go over this very briefly, and then again, we're going to step into each of the different tabs over here in the lessons coming up. And so I understand that as we get into the real projects part of this course later in the course, you're gonna learn as you go. Part of you know, part of learning software is just getting in there and starting to create riel world projects. However, I do feel like covering all of these initially, and a whole section of the course like this really gives you the foundation, the building, Brocks that are really gonna pay off and save you time as you get into the real world projects. I think this is true of any software where it can be frustrating at first when you're sort of bumbling around and you don't quite know the tools. But once you build that foundation, then you can really start to work efficiently, and it becomes a much more pleasing experience. So hopefully that's what we do in this section of the course. So again, the project interface. Once you're in here, you have your project workspace over here and then to the left. You're gonna have templates for ah, you're gonna have taps for templates, photos, elements, text and so on. And as you do that, you'll see this interface change over here. Based on your choice that you've chosen here Now, in the menu up top, you can always go back to the home screen here under the file menu, you can do things like show margins, show print bleed. And so if I do things like that, you can see what they do here. So it's just sort of giving you some extra guys within your workspace. If that's a visual cue that's helpful to you as you work, you could start a whole new design from here. You can say this now. Camera does a good job of saving on the fly, but if you're not sure and you want to be sure, you can always come up here again. It pretty much saves on the fly for me, so I don't really use this, but that's here. If you just want to make a part project of the make a copy of the project, you can do that. Here. You can get help, and of course, you can download, and you can also download over here. Up top here in his blue bar is where you name your project. So all just call this test project for whatever and then, of course, you have the share button. If you want to share this and then you can share this with anybody. If you have their email, you can send them an invite and you can give them permission to end it. Or you can just share a view of the project. If you don't want them to have added capabilities. And when they do edit, they can then make a copy on their own camp account. So what is it really convenient way? Even if you don't have those team tools, you can use those share buttons and you can share a project, and then somebody else can make a copy on their old own canvas. So it is really cool way to share assets now, to the right of that, you have all this download options, and we're going to get into all these in a lesson coming up. So I'm not gonna go into detail. Just know here's your project interface. You have taps to left basic file menu up here. You can undo keystrokes with that Over here, your name you can share, you can download. Then this is just for changing your zoom view. So if I did that, I mean it really small. Actually, I didn't do that Here, let me excited that for second So what you have here if you start to have a multi page document, and then if you use thes ah, this page managers here, which we'll talk about later, then you can really jump in, and then you can move around pages this way. So it is a really helpful view when you start toe work with larger documents. If you want X out of it, you can just x out there. And of course, what I was trying to do before was Click on the number here and you can fill the screen with your project you can. I did it again. I keep clicking on the pages manager, so maybe for me these could be a little bit farther apart. But so you can click on the zoom and you can change the zoom of review. Normally, you will want to fit it to your view. But if you're working on something that's larger dimensions that you want to zoom in closer or just have it fit more of your screen, you can do all of that right here. And then, of course, help button if you need additional help, the lock but year. So if you lock this button here. It's gonna lock and unlock the background will get into that coming up, but it's just another safety feature within camera. So again, as you go through, can va like this resize button here? If I jumped back over to my free can of account, then in here you see this? Reese Ice has that crown. Any time you see that crown, that means that is a future of the paid canvas account. Again, we'll go over what those are, and you may have watched that lesson, but we'll cover some more of that as we get in here. But so if you ever see this crown and you're in the free version of Tampa, then you've run into an option that is only available under Campbell Pro. Okay, I don't want to spend any more time going over to user interface like this cause we're gonna start to jump into all this in detail in the coming lessons. So I'll see you there 30. 5 - Working with Canva Templates: theme this lesson. We're gonna be talking about the templates tab within the project interface. And this is the tent. This is the tab that should be highlighted, an open by default when you first open a new project. So again, project to your left and then over here to the left, the templates tab is highlighted. And when that's highlighted, you're just going to see a whole bunch of templates, which are just that they work as great starting points for any project. So they're basically Primi projects where you can start out with that. And then, of course, you don't have to use just that. It's just sort of placeholders and a starting point where, maybe, like some of the graphics or some of the colors or just the layout or the text, and then you can make adjustments as needed. So with the templates tab open, if you just tap on any template, just click at once. It's gonna automatically overwrite whatever is over here, and it is gonna fill your project with that template as a starting point so I can tap through these and see the large version over here as they fill my page and then you can hit the add new page button at any time, and then you can go ahead and add different templates to that page so you can use different templates on different pages and let me show you again what happened when I clicked New page. You'll notice that the photo in the background on each of these is being used as a background element. And so that is something that's actually a little new to Camba. Two point. Oh, this didn't happen in Camba 1.0, where you had background elements like that. We'll talk about that a little later when we come up to this background section. But just know when you copy a page, it's gonna try to copy whatever the background element is, whether it's a photo or whether it's a color. And so you're not just adding a blank white page, it's gonna carry over whatever the background element is. Let me just show you another quick example. So if I click this one here on my add new page, it's going to carry over nothing, because this doesn't actually have a background element. But let me find one that does so Let's try. Let's try this one here. If I click this and I click at a new page, okay, this has a yellow background, so that could be a little point of confusing. Just know some elements. Some designs have background elements of background color of background images back on image. Others do not. But do not let that throw you, because if you ever have this situation where a new blank page carries over, ah, color or a picture, that's a background element and you do not want that, just click on it. Once you may not see anything but click on it, it is selected. Hit the leaky and it will go away. And, of course, remember anytime you click a new template over here, it's overriding any things in in there. So if you have a background element in there, of course it just gets over written anytime you click on a new template. Okay, so just a couple more things to cover here with templates. Ah, you'll notice that a lot of these have this free little icon down in the bottom right that lets you know they are free. You can use them in your designs. There's no royalty, there's no fee, but you will sometimes run into ones that say Premium in the bottom right. And if you click and use on one of those, then when you come down to download it, you're probably going to see a watermark. First of all, when you load a design and then when you come to download it, whatever pictures in there are premium elements. You are gonna have to pay a one time fee for the use of that element in that design, so we'll get into examples. That was a big deal forward, because this comes into play with not just ah templates, but also with photos and with icons and things like that. Again, there's tons of free stuff, but you will sometimes run into these paid elements to just know that's a possibility. But if you see this little free icon here, you're good to go using that template as a starting point. There's nothing in there that cost anything. A lot of times when it is a premium thing, sometimes the premium thing is a photo placeholder that you're gonna get rid of anyway. So if you see a premium icon here. It may still be a template you can use just fine. And you're paying for nothing as long as you get rid of that premium element from that template. Okay, One more thing, I'll add, is that sometimes you do have multi page templates. So give me to give you an example. I'm gonna jump over to this next screen where I have a magazine South template up. And so again, same thing here. Template tabs open. And I see everything here. But if I start to go down through these, I see this free and I see free and I see free. Let me just expand something something come appeared. I'm gonna expand all to Seymour these food ones cause I know some of these they're gonna be multi page. And so how do you know it's a multi page? So you see, I see nothing here. But if I hover over it, if it happens to be one that's a multi page template. Then it's going to start showing me this animation and show me the different pages within the design. Now, if I want to see him all at once, I can just click on it and it will sort of twirl it open, and then you see all the pages that are part of design. So if you like this, you could go ahead and click on the page. You want add new page, click on the page you want, and so you can sometimes find these multi page templates where they give you multiple pages within that template, and you can use any of them. All of them are any of them as you want. And, of course, if you want to get out of this just 12 that closed. But again, keep that in mind. You're gonna see things like free. But then, sometimes hidden. If you hover over a template, sometimes you're gonna find those templates that are multi page templates. So I think that's covers templates as much as we need to. For now, we'll get into how to use them later in the course. But for now, let's move on and let's check out some of these other tax you have in the lessons coming up . I'll see you there 31. 5 - Working with Backgrounds in Canva: okay, in this lesson, we're now gonna be talking about backgrounds in the background tap here under the project interface. Now, I believe that backgrounds air new to Campbell A 2.0, I do not remember them previously. But before group the backgrounds, let's just step back into elements. So if you remember grids, you can add a grid and it will fill the whole screen. And so then, if you want to click and drag a photo into this, you can have this be your background and maybe you want the transparency to go down. So previously in Campbell I would remember, Ah, creating a background or something like this where you're gonna add a grid and fill the whole screen. And of course, you could just stretch a photo to fill the whole screen, and then you add a new page. But when you do, it's just a new blank page. Now backgrounds are gonna work a little bit differently, and so let's go ahead and delete this page and let's go ahead and delete all this here and we'll delete the grid. So let me shoot. Well, here's a good opportunity to show you something. I forgot to show you before, so let me real quick. You control Z control Z undo. Undo that. So you notice my deleted This? I had the first delete the photo and then delete the grid. Ah, there is a way to delete them both at the same time. I believe so. If I delete this and come into the trash can here, If I choose delete image, it's just gonna delete the image. But if I choose delete grid, then boom, It gets rid of them both at the same time. So just know if you ever have an image in the grid, let me. It controls the control z to have it up here again. If you ever have an image with integrated, you're going to see this trashcan icon up here. And then underneath that you'll have the option of getting rid of just the image or just the grid. Of course, we do it manually. You'll just have to tap it twice. So not a big deal, but so those air grades. But let's jump over the backgrounds backgrounds act a little differently. A background is always going to take up the positioning of the entire project window, and so it fills the entire background. Me Just drag one in here, for example. So if I come in here and I go under crop, I can change the positioning. If there's something that's more that what doesn't have much, let's trying all the different one. So let's do if I have crop here. So yes, solar is extra here so I can move it around and hit Enter. But there is no way to resize it, so it doesn't fill the entire screen cause by default. It's a background. It fills the entire screen also by default. A background element is always going to be the bottom element of your design in your layers stack. So if I had texts and some other stuff on top of here and I moved it to the back of the layer, stop stack, it's still going appear above your background. You can't move anything to behind the background, and that sort of makes sense because since it does Philip the entire screen, you're not going to see anything that is behind it. Whatever you can can come in here, and you can do things like adjust the transparency if you want that underlying white to show through in this just to be a little different look. But again, backgrounds, the entire element fills up the entire screen. And the other thing that is a little different about backgrounds is then when you come to spawn a new page. So if I just come in here down below, let's see, let me get rid of this one. If I just come in here now and add a new page, it is gonna pick up whatever background is element is on that previous page. So let me add a different one here or now if I do a new page, it's gonna pick up this background. So I guess this is potentially a good thing. If you're Korean, a unifying design. And when you create a new page, you wanted to just show up again and again. But also just know that because if you ever have something where you don't want the background element and you're creating a new page, you're just gonna have to click it and zap it first. So those are background elements. Ah, you have all these different patterns, abstract things, textures and all sorts of stuff in here and again. The easiest way. It's probably again to search. I don't know. Give me some random thing to search for. I have no idea. My mind cannot work. Let's just do floral or flowers just to see. And then if you do that, you'll see that, Yeah, You found a couple of background elements. I didn't find that many. But again, best way is probably just to come in here and search and find what you want. Another cool thing would be maybe by searching for by color, if you know a certain color that you want. Ah, let me just do an example here. So I've actually going back over to my templates. But first, let me just clean up here a little bit. I'm gonna get rid of that stuff, get everything back. And then I think I'm here under Instagram. So if I come under templates and I choose this one here would be cool. So again, this here is this a background element. Let's see. I won't know until I create a new page. Let me get rid of this one and let me do a new page. So yes, it's using that photo is a background elements, so you can also use photos so I could drag in any photo that I want. And let's just show you an example of that. So here this is a background element. Now, if I drag in a photo, it's going to come and then it will snap and fill up that background. So now that is a background element. New page. It's going to carry over that. But so let me delete that. Let me delete that. And I'm gonna come back in under my backgrounds. And like I said before, it's kind of cool to sometimes search by things like color. So if I were to do yellow and did something like yellow, then just because I have this front yellow graphic I might find something in here that looks pretty cool to go along with this. So if I do something like that and potentially, that's pretty cool, I like that a lot. You could also come in here, do things like adjust the transparency down a little bit so again, sometimes searching by colors. If you really want to stick with something that's gonna go well with your design, that can be a cool way to do it. So again, just adding something in there. So here's a little tip. If you're if you're really designing something, colors such a huge thing. Sometimes. Under these backgrounds, if you're looking for something cool that works with your graphic, maybe look at what texture starting with and then find a contrast in color for the background. Or if you have this initial element in front, like this bounding box here, let me bring up the transparency. Then maybe something in that yellow color range might look good. So again, maybe this. I'll just try that and so again, experiment around. But just backgrounds. There are lots and lots of them available. Understand the little quirks and understand what you create. A new page. It's gonna carry over that background element but also realize underneath his background tab, you're not just limited to that. You could jump over the photos, and so maybe in photos will do something like Oranges says. It says fresh and organic. And so something like that, Well, I can't tell you puts. Try this again. There is no orange jurors oranges. Let's try that again and again. It's just doing the free elements here, which is fine for now. But then then I could try some of these elements and see, how do I like these in my design? Bring it over until it snaps. Bring it over to the hotel. It snaps. So again, very easy to quickly try a lot of different things. And then the course in here. But one of the change the color of this. You come up here and you can change the color. Maybe I'll go for an orange here. And another little tip is I like to have a color picker installed on my web browser. So if I wanted to sample a color from my design, I'll come down here, I'll click that it gives me that little hex code. All copy that. And so now select this. I got my hex code. Still, I believe. And so if I come in here and I paste that hex code here, it's going to give me that color hit. Enter and then you can actually choose colors from your own design and use them within their In other words, color sample colors from the photo That's part of your design. and use them as other use that, along with other elements in your design. So backgrounds. We sort of spun off from that and talked about a couple other things. But I like to give you as many tips as I can when we're going through these and will hit all these things again and again in these projects. Because again, just knowing all these tips are really gonna just you're gonna work more efficiently and you're gonna end up with better designs when you know all these little tips and tricks and how to get the most out of this software. So that's backgrounds. I will see you in the next lesson. 32. 5 - Working with Photos in Canva: Okay, in this lesson, we're talking about the photos tab within the project interface. So I have a project open here on screen and by default, it opens in the templates tap to jump to the photos tab. I'm just going to click here and you will see this changes over here, and I am now within the photos tap. So the first thing I'm gonna say is the photos tab is not where you want to come If you want to use your own photos. If you want to use your own photo photos, you're gonna goto uploads or within folders if you've already uploaded something in the past. But the photos tab is where you're searching for stock photography and assets that camp A has that you might want to use in your project. And one of the advantages of Camba is that there are so many free assets in terms of templates and photos that you can use. It's great if you have your own stuff, your own stuff, your original stuff. I think that's always best if you have your good own original asset. But again, you don't always have that, and it's a great way to save time and find stuff quickly just by going through all the free stuff within here. So let's just say that you were throwing a birthday party and putting together some sort of fire soliders type in birthday year, and you're going to get all these themed photography's that. Then if you click on something here, it works the same way as templates. You just click on it and it's gonna populate over in here and again. It's the same as we discussed before, where you have lots of free assets, but you will sometimes run into premium assets. So let me just go ahead and get rid of birthdays out of my filters there. And then you see this pecan pie here I am in undermine ah, pro account. So this camera pro and I see this pecan pie photo right here is a free photo. Now, let me just jump real quick just to show you a real world example here. And so I have just jumped over to my other account, which is a paid account and look same photo. But this time it is a premium photo. So this is another example where maybe you can save some money and make some money back with that pro account because you do get access to Mawr and MAWR stock photography, more free assets that you don't have to pay for. Now, whether that's a big deal to you, it totally depends. Are you using your own photos or you're using a lot of these stock assets, so I'll leave that up to you. But I just wanted to show you some of the things that you find for free in the pro count. You will have to pee for in the free account, but rest assure in the free account. There's still tons and tons of free stuff. I always go ahead. Jump back over to my window year on the my paid account, and so within here. Once you have a photo on the screen, let's just talk briefly about how photos work within a camp. A design Once you have photo or photos within in your design, their number ways that you can adjust it or work with it. So if I just come over here and click on this, all of a sudden, I get these handles that I see and again if I click off something I d select. So you select something by clicking on it, click anywhere else and de selected. You can also drag and select one element or multiple elements at a time, but with an element selected suddenly I see these corner points in these middle lines here . So if you drag in from a corner point, you are then just scaling the image up or down scale up or down like this. Now, if you use these points which are on the sides of the center points on the sides, then you were actually cropping the area of the photo that is actually gonna show. So if I want a crop in here to more of a square image, I would do it like that. And then if you double click on the image, you come within here and now you can adjust sort of what you're seeing within the frame. So think of your object sort of within a hidden frame. If you want to see that frame, just double click and then you'll see. These are the bounds here. But you can see the photo is actually larger than that. So if I want to scale it this way or that I can do that. And so then again, we click anywhere outside. Then you're back outside of their And so again I could make it smaller like this. And so when you dragged these corner points, you're adjusting not only the image, but the frame itself. Right? So look at that. I'm adjusting the frame and the whole thing is getting smaller. So again now, if I double click and I wanted to take a corner point Now, now look what I'm doing. In essence, I am cropping in closer. So I have a tighter frame and then I go ahead of a hit, enter to apply. Then there. That's my new image. So just keep in mind these quarter points here you're adjusting and scaling, sort of maintaining proportions. But you're scaling the whole frame, the whole image up or down. If you actually come in and use this, you are cropping inter out based on the current frame size, right? But then if you double click and your within here, then you can use thes central points toe actually cropping and crop out. And so you can make something appear you know much bigger and scale, right? Or you can pull way out like this. And then any time you get the enter key on your keyboard, it's gonna accept those changes, and then you're back in here, and then when you're hovering over your image, you'll see this course or here. That just means you can pick it up. You can move it around. So if I want something in the top corner here, maybe I put it down like this, and then I could use this to expand out to my full page. You can drag up or down like this. If you want to grab anything as you pulled around, you'll start to see these smart guides that pop up, so that lets me know, Boom! It's gonna snap exactly to the center of the page and so I can drop it right there. So you have all these different things that come into play as you're working with photos. And so I've gone over some things. But let's go over the other stuff here again. If I select this, you'll notice up here in this bar here. Suddenly I get Mawr options, so I click it. See Now I have more options. Okay, let's start to go over some of these options. But first, let me just resize this so we can see a little better. Something's gonna drag out from that corner and drag out from that corner Units. When you drag out, it's anchored at the opposite corner, so you can use that to help you position someone dragged it out just so it's bigger just so we can see again. Click on it. I get these options up here, so course flip under here. You can flip images horizontally. You can flip them for perfectly. So good. Flip that back under crop again. We did that. It's just another way to get into what we got into before we're now, you're coming in here and you're adjusting, and then you could actually just in and pull in that crop. Go ahead and cancel that. But you can get to that from this menu. Also, remember, if you double click, same thing gets into crop, so cancel out of this under adjust. You have all these settings here, but before even start playing with that, let me jump over to filter because these air connected I want to show you this. So if you come under filter, you have all these different presets. So you know, this is a click on that. It's changing the look that I see over here. And so here's women's whimsical daily in Peony. And so you get all these cool presets. Ah, and you can adjust the intensity up and down. So if you like this but a little strong, you can dial up or down. So you may notice, Like when you look on instagram or places like that. Ah, lot of times people have almost these filter Look to the their photos. It's not always great, but sometimes it is really good and it is a custom look. So if you find something on here that you do really like as a look as a style, then you can go ahead and start to apply that to all your instagram images if you want. So you have that consistent feel and you have that consistent look. Of course, there are other ways to do this if you know other programs like photo shop or light room or whatever. But if you're working within Canada and you're exporting images from here. And you want to have a consistent look, you can start to use these filters. Now, here's what I want to point out to you. If you have to come in and do this selfie thing every time, you may not want this exact look, so you may dial the intensity up and down. Well, what if I want to be able to really customize it, but then be able to repeat that? Let me just show you. If you jump from filters here over to adjust, you'll notice that whenever you're dialling of in a filter here, all you're really doing is dialling of set of presets that are these things here brightness , contrast, saturation, tint, blur, X process and vignette. So take a look at these sliders. I'm just gonna reset all these sliders. Zero. You'll notice my photo goes back to looking as it originally did. Now, if I go under filter and I just choose his epic preset Now watch what happens when I come back to adjust. All of these have been adjusted. So these are actually the settings that make up that adjust preset, right, so you can use any filter as a starting point. But then you can come in here and individually tinker these things to get a look that you really enjoy and that you really like. Now, as I drag any filter, keep an eye. What happens down here? This filter code, this filter code is changing to represent the exact settings that I have right here. So if I customize something and then I really like what I did, you can actually copy this. So go ahead. Select that. Copy that. Now I have that on my clipboard. You can save this somewhere. You can put this code within a camp. A document if you want. But then any time if I reset this any time, if I have a new photo and I'm in here and I want that same look, I just come down here, control a to highlight that Control V and I'm pasting back in my code so you can use this filter code if you have a custom look that you want to be able to replicate again and again . So again, with the photo highlighted, you have all these filter options along here. Also, the ability of the crop ability to flip vertically, horizontally. Excuse me. Um but so you have all those options and so you can really do a lot with your photos once you have a photo within your design. A couple things I haven't mentioned. So you have these other options up to the right. So one is just here the transparency so you can adjust the transparency of this If you want to be partly see through. You can use this if you want to turn it into a hyperlink. And so then if I paste the URL into here, that will be embedded into this document. So if I downloaded as a PdF or something like that, then this is gonna be clickable. And anybody that clicks on this is going to go to the euro or the website that you link. So this is really, really beneficial if you're creating stuff like lead magnets or other giveaways where you want to get people back to your landing page back to your website. This lock button here If you lock that that all it really does is see, Now I try to select this photo I could no longer selected. So if you have a photo in your design and its position exactly like you want. And you've made all the changes you want. You can go ahead and use that lock button, and then the only thing that's gonna show up here is the lock button until you unlock it. And then once you unlock it, then you have all these options again. That's just the way of safeguarding a part of your design as you go. So you have that lock button right here. Copy does exactly what you think it does. Now there's a second copy of that, so highlight that I'll delete it. But you can make copies if you want to make copies. And the position thing. Ah, that really comes into play. If you have multiple elements. Well, actually, it's not true, because let me scale this down. If I scaled this into position here and then I go into position, you can align it to the top to the bottom, the middle. So you're aligning to the page here. The one thing I will point out is that you do have multiple if you have multiple images, so let me make this a little smaller, and then I'm gonna create a copy, and I'll just throw the copy up here. Now, if you highlight multiple images of ones, then this position is gonna work a little better. Ah, little different. Excuse me. So under position now, I'm not aligning to the page. I'm lining the elements to each other. Ah, so if I do left the line, there's gonna be a line there. If I do middle line that same size, we're just going to snap together. Let me doozy to get out of that controls e un does a keyboard. Ah, keystroke that you just did. So control C Control V. It's another way to copy. So now I have three. I'm gonna make all these a little smaller, and I'm just going to show you one more thing. So again, the align position functions work a little different, based on whether you're lying to a page or lighting multiple elements. So now if I do position now, you can see that I could space these evenly, vertically or horizontally. So if I click that now you see now is an even amount of white space there and there. What if I want a position on evenly, horizontally. He could do that. You can snap him. Also. They align bottom edges, right? And then I can separate amount and same thing. Highlight him again, come under position. And maybe I want to try something different. The line, the centers. Okay, these to snap together cause they were right on top of each other. But let me do it again. Here, Position center. So you have all these different options that are really going to help you when you're creating a design and you want to come in there and you do positioning. And again, I'm showing you this example with photos. But this works for pretty much all desired elements. So this positioning trick is really helpful when you're creating any design, whether it be icons or anything photos. So just know that that is there, and one last thing I'll mention is again with all these highlighted, Then you can group things which I can do by clicking his group button there and then I can UN group. And when you have things group that just means that if you click on any one of them, they're all gonna be selected and they're all gonna move together and they're gonna move is one doctor one item and act as one item until yet that I'm good on group button. Right? And this will work for shapes and other things when you have other things in your design to . But if I highlight those again Ah, you also use control G. So control G does the same thing that's gonna group, um, ship control, G. That's gonna be the UN group shortcut. So again, the ability that group items is really going to come into play when you start to get into more advanced templates and you're really trying to keep things organized. So no, that that exists. I think we've pretty much covered everything and beyond that, you can do with photos and some of the things the positioning in the grouping that applies beyond photos, DEP applies to elements, other things part to design texting. He can group text with photos, etcetera, etcetera. So we're gonna move on now and we're gonna get into the other thing, were to go to elements next and then text. So I will see you in the next upcoming lessons 33. 5 - Grids, Frames, Shapes, and Gradients: theme this lesson. We will be talking all about the elements tab within the project interface. Okay, so a new project open. And here I am under the Elements tab. Now, in the Elements Tab, you're gonna find grids, charts, frames, shapes, Grady, INTs, lines, illustrations and on and on and on. So it may feel a little overwhelming when you first open this. But really, what are you looking at here? Mostly you are looking at vector artwork. So another worth one We were looking at photos, photos or roster artwork. So a roster images based up based on individual pixels, illustrations or vector artwork. They are based on a mathematical equation, so you can scale those all you want. And you're never going to get any picks. Elation with a ah vector image roster image of your scale. It you're gonna start to see the pixels of eventually gets too big. But with these illustrations and roster images, excuse me. Keep saying that with these illustrations and vector images, you're not gonna have any picks. Elation, So really cool. So you have things like radiance, and then you have other illustration things like here just icon sets which is really cool line elements which might be good in your design. So basically, you have all these little things that might be good elements within your design. And then the other thing you'll find within here or grades in frames and there really a separate category. Grades and frames are really ways to control the positioning off these photos and other things and other design elements within your design. You're gonna learn best by example. So let's just jump in here and look at some of this stuff and look at how it works. Okay, let's start by looking at grids. So if I want expand grades, I can hit this all button here, and it's gonna take me into all those grids. And then again, you're seeing this filtered view appear for ever. Want to get back to elements? I can click on it over here, or you can also just click that. And now that filters going around back, looking at the whole thing. Alright, someone jump back in the Great because we do want to look at grids and it's gonna bring me up these varieties of grits. Now this cloud landscape image you're seeing, that's just sort of the placeholder icon to let you know this is a grid. This is a placeholder where you can play something. So if I drag went out my design, it's gonna by default fill the whole screen that screen there. But you can also drag from the corner and you can change this toe any size you want. Now, if you shift while you're glad dragged, then you are constraining to proportions and it's just gonna resize by those proportions. So let's just take this great, and we will position it in the middle there and then Now what I have here is a placeholder as part of my design, where I can add in any other elements. So these placeholders air really valuable just when you're trying different photos or different elements, because then you can quickly drag and drop in different things. So if I want to try this photo, just drag, wait till it snaps to my grid and then put it in there, drag and drop something else. So again, this is just a building block, an element that gives you a placeholder within your design where you can add an image. Now if you come in. You dragged by this Centrepoint or by these corner points you are re sizing the grid. If you want to resize the photo within the grid, then you have to double click. So I'm gonna come on a photo here and I'm going to double click. And now you'll see where I can see the bounds of my photo. And so if I want to expand my photo within here, I can do that so I can reposition it. I can move it over here. Hit, enter! So again now, if I wanted to resize migrant, I could drag it down now noticed As you drag it down I'll hit shifts just to constrain proportions as you do. The photo is re sizing within the grid as I drag it down. Maybe you want to do that? Maybe you don't. Maybe the idea is the crop in here more on this girl. So again, if I double click then I'm within here. Then I can come in here and I can resize my photo position it back in here. Hit! Enter to lock in your changes. So again it works much the way we saw photos work in the mission in the initial ah, video that we did on the photos tab. But now, within this grid, basically what you have, it's this place holder where you can then and you can come and you can drag in other ones. So again, these grades are just placeholders for your images, and it's really just another building block to use as part of your design. Usually you're not just gonna have agreed you're gonna have a combined with other elements . So, for example, I may drag this up here, and I may want to bring some text in. So maybe I have some text that I want to be part of miso designed. So let me just drag that over and then let me just scale that down a little bit and then I want it centered here. So wait until it's centered. And then maybe I'm gonna group these two things together, and then I can move those together, and I can position it may be centered in screen like that. So, again, these air just building blocks that are part of your design. So let's go back and let's look at some of the other options under that grade. So money back under elements and back under these grades here. So let's just see. I'm gonna delete this one for now. We can leave the text on here. We want to, but so you have lots and lots of different ones. And so, by default, the one you think I think you're going to use the most is the single grid. But you also have other ones here where you have multiple elements together again. By the fall, it's gonna wanna fill your whole screen, which maybe you want to do. But also maybe you don't. So if you re position that year, then now you have this double great here. And if I go back under photos now, let's see, I'm adding a photo to this and I'm dropping something over to this. So obviously I would think more about my design. I'm just dropping things in as example here. But you see, you have all these different ones to choose from. Now, the reason why I think that single grade is going to be the one you use the most. Just because it gives you more flexibility. You have this great here. Ah, but you may want to be able to totally customize it, but so the one thing I will say is you can make some adjustments to double grades like this . So if I come up here now, any time you have anything selected, you're going to see the options up in this. I like to call this the options bar that remember these things over here are universal, like the transparency, the positioning, Whether it's a hot link out to something else, you can lock elements. But remember everything to the left is sort of specific to what's working in the grid right now. So we remember this from photos. We have things like filters. You can do adjustments like this so I can still apply all that stuff to the photos. But if I want to make actual adjustments to the spacing on a grid, I now have this spacing option since there within a grid. This is because this is a grid. I have this additional spacing option, and so now if I do like this and I start to drag out, I am adjusting the spacing between those frames we saw, Ah that I added to to to the design now again, you can do it that way. But I think it's just a ZZ oftentimes, oftentimes easier to just actually drag in a single grid. Go ahead and size it down to whatever you want. And then if I want another one, I can just copy. And I can just piece that or whatever it's gonna come in. And then I can position however I want. And then I can drag these together and position them right there in the center. So again, they're usually multiple ways to do the same thing. But I think with grades, this single grade is gonna be the one that you use the most. I know it's the one I use the most. But sometimes, if you know you want to do a collage of images or you know you want a specific thing, you can check out these other grades as well. There are lots and lots of options, so I think you have the idea of grades. Let's move on to see what other things we have in here under elements. So again, if I click this to get rid of the filter view now, I am back in here you have grades. Let's talk about frames because grits and frames are pretty close to the same thing. I mean, frames work the exact same way with their placeholders. I think the difference is with frames you have all these different interesting shapes, and so you sort of have some of the areas air mask out. So if I just bring this up here and then I go back to our photo now, I'm just adding it into the circle there. So, greats and frames, you can think of them as pretty much the same thing. But with grid, Sometimes you have multiple grids snap together, but they really are the straight rectangle grids. If you come in under frames, then you start to get all these really interesting shapes where suddenly you're doing something that's a little bit more artistic. Let me delete those other elements, and then you see with frames. Look at that. That's pretty cool. So under frames, check him out there. A lot of interesting shapes and it is, could be a cool part of your design. If you're looking for more of the straight rectangle thing, then you're gonna find that under grid so greats and frames, I think they're pretty similar. But they get called and labeled separately here within the elements tab. And so let me go ahead and close out of that. And let's just look at some of the other items in here shapes. I think that's pretty self explanatory. Of course. Ah, you can drag in a shape and then you can reposition your shape. Now, sometimes the shapes will come in with these border effects here. So let me go ahead and do that. And when you bring in a shape like this or something that has multiple colors or border like this, then you're going to see color swatches up here for each and every part of the element that you brought in here. So I know this green is his border color. So if I want to come up here and I change that, I can change that to a yellow. Now, down here, this is my other color. So if I want to come up here and I'm gonna change that to a darker gray, I can do that. So just know when you drag in shapes, oftentimes you can still, you know, change what they look like. You can send them to the back right by using your control bracket keys or another way to send things in the bag. If I do this here, let's see if I do this position here. Okay, so I think I have to do it here. So forward year, I can click that forward since it's already the back. So you do have little keys here, but it also shows you control plus plus brackets. That's really the easiest way to do it. Once you learn to simple shortcuts, so you have your shapes. And then any time you bring in artwork like this, and as a multiple colors, you have the ability to go in and you can change. Ah, sort of the different instances of the color when it selected. You're gonna add that up here in the options bar. But there are lots and lots and lots of different options in here, So whenever you're not sure, you can always come up here and sure in search. So we saw heart shaped star shapes. If you wanted to see just star shaped, you could do a search like that and then suddenly you'd be bringing up all that vector artwork right here. So that's kind of a handy feature. And there are lots and lots of options. So if you have something that you need in the design, you very well may have a good free option here within the elements tab within your project interface. Alright, Close out this filter view here and back out here. So you have Grady ants. Grady INTs are pretty self explanatory. So much every grating in here and selected. You can just adjust either of the grating colors up here so I can change that to that color if I want. If I want to change the other color, I can come in here and change it off course. You're not the limited to just the colors you see right here you can use this little plus icon, and then suddenly you can drag to change the hue. And if you want to change the saturation of the intensity year up and down on here so you can easily come in here and create cool custom radiance, which is pretty cool, cause radiance can be a nice part of your design. If it's so. Look, you're going for so you could do that. And so the other thing I'll say is you can crop in if you want it to be a little bit more heavy to the other side. Ah, you could do something like that and you can crop in on go ahead and click done. But so once you've cropped something and changes the mentions, let me just say is another option here is flip. So if I come in here and flip, this is one of wanted to say Once you flip vertically or horizontally, then you lose that ability to crop right. It has to be for whatever reason, at that original thing. So if I flip it back and I flip it back, then suddenly have that crop thing. If I want to bring it back out to the full proportions, I can go and do that. So that's just one of the little quirks there. If you want to have that crop option, you have to be on the original orientation. Once you flip it, then you lose that ability of the crop. Okay, so that's Grady INTs. Let's move on. But you know what? I'm gonna maybe go ahead and end this lesson here. And then we'll have a elements part two in the next section just cause we're getting a little long. So I'll see you in the next lesson and we'll talk about the rest of the things you have year under the elements tap. 34. 5 - Lines, Illustrations, Icons, and Charts: way continuing on, we left off the last lesson. Let's continue and look at the other elements available under the elements tab in the project window. So here we are in Let's look at the other option so line so you can drag out a variety of lines of I click all we'll bring those up on the screen. And so I'm gonna drag out a couple here just because I want to find one that's different, because I know you have some that are different. So, for example, Okay, this you can't see because the color is white. Let's change at the black. So you're gonna have some elements in here that you can Onley, resize proportionately like this. You're gonna have other elements where you can drag in this way. So just know some of them are gonna have this sort of central handle and others are not. But so for ones like this, if I wanted to resize Aiken go down like this, But then there's really no way to make that a thin line like that because I can't drag it back out. So you're gonna find some elements, behave a little differently than other others It just depends on what format the file has been uploaded in and all that stuff behind the scenes. But for once where you do have this central handle, let's say I want this to be the same width on screen. I wanted to cover the whole screen, but I wanted to be a thinner line. So for that a good trick to Noah's. You first want to drag in until you get to the width of line you want, and then you're going to use this handle and then drag out that way. So that's just helpful to know that you wanted to first get the with divine you want, and then I should say the thickness of the line you want, and then you can drag it out to the actual with on screen that you want. So same thing here. If I wanted this to be bigger or smaller, first do that and then come in and control the size, right? So once you get very thin like this, it might be hard to see those corner handles. They should still be there. So if I go to 300% something like that and I come in. Now there's that handle, and so sometimes you may have to just zoom in a little title if you only start to see the central line and you can no longer see those corner points. So if I wanted to go ahead and use those corner points, I could do that. And I could start to use this to make the line bigger. So making the line bigger of making the line bigger, right? And then if you get a with you want, then you can resize. So just know that little trick there that first, when you're dealing with lines, if they have this central point again, some may not. But if they have the central point first you want to resize to the thicknesses. You want thickness that you want, and then you can spread things out on screen the way you want. And if you ever get something where you start to lose these because you're just in so tight , then you can used assume to get in and out. And then, of course, I usually reset it to fit or fill. Once I'm back and I want to work in my project where I can see everything on screen at once , so that's lines. I'll just due to a control, a delete to get those off the screen. And then let's quit back out here and then some of the other things on here. Lines, illustrations. Okay, so illustrations You can add illustrations of the good all there's all manner of things in here. I'll point out the same thing I did with lines. So for some of these illustrations, you're going to see the different colors. And if you want to come in and change individual colors within their you can do that. You're just clicking on the color, selecting a new color again. You can come in here if you want to control the actual color. Ah, and saturation and other things. You can make all those adjustments in here. You don't have to choose just from these pallets. And again if you have the pro account and you have different palates stored. This is where you can come in here. It will redirect your over to your brand kit, and then within your brand kit, you can actually load these pallets over and have them access accessible in your workspace so that is a cool feature of the pro account if you work a lot with colors. But again, there are other tricks where you can get color. So I wouldn't worry about it so much if you don't. But let's move on from here just to talk about this firm, or I just want to point out like lines. They're not all going to behave exactly the same because it does depend on the uploaded graphic. So again, if I drag out this popcorn here, you see with this graphic, I don't have the individual colors to choose from. Right? So some of these illustrations aren't behaving like true vector graphics where I do not have the individual colors. So just know it's sort of gonna be a mixed bag when you load something on screen. Look for something that has these colors, because then you really do have more freedom and adjusting your design and the other thing you are going to be stuck with the colors that come on screen. Ah, most of them will be like this, though, so don't worry, you will run into some like that, but I would not let that trouble you too much. And so the other thing that's just to point out right now you see free. It's sorting by free items. You can toggle that on and off. If I talked with that off now it's showing the free and premium items. So again, if you have a premium item over in your design, you're going to see this watermark. That means it is something that you do have to pay for. And so if you keep that premium element in your design and then you go to download, then you will see that it is going to charge you a dollar or whatever the charges for that premium image. So just know if you choose something that says Premium and then you have it in your design when you go to DeLaet, download it. You will have to pay for that for Houston. That design If you want to use that image, all right, go ahead and delete that. Now one of Alito's jump back out here under illustrations and so below illustrations, you start to have icons and all these different sets of images and hear icons are really helpful because in here you can search for things like Instagram if I can type instagram and so you can really easily find free social media icons and things like that where you can come in here, you can do this. You can adjust the color and style and other things. If you want something that's branded in your color to be on your website, you confined graphics in here very easily. There lots and lots and lots of options. Now let me jump back over here. Ah, I'm gonna jump back out out of this. Icons then below this, you have all this stuff that is sort of sorted by category. That's nice. But I mean, really, I would just recommend at this point coming up here and just searching for what you want. You're gonna save a lot of time versus going down here in all these categories unless one of these categories, like education and science, is really specific to the project you're working on. If you're working on some project and there really is a category in here that really makes sense, then sure go down in there. But otherwise just do a startup year. If you know specifically what you want and you will save a lot of time, so that pretty much covers everything that didn't hear The one thing that I will mention that I did not mention left That is a little different that we haven't covered yet. Are these charts. So let me delete this and let me drag over charts. Now, you may never, ever use this feature or maybe a well, I'm just gonna point it out because it is different from the static images we've been looking at before. The charts are kind of cool because they are dynamic charts that will change on the fly based on data. So when you drag this out on the screen, you'll see by the fault you have this date of you here. However, if I come over here, let me just try toe get rid of that. So you ever lose that date of you? Just come up here with the chart selected, click on Edit and it'll again bring up that data view. And then if you come in here and you change these values, then you're going to see that value change on Reid in real time on screen. And you can even come in here and you can even add more columns. So if I wanted another one, let's give that a value of 70. You could do that, or you can also come in here and you just start to delete items where if I delete this item , it's gonna change what's on the chart. So you do have these charts. You can even paste in data, and there are all kinds of charges. There's bar charts, has doughnut charts. So if you want to have simple chart graphics, it is pretty cool, because you can customize them with your own value. So you have charts that actually make sense and go along with the data you're presenting, so just know that's there. It's a cool option. Maybe you never use it, but maybe you do. And maybe it's helpful. All right, so I'm just gonna jump back out here now. I think that pretty much covers it. We're gonna move on from here, so just know, under this Elements tab, you have the fundamental things that we talked about in the last lesson, like grids and frames that are going to placeholders for other elements of your design. Then you have these other things in here like lines and shapes that might be part of your design. And then, of course, you have all these different illustration and icon sets, which might be part of design and can be helpful. So all those things found under the elements tab in your project interface. 35. 5 - Working with Text in Canva: in this lesson, we're gonna be talking about working with text inside of Camba. So any time you open a new project by this fault, you will be in this templates tap here. Ah, And when you're working in any project, if you want to just work on the project and you want a bit more room, you can collapse that tap here and you have a little bit more workspace. Of course, Now we want to click on this text tap here because we're talking all about this text tab within this lesson. So once you open up that text tab, you're going to see your brain styles up here at the top. And that's if you have a camp a pro account. If you have a regular free account, you're not STD's brain styles. You're just going to see default styles up here at the top and then below that, you're going to see all these different font combinations, which are all these different presets that give you starting points off things you may want to use in your project. Of course, you can also just add a heading at a subheading at a little bit of body text all on its own . You don't have to use these presets down here, but they make a good starting point sometimes. So you get to know your way around here and see what is available. Now, any time I want to add one of these little presets here, I can drag it over like this and let me delete that, so the first way would just be to drag it over. But easier way I find is just actually, just click on it, click on it, and then it's going to go ahead and populate over there. I'll delete that one again, and the other thing you would be able to do We just hit T O on your keyboard and T is the keyboard shortcut for text box. And so when you tap T, it's going to drop a default text box there into your design. We'll just go ahead and get rid of that text box real quick, though selected and get rid of it. I only bring one of these oh other ones back in here real quick. The other thing, I wanted to point out is that when you do have a text box in here that along with your brand styles up here, you will also see these documents styles. And it's going to give you the particular styles which you currently have in your ah design here, which is very handy because a lot of times when you're using text in your design, you're going to stick with a couple fonts. And if you add other elements in here, ah, you're gonna try to be consistent and use the same sort of style. So if I have this in here now, if I just click this here that it's going to bring in another text box that uses that exact size style fun. So it's helpful that when you populate something in here Van does document styles go right to the top of your design here, so just very convenient, and it just really helps to speed up the work flow. When working with a lot of text inside of a single document and what you have text in your document, you can select it just like you would any other element where you click directly on it. Now if you double click or if you click inside of a text box, usually up to double click. Then you'll be in there where you can actually come in there and edit your text. But again, you can click on it and it'll go ahead and will select that. Sometimes when you bring in these pre made elements, they are grouped so you can still get with anything. Ah, particular element, even when it's grouped. You can still come in there by clicking on that particular element and making changes. But you can also UN group. If something comes in, that's grouped, and you want to move those elements around by themselves again. A lot of these pre made things will come in as a group. And then if you wanted them to move separately, you're gonna go ahead out the in, group them, or you can just leave him grouped if that's what works for you. But just pay attention when you bring something in here and notice whether it is grouped up here or on grouped. Okay, so I'll just go ahead and I will just drag around all of this, just looked at all and delete it. Ah, and then I just wanted to point out that you have these search text box over here. So just like when you're in under any of these tabs, you have the ability to search rather than this scroll down. This way, if you know what you're looking for and you don't want to just scroll in search, scroll in search. You can type something into the search box here and try to return results that meets your needs. So when you first start working in here, you might not quite be sure what sort of things you want to search for. Well, here's a little helpful. Tip tip. If you use thes three dots up to the right, then you'll start to see all the keywords Associate ID with that particular block of text so you can see this one is a minimalist, that it's also quote. And if I do one over here, you can see regular love. February 14th Valentine's Day. So you have all these different things at all these different keywords associated with each block of text. And then if you return something, search for something, it'll return anything that has the keyword. So, for example, quotes, quotes could be definitely something that you were trying to create a graphic with or you wanted to have quotes within your document. So just by searching for quote, I get all of these really cool results. And so then I could do something with any of these and these air great pre made styles and some saving a lot of time by just finding something that looks really good that somebody spent some time designing. It's ready to go for me, and I don't have to think about it. So through one like that, of course, once you're in here, you can still re size If I drag the Ault key as I drag out, if I hold the all Kia's I drag out, that would be option on the Mac. Then it will resize from the center out. So it's really cool coming here. Experiment around. If you're not sure what sorts of things search for, come under here and you'll start to get these little ideas so you can sort search by things like quotes, minimalists or for maybe a particular theme. So we saw the one in here was Valentine's Day, but let's see what happens if I type in something like Christmas, see if that returns any results. So yeah, you see that? That call does come up with some particular results and so you'll just have to experiment around in here when it comes to searching and see the types of things you can return, I may just go ahead and clear all this out right now. And, of course, a lot of the times you're not going to be searching for anything at all because you're just gonna be adding your own text and your own styles to the document. So you're not gonna always be using these presets. They can be helpful for certain designs, but a lot of times you're just gonna be adding in heading subheadings in your own body text . So I'll go ahead and add one. And now I'll just resize that a little bit. And now that we've talked about searching over here for particular elements and having your document styles and your brain styles, let's just talk about the options that exist once you're working with a particular block of text here within can. So, with this selected as is the case with all the different elements in Canada, you have these universal options over here in this options bar up to the right. These are the ones that always apply. So again, things like transparency. You can duplicate something to create a copy. Let's see if I can grab and move that now and then. Of course, you also have things like position. So if I position if I have one thing selected, then it's gonna position it based on the page. And if I have multiple things selected like this, let me actually move one of these over multiple things selected and then you do position than its positioning Ozaki those objects relative to each other. So if I wanted a left the line, I would just use that position in command there. So just remember, all these things apply when you have your text selected. Same options you have with any element are the universal options up here. Copy style. If you had something where you had, let's just show you that, for example, real quick. So I'll make take this font here. I'm gonna make it smaller. I will let me make it bigger, too, so it's better option for us to see here. I'll make it bigger, so it's easier for us to see, and I'll come in here and I'll change the color. So I'll go something like that. And this Oswald fought is our font. Let me change that, too, something different. So choose this fun here, and I'll make it bold. So if you wanted to copy style, then if I came in here and I use this little roller for copy style and then I came down here and just with that clicked right on that, then it's going to go ahead. And it's going to take all the elements of that style, the size, the color he fought, whether it's bold and it's gonna immediately apply that you have this little roller tool that comes into play for copying a style and applying it to another block of text. These other options up here still apply transparency of something we mentioned. You can add a hyperlink to something, and if I lock something down, then I can select it. But I can no longer drag it and move it. So you have something. We have the positioning of the way you want it and you want to protect it. You can protect it that way, but we've talked about these universal options before. So let's talk about these options. Unwto left to the left, which are specific to text. So again, everything that loads to the right here is universe virtual options for different elements . Now, for specific elements, you get thes specific options, appear to the left. So for texts, of course, we have the font that you're choosing. You have the font size, you have the font color, whether it's bold or not, italics or underline. And not all fonts are necessarily gonna have all these options here. But bold italics underline are often going to be options. And then, of course, over here you can control the alignment and then whether it's capital or upper capital or lower case letters Ah, if you want to do a bullet is list and then here the spacing. Now we're gonna go in real quick. I'm gonna look at all these and just a little bit more detail just to make sure you really understand all the font choices you have. All these stylistic choices you have within can vote when working with text. We just select all of this on screen real quick and delete it so Let's get rid of that. Select and delete. I wasn't Let me delete it all because I forgot I had this lock. So be able to lead it. Have to unlock. So they're unlocked now. I can delete everything over here. I'm just going to search for a pair of paragraph. I think I want something that has some paragraph text in it. All right, so it doesn't return a lot, but it did give me one that will work for this example. And so here that all this is group I'm just go ahead and ungroomed pit for the moment here . Ah, so also, like this stop portion here. And so, of course, with that selected appear to the left, you have your font choices. And if you're under the paid account, it's gonna show your brand fonts. So just like they load in the big display to the left, they load here. If you've uploaded fonts, they're going to see here and again these air both elements of paid can va. So you're not gonna have that summer the free brand. But under the paid brand, all your brand fonts and uploaded funds are right here at the top and easily easy to to access. And then you have a long, long list of fonts. And, of course, the ones with the crown. Here are ones that are only on the ah paid canvas. So with pay can be, you do get even more font options. But even with the free can value have lots and lots off font options as it chews up here in the search bar, you can try to filter this as well, so calligraphy opens on. So if I did something like sons Sarif, it would attempt to return all the songs to re fonts for me. And, of course, those are the ones that don't have the little curly style elements. So I just did Serie fonts get rid of those and do that search. Then we start to see fonts that do have those more decorative elements and there so you can filter that way by doing a search up top off course. I think what's most helpful was just to eventually have your most recent in your your favorite fonts. Load here at the top, but you can really spend time searching down through here and just click on a new font if you want to try it. So as I click this, you can see that my selected objects, which is my headline over here, is going to change as I make the choices over here and on the fly, you'll see that new fund. So it's really easy to come here and trying new fonts right there. And of course, the next block over is just your font size so you can make things smaller. You can make things bigger, so that's really easy as well. And of course, you have numbers in here where they have 36 to 42. But if you wanted something in between there, all you have to do is just double click up here to highlight and then type in thes specific font size you want. You can even put fractional values in here, which can be helpful. Sometimes when you're really trying to align something, exactly. So just keep in mind, you can type in up here. It doesn't have to be one of the values that you actually find in this list. Go ahead and type in your own values. If you have something really specific that you want to put in there. I am. So go ahead. Make this a little bit bigger against that will bring that back quite that much. We'll bring it back. So it's Ah, big again. And so then we have that. And then, of course, here is the text color. So again, here you can choose any one of colors here. If you have your brand colors up top there really easy to access and you can click on this new color. And then from within here, you can choose any color you want along the spectrum. Here. Ah, course. As you come in here, you start to fool with the lightness values and then the saturation eso you can come in here and you can fool around as much as you want and get the exact color you want. And of course, if you know the hex codes, you can always type the hex codes. And here, Or if you search up here, you can search by hex codes. It's automatically gonna find that color next three blocks up here are pretty ex self explanatory. So they have the bold, whether it's bold or not. Italics. Whether you want to be in italics whether you want it underlined there. And then this next one box here is just the alignment. Let me actually jump down to these text block here for the alignment so we can see a little bit more clearly. So you have alignment, you have left aligned, you have center aligned, you can write a line something, and the last one, which is actually relatively new in Cuba, is you can now totally justify something where it's left and right aligned. So, no, you have all those options here for alignment and will go on to the next thing here, which is just uppercase versus lower case. So if you want to quickly change something from all from lower case to all uppercase, it's pretty handy. One click option appear. Course, you can change it back just as easily. Now bulleted lists a bulleted lists. Let me just come down here and I'll actually put in a new text box for this. So let me just do that for a second, and I'm just gonna add a subheading year and let me just bring that down here, okay? So we want to make this a little bit bigger So let me put it something like this, so we can see it. I'll get at the front of this here. Actually, let me just start by just go ahead, selecting it and then clicking up here. This lets you do a bulleted list. So it's gonna put that bullet point there in the front. And then, of course, if you come to the end and start adding new lines, any time you add a new line, it's going to go ahead and put in the text. And of course, you still have to do things like a line thing. So I don't think that you'd want a list like this that was left the line. Excuse me? That was center aligned, so I would just go ahead and left the line it like that. So it looks a little bit better. So we've covered just about everything in here. But one thing we have not covered is this spacing. We covered everything else. So the spacing. If you click on that with anything selected, you can control the letter spacing, right. So you're just adding or diminishing the amount of space that you have between letters and the other thing is you're lying height like that. And then the other thing is your anchor text box. Now, your anchor text boxes, maybe one of the things that's the more confusing and you're not necessarily gonna understand right out the box right out of the box. So if you don't understand how this works, let me give you example. That's gonna make it really obvious, and you can see why it might be useful. All right, so let me first just give ourselves the clean work space. So I'm gonna go ahead and get rid of all this right here, some zoo, and add a heading in here, and then I will use this anchor point to resize it. I don't know if I mentioned that before, but any time you want to resize your text, you just grab one of these corner points here. And you can also just resize using those corner points. And when you do that, whatever point you grab its anchoring the text in the opposite corner. So if I were to grab this here, then you can see that it's anchoring the text over here so you can resize using these corner points and If you actually want to resize the text box itself, then you can do these little side things and it's gonna drag it in and force it to expand downward like that. Okay, so the one option we have not talked about yet let me select this again. Is this spacing here? We've talked about the letter in the line height but this anchor text box. So if you look at these icons here by the fault, it comes in with this one selected. So it looks like a line and then a down arrow, this one a line up and down this one a line and up. And so let me show you how this works because this may not come into play. But it also is something that it'll drive you crazy if you miss set this and you don't understand how it's working. So with that 1st 1 if I come to the end of the line and I hit enter notice The de text box just expands downward. So my tech stays in place and the box just expands downwards. Alright, A little backspace here. Let's come. The changes spacing. Let's set it to the second option, which is an up and down arrow. So now with that selected if I hit, enter now notice that the box itself extends up and down. So my Texas moving because as I hit, enter the box is re sizing both at the top in the bottom. And so that's because I have this center option here. So this option is really telling canvas how the text box will resize when you add a new line. So last option here. If I do this and select this one now, this text box is gonna expand upward. So as I do this and hit, enter my text moves upward because it's still gonna put the text below the next line below . But you've told it by anchoring the text box here that you wanted anchored at the bottom. So if you're hitting, enter to resize the text box by adding another line, then it's going to continue to expand upwards. So don't let that trip you up. Make sure you understand everything in here about the options working with texts and especially that spacing that anchor text box that could be a little confusing until you understand what it's doing. So that is text in Camba. Make sure you understand all the options and I'll see you in the next lesson. 36. 5- Uploads and Folders: in this lesson. We're talking about the uploads tab within the camp. A project window. So I have the project open, and templates is the current taps. I will just jump over to these upload taps right here. Now, in this tab, you can open and close this left side here as you can with any tab, and then just have to bring it back open. But so when it's open, you're just going to see all of the images you have previously upload, and they show up in order of recency you. So your most recent uploads air here. And then if you scroll down, you can see older and older uploads. And then, of course, you have the upload image button right here. Now, remember that if you have the pro version of camera, then you have a few more options because you can also organize within folders. But first, let's go ahead and upload a few images just to see how that works. Someone tap on the uploaded image, and then, from this nature folder here, I will just grab one or few these. Now you can upload multiple images at a time, so if you shift click, you'll select a whole bunch of images. You can also just control, click and pick just the images you want to upload. So if I control, click on a ladybug and then on this I will upload both of those images since they're highlighted and it be command click on the Mac. So I'm gonna upload these two images and I'll go ahead and click open. And then once I click open, I'm gonna see the thumbnail here. And then this blue line is just a progress line showing me how it uploads. So how long it takes is gonna depend on the size of the image and your Internet connection . But it shouldn't take too long unless you have really big files or really bad connection. But OK, so these are uploaded already. And so once they're uploaded, you can just click on them and they will populate here just the way anything else does template or anything else. Just click once and it will show up in your project. And, of course, once it's over here, you can reposition. You can resize. So all the normal stuff that we've learned that that you expect Ah, but let's talk about folders and how you can farther. Organize this if you have the pro version. Now remember, we talked about one of the differences between free Camba and pro Camera is the number of folders that you get Now. You do get to folders with the free version, but those air designed folders so those air for design projects. So I suppose you could start a project and put photos within that project and store photos that way. But that might not be the most effective way to organize your photos. Ah, but also, it's not a huge deal. Maybe because maybe you just keep all your stuff organized on your local computer. And so it's not a big deal of having toe upload assets every time you have a new project. I do that a lot anyways, because a lot of times I've just taken the pictures I'm gonna use. So they're already down on my hard drive or my computer and I have to upload in many ways. But if you do have the pro version, you do have this farther ability to organize your photos within photo folders because with the pro version, you get unlimited design folders and unlimited photo folders, so let's see how that works. So when you're hovering over any image here, just like when you hover over design project, you see these three dots and any time you see those three dots just basically tells you you have another sub menu more options if you click on that. So go ahead and click on that. And then once I do that, I have the option of to delete. If I just want to get rid of this image, I can download the original. And so maybe if you upload from one computer and then you're working on a different computer and you want to download, that might be helpful. And then also, I can just move to another folder. So this is where the organization comes into play, and again, you will not have this option under the free version. But the paid version you will have that. So if I click that, then I can go ahead and I can choose any of my folders and I can move that photo. Move that photo to that folder now. You can also create a new folder here on the fly just one word of warning I have noticed, especially if you work on a computer with not the best connection. Sometimes there is just a little bit of elapse between creating a new folder and seeing that or adding a photo to a folder. And seeing that So I like to have established folders and then add to those established folders. But if you create something on the fly like this, just no, every now and then there is a time delay, and you may not instantly see that folder in that photo Butts. Let's just try. So select a folder on Nick Chooses, Create New and I'm gonna name this new one nature and then I'll go ahead and hit Enter, or you can click the add two new folder button, and so it disappears whenever you create a folder or add something to a folder. The photo that you at that folder is going to disappear from this upload section, and then if you ever go conversely and you delete that folder by deleting a folder, you're not deleting the images within that folder. They just come back here toe under this upload stab, so let's click on the folder now and see if we're having that time delay. Well, I see a nature folder, but it does say zero photos, so let me just click. Okay, so it's in there. So you see, there was that little lapse, and it didn't immediately recognize it, but it is in here. So just know that sometimes you will have a slight time lapse when you create a photo on the fly. But this does work, and it is a good way to organize your photos. So let me just jump back to the photos tab. Now excuse me to the uploads tap, and I'm gonna go to this upload stab, and I will choose this one here. And I want to put that in my nature folder already, which would show up here now. No again. Says zero photos. So sometimes there is a lapse and it updating the metadata. But we know we have one in there, so go ahead and add this one as well disappeared from here. But if I come under my folders menu says one now. But I bet there too, if I click See, they're both in there, so it is kind of cool have all these sub folders, and then if you're under the uploads and then you just can see your other filled folders here or if you go under this folders tab, you start to see all your folders, and the one thing I'll say it sometimes is. This gets longer. Sometimes you won't see all your foot folders at once. You have to click a little button here that says, See all folders, So just know. Sometimes it might be hidden farther down in this menu, but you will see all your photo folders here. And so it's a great way to organize and then click within a folder and then see a subset of your images. So it is a good way to stay organized now, of course, if I jumped back here just to the home screen, you can also get to your folders here just from the home screen. And so if I go under this now again, I'll start toe look, and I don't instantly see it. But again remember, sometimes there's that lapse or you don't instantly see it. So let me just try hitting the refresh button. Since I just created this and see now it says show one more. I'm not seeing it, but it says show one more. So they click that There it is right here. And there are my photos within that folder. Okay, so let me just go back and step back here for a second. And so you can imagine that you might be a good way to keep Ah, organized. Keep all your promotional assets organized. So, for example, if I wanted to do something like this and I came in here and I typed thump something like Thanksgiving because maybe you want to keep all your content related to Thanksgiving promotions in one folder like you go ahead and create that folder course it's gonna be empty when you first created. But then, if I jump back here under designs and I go into my uploads, I know that I have, for example, this risotto image, which is perfect for ah, that kind of holiday. So I'm gonna go ahead and move that to the folder, and I will look under here and again just created it. So sometimes you're gonna have that lapse so you can try a couple things you can quit out of a window, you can come back. You can just hit the refresh button on your screen. Or maybe just wait a second again. You won't have this problem if you have created something a while in the past. But if it is something that you just created, sometimes you organ have that little bit of a lapse. So let's just see and let's try this again. Move to folder And there it is there. So it just took a second. But now it's there. So now if I went through here and I decided to say, Okay, this is a pumpkin cheesecake. So I want to move that to the folder. And so now you're adding assets and just giving yourself a better way to stay organized. And now you have this Thanksgiving thing. This last one has not updated yet. It may come through, I think I added at second folder to hear, but so you can see that it it's a little quirky, right? When you're doing stuff on the fly, sometimes it takes a little while, but just know that it does work, and then once you have it set up, then that stuff's gonna be here. when you come back at a later date. So again I clicked on this now and it does seem like it's thinking and struggling. So depending on your connection, there are sometimes these little quirks. But then things will move over. Let's just jump back. I don't know whether I got that second felt photo or not. I keep jumping to the photos tab. I won't mean to jump to this, but that this is a good thing, because keep in mind here that all these assets that Air Canada assets and not your uploads you could also add those as well to the same sort of phone folder. So if I type in Thanksgiving here and I come under here and I find some images I like, so let's just say like this image I could add to folder choose Thanksgiving. So let's just come down and pick a couple more so I could find something here and I could add to folder and shoes Thanksgiving. And then maybe you even come under elements and you're like, OK, I want some other little design elements to go with my Thanksgiving promotional are just that voter. So maybe you'll like this a corner. Whatever. You can add these. See your folder, so I'll throw it out into Thanksgiving. And so now here's my Thanksgiving folder. Have I go down under it? Everything is there. So I think that previous time I just missed that one photo. But you can see that this doesn't work, and it is a good way to organize your content. And you can use not just your uploads like we're talking about in this section. But you can also pull all these other little design elements from Camba. And so you can really build at organized promotional stream so that when you get toe Thanksgiving that time of year, when you know your Web contents going to be very popular or whatever your business and you have promotions, you have all those assets sitting there waiting for you so you don't have to spend time struggling, trying to remember what you do this time of year. It's all there, and it's all ready to go 37. 5 - More About Folders (NEW): Okay, this is going to be a quick lesson about a few more things related to folders. These are newer features that weren't available when I first published this course, but they are available now. So I wanted to jump back on here in case you find these tips helpful. So I'm on my home screen here. I can just jump to see all my folders. So I'm just gonna go ahead and create a new folder. So I'll come up here and it create new folder. I will just call this folder favorites. So Favorites and I'll go ahead and hit Create. And of course it as you do this, you can share it with team members if you have team members, I'm not going to worry about that. I'll just click Create folders, okay, so a new feature. Now when you have a folder, you're going to notice this star icon right here. And as you click and unclick this, you can turn it to one of your starred favorites. And if you turn it into a start item, it's then always going to show on your home screen and this side menu here, which can be very helpful because you can drag and drop stuff into folders. So if I just jump into all of my designs, I can find this recent design here and I like this one, so I'll throw that over. And my favorites, maybe this one here, I like that one. I'll throw that over my favorites. So it's just gives you an easy way to put it here over in this Start menu. And then you can jump to it quickly. You can drag and drop things quickly. So that is a helpful new feature of folders. Also, when you're in the folder, you can now add folder banners. So I'm in the folder. I have these three dots up here. I can select that, you can rename it if you want to. I can also add banner. If you add a banner, It's basically going to launch sort of a design window. You can come in here, you can add a graphic or a background. You could add text if you want. Usually just works better with a color or background. And I'll go ahead and click Save. And then what it's gonna do is it's just going to update and gives me sort of a banner so that whenever I'm within this particular folder, I get this little design banner up here. So this is maybe more aesthetic than it is helpful. I don't know that this gives you a great new level of organizational anything, but it's kinda cool. So it is just a new feature folder. Wanted you check it out. It might be something you'd like to use. One last thing I'll mention with folders that's new, you now have this present option with your end result or if you're within a folder, excuse me. And if you hit this Present button here, you now will have this play or you can present two items, and it's automatically going to send you into that full screen presentation mode. So if you ever have some of your favorites and you want to throw them within a folder, you jump into this present mode. And then I can go forward and backwards with my keyboard, with my keys on my keyboard. And it's going to go back and forth between those elements within the folder. So only have two here. So obviously not anything super cool, but it would be super cool if I put a bunch of them in there and you sort of had a portfolio or something you wanted to show off to someone quickly. Go ahead and store them all within that folder, jump into that present mode. And then you can just use the arrows on the keyboard to go back and forth. So if you did prepare a presentation of slides, you could throw them all within a folder. You could jump into that present mode, and that is pretty cool. So that's just another feature of folders. Hope you liked these new features and I'll see you in the next video. 38. 5 - The More Tab: in this lesson, we're gonna finish up talking about the camp, a project interface just by talking about this little more tab, which you see at the bottom here. And so again, those three dots always indicate more options and so appropriately titled book titled More So. If I click on that, it's going to bring up this. And basically, what this is is another suite of APS and things you can use with camera so you can connect up your INSTAGRAM account, and then you can bring in your instagram photos into design. So that is a cool feature. Same thing for your Facebook photo fotos YouTube. Again, You can search and ad YouTube videos to your designs. And so the one thing I want to say about this is they will play within your design windows here. So I believe if you add a YouTube video, you can play it within your design, which is cool if you were doing screen sharing or something like that. But again, the functionality of that is not going to stay. If you download that into we final asset now, I'd have to check something like a Pdf, maybe a PdF and beds. It it has that play function functionality. But I think maybe that just works just within Canada itself. And so again, you have some other ones here, giffey. Ah, and add emojis at an embed picks obey pixels. So emojis you can do directly from here. So you just see you have all sorts of emojis here that you can add and use in your designs . So if I click one, it pops over there so that it's cool to have access to even more design elements again, some of this stuff you may never use, but again, it does give you mawr and Mawr design assets at your fingertips. Now these you can't do the right click store to a folder, but I guess you could create a document called Favorite Emojis. And maybe you could put all your favorites in one folder or one file. I should say one project and then have that project stored somewhere we could easily find it, and that way you could have all your favorites, and you wouldn't have to navigate through this big menu any every time. But again, it's not too hard to search, so all you would have to do is come up here in search and you can narrow this down a lot. So it is a cool feature. Let me just jump back in here under more and you have added in bed. So if you click on that, you can see all these things where you can embed stuff into your design projects. So again, this really is pretty cool. So let me just go back under more pixels. That's just more free. Stock imagery picks a basing type of things to somebody's finding images and then embedding stuff, adding emojis, using stuff from your social media accounts using stuff from your Dropbox account. Ah, so again, if you didn't have unlimited storage, Or maybe if you're working under the free account, maybe here's a way to organize things within Dropbox. And then if you hook up your dropbox account, I'm not sure how that works. But that is another little work around and another way to access more of your photos. Maybe we have more storage over on your dropbox, and so I think I've covered all these, so I'm not gonna go into any more detail. I'll let you leave it to you to explore and work through these, But you can do some cool stuff, so play around and definitely take advantage if it's something that's gonna help you and help your business. So I think that closes out this last section on the project interface. I hope you've learned a lot of stuff. And I really hope everything we've talked about in this will these last several lessons really are going to serve as the building blocks as we now jump into the project part of this because now we're gonna start really creating rial world assets, real world projects. They can benefit you in your business. And as we do it, we're gonna be learning the smart template ing tips and tricks to just make your workflow mawr efficient and just really save lots of time because we're all about giving you the assets you need for your business and giving you back as much time as possible. So I'll see in the next section 39. 5 - Class Project - Show Your Canva Skills Challenge #2: welcome to another set of challenge exercises. So what you're gonna do now is you're gonna jump over to that class project section of this course and look for the challenge. Exercise is associated with the project interface. So the last several videos have been all about the project interface. And inside these challenge exercises, you're just gonna be given some task to really demonstrate that you've learned some of these things within the project interface. So go ahead through these exercises, give them a try. Don't think of it as a homework. Just think of it as a fun chance to test your skills and really lock in what you've learned about the project interface. And that's really gonna help you going forward. So go ahead and give it a try. And then when you're ready, just go to the next lesson and you can see the answers to these challenge exercises. All right, good luck. And I'll see you in the next lesson. 40. 5 - Class Project - Challenge Solutions: When they came back in the public domain. In the case of an ellipse. And the code for the challenges of society. What 41. 6 - Canva Mobile - The Home Screen (NEW): Okay, This section of the course is going to be all about Canva mobile. I didn't originally have this in this course, but I'll, I've gotten a lot of questions about it. And so I did want to include this section because even though a lot of it's going to be saying just to do just because you're working on your phone with finger gestures, there is some, there are some differences which are going to be important between working with Canvas on your desktop and Canva mobile. So we're going to talk all about Campbell mobile here in this section of the course. Now we're looking at the home screen right now, and the home screen on your device isn't going to be that different. Now of course, you can rotate your screen and things like that. But for the most part, It's not going to be that different from what you find in the regular version of Canva if you're working on desktop, in other words, all along the top here you can see different project types that you can create. You also have options down here we can create design with these buttons. You can scroll up and down. So you'll see Instagram, your stories, logos. So you can scroll through all these different options for creating new projects and you can tap on any of those options. You also can use this plus icon, that icon down in the bottom right corner. So you just tap on that. And then once again, of course you have all these options that they're going to show up. You could search. So if I went in here and I searched for Facebook, you can type in and Facebook ad, Facebook posts. You're going to see all those different options. And if you tap on one of those, you would launch that type of project. I'm going to cancel out of that. You can search up here just like I searched when I was under the button down below, you can search up in this search bar. Same idea. So you see videos of zipper but animated. If I did animation, you would bring up different types of things. Well, I didn't type correctly there, but you can use all these different search bars to search for the type of project you want. You can scroll. You have an option on the bottom where you can return to your home. You can look at your design. So if I click on designs, I can see designs that I already have on this Canvas account and I can scroll through and I can open a project that I'm already working on. And then they also have this menu option in the bottom right, so I can tap on that menu. And then you're going to see all the other options that your normal, normally would see on a desktop where you have your brand kit and here you can come on that you can set brand logo, brand colors, things like that. You have all your folders here. If you have folders, you can go in and you can see your folders. So all the stuff that exist on Canada for desktop, it's all here under canvas, mobile. You just sort of have to look around and explore around because even though everything's pretty close to the same, there are some subtle differences. So just to get to know your way around here, you're always going to have this Home icon to come back to this homepage. So I will go ahead and launch an Instagram post. But you can see that in again, same thing when you get a blank option and you can choose a template. So everything is pretty similar, but you do have some subtle difference. So that's the home screen on mobile. We're going to get into now looking at a project in seeing once you're inside the project interface, how things work a little differently in the project interface. 42. 6 - Canva Mobile - Top Menu Bar and View Modes (NEW): Okay, so here we are in Canvas Mobile inside our project interface where we've launched this to Instagram project. So let's look at this interface. So up on the top bar here we have the home icon. So you can use that home icon at anytime to go back to the home screen. Home screen is going to come back up. So here are all my designs. And of course I can control what I'm seeing on the home screen on the bottom. We went over this in the last lecture. So home, I can get back to my designs. So I'll jump back into design where we were just in because we're looking at the project interface here. So you have the home option, you have the three dots. So if I come up here now I see I'm in scrolling view and in scrolling view, that just means I can use fingers, slight movements to get back and forth between my different pages. Now if I were to come up here and go to thumbnail view, then you see now I have this page view on the bottom here where I can just click on the bottom little thumbnails. And that'll take me between pages. I have that plus icon for adding more pages. So again, if I were to do this and then come back, let me just change something on Mondays pages, so it's more obvious on the third page here, I'll click on the design itself and then I'll change the color by clicking on the bottom and change that to black and I'll click Done. So now you see that I can just go back and forth between those different pages, just tapping with my finger on that little thumbnail view on the bottom. Now if I come back up here, go back to that scrolling view. Now to get back and forth between my pages, I'm just swiping across my screen. So I like thumbnail view where I can see the pages on that little thumbnail on the bottom. However, in scrolling view, you do have a little bit more screen real estate, which is an issue on mobile, since Xi by definition, don't have as much space as you would on a large desktop screen. So I think it just comes down to preference, but you can very easily just go back and forth between the two. And of course you also have grid view. Grid views were to takes you in that full view where you can see all your page layouts like this. And then if you double tap on one of these, it'll take you right back into the page. So these are just the different views and you can see double tapping took me back into scrolling view. If you want to jump back to a thumbnail view, just click on that. So that's using the three dots there. It's just very helpful for getting back and forth between those different sort of screen modes. And there are subtle differences. So it just comes down to what you like in a given instance. Now if I bring those three dots up again, you also have things like slows, show margins. You can turn on in here. And then all the other stuff down here, make a copy, share resize. So all the other options you'd find on desktop you have there under that. Then if you go to the next option here, this little symbol right there, if I click on that, that's where I can come in here. I can resize this. So if you're under the pro account, you have that re-size ability. So I can resize to some different options. It shows me more options. So if I were to check something in here, for example, this currently looks like it's a rectangular format and sort of a portrait format. If I were to come in here. And let's choose something different in here. So I'm gonna go down, she did. I'm gonna go to this menu here, the dots. I'm gonna go resize. And I am going to just choose, actually can search in here too, I believe, Show More. So maybe you can't tell, yes, you can search here. So if I just click on that search icon here with phones got a little angry with me. Let me try one more time. So again, this is maybe why I wouldn't endlessly work in here. So I'm going to give you just choose landscape. I find it for me at least, and this is sort of personal preference for me, it's more pleasing on a desktop. But you may only have mobile as an option and you certainly can work in mobile. And especially if you have templates setup, then working in mobile, it's really not bad. So I'm gonna just going to choose this invitation landscape under resize. And so then once I do that, I click Done quotes, you can choose multiple things, copy and resize it. I'm just going to show you that. Yes, it's just like you would have on desktop. It's going in here and it's resizing my project now. So now I have this landscape version here of the exact same project. Of course, if I do go back to my home screen, they're both still here on the home screen. The one thing I'll say from all your designs, this view here on the home screen. It isn't always intuitive just by looking at this, what the dimensions of the project is going to be. But so then if you click on it, you open it back up, then you're going to see that full project on screen. So this is that one that I just resized here. Okay, so we're back in here. So we've talked about the little home icon, then we have the three dots and then the next icon is for doing resizing. And then you have your download and upload option. So if I was done with this design and I click on the next icon, I can use Save As image. What happens if I just click Save, preparing your design, making the magic happen? I expected to see different options here, but it says you saved your design. So continue editing. So actually I think it's because I'm on my phone. I've actually you can tell I haven't worked much on my phone. So I'm just going to click out here for a second. I'm gonna go to my camera roll. And then you'll see that by clicking my camera roll. I do have all those different pages that were part of my design. So that's pretty cool. So it takes your design and instead of downloading to a folder on your desktop, which is what I'm used to. It, it'll spit all those out to your phone. And so now you can take these and you could share these. Some of you are probably very comfortable working on your phone sharing cure different social media platforms. So this is going to be more intuitive to you than it is to me, but so it's going to save it to your camera roll. So I'm just going to jump back here, back into Canva and we're back inside the project and we're going to continue to go through the options. So you have that download option to save. And then of course, if you want to use the upload icon in the upper right, then that's where you find all your other options and other words. You can send it to Instagram, you can send it to Facebook, all the other places where you might share your final design. So that's the top menu. In the next lesson, we're going to talk about actually working with this design, actually making changes to this design. How does that work on mobile? And what are the differences between that and working on desktop? 43. 6 - Canva Mobile - Navigating within a Project (NEW): Okay, so here we are back inside of Canva. And so now we're going to start looking at what do we do to actually make edits in here, how are we working inside a mobile and how is it different than working on desktop? Okay, so first we have right now where courts currently in this thumbnail view on the switchback, the scrolling view for a minute, you remember from previous lessons, you can just use those three dots and choose which view you want. So once you're in here, you're going to see this little blue plus icon in the bottom left. If you click that, that is how you add new elements to your page. And also if you click on an element on your page, you're going to get this contextual menu below and to the right of that blue plus icon. So this may change depending on what you have highlighted. So if I highlight just my background page, you'll notice that the menu I get and can scroll through here has different options. Then if I select this text elements, and that's because it's a contextual menu at the bottom, which is going to show up based on what you have selected on the screen. Now to select something, you're just tapping it. So for example, if I select my background, you can just come over here and I can select a different color. So I could do plus that could come in here. Choose a totally different color for this background. Go ahead and when I'm done, just click, click back on the screen and it's going to come back to your design. So it's really easy. It's tactile, it's, it's just organic. There's something pleasing about just tapping on the screen and moving around. Now I do like working on my desktop, but I can understand why some people do like working on mobile like this. It is pleasing just to use your fingers and touch and move things on the screen. So again, you just tap on items and then you're going to be a scroll and see through this menu all the different options we have. So let me just for a second, Let's just jump back to thumbnail view so we can see the different pages. I'm just going to go ahead and use the plus icon here and add a new page just so we can work from a totally blank page. So actually, I have a couple of blank pages here, so I'll just go to the yellow blank page and then walk through adding some more elements and seeing some of the menus we get here in Canva mobile. So again, plus icon to add something new. You can come in here, you have all these different options on the bottom from templates, you can choose from starting templates. So I'll just going to click through some of these options so you can see, so templates again, if you want this page to be built totally off a template, I could click in here. I could select one of these templates. So if I just click on this one, then it's going to load that as a page. Let's do another page here. And so you have this plus icon here in the page thumbnail view, and that just adds a new, new page. Now it's going to add a page based on the background color of the previous page. So this is black because the previous page was black. If I were to come in here and come on this page and change the color to blue. So you will notice now fade the plus icon, I get a blue page because remember if you have a background on your page, then when you create a new page, you're going to get the same page with that same color. But let's go in here. Let's change the color of this page. I'm going to tap on the page, will go under that call ever going to choose this yellow again, we'll click Done. And now let's add some elements to this page. So again, I'm going to come back and I'm going to switch to that scrolling view just for a little bit more screen real estate. We have our background set, so we're gonna go under plus, we saw how you could choose a template and create a whole new page based on the template. If you go under elements, that's where you're going to see things like lines and shapes, all your graphics and illustrations. You're going to see anything that you're recently used. You're going to see photos, you're going to see videos. You have audio files, charts, frames, grids. So all the cat canvas elements that you're familiar with and that I talk about in the different lessons of the course. They're all in here. Now if you search for something, so let me just search for landscape or something. Don't know what I'm searching for it. Let's just do landscape. And then when you do a search and it did it actually enter return, maybe I didn't hit there, you actually have to hit Enter. So once I hit Enter there it is, it is returned all the results. And you can see up here because the word all is highlighted, it's returning all those different formats. So in other words, if I scroll through here, I can see at the top I have some illustrations. Then I have some photos, some more illustrations. There's an animation, there might even be some videos down in here. So by default, when you search within these elements, it's going to return all of the elements and this is the same way. Now, on regular Canvas on the desktop, you have this search that returns everything, but then you can just use these little buttons up top, these little menu tabs to filter your results and results. So I just want to see photos, my landscape, photos, graphics. I can see things that are graphic, in other words, the vector art illustrations. If I want to see videos, I can see videos. I want to see any audio files. So you can do all of that. And you also have this farther to the right, this filter. See these lines and these dots, you also have my phone's getting low, so I'll finish this up in a little bit. So you have this filter thing here. We can come in here and you can filter even farther based on the color of results or the, you know, whether it's animation, whether it's free or pro, whether it's vertical or square. So you have a lot of different ways to filter your results inside here. And of course you're also filtering by your search term. So if I went instead of landscapes, maybe I chose something like, let's just say fish. I don't know, we're going for anything here. So fish go ahead and hit Return. Again. It's going to return all the results for that search. So now it's searching for fish, it's going to give me all the results. But hey. I don't want these illustrations, I just want photos. So you can click over and do an filter that way. And of course, if you want to add something to the page, you would just click on it. And then it's going to add it to your design. Then you can move it around. Just tap with your finger and move around. You can pull these corner bars to pull it in obviously. And then if you pull from the middle here, then you're cropping your image, right? So you've cropped with that corner thing or excuse me, crop with a center thing from the corners, you actually resize, okay, but I don't want this, so I'm going to select this element. Then remember you have this contextual bar down here. I just want to delete it so I'll collect, I'll get rid of the Delete icon. Really what I wanna do is I want to use this plus icon. And I'll go back in here. And then you can even come and you can use uploads. So maybe you want to go and look at things you've already uploaded into Canva. You can see the give-away there because I saw a picture in there of my dog which actually came from my camera roll. And I can actually get to my camera roll here. So you can see we have text, we have stickers, we have backgrounds, we have colors, we have things you have stored in folders and you can even now go to your camera roll. So I go in here, here is a photo of our dog turbo. He is quite pathetic, but a little bit cute. And so here is a picture after a recent bath that he had, so I can bring him in here and then now with him selected, of course, I'm then gonna get to contextual menu that you see when working with photos. So I can come in under Effects. I can click on this background mover, background remover. Now it's going to try and it's going to try to cut out turbo from the background. Now this works great if you have fairly simple backgrounds, the more complex backgrounds you have, it's not always going to do a perfect job. But you can see, hey, it did a pretty reasonable job, putting turbo in here all by himself on the background. So then we need some other things in here. So let's see, we need some sort of text. So let's come in here. I could choose any of these text items. Maybe I'll just add a basic heading. So we're going to come in here. And now you can see it came in pretty small, but since it's selected with the blue selection box around it, I can come in here and I have a contextual menu based on tech, so font size, I can make this a lot bigger. Now. Right now I can only drag it up to 144, but you can just use your fingers and resize it even bit beyond that. And then of course, if I double-click on it here, actually let me click once to go back in. If you haven't selected, you don't have to click this edit to actually type the text. So I'll come in here, I'll set my all caps. I'll type turbo his name. So there's the name Turbo. Now I'm going to re-size with my finger. I'm just going to drag it up with my finger. So again, it's very, very sort of tactile, much more so than working in Campbell on your desktop. Both have pros and cons, but they have tons of the same things. So let's resize that text there actually that's the picture of him. So you have some of the same problems where I'm resizing these frames just so I don't accidentally select them one of the others. So some things between the two platforms, mobile and desktop, you still run into some of the same issues, but you just come up with these workarounds. And so we'll resize him there. So we got turbo, we got name. Let's come in here. Let's check his name again. Let's change the color. Let's make it white. I'll click Done. And let's add one more thing to this because what is a picture of your pet for the Internet? If you don't add some ridiculous sticker to here. So let's just come in here. I clicked on stickers on my bottom menu. Let's take this well, sticker because, well, this is the ultimate Internet picture. Write a picture of a dog and a picture of the over the top Call of colorful animated text. So anyways, you get the idea. The idea here is just that you have to understand when you're working in here. You're just tapping with your finger and you're using these tricks to resize things, to move things around. And then based on what your selection is on screen, what you have selected, you get this contextual menu down here on the bottom. Now let me just go over a few other features. I'll one thing that people complained about a long time on their phone was it's really tough to space things precisely in mobile. Well now you have this little nudge icon. So if you have something selected in here, and then you click on this little nudge icon again, here it is in this menu here. If I just scroll through to the right, you see this nudge right here. I can tap on Nudge and I can move it one pixel at a time. I can hold down. And it will sort of do this smooth move. But if I just tap it once it's moving one pixel down, if I hold that down, now it's sliding down. So you just have these, you have these positioning controls in here. Of course, let me move that down. If I put it over top of turbo and then I were to come back in here and choose position. I can move it backwards. So now it's behind. I can bring it forward. He's the best way to learn these things is sometimes just to get in here and play. But remember it's intuitive. All the menus are there. It just changes based on what you have selected. Now one more thing, where I've heard from Canva, I've heard from Cambodia that they're going to improve this. And so I think this is going to become easier, but right now there's no obvious way to group things when you're in here, but you actually can do it. All you have to do is do a long press with your finger. So in other words, if I do a long press on turbo, you're going to see that blue flash and it says one element selected. Now suddenly I can select another one. I can select a third one, and then I have the option to group those. And now I have all these elements here. I'll click Done. I have them all in a group now. And so now I can move them together. So again, the trick for that, if you want to group multiple things by selecting multiple things on mobile, you have to hold your finger over top of the item. And when you do that long press, you're going to see it flash blue and then it will slit. Let you select a second elements, like the third element, and then you can group them. Okay, we're going to end this video here, but this starts to give you some great ideas of all the things you can do working inside of the canvas, mobile project interface. 44. 7 - Magically Resizing Projects for Various Platforms: this'll last time We're talking about the magic resize tool. Now, this is a tool that is only available in camp a pro. But I'll show you a little bit of a work around for the free version. Now, it's not gonna be as effective, but I'll show you what you can do if you only have the free version. But let's start with Campbell Pro here. This resize option. So this comes into play. If you have a design where you want to create that design across multiple platforms and those platforms, we're gonna have different image dimensions. And so if you want to really quickly spawned one project into multiple projects, this is where this resize is gonna come into play. So let's take this design here and imagine that we want to report it to a couple of different platforms. So what I will do is go ahead and click this resize option. And if you want, you can choose a custom size that you want it to resize to, or you can also choose the recent ones that refused where you come down here and choose anything at all that you want. So I'm just gonna go through and I'm gonna click a few of these so we'll click someone's that I know we're gonna have different dimensions. Now again, anything at all here that you want to select. They have lots and lots of options, so I'll just click a few so we can see how this goes to work. So I've selected six different, uh, platforms here that I want to resize for, So it's gonna take whatever image dimensions are common on that platform. It's gonna take this design and convert it into those dimensions. So all you do is do copy and resize, and then you see up here, it has opened up a new tab for each one of these, and it is going toe work, and it is re sizing my design so that it makes sense for that platform. So let's take a look at the results we get here so we can see that it's resize for this. That's for Pinterest there. This would be an album cover. So it is resized. Here is another one, and so you can see it's scaling and making sure that everything all elements of your design still fit within design. It's it's making its best guesses as to where to put things. In other words, it's keeping things pretty much aligned the way that I had, Um, but it's scaling them down. So they fit this platform and so that you don't use lose anything off the edge. Now, if I decided I still wanted to make changes, of course you can come in here. You can still move things around, so you're not locked into this as a final graphic. But it does very quickly take you from one size to the Dimension Project and poured it over into another one, an attempt to align it in a smart way so it really can save you a lot of time. Ah, lot of time it will. It will result in graphics that are good to go. Other times you will find that you want to come in here and you do want to do a little bit of tweaking, but it's still better from just than just starting from scratch. So again, this is the resize option here, which is only available in Campbell Pro. If you're in the free version, you will see that little paid crown icon and you will not have this option. So let's talk about what you would do, though, if you were on the free account and how you would re sides for another project. So I will just come back to this initial design here. I'm gonna close my taps the right. And so the advantage of Campbell Pro is that you can automate it. You can select those things very quickly and you can just launch lots and lots of projects . Now, you're not gonna get that one click where it goes toe work for you like that. But of course, you could still take these options and copy them and rearrange them to yourself on a project that has different dimensions. So let's imagine I want to go from this to something that is a square format, sort of like most instagram images are. So then maybe I would just come to my home screen here. I would come down here and create a news on design, and I'll choose Instagram. So Instagram Post it's gonna be a 10 80 by 10 80 square image format. And so then I would just come back to that original design that I wanted to copy. I'm going to use the control. A shortcut key to copy everything here. And I'm on Windows. That's control a and then control. See, to copy. And it's These are pretty common keyboard shortcuts in lots and lots of different software . So control C copy something, and then I'll just move over to that new project, which is the instagram one here. And I'm just gonna hit control V to make sure I'm their control V and it's gonna pace it in here, right? And so I have moved it over here and I accidentally pieces it twice. It looks like So let's delete that. Let me grab everything here. And so it pasted it in here and it did resize it down a little bit, right? Or at least it fit in the screen. But if it's not, you may have to move it around. You may have to make some adjustments. And of course, it didn't center it like it did before, So I have to move it around and figure out where my center point is there. See if I can get the other center line right there. So use these campus smart guides to ally in this, and so I drop it in, and so it's not gonna take a lot of work to move something over to another project. But of course, you're gonna have to manly go from your home screen and launch the new projects for all the different formats where on the pro version, you can bring up that drop down list and check all the boxes, and then it will do a lot of the work for you. So resize toe it is really cool. You still may have to do some work, but it does put you at a good starting place, and it does save time. If you have graphics, you want toe port across the multiple platforms and then with the free version. You don't have that tool, but you can copy something and move to another project and just resize it a little bit. And there's one final thing with this resize tool here. I wanted to show you that it's not limited to just static graphics. You can also do this with video files, projects that incorporate video, so just showing here this is a video I have in this ah widescreen format. And so if I wanted to crop this over to a square video, I could use this same resize trick where I come up here and again, you can enter a custom size in here or I'll just come down and to choose Instagram Post. If I wanted it to be that size right there and I will go ahead and do the same copy and resize and it spawns this new window. And again it will resize that video for you. And so then, if I hit play, I can see that, Yes, this is that same video and has been cropped down to fit these square format, and so that is very cool. Now, of course, this video, if you double click on it, you can still get in there and you can still reposition If you need Teoh. I think by default it's gonna crop into the center of your video when it takes it into a new project. But of course, you can move this around and said it however you want. So it is a really easy way to take a final video project, and two poured it over to other platforms. And I know Sometimes people do struggle with this in another software. There's lots of other ways you can do this but can be gives you a really nice, easy way to do this. So this could be something that's very helpful for a lot of people. So again, this is the resize tool, which is allows you deport projects over to other projects with different dimensions. And if you have the paid version, you have this resize thing, and you can do a lot of things automatically by checking boxes and telling you what format you want. If you have the free version, you're gonna have to do that copy and paste trick. We start the projects on your own, so not as convenient, but it still works for going from one size to another. So hopefully this is helpful and I will see you in the next lesson. 45. 7 - Using Filters and Presets: this'll s. Then we're gonna be talking about filter effects. You can apply in canvas your photo, and I'm gonna also show you how you can create your own custom Look and set up a template so you can always reuse that custom look, or that custom preset, whatever you wanna call it. Ah, so here we have a photo in Canada and I'll just show you how this works. So if I click on the photo with my photo selected, I then get the select options up here and you'll notice this filter option. Well, if you come under this filter by default, any photo comes in as none. But then you can click through and you can apply any sort of filtered, ah, sort of stylized look. And then once you select something, you can also dial up and down the intensity of that look. So you may find that you really like something like this. Now, if you look a lot of people's Instagram accounts, for example, that's where it's really popular to have sort of this stylized look to your photos. And of course, a lot of people are doing color grading and other software software but this is sort of the camp aversion of how to take a photo and apply this stylized look to it. And once you have a photo in a project that has this stylized look to it, you've applied a filter. You noticed that Then, if you go back under photos and you add any different photo into that frame, taking the replace of replacing that photo, you'll notice that that photo then comes in with whatever filter preset you had applied so I can come back under photos and again, any image here that I drag in. It's gonna get that stylized look because it's going to come in by default. With that filter turned on course, you can turn it off and you can try one of these different ones, but it's going to come in with whatever the image you just replaced had apply to it. Now let's talk about this filter setting again a little bit more detail, because this is how you're gonna understand how you can do your own custom looks so by default. The only option you see here is dialing up and down the intensity, but what you really need to understand is what is going on behind the scenes. And so if we go from this filter menu over to this adjust menu, this is the actual set. These are the actual settings that are being applied as you go in here and choose these presets. So watch these numbers here. 8 27 minus 1900 67. If I come back to the filter menu here and I take my intensity way, way down and I come back over here to adjust, look at the numbers. These numbers went way, way down. And it's because all these filters are really doing is setting thes sliders at particular values. And so I can come in here and instead of using filters if I want to, I can start to manually adjust the brightness. I can mainly adjust the contrast, liken dial up contrast and you can fool with things like saturation a de saturated look. Maybe you want a saturated look. You can fool with the tent where you start to introduce different colors, the blur. So if you go all the way, take it there. You're gonna have this crunchy detail. If you go to blur, you're just gonna blur something out. So there are a lot of creative uses here, potentially So keep this in mind, especially if you're not familiar with image editing software. And you really are just bringing images into Canada. This gives you some image editing ability within Canada. So again he can is full around here and try these different things. Now blur that one, might you want might want to keep it zero. Unless you're really going for that artistic look vignette. You can introduce a vignette on your photo, so there are a lot of possibilities here. But so So here's the magic. Here's the magic. Let's say that you want to get a particular look. You can even start under. Here is filter if you want to, and you can say I like this epic but I want to make some changes. And so then you come over to adjust and you say, Well, this is cool, but I wanted to be a little bit more saturated. And so you dialled the saturation. Let's say, Oh, I love this Look, I love this look right here. Well, check this out. Look at this filter code down here watches I drag out in change vignette. See how that filter quote is changing. All this filter code is doing here is really generating a number on the fly that represents all of these current settings. And so if I wanted to save this Look, all I have to do is copy this filter coat. So I'm going to copy this filter code. I'm gonna stick it down here in a new page. Now, go ahead and delete this out of here. Because in this new page, I just want to take a text element like this. So I'm gonna put a subheading on here, and I'm a girl control V to paste in that filter code. So this is my filter code. This is the custom. Look, that I wanted to create the custom Look that I just saved. Now, you could even add another heading in here if you want, and you can name it. So you know what this is? But I know this is my filter code. Okay, So now if I come back up here, I'm gonna delete this image all together. It's gone. And so now if I bring over any new photos so I can pick any photo out of here. Bring in a photo by default. It comes in no filter. We know for adding a photo just by itself. It's coming in with no filter, but maybe it's a month later. I I don't know. All the settings I said under this adjust. I have no idea what settings I said. Well, watch this. They're all to zero. All I do is come down here. I'm in a double clicking here. I'm gonna hit control C to copy. I'm gonna come back up here under my photos. I'll go under. This will come down here on it. Control A to select everything. Control V. Look at that boom. All my settings magically come back. And I have applied that look based on all the settings that I save just with this filter coat. So that is really cool. And if I wanted to take the most advantage of this, So, for example, if I was doing this for Instagram or something, I might go ahead and make a copy here on this page here. So let's try it again. Copy. And so then let's say I wanted to have a different look here I may go ahead and come down and adjust and coming here and go ahead and just whatever items I want to adjust. And then I have a second look And because these are looks where if you drop in another photo, it's gonna take on that look. That means if I save this office a template that I'm not gonna do, go through all that right here. But if I save this office a template that all they have to do is every time a launch, a project to create an asset, I don't even have to fool with that code. It's already built into the image, because if I drop it over it, it's going to take on that custom. Ah, filter. Just when you drop in the image. So in other words, if I drop that image down there and I drop it up here, they're gonna be slightly different based on those still filters. So that's really cool. And that's the way you can do this and save the most amount of time. Of course, I also would save any looks down here, so I would have copied the code for this and I would pay sat down here just in case you want to use this in another project where you don't have any filters built into a photo, you can open up this project. You can copy the code, and then you can bring that look and use that look in any project you want. So that's filters, and that's how to set up your own custom filter and use it very easily within Canada. I hope you like this and I'll see you in the next lesson. 46. 7 - Changing All Instances of a Color at Once: in this lesson. I'm just reminding you how to change all instances of one color at the same time in Canada . Now I've covered this a little bit of other lessons, but in case you missed it, I just want to go over it again here because this really can be such a huge time saver. So let's look at the example on screen here. I have a presentation open here, and his presentation has a number of pages and there has been a consistent color theme used for out. So that's a good part of design. They're using colors again. Repetitive Lee. But what if you started with this presentation and you wanted to change this to your brand colors? Now, of course, you could come in here and you could one by one start to change colors like this. But that really would take you a lot of time if you want to go through all of these pages and make all of those changes. But since these all are using the same colors, you actually can change all of those colors to a different color at one time. And if you don't remember how to do this all you do is click one instance one instance of the color. You come up here under your color menu, you choose the new call. You want to change, too, and then make sure you come down to this box here. This is the magic box here at the bottom of the color palette, it says. Change all of this instance to this color. And if you click that and go ahead and change, then watch what happens when you come out here not only to change that one, it changes this page. It changed this page. It changed all instances of that color. So if they were using a consistent color theme now, all of the sudden, everything in your new design has a new color. I'll just jump in the page view so we can see. Yes, everything now has been changed that new color, and so this is really cool, and this really could save you a lot of time. However, I can't imagine a scenario where that could get you into trouble. Let's say you have colors that you did not want to change when you want to do this change all color Well, that's when you have to keep in mind. You can't lock down things. So, for example, of this peach to I knew I wanted this to stay set. I could come in here. It's like that page to use my lock icon. And then if I came back down to this first pick back to his first page, and I were to do this and do this change also do that and I'll do this change all here. I'm going to click that box there. Then it's gonna change everything except for what I have locked down. So just bear in mind has changed. All is really helpful. But if you need a lock down a page, remember, you can lock something, and when you lock a particular element, you're locking the position and the color, and that will not change. So that's how you change all instances of one color to another color within Canada, and this can really, really save you a lot of time. You might be starting with a theme that's already exist there within Canada, but you might want to quickly get that theme over two different colors your brand colors or whatever works for that project. And here's a great way to change all instances of a color just without one click. All right, I'll see you in the next lesson. 47. 7 - A Few Helpful Color Resources: this lesson. I just want to mention a few other color Resource is available to you, since color can be such an important part of your designs. Now this design onscreen uses some really bold color choices, and while that may sometimes work, you do have to be careful about colors that are overly saturated that introduce eye strain to the viewer. But what happens when you just can't find the right colors for your design project? What do you do? How do you go about finding colors that work well together? Well, I want to show you some resource is that Can VA itself has something to jump over here to this tap here. And so if you go to canvass dot com colors, they have a number of great color Resource is that you can make use of in your design projects. So, first, if you go under color meanings, you can look at any of these colors here, and it's going to give you more information about the cultural significance and meanings behind that colors. This could be very important if you're trying to create a mood, and you're just not sure what color's really represent that mood, and you want to do a little background research. You can come in here under this tab and again just go over here to the Canada dot com colors and then color meanings. And if you click on any of the colors in here, you can read more about that color. So if you want to read more about fuchsia, you can come in here and it will tell you more about fuchsia. It will give you some color combinations that make use of it, and then it can tell you the history and anything else that's significant that you might want to consider when doing a design project. So that's pretty cool. Take advantage of that. But I'm gonna jump back down here, and I'm just gonna go back to Canada dot com colors. And so this is a good page of the book Mark, and the other thing I wanna jump into next is this color wheel. So this is a really handy tool. If you don't design projects before you may be familiar with color wheels. But if not color theory, maybe something that's new to you I'm not gonna go deep into color theory year But you can read more here on this page. And basically what I want you to understand is that certain colors naturally complement each other and certain colors. They're gonna work better together. And it's good to have an idea of how to find these colors when you're doing any particular design project. So here on this page here you have this color wheel and you can drag around and choose any of these colors. And then down here you can set whether you want to choose a complementary color, you can choose you whether you want a monochromatic color scheme. Analogous, try attic. And again, I'm not going to get specifically into what each of these is and why they work well together. You can read more on color theory, but just know that this is a very good starting point. It can really help you find colors that are gonna work well for your design. So if I go to call complementary here, for example, I can just drag around, and whatever point I said the cursor on it's gonna automatically find the complementary color that's going to compliment that color. So if I drag to something like this and I can very easily grab these two colors. So, for example, let's go back to the design it had on the other page. So if I just click here, it automatically copies that. So I will just jump back into that project I just had. So I copied the one color. So all I would have to do now is come down here. If you paste any hex code in the box like that, it will automatically find that color for you. I'll jump back over to that color picker right here. Where have the other color? I will click that it automatically gets copied. I jump back to my design. I come here once again. I just paste it in here. It finds it. And do I want to change all? Yes, change all so very easily. You confined colors that are going to complement each other and work well together. And so that can be a very, very handy tool. And again, you can experiment around with different base colors to that first color that you choose. But then it's automatically going to go and find the color that complements that. Now you can also come down here, and you can change this from monochromatic. And then it's gonna find another color that's in the scene basic color range, but it's gonna find a different shade of that color. You can also come down and set this analogous. And again, I won't go into all the color theory behind us. But you can see how the dots are gonna move together. It's gonna find those colors that pair well again. You can try out the different combinations in here, so if you have three colors in your project and you want them to work well together, you could try this. Try attic. So again, get to know color theory a little bit and bookmark this color wheel cause that it really is a great resource when you're trying to find colors that work well together, I'll just jump back here to that colors page. So here it is again, and we'll look at the few items we didn't look at yet. So the other one is this color palette generator. And so if you go to this color palette here, you can upload any image, and then it's going to go into that image, and it's gonna build out a color palette. So if you have an image that's a big, central part of your design, and you want to build out the complementary colors that are from that image and will complement your design well, you can upload any image, and it'll build this color palette for you. And then you can use those colors in your design. Now the last thing here is just color palette ideas. So again, if you're doing a project in its themes with a particular theme, you may be able to come in here and type a keyword and find colors that fit that theme. For example, you could type in something like Easter, and it's gonna find all these nice pastels and colors that might work well for an Easter theme design. So pay attention to what colors you're using in your design projects. And if you get stuck, just remember, you do have these nice tools available to you, and they could really help you get over that period where you just don't know what colors to use. You can get some great ideas here, and it can really help with your projects, or it's another tip of your design just isn't coming together or feels to model the color just aren't working. Sometimes less color is the answer. So don't be afraid to go back toe white white spaces, usually your friend. And one more thing I've mentioned, which I will have mentioned in other lessons in this course. But I'll mention it one more time. Since we're talking color. I have this color picker right up here in my chrome bat browser, and this is just an extension of EC stalled installed chrome. And so, if I grab that, I could just come right down. And then, without leaving Camba, we're going to a different tap. I can just pull a color right from this design again at his color picker extension, and it's actually this color pick Hi dropper, So I will add it into the references at the end of this lesson, I'll put a PdF with links to these different references I've mentioned here, but you can find this for not only chrome but for other browsers as well, or something comparable, so you can even get some sort of extension. That then allows you to just go around your screen and choose colors. So give that in mind as well. Okay, that's just a few tips on working with color and your designs. I hope they're helpful, and I'll see you in the next lesson. 48. 7 - Finding Things Quickly with Search Filters: in this lesson. We're talking about search filtering now. We've talked about this some throughout this course, but it's going to cover it a little bit. Maurin this lesson. So by search filtering I mean, you have this search bar here within Canada and you can type in any sort of fame you want over here. So if you typed in something like like again my keys lineup, if you typed in something like holidays, then it would go through and it would search those templates and find anything that's holiday themed. Now, you can always type in what you want here, and if it finds anything, it'll bring it back. And it is finding that based on tags like this, which you can see by clicking on these three dots so you can search the tags any time. Just by typing something in here. However, under certain elements here and assets, you will find that you have other options. If I come under videos, then I can see that it has up here to the upper right of the search bar, this free button. So if I click on that, it's gonna filter these and show me just the free options. If I goto elements, then suddenly I have even more options. So if I click on these filter options now, I can search for just free. I can search and find elements by colors. So you check whatever filters you want here. So if you want just the blue free items, you could apply that filter and you would see the options down here. The results that match your filter. You can also do this under photos. So under photos, once again, search bar to the upper right. You have this icon, you click. And so, once again, if I was a probe member and I just wanted to see those pro photo options and maybe I was working on a theme where I wanted a particular color, I could choose that. Or maybe I'm just looking for things that are square in orientation that's gonna match up well with this project size. So I go ahead and click what I want apply filters. And just like that, it has filtered those search results based on what I chose. You also have other categories. You can choose here, but the big thing here is right here. You can come up here and set these filters. Now, when you have filter set, you're going to see this blue circle up here, and it tells you the number of filters you have turned on. So that's important because you're not seeing all the results. You're just seeing the results now that match your filter. So if you want to reset, you could just come in here and clear all, and then you're back to it, showing you all the results. So that search filtering within Canada just another helpful way to quickly find what you're looking for. So make sure you know that's there and make sure you know how it works. All right, I'll see you in the next lesson. 49. 7 - Class Project - Poster Redesign Challenge: Welcome to the next class project. This class project is going to be a poster, redesigned challenge. In this challenge, I want you to redesign ah, poster in Gamba. So I actually redesigned the poster that you see on screen, and I did a couple of different variations, and I used some of the color things we talked about in recent lessons and a few other things from recent lessons. So you can either redesign this poster as well and show me your variation, or you can pick any poster at all and redesign that poster. But I want you to come over to Camba templates, and I want you to start with one of these poster designs. It can be a landscape poster. If you don't want to do vertical, that's fine. But pick any poster in Canberra, pick a starter poster, and then I want you to redesign that poster. So if you'd like to do this particular poster, which I did, you can go to the class project section. Look for that poster redesign link, and you will have a link that lets you spawn this file and then you can redesign your own version of this If you want to do your own poster, just go ahead within Canada. Go to that home screen and go ahead. And once you're on the home screen, you can go ahead and type in here and create a design, and you can type in poster and you can either choose landscape poster or just the regular poster. Go ahead a launch, a poster project. Let me go ahead and go and click this so we can see. So once you're in there and you've started your poster, I want you to pick any templates you want as your starting point. And then I want you to do do a redesign of that poster so you can keep some elements of the original if you want. But you're using that original just as a launching point for your poster redesign. And now, once you're done, I want you to capture a J peg of that before picture before the redesign and then also J peg of your finished redesign poster. And then you can head over to the Class Project section used that create project green button in the upper right and go ahead and upload the before and after images of your poster in your post to redesign. All right, good luck. And I look forward to seeing what you create. 50. 8 - Creating a Facebook Cover Photo and Easily Creating Multiple Final Assets: in this lesson, we will create a Facebook cover. So again, this is something that Camba has a lot of pre made templates templates for. So I will come up here under, create design and start to type it in Facebook until I see Facebook cover. And there you go. So you click on that, it will launch the project, and it's going to give you all these nice pre made templates. So by now, you should have the skills to be able to bring in something here and customize it and make it your own. So again, I want to drive home. The idea now is whenever you're creating an asset like this, think about how do I use this for my business. So if you're doing Facebook photos, is that something? You're just gonna have a static image and leave for a while? You might. But you could also think about how often do you change it? Do you change it every month? So just think about that as you start a project. Is this a one off project or that something where I can create a template that's going to save me time? So I will just come in here, for example, and I will click on this one. And so let's say I wanted this to be in my starting point. Well, I'm gonna go ahead, and it doesn't make much sense to have this other image in here, so I'll delete that, and okay, I will drop in my own little grid there, so I'll just click on the script and put the grid over there. And then, of course, I'm going to change The text here. Doesn't make much sense as is, but so I'm gonna change. This is something that makes sense for my business. So I will change this to purpose. Blogger, Since this is one of one of my I mean brands their purpose, blogger, and then changes to a little tagline. So ah, learn the software actually just changes to learn the skills that pay the bills. So little slogan or whatever is part of your business that makes sense for you. So I'll change that. Ah, and then I can just come in here and drop in an image. But I may keep this as sort of a template was used as a template. Of course, if I'm going to create the final asset. I might come in here and start dropping in things that make sense. So, for example, I have under uploads. I have uploaded this little picture of myself here. That is a brand assets. So I will just drag this end. So, like a personalize it a little bit more. Get my face out there with my brand, and then you would drop in a photo that made sense. So maybe have a photo that makes sense. Or you could look at something that and find something under this photos tab that makes sense for your business. So by search for something like technology or computer, since that's a lot of what I teach software and things, I could find a graphic in here that I liked and dragged that in. And then, of course, if I want to creep this element here, I would maybe find something where the color matches a little bit nicer to that. So I have this little tool here, which is just a color. I drop or extension for chrome so I can come in and grab one of these colors right out of my design. So all grab that I will copy that. I will get rid of it there. And then I will pace that hex code into here, and I can find that. So you're coming in here and you're making these custom is ations and you're creating something. So just like that, you're able to create something since they start you with the right dimensions, that's going to make a really good Facebook cover. So maybe decided, want to take the transparency of this down just ever so slightly. So maybe I'll change this to 90. But so at this point here, I could download this and be done with it, and I have a very nice Facebook cover, but I encourage you to think long term. So if I did know that I was going to sort of update this monthly or something like that just to keep it fresh for my people that visit my Facebook page, I could come in here and I could make little changes. So, for example, if I was gonna create a monthly, I might go ahead and just start making copies of this. But then I may start to make little changes month by month. So for example here. Let's say I was going to do one down here, and this was going to be my December 1, so maybe I'll bring in some sort of Christmas element. I could always change this picture. I could change this picture. So if I'm just under technology photos, maybe I switch up the photo every month. Maybe I keep this element of myself or I bring in a new picture. Ah, that's another picture of May. So you could mix up whatever you want to mix up. Ah, and you go under elements and you could find something like by typing Christmas over here. I could find a little Christmas element, and I could find one of these. It's free, and dress drags something over so you could have these little custom elements. So then suddenly, now you're switching it up a little bit each month, I'll come in and I'll change the color of this. You could use a brand color, or you could use some other color. That's gonna just keep it up, mix it up, keep it fresh. Ah, So in other words, you can very easily theme these out so suddenly, instead of having one you have 12 and then every month you can just drop it in to keep things fresh again. It's up to you. It really depends on how you use the platform. But think about this. Ah, so I'll come in here. And so let's say this one was gonna be Ah, This one was going to be for October, so maybe I'd search for Halloween. Of course, this is in the U. S. So these holidays or big, you would do what makes sense for you. But I could do something like that and I could drag this out and customize this so very easily. Now I have two things that are basically the same. The branding is consistent, but at the same time, I'm just customizing a little bit to keep it fresh. So think about these things as you build out assets for your business. So that's creating a Facebook cover that gives you an idea of how you could very easily come in here and make copies and just make the slight changes to tweak it. So they're theme for each month. And I hope you enjoy this and I'll see you in the next lesson. 51. 8 - Creating a Resume with Canva: thin this lesson. We will be creating a resume in Canada. And of course, the things we learned here pretty much will apply to any sort of text document you're designing. So remember, it's a about the skills, and as you build up those skills, you really can create anything you want. So I could start with a U. S. Letter document. Of course, it's gonna make sense to take advantage of starting points that already exist, So I could type in, resume here or search up here. But I can also scroll through and see the designs here. So I'll find. Resume here and I'll go ahead and click Resume. Now, you could just start with the U. S. Letter document. But of course, since there are gonna be a lot of pre made templates for something like this, why start from zero when you can already have a lot of your work done in terms of a design that may work from for you? So then you could go through here and of course, you may find one of these that works and you like to design, and you're pretty much ready to go. So then you're just gonna go in and take this information and sub it out with your own information. So the design part of it in some cases is done. If you have a design, you find a design one of these templates that works for you. There are lots and lots of options. So look through here. Pay attention. Of course, Lots of these. They're gonna be free. You may sometimes run into those paid elements, but of course, you are not totally locked in with something like this. If you find something you can always make, custom is ations. So let's just say I chose this one here. I'll just walk you through quickly. Some of the changes I might make that something like this, and you get the idea for how you come in here and you make changes. But again, don't shoot yourself in the foot if the work is done and it's something that works for you , you don't have to designed from the ground up. But it's great that when you need to, you can customize and make something that's gonna work for you. So if I was going to customize this, I think I might start first by just making a copy of the page. That way, I have the original down here if I want a reference one of these elements once again without having to come over here. So I have a copy, that page, which I can throw away at the end. But so I'll start with this. And so if I was gonna make changes with this, I'm not crazy about red text and some of the things over here I can see where I made may just make some subtle changes, but of course, pick something as a starting point. It's gonna work for you and a lot of the elements. So if I decided this was the layout I liked for the most part that I would just come in here and start to make some subtle changes. For example, this here, this circle that is not like a grid. I can't drop a picture in here. It would make more sense if I was gonna have a picture up here to have an actual frame where I could drop an element of that. So we'll make that change, and then I'll just come in here and make some little text changes, some little color changes. So I'm just going to start going through that process. Okay, So, first, all of this here is grouped. I'm gonna ungroomed it for a second. I will come to this here. This is sort of a background shape, and I'm not crazy about the color. So I'm just gonna pick maybe this green. I want that to be the color off. What? I'm my design here. Of course I can change that later. I'll just make this so it fits down a little bit better there to the edge of the page. And then I will start rearranging and making some of my choices in here. Now, of course, was something like this. One of the first choices you're gonna make is what font you're going to use. They have a Ramon here, which is fine, but you may decide I want to use a different font. So with something like this and a resume, I would keep your find choices to a minimal one or two fonts at most. I would say Don't go crazy cause you're just gonna clutter things up, so I might search for another fun I like, So I'm going to use this. Ah, Helvetica ish here, and I am gonna use this font. And so I'm selecting this whole block of fun. That way I can all at once change over that fund. So if you select a bunch of elements, if you're selecting just font elements, See, it's also getting the background here when I make that selection. So it will not let me change those funds because of background. Doesn't have a fun property. But so if I come in here and I select all of these but that I might use my shift click, you can use shift to add things to a selection also to remove thanks from a selection. So I've ever removed this background that I just have fonts highlighted. So now I can come in here and I can make that change of that thought. So I think I got all of these fonts over here. No, I did not get all these fonts. Let's seal. Let me click on all of this again. Let's try. So what did it do when I selected all these before? I don't know. I think I just had one thing selected. So you got to be careful here. So let me just un group All this, I think, is gonna be the easiest thing. And of course, if I select the text elements and I get one of these line elements in between, I'm gonna have that same problem where I can't change the find. So I may just do something like click this and then just start to shift, click down the page real quick and just get my font elements. Make sure I skip over those graphic elements those lines and things like that. I just want my font blocks. And then when I do that, of course it has multiple fonts in there. I think is I changed with one of these, but maybe not all of them. It's OK. It's showing me the two fonts I have. But I want to switch them all over to this. So now I've gotten rid of that Eramo, and I just have this Helvetica ish ah font throughout my design. So that's what I want. I just wanted to unify that with the fonts that I like. Of course, I got all of these, but I didn't get these to up here, so again. When I do this, it's also selecting that background box. So just shift. Click done, Jack that and then they're so real quickly. I changed all the fonts over to the fine I wanted to use. And now again, I want to get rid of this element here because it's not that useful. If I'm gonna position a picture in here, I would rather have the frame just to drop it right into. So I will go under elements. And here's a circular frames. I'll just real quick put that over there, and then I will shift and drag it down something like about that size. And then I'll just make sure I get that position centered and sort of aligned with the top here and then aligned with this column of text here. Now take all of this text and elements, and I will undo that background again, just making sure I have things centered and lined up. Ah, Then I would start to come through and make those subtle little changes. I'm not crazy about the text choices in terms of color, so I think what I'm gonna do is I wanna have culled this green color to sort of be a little bit of ah repeated unifying element. So I may come in here in shapes, and I'm going to drag out a few, um, background shapes here, and I'm gonna use these up here and all position it in something like that. Again, I'm paying attention to this column spacing here and trying to keep basically a uniform. Ah, spacing around the the edges, the borders of my documented Think I actually bump this up? Maybe slightly. Okay. And so then again, of course, I would come in here, and I would select that seem green color that I used before and actually remove all this. Good. I still have this stuff below. So let's see. I will take this, and I will use my control and bracket keys just to start the moving backwards. And, of course, you could also come up here and under position. You could move things forward and backward up here, and then I want to change the color of this texts, and that's gonna be white, right? And I also want to make this bigger. So will change at the 16 and will change it. The bold. Okay, so that gives me sort of a header block that I can use for my sort of main categories here . So I'll get rid of this line element here because I no longer need that. I'm going to select these two of elements here. I will group them together, and then I can drop this down a little bit and then just get really position where I want. And I know I'm going to use this to replace thes two down here. So let's see this one's education and training. So I will just delete those two elements. Get that selected. Delete that, and then with this group now selected, since it's a group, I can move it all once, and I'm using the Ault Key. That would be option on the Mac, and you hold down your older option key and then drag and you can drag out a copy so I will drag that down, make sure it's positioned just like I want it. And then again, once again, I'll use that to replace this down here. So notable achievements. I'm going to get rid of that, and then I will use this all trick again with this selected Ault, drag it down. Of course, if you hold down your shift, you'll make sure you do drag down in a straight line and again get positioned right as you want it. I think maybe nudge it down just a little bit. If you need to nudge something done with it selected, you can just use your keyboard to move it, even if you excuse me. If you use your keyboard keys, you can move it. One little pixel, the time again. Shift, click, and you can move things 10 pixels at a time. So these are little tricks. We went over in the foundations off success, and so again I forgot what the's were. But so that was education and training and notable achievements. And, of course, if you made from eight cents to, ah, change it to something different, you would at this point customize it to what makes sense for you. So education and training in this part down here is notable achievements. So this is just the customization part, and of course you'd end up coming through here and putting in all your own text. But I'm just gonna make some more format changes, so I will use that same shift trick to select the different types of headers I have. So this is sort of my main header, but underneath the categories to the sub header here. And I was like all those and I might say I want all those to be bold and maybe I wanted to be slightly bigger. So 14 and this next sub header I will select those. And I would say those I just want to be I talic. And then I'll come into like my body text and I might sign I'm OK with that, but obviously I don't want that color. So coming here and maybe not this black, but maybe just this dark, dark gray. And I would have that. So you see, this is really just a simple process. Come over here. I want this to be bold. I want this to be significantly bigger. So maybe 24. I'll go ahead and bump it up. I'm not gonna worry about the positioning. Totally because from little positioning things to improve here, Let's see, this one isn't totally center. That's that's a little better. And then this here again. I want this to be bold uh, I'm gonna grab all my text that isn't white. Let me grab all my text. It isn't like I do want it all to be white here. So come down here. That's not what I wanted. I want this here to change the color, and I've also bowled this text. But this one here, I'm gonna make metallic also, and a little bit bigger will make this 1 14 and I'll bump it up slightly, using my shift just to get a right underneath that. And I'm gonna have this line as a separator. I see. Bring it up like that down a little bit. Something like that. Like a little bit higher right there. Ah, And then I will take this here, and I may decide I want all of you used to be just slightly bigger, so I'll select all those. Go to 16 on those they're bolted. So that's cool. I don't really like having center line paragraph, so maybe I might decide that this is centered up here. That's fine. But all this down here, I may want left the lines of what I would do is I would shift click to select all of this. And of course, that's picking up this background element also. But I can shift, click the background element Owen selected, and I have all of this now and then. I could just do this toe left the line. All this. So a big part of working with documents like this is just learning your way, how to select the elements you want so you can make multiple changes at once. So you know those shift tricks for adding something or removing something from what is currently selected on screen. So you get the idea. I'm not gonna make any more changes to this. Maybe I would, but you could do this sort of tweaking. You may find that you want to move this to another page, but you get the idea building a resume, choose a starting point finders, great templates. If you have one that works for you. Great. Choose that one. If you need to make any changes, go in there and make your customization, and then you're all good to go and you can start populating it. So then, of course, if you're ready to build a resume, you start to fill out your information, make any more little adjustments you need to make along the way. And of course, you have this grid there right now, so it would be really easy to add an image, so I'll just come over the photos. Of course, you would just then just drag and drop because you have that ready to G O. So you could build out your resume really easily. So it's building out a resume inside of Canada and I will see you in the next lesson. 52. 8 - Creating an Instagram Post and Employing Smart Templating Tactics: this'll s, then we're gonna build out a graphic for Instagram. Now, when you start talking about something like building graphics for social media, this is going to something that a lot of blog's or businesses do on a regular basis, and it's somewhat repetitive. In other words, you may make slight changes each time you may be be using different images, different text, but a lot of the time you're gonna follow a lot of the same patterns. And so this is what I really want to start driving home, the idea of template ing and by template ing, I mean, I mean setting up camp A projects a smart way so you can reuse them when you do similar projects in the future and have a great starting point that's going to save you time. So we will start to talk about that. As we get into this, we're gonna be creating a graphic for Instagram here. So I will type in instagram up here again. There's lots of ways to find projects. So Instagram posts or storing this time we'll just do an instagram post. We're gonna talk about an instagram story in the future lesson so again. OK, jump in here. And when you search up here in the way I did up there, sometimes that wants you to choose a template. First, you can choose anyone because once you get in here, it's still going to show you all the templates over here on the left. It just If you launch a project from that top search bar, then it makes you choose a template first, and then it launches the project. But again, over here I'll have all these templates, so I can still decide. I want to change from this. But this is just a starting point that it launched the project with so I could still choose any of these other templates if they made sense. But this is pretty cool. If I ever wanted to do a collage style instagram post because I could get rid of these images and, of course, just drop in my own images. You should know from all the prior lessons how you come in here and you customize the text and you drop in your own images. So what I really want to talk about now is how to set this up in a smart way so that it really isn't acid that works for your business. So let's just imagine that this is pretty cool, because we do, Ah, a lot of collages on our instagram. Or at least we do some collages so that I may just come in here and I may get rid of the images out of these grades and I may keep the grids so I'll just go ahead and all throughout the images. So I'm just clicking on each one and I'm deleting the images now. The Texas is fine. That could just be a placeholder. Of course, I could just change this to something else. If I wanted to be a placeholder text, I could come in here and I could just different graphic elements. But let's say that this is pretty cool. I like that. So that's cool, but that I want to think about, Okay, what other sorts of post am I doing on Instagram? So maybe I'll come down to this next page. Of course. This one that I launched actually has a multiple ones, so you could come in here and say, Okay, what sort of ones might I use here and you could choose all the pages that were appropriate and you wanted to keep. So maybe I want to keep this one, so I would do the same thing where I just got rid of the image out of there. But I'm gonna keep the frame. So I'm gonna delete that I am going to delete this image. And so I like that one. Let's say idle. I don't need this one. I'm gonna get rid of that. I don't need this one. I'm gonna get rid of that. I'll get rid of this. So again, set up the templates that are gonna make sense that you might use. But anything that's extraneous that you're not going to use, you can get rid off. So let's say Okay, this is cool. I have to nice collage templates that I can use really quickly. Now on that, I'll come in here and add just a new page and it's got this colored background which will just get rid of. So it's a white background. And let's say I know that I also sometimes just to single images on Instagram, and so maybe I will have one that is just totally a blank page because, actually, I'll go ahead and put the frame in here Something Roman elements, and I'll just come and grab one of these grids and all drop in a grid and it's gonna fill the whole screen. That's awesome, cause that's what I want. So this I just want to be able to drop someone really easily where I just drop over the image because sometimes I just have an image. Ah, and if I haven't image uploaded here, I could real quickly drop it in and get it to the size I want. And then that's good to go. And then I might copy this page because sometimes I'm gonna use one like this, but I also want to have a least a little text overlay. And so what I might do that has come under my shapes and I'm gonna come under shapes and so under elements under shapes will grab this rectangle, and this is just gonna be another just image single image, but will center this in my design here. And then I just wanted a bit of text so text and I'll add a heading. Of course, I want that to be significantly bigger so I will drag it up. Here is my heading. Grab it, Get it centered up here within that, bump it up slightly. That's cool. And so I could say, OK, that's another one. I will change the color, Let's say the black Texas fine. But then I wanted to show so I'd make this white and I'll take the transparency down a little bit on that. So something like that. So now I have my templates for my collages. I have my templates for single images. And let's say the one thing other thing I know I do regularly on Instagram is I love the Post quotes related to my business or just inspirational quotes so that I could add a new page. And this is one where maybe I jumped back in those templates because I know they have some good ones for quotes and saw search for something like quotes. Now I'll find one that I like. So let's see. Let me just look around and say, OK, this one here is great. Saul, do this one, and that I could bring in my own image and maybe I'll take the transparent see of this down slightly the circle, so you can still make changes. So I'll take the transparency down. So the image shows through a little bit. I'll click on the image itself, and I will get rid of the image and just keep the grid. And so then, if I save this off here, for example, appear, I will call this Instagram Instagram template. Okay? And so I will save that. And so now that that is saved, I'm just gonna riel quick a Go ahead and close this just to show you. If I was coming on here and I decided, OK, now it's January and I'm building out my all my January instagram graphics all at once that I would just come in here. I'll get rid of this and I'll go to all my designs. I'm gonna find that instagram template. Let's see. I may need to refresh this because I just ah, did it. I'm gonna go. It hasn't showed up here. There it is. And so I'll click that it says one of five because I have those five templates in it in here. So I'll just click on this and I'll choose a make a copy. Well, I actually didn't mean to do that. Make a copy. That's fine. You could do it that way because what you wanted to be doing doing is working on a copy of your template instead of the temple itself. So the template itself stays intact Now, the one way I did it is fine. I could just launch it now where I could also click on this. And okay, now it launched a template. So the way I did it first way was actually correct, because I did that. Now I have a copy. And so now if I launch the copy, that's what I want. Because I am working on the copy of the template and this template itself, it's still preserved. Now, if I decide I want to add in some other options, I can come in and I can copy this template. I mean, I can work on this template and make changes so they'll be there for the future. But then when I launched a project, I'm gonna launch it. So I'm working on a copy. That way, that template is preserved. And so now that you have all this stuff and you just wanted to build out your graphics. You could have your uploads folder where you had the images. You could have the text. Ah, copping into a word document or whatever that you could bring over easily. And then I would just come in under uploads. I'll just go under photos here, actually, but you could upload you would upload. So in other words, you couldn't. Actually, I will go under uploads. Just so I have some stuff in here, actually go into folders. Folders is his option for the pro account. Of course, you could just have things under uploads if you were under the free account. And so I just come down in here and you've seen me go into these food folder many times. That's what I have uploaded currently. But again, it for you would be whatever made sense for your business. And I could be like now. Okay, now I'll just drag out this image here, and I'll create this cool graphic here and, of course, coming here and making adjustments. But now you get the idea that now you can come in here and you can very quickly create assets for your business. And then you could come in here and just really quickly build out a whole month worth of marketing. And since you did the work up front, you're not spending the time doing all that designing off the major elements. Those are already in place. You're just coming into your and making the quotes, and you're just making the graphics that you need. So maybe in here I put my favorite quote about ice cream would not be a William Shakespeare quote. I don't think, but you get the idea. So there you go very easily. You could come in here and built out lots and lots of assets and then schedule out that whole month of marketing. So by setting up templates this way, you really start to have powerful assets that give you back time. That's what I want you to dio. All right, I will see you in the next lesson. 53. 8 - Creating a Reusable Pinterest Pin Template: This'll Essen, we are creating a Pinterest pin. Help! Interest is a platform that is really popular within the food industry. So if your food blogger or someone within that industry, it's probably a platform you use a lot. Of course, with all these things I stress to you think about what makes sense for your business, what platforms? Air popular for your business. And of course, the skills we learned within these lessons can apply to anything else. And so I'm really just trying to drive home for you. The things that are gonna make you efficient in terms of working within Camba and then also that workflow that's going to give you back time. That is really what matters. Okay, so I will come up here and again, create a design, and I would just start to type in Pinterest, and there it is. So I will start with this Pinter's pin design amount element, which is sort of, ah, 1000 by 1500. I think that sort of two by three ratio is what is most popular on Pinterest. So this is a great starting point. And then, of course, you can come in within here and you can use any of these Ah, pre made templates if you want to. But what we're gonna do in this lesson is we're going to sort of create our own from scratch. So I pretty much want my image to fill up the whole screen here. So I would just grab a quick grid and put that in its my starting point and that I'm gonna go ahead and grab a photo, because in this case, I want that photo element so I can see how the text interacts with the photo. And I know I'm gonna have different photos each time, but I'll talk about that as we go along here. So I will just jump now over toe uploads, and I will again go, but actually go into my folders, always go upload. But if you have the pro account, sometimes you will organize within folders. And so that is just a handy feature of the pro account. And so in here into this photos thing. I am just going to start dragging something over and that will give me a photo I can start working with so something like that. And then I want a basic text element. So I will click on the text tap here and this takes me over to my styles in my text. Ah, and so I have the documents styles here. If I click on this. Ah, So what I've noticed here is that it keeps bringing in the heading smaller that I want because I set that up earlier in my brand kit. But I did not make a good choice in terms off Ah, font size. So this is just a good chance to review another lesson real quick here. So you have your brand styles here, which sets up you're heading sizes and ah, what font you're using if you just come under edit styles. So if I go under edit styles now, it's gonna automatically take me over to my brand kit. And I will see that this year is controlling how that text first comes in when I click on a heading. And so I want this to be actually much bigger. So let me just come in here and edit this real quick, and I will just choose something much bigger. So it's maybe something like 1 20 then I will go ahead and save that now, it may take a minute to update when I jumped back over. So let me just go to my home here and when I jump back over, it may take a minute up date. So let me just see if I refresh my screen whether that updates. If not, it will just take a second here to update. But you can very quickly go in and make that sort of change too. So you update by the fault, not may have the pause for a second here, but it will update. So, yes, it did update. I just had to do a couple screen refreshes. But now we see down here. If I click on this, I do get that much bigger text item there. So I'll go ahead and get rid of this. When I had previously added here, I don't need that anymore. And so that's just helpful, because now it will save me just a little bit of time because now I have the font sent to this larger size, which is what I use in most projects. And so again, it may seem like a little thing, but if you can come up with these little things where you save yourself 10 20 seconds because you don't have to go through the menu, defined the font you want, and you have the size you want that you can use. Most times, that really does start to add up over time. And we're all about doing everything that can save time. Even it's the little things because those little things are gonna add up. Okay, So back to the project here, I will just come in here and I'll change this color to a white, and I will just give this some sort of placeholder name. So you have This is white, and I'm gonna come here and I'll just give it some sort of placeholder name, so I'm just gonna call it recipe name. Ah, and I also changed my font style. Just so it comes in is bold also. So this is bold, folded font, and ah, let's see. I think most some are speeding is gonna be a little bit longer than that. So my size there might still be a little big, so I'll drop it down, Maybe something like that. And so that's a very simple starting point for a pin. Now what? I'm doing something like this. You hear me? Talk again and again about template ing building out something that's gonna work for you over time. So I want to think about a couple of different ways I might want to style the pin so that I can make it work, even though the photos gonna change each time. I want to have a good starting point so I can make it work regardless off what the photo is . And one of the ways I like to do that is just by copying a page and then building out slightly different styles just so I cover the different situations I might face. So, for example, I don't know whether my photo here is going to have dark colors up here or light colors that may affect what sort of ah text color I want to use. And then also, sometimes they may want a background element behind my text. So let me just go ahead and copy this page Hoops. I deleted it after I copied it. So I'll copy this page a couple of times, and then I was just come up with some variations. And so, to what degree you come up with these variations you got to think about Is it taking more time to set this up in a template that it would actually making the change on the fly? So don't set up just like endless endless options because then you're spending more time than you need. Teoh just set up a few so you cover most situations and so that it saves you time as you come in to use your template and create your final asset. So here's one will make the text black, for example. And then I may go ahead and copy this page out. And then I'll say, OK, sometimes when I have black text, I know that I'm gonna want a background element behind it because it's still gonna be modeled. Ah, with ah the picture behind it. So I'll just come in here and I will add this actually wanted this down on this page, and then I will send this behind the text and I will resize this down, drag it over. Ah, drag it down basically. So I'm just highlighting my text there, and I'm gonna position I didn't want a position that I want a position. This shapes only grabbed the background shape there and let's just move it a little bit. So it's getting my text element when I do this. So let's see. Let's try this again. Let's position this centered within the box, right? Then I'll grab them both and then I'll unclipped the background. They're all group thes two. I still the backgrounds like that. There we go group. So now I have this in a group, right? And so then Now if I come in here and I decided want us resize this, I can just drag that up a little bit, something like that. And then I'll position it. And of course, I made come in at the time and decide I have toe make that text smaller. In fact, I think I do want to make that text a little smaller. Let's drop it down to, like 80 and then I'll need to reposition so on group, and I'll just grab just that text, position it again within the box. And then if I wanted the group home again, grabbed them group and that I could move that around together and I want to change the color. So I just wanted to be white and I want to be a little bit transparent. So something like that. Ah, So the other thing is, Ah, one reason why it's helpful to group things like this Sometimes when you have text within a box because then if I do need a second line she had did not work. Here, let me try this again. Control Z Ah, let's see. Ah, think because my text element goes outside the box here someone on group for a second. I'm gonna come in here and I'm gonna drag this text box. So it's definitely with in It's within the bounding box there. So now if I group on both So let me just grab again Group. And now let's see what happens if I do another element here now you see, because it's contained within that you can ADM or lines to my text in the box will expand to meet that. So that's very helpful because I may sometimes have recipes that go to a second line. So it's these little things. It's these little tricks that can really save you time. So again, if your text box is with Indy bounding box of a shape that it's grouped with. Then that shape will expand with it as you add new lines attacks. So that is helpful. So now that I have that the way I want it, maybe I will just copy the page. And this time I want the text to be white. And this time I want the background box to be black. So little things, little things like that. I didn't get white text. Let's try that again. I failed. Oh, so white text, What is going on here? How come I do not have white text? Ah, let me on group for a second just to make sure I'm getting this text and let's make sure the texas above the box it is. But for some reason, I am not getting way Text Let me check the transparency that layers s Oh, there it is s o everyone. Then you're gonna have these little things that trip you up And don't panic. Just work through things you know about Canada and there is gonna be a logical reason why something like that is happening. So just take your time and you'll get it figured out. So again, the idea here isn't the build out endless styles. But if you have ah, variation of styles that you use, then cover your bases so you have what you need When it's time to come in here and just quickly design something, you want that template. So you put the work in up front, and then when you actually come in to create those assets every month, or whenever you go through your marketing cycle, you want to be able to do that quickly. So another example here. I mean, just create a copy this again. Let's say I sometimes had different fonts here with one of them being a descriptive line and then the other being the recipe name. So then I would come here and let me just grab this box, and I'll just make this Ah, little bit bigger. I'll grab this element here. I will drag it down and then let me just come in and I'll come back of my texts well, at another heading. But this time I'm gonna make it smaller. So something like 56 let's say I want this to be more off a um styled hand, sort of hand written font. It's all coming here and maybe I'll just search for so I could search for something like calligrapher your handwriting. So let's just do this handwriting one see what kind of results I get. So maybe something like this, and I'll drag this up and I will put this in here also. And I'm gonna change my color so again said at the white and don't drag it out. And now I've noticed that it's bigger than I wanted to be. I wanted to be centered, sold, dragged to the bounds of this box. So it's gonna be centered within the box, and I want to be a little bit smaller. So maybe something like 42 and I don't love this font, but so I would go in here and find one that I did like So let me just again type out calligraphy or something like that. So we'll search that and we'll check real quickly. We'll just go through a couple of these or something like that. So let's just say you find the funds you want, and then you're dis really sort of setting up your elements in here and then let me shift. Click both of these together all group those together just positioning within here. And if I wanted to shift and add the background, Actually, I have the in group these first groups duplicate. No, I did not want to duplicate. Want to just grab all these? So this this and this it's not letting me group all those there. Is it cause these are grouped and these are still grouped. Okay, on group grab a mall group. And so now I have this whole thing group together, just in case I need a group together. And I could obviously really quickly duplicate this and set one up with a Why? Quit background. You you get the idea you could make. This is as complicated as you need to be. We not spent endless time. I would just come up with enough variations that you cover your design needs so that when you actually create the pan itself and go through the marketing, when you want to create a lot of pins quickly, you don't have to, you know, spend lots and lots of times doing this course you could do endless things in here. You come in here and you could have a variation where you have a little bit of a border, something like that. So you could come in here and really, really style this out. However you need Teoh. But then when it's time and you have this template again, once again I'd come up here and you've seen me do this before. So this we are being repetitive in this course. But it's just I want to drive home the workflow that makes sense that will save you time. So again, if I save this as Pinterest Template, I come back here under all my designs. Here. Let's see. Is that my Pinterest template? No, Let me just refresh this real quick. So refreshing. It should show up here now. Pinterest template. Of course, I'm going to create some at marketing assets right now, so I will just make a copy so that I am not launching my template itself. I'm now launching a copy of that, and I could come in here now and just start designing the assets I needed. So of course now I might start putting in different photos giving appropriate names, so come over toe uploads Actually, I do that all time. Come over to folders, find the folder or go to upload wherever you've put your assets that you're getting ready to use and then you can just start. Ah, dragging stuff out in here, dragging stuff in here so that you can now very quickly come in here and very quickly start to make assets, and you can go through here and decide. OK, which one is gonna work best for a given image? And you can very quickly create lots of graphics and lots of things to meet your marketing needs. And you're not spending all that time doing the little design tweaks. Ah, that you really want to have done before you start doing bulk work. So you mean you're still gonna have to come in here? You're still going to change the recipe title things like that. But you don't want to be making the little design decisions every time. Get most of those done builders into your template, and then you'll save time. Okay, that's creating a Pinterest pin in Canada, and I will see you in the next lesson. 54. 8 - Creating a Custom Image Collage with Variable Options Built In: and this list. Then we're gonna be creating a collage image, and we're gonna do so by using our own custom dimensions. So in other words, when you come in here and create a design, you can choose any of these presets. But you can also do your own custom dimensions. So let's come in here. And I could change this two inches or centimeters or whatever, but I will leave it as pixels. And let's say that I know I want an image that's going to be twice as high. And so maybe I want something that's 1000 pixels by 2000 pixels. I can do that and I will go ahead and create design. Now it is going to go ahead and still giving me some templates over here, because this is great, because this gives me some good starting point. So I see right away. Okay, Maybe this might be nice for some sort of collage, so you could be doing something where you're doing your own custom size poster. Or maybe you're creating a longer pan that's gonna still go on Pinterest. Just remember, you can start project with your own custom dimensions and once again. Think about Is this a one off project, or is it something where you're gonna want to create multiple projects? Ah, and if so you want to think about Okay, what are your design needs? And maybe set up a template that gives you a few options so that when you do this project in the future and create future collages, then you're gonna have some great starting points assuming you're using this dimensions. And you can also take things and pour them over two different sizes, which I talk about. In another lesson, I talked about re sizing your project for other platforms. But in the here, let's just go and try to build out a couple of different collage style images here that are gonna work for different situations. All right, so right on screen here, I will see if I click on this that this is a grid. Ah, that is a bunch of frames sort of together here. So I could come in here and I could throw out the images and I have this Ah, sort of great. It's a starting point years. I'll just throw out these images and the lead image. So one of nice things about having one where it's a bunch of grits together, as one element is that you can come in here and then you can go ahead and adjust the spacing. Now, when I did that, for some reason, I've noticed that as a quirk from canvas. So let me go ahead and delete these images again. Watch. I have deleted these images. But when I come in here in just a justice spacing for some reason, it finds and put that puts back some of those images. I don't know. That is just sort of a little bug within camera, so I'm not gonna worry about that too much. But again, you can come in here and you can adjust this spacing after the fact. Of course, I may want to get the spacing set first and then delete the images because of this little bug in Campbell. But anyway, so hopefully we'll take care of that. But so I'll just go ahead. It controls E, and once again, the images air out of there. So right like that. This here, this would be a pretty good design. Obviously I would come in here and I would change the text so that it was appropriate for me. Or maybe I'd leave these placeholders and then I could come with each project contains changed attacks, but that's a pretty good starting point. And so let's imagine. Okay, this is a good if I have four images I want to stick in as a collage. But maybe I know that I Also sometimes we're gonna have I'm gonna have more images than that. So maybe I'll go ahead and copy this page. And so then I have another set here. Now, if I wanted to have something like eight images on the page, I'm gonna have to start rearranging a little bit with in here. So I will grab now all this text here and I will move that up to the top a little bit. I will grab this text here. And when you're moving stuff around, you see, I can drag right on here, but any time you can also drag on this, you can click or right on that little move icon. And use that as you move things down. Okay. Ah. And so then if I want these to be smaller, one thing you can do when you have ah gripped like this and everything's together. You can use these handles here to change the size. So I want to do that. So it's a little bit more closer to a square image and let me drag that up right now and see if that gives me enough room. Ah, I duplicate this whole thing now and I bring it down so I can almost fit this in. So let me actually undo that. Undo that. Let me make this even a little smaller so we might move a little bit. Ah, more to a horizontal image. But that's fine. Ah said I'll duplicate that. And again, you're just experimenting around, finding the type of thing that's gonna work for you again, trying to really get that does not lined up. And so that looks pretty good. And so, just like that, I have another option here and in this one here, I could put in eight images. Now let me go ahead. Actually, dragsholm images in here and you'll see how easy it is when you actually come to dragon images. So I don't really care what sort of images I use here But I will go ahead into my own folder here. And you guys are used to me go into this Food photos one. Ah, but this just gives me something where I know have some images. But so let's just drag some in because I really want to show you something here. So I'm gonna drag in Ah, bunch of images and so not worrying about too much what my images are. I'm just going to drag some. And so you see how quickly once you have this grid set up, how quickly you can just come and populate these now, obviously, I would go in here and I would do the little things to resize this and really get this framed out the way I want. So I'm just dragging that out. I'm just clicking and dragging and repositioning. So maybe something like that, again not spending a lot of time just getting it set up. So this is great because you can still come in and you can move stop around these frames, so that looks pretty good here. But I want to show you one thing you can do within Canada and so this is pretty cool and a lot of times you see this on Instagram, where people have more of a stylized look. And maybe also you might do your own color grading where you'd apply some color grading two images, but let me show you sort of the canvas equivalent of that. So I'm gonna keep this copy here cause that's fine. But I'll go ahead and build out another copy here. And so now I'm going to come on each of these and because it's too grids, I only have to do this twice, right, cause this is a set of four and this is another set of four. So if I come in here and I come under filters and let's say I like this epic filter in sort of a styling that does now I noticed I take that back. I thought I was gonna have to do it once for each. But you see, I have to actually get on each individual photo in here. So it's actually kind of difficult to do when it's in a grid like this, because I can really only select one of the time. That's fine. I'll just do this real quick filter epic filter, epic, filter, epic filter. But because because of the work you see I'm doing here, it would make sense to do this ahead of time if you knew you wanted something where you always wanted to apply this style. Because even though I'm only have to click this eight times, if I build this into my template, then what happens is the next time I come to do it and I decide I'm using different images and I drag something in Look, that filter is already applied, so you will not have to apply that filter every time. So it's this little this little so it may seem like a small thing, but it's these little things that add up. So you really want to understand the things that can save you time as you work in camera. Now, the other thing I mentioned is that when I go over filter you see, you have all these presets here. There is actually a way for you to store your own custom preset that you can use again and again. Now I talk about that in another lesson. So look for that lesson where I talk about filters and presets. and you'll learn all about that. But continuing on here. I have a couple of different designs right now. So this is one where I use for this is one where I use eight. This is one where I use eight, but I have the filtered look. Apply to it. And then, of course, you could come back into your templates and you could add some new pages and you could do some ones that air totally, totally different. So, of course here, this just has a bunch of designs here. But so if I did something like, uh, multiple images, I don't know if it's going to return anything, but let's just see what it returns there. So yeah, sure. So there's some other options here, so you could do something like that. And again, you may just have to search around and find what works for you. Or you may build out your own custom ones as well, which you could very easily do. This one has a background, so get rid of that background. So again, I'm not going to go through all this any more than I have already. But you can come in here. You can very easily build these out and then save it. So again, you know the rule here. So maybe I'll just call this collage template and I will call this 1000 by 2000 since that's the dimensions and I would go ahead and save that off. And then when you start a new project, make a copy of that and then you're working on that copy, and you can really easily create new assets again with all these lessons, what I'm really trying to do is just give you the building blocks for success, the workflow that's really going to save you time. So I just come out to this other one real quick just to show you that you could also do something totally custom where you started totally from blank here. So if I come under texts and I say, OK, I'm gonna add a heading. Or you could even go in the text and say, Okay, let's find one of these pre made headings here, and you could use one of these so something like this. Let's say like that I could put that on here, and I'll just bring it up to the top and so again you would change this obviously, to whatever text you gonna use. But let's say you were using that for your title. And then you wanted to put some images down here sort of a grid. So then I would just come down to my elements and I would choose this grid. Now, since I know, let's say I wanted to do sort of two columns. So two columns of images, maybe a couple rows, but two columns. So we just maybe grab this one then would make sense. I would pull it down, sort of toe, have the dimensions I wanted. So something like that. And of course, once you have it like this, then you can individually control the spacing, right? So I also think maybe I'd want to drag the sand. If I hold down my all key, then it'll pull in both sides at the same time and so I can get that spaced out. So sort of like my outside spacing here matches up with my center spacing on the course. If I want to tweet that, I could come in here. Obviously, that would be a way bigger, but I'm trying to get that center spacing. So it pretty much matches what I see on the outside. And of course, once I have that locked in the way I like it, then I can just ault click and drag it out to get my rose. So something like that. And of course, if you're not quite sure if you got that row spacing exactly right? Remember, you have those positioning tricks, so select all these come here and make sure things are spaced evenly. Now, I think Let's try this again. Shift, click and click position. I'm not sure why does not have this space evenly, vertically with the options here. Usually that's an option, but for some reason, with these grades, it is not giving me that option. But I can see here that these are pretty darn close, and so you can sort of eyeball it if it doesn't give you that option. It usually does. I don't know why it isn't, but there you go so very easily you've created another option, and we did this pretty much custom option that we created on the fly so you can see it's not hard to come in here and set up custom projects with custom dimensions and where you drag out and either use the templates that they have and make your customers ations, or you come in and you create something totally from scratch on your own. But then, as you say this out, maybe use something like a title that's gonna make sense. And then you have asset, an asset you can reuse again and again, and it's going to save you time, all right, that's creating a collage with custom meant dimensions, and I will see you in the next lesson. 55. 8 - Creating a Recipe Book (or e-Book) - Part 1: I think in this lesson we're gonna be looking at how to create an e book with camera. Now I'm going to be creating arrest people, Kier. But of course, it is the techniques that matter. So you could create pretty much any kind of e book than made sense for you, for your blog's for your business. So if you're doing something different, that's great. Just pay attention to the techniques here, and we're really gonna start to dive in deep and how you template and build out these documents so that you can add to them quickly so that you can reuse them for other projects . All right, so I'm going to show you a finished result. This is a recipe book that I did in the past, and then we'll go ahead and create another one from scratch in here. But let's just dive in and take a quick look at there this first. So this is just a recipe book I created previously, and this is the sort of thing. It's great. A great asset for your business is something you can give away to get subscribers or something that you could even sell is part of your business. Ah, so I'm gonna go ahead and walk you through it real quick, But let's take a look. So this particular document has a cover page. It has some a table of contents page pages, and then it gets into the recipe pages. And then I'll go into the page manager here, which disease? Four dots down here. You can click the jump in the page, manager and from page Mental Manager. You can see all the pages within your documents. So you see that this is a 20 page document and it's got the cover page, table contents, all the recipes. And then I thank you Ph here at the end. And so you really can create these larger form documents within Canada. Ah, lot of people think you can't do this sort of thing, But yes, you can. Now there may be some sort of things you want to watch out for some techniques that are really gonna help you. So we will cover all of that in this lesson, and we will quit. Get you creating e books and larger form documents like this and no time. Okay, so I am going to go back to my home page, and we're going to launch a project from scratch to see how we go from the very beginning to something like this. So you're always going to start by creating a new design. Now you can use custom dimensions, or you can use any of the template starting points that air there within Canada. And I'll say this. If you're building something out for another platform, like any book for Kindle or for the Amazon store something, then you may have to pay attention to what that platform accepts. What are some of the size, specifications and requirements for that platform? And then you may have to choose custom dimensions and build it according to what that platform requires from you. However, if it's just something you're building from you for your own website for your own purposes , so it's gonna be a P A. Pdf and our give away or something like that. Then you can really decide whether one of these, uh, starting points within Campell makes sense. Or maybe you have your own custom size in mind, so just think it out ahead of time. If you need to research at all what you're creating. If it's gonna be for another platform, you do that. But then you go ahead and choose an appropriate starting point. So from doing this in doing this in the past, I know that Can VA does have an e book cover so I could choose this e book cover. However, I find that I like the magazine templates a lot better just cause they're a lot more starting points. And the more you ah, play around in Canada and get to know Camba, the more you get a feel for what are the templates you like best? Where are the best tamp templates that work for you as starting points? And of course, you can start from scratch. However, if there is a template that's going to save you a lot of time by giving a great starting point than absolutely take advantage of that. So in this case, I'm gonna choose magazine cover and take advantage of the options that they have within that category. Okay, so here we are, within the canvas project interface. And because I chose magazine as a starting point, it is showing me lots and lots of magazine. Ah covers here templates that are great starting points. Now there are different categories within here, so I'll probably jump into something like Food magazine, Since that's maybe gonna make sense for the project, I'm starting. But just keep in mind just because you're creating a food magazine or something within one category, it doesn't mean you have to start within a template in that within that category. For example, if I went down here in Teen magazine cover, even though that's not at all what I'm gonna be creating, if there's a layout in there that makes sense, I can still use that layout as a starting point. I could use a travel layout of fashion layout, so don't necessarily limit yourself to just the category of the asset you're gonna be creating, because it's the layout that matters, not these pictures. I mean, these are mainly categories based on categorized based on the pictures you're seeing year. But fool around. Experiment around because sometimes you might be surprised where you find that template that makes a good starting point. But in this case, I am going to go into the food genre. But let me just say, rather than going in here. You can also search up here and filter based on just keywords. So if I were to type in food here into the search bar and hit enter, then it's gonna find everything that has that food category. It is tagged in that food category. So when you bring up the templates here, if you have these three dots you can see, then it shows you all the keywords associate ID with that particular template. And because food is a key word here that's going to show up. So all these have food as a key word. So experiment was searching by keywords up here, and you can start to narrow your results and hopefully more quickly get to something that works for you. So I'm gonna scroll down here and you'll remember from prior lessons here you can see at the bottom. Some of these are just one page layouts. Other ones have more pages. So if I click on that, then I can start to see the other pages that are part of that layout so I can click on one and have it populate over here. If I want to take a ah sort of a closer look at that page and see the options a little more clearly. Just go ahead and click over here, and it's gonna populate over here and show you a bigger all full screen preview as you make that part of your project. And, of course, I can an eight point time back out of this one and come over and take a look at some of these other ones again. Here's one that's a multi page layout. So if I wanted to click, I could click and see these a little closer and again. So you may spend a little bit of time at the start of any project, searching around and just finding the right starting point and again when you bring up one of these multi page layouts, you don't have to use all these pages you can. If you want to, you can create some of your own. You can use some of these. It's really up to you to build the template. That's the right projects for use. In other words, you may pull somebody's elements may create some of your own. In the end, you're right. Arriving on your own custom solution that is gonna work for you and hopefully one if you have repetitive projects, one that you can use again and again for those projects. So just looking at these pages here, I can see that a couple of these would definitely work if I wanted to create a recipe book . And I like to design a fair amount. So maybe I'll go ahead and I will click that one. I will add a new page, and I like this one. Maybe. And then maybe I might use this one as well. And I think, actually bumped this one up ahead of this page here. And so now I have three pages here. Let's see, actually, let me bump this one up. So that's page one. That's page, too. And I lost my third page. Let me just add a new page there. I think I didn't actually click on third page, so I one of the third page, So there. So now I have this 123 pages in my project. And so I think maybe these air the pages I'm gonna use. So I'm just gonna use this as my starting point and now I'm going to start to slowly build out this template so that it works for me. So you always want to think about what the content is gonna be and what pages you're gonna need, what elements you're gonna need. So I think I want this to just to be a basic desserts recipe book. So any time somebody comes to our food blawg and maybe they visit one of those desserts on our site, maybe all offer them up a free e book that I'm gonna create right now with all of our favorite desserts, and it's gonna have, like, you know, 10 20 recipes. They can get it for free if they subscribe to our newsletter. And so it's just a great way to create a lead magnet to bring people into your business. Ah, to get people coming back to your site. Ah, so I'm gonna create this asset for my business. And so I'm gonna do this with the idea that this is gonna be one recipe book, but also that it's something I can reuse very easily if I want to create new recipe books in the future, that might have be of different categories, maybe not desserts, but maybe vegan meals or vegetarian meals and also the idea that I want something customizable. So if I decide at some point in time, I want to come back and expand and add more recipes to this, I also want that to be very easy. So I'm keeping all these things in mind as I build this out. So it's gonna be an asset that continues to work for me in the future. And so I put in a little work up front. Now it's gonna save me a lot of time down the road. OK, so once you're in here and you have these pages that you've dragged out from some pre pre made templates, this is where you start to make the decisions that work for you. So, for example, title in here. I'll just come up here and I don't mind this font. I could change it, but so I'll just talk about something like desserts. And then if I wanted to fool around and see if there's a fun I like better. I could come up here and I could start to go through some of these fonts. So I'm a charge. I may try some of my sort of brand fonts that I use a lot so things air moving slow there. But I could try that I could come down and go through here. I could try any of these different fonts. So let me just click on this one here again. Things were going pretty slow, so I apologize for that right now. Camera is sort of running a little slow for me at the moment. And since it's running so I will mention again that can VA has announced that pretty soon they're gonna come out with desktop camera and beta. So that will be a really nice solution. Hopefully for some of us that sometimes face slower Internet connections because then hopefully you build a work offline in Canada. And I think that will be a really, really nice change for those of us with slow Internet. So I'm not gonna spend too much time fooling around with this right now. You know what? I may even do control Z on my keyboard to just go back and go back to this original final right here. I think I'm gonna leave it like this for now. I can always change this later, so I'll go ahead and type out desserts and size wise. I think that's gonna work. Fine. Now, I don't want both lines of text over here again. I want this to be really simple, so I'm just gonna control a select all this. I'm just gonna put blogged name. But if I was gonna make something that I wanted other bloggers Teoh to use also, you could type out something like my blawg name, ah dot com. And that way you could share this with others and they'd be able to just sub in their own name like that. So you gotta think about whether you're designing for yourself whether you are designing for clients for others and think about that as you build out these templates. Sometimes when you're making placeholders, just put something obvious so people know what they're supposed to put in there. Of course, if you're creating for yourself, you may go ahead and put your blog's name in there. So for my wife and I, it's actually my wife can cook, humble brag so my wife can cook, and then I think I would make that maybe a little bit bigger, So I'll do something like that and that looks fine. And then this block down here, you know what? I don't think I need that. I don't think I need this. I'm trying to keep this really, really simple. Now, this image here, I could come in here and I could delete the image. Maybe I'll keep the grid that way. I know I could just drop in image in there. Sometimes I like to go ahead and put the image in there. Sometimes you might just leave it like that. So you know, there's a great in there and you can drop in image in either way. It's fine. Whatever works for you just wanted to be a template that you can easily then customize and build out as Ugo. So I'll leave it like that for now. And that's really all I need on the first page. So I'll just move down to my second page here and I see that I actually want a peach. It's gonna be table of contents also. So that is something where I may even step out of this one for a second and I may go into one of these other ones and see if I can find something. So I seem to remember we stepped in here, this page here, sort of woodwork. And so let me hit control Z, cause I don't want to overwrite that page, but I won't actually bring in a new page here, so let's see right here. I'll just put plus toe at a new page. It added it not where I wanted it, but let me just bring it up here. There it is, where I want it now. And so go ahead and bring that. And so that's gonna work, I think for a nice table contents. But I do want to make sure I'm consistent with my fonts. So I'm gonna pay attention to what fonts I have here. That's Playfair. So I may come up here to these and let's see, let's change that to play fair. And this and this actually let me on group these. This will be easier if I own group these for a moment. Someone on groupies on group these And with those ungroomed I will just grab that one. I'm gonna shift and grab this one. I will shift and grab that one. That way, I can change him all at once. Again. Any time you can do something to change, to save time, go ahead and do that. And so this will just be a very simple table of contents. And so I think I will have my table of contents, not have another note and just hold really the recipes and so actually get rid of a bunch of these here, and then I'll grab all of this here, and I'm just going to shift and drag it up so that even with my top and then, let's see. Now, let me come in here. So actually come in here and I'm just gonna call this recipe title and the number is fine because I'm gonna change page numbers later. I can tell you from experience it's best to probably leave your page numbers until the end . And so the one thing I will say is can but does not have an auto page number feature. That would be a nice addition. They don't have that right now, but it's not that big of a deal, and I'll show you that does not take that long. If you want to come in here and add page numbers. So we'll have page numbers here on our recipe pages, and we'll talk about that as we go along. But for now, that's gonna be my recipe title. And then down here, I'll say something like this is a brief recipe description. Keep it to a a couple of lines at most. Ah, I must say three, three lines at most just so that spills over to 1/3 line. So whenever you put in this, put this type of placeholder text in here, you can make it whatever you want. You just want to sort of try to make sure you're covering all the scenarios that are gonna come into play as you actually get into doing the design. So I'm think I can thinking I can always fit my recipe title up here. I can make a text a little bit smaller, find you two, but that's probably going to be OK if I have shorter recipe names, and then I'm going to try to limit myself to just three lines of text here. So if I know that that is basically what it's gonna be, let me just come and I wanna bump this up maybe slightly. I kind of want the actual texts to align with the top of this, which it looks like It's not quite That's pretty good. Not perfect. But I think that's good enough for my purposes. So that's pretty good there. I could make this text go a little wider, but I like keeping the border about the same as it is on this side. So have a good amount of white space. So now, with that in mind, I will maybe group all this for just a minute. And then I will start to drag out some copies, so copy, Copy a copy. Now, I know my spacing is off here. That's totally fine, because we're gonna fix that in a minute. And so 1234567 That's about as many as I'm gonna get on the page. I think so. Now I have the 1st 1 aligned where I want it to be aligned. The last one I have aligned here where I wanted to be aligned. And so now I will describe all of them, and then I can use this position and Aiken space them vertically, so they're nice and evenly spaced. And so now I have a nice, nice page there. And of course, if you're designing your recipe book towards the end, all you really need is this one page here for your table of contents. And then if you're gonna have, like, 14 recipes instead of seven, then you would just take this peach here, come up here and copy page. And then suddenly there's your second page and you can start to fill in the contents there . So I'll go ahead and I will delete that second page for now because we don't need it as tight assed part of our template. We know we can always duplicate that. Ah, as we go forward. So that's pretty simple. And I think I would probably keep it pretty basic like that. Maybe I'd come in here and maybe I will delete these images. So I have just e the, uh oops me undo that. So actually, this looks like it is a three. Let's he delete image. This is sort of one of these, um, grids that has three spots to its. In other words, delete image. This is connected here. So if I came up here and I went under spacing and great spacing. I could change that spacing. Now I forget what it was at the at what it was that by default. But we'll just move it out to something like 15 is probably good. So pay attention, because I wasn't sure at first I thought maybe these were individual grids, which would be fine, but I don't mind it as three year, so you can put whatever you want in their whatever works for your template. So if I thought I wanted four images, then maybe I could do individual individual grids. Ah, I don't always like thes multi grids where you have multiple images link together. But in terms of doing the auto spacing, it does kind of work out nice. And so it's fine. It works for this. I mean, at the end of the day, that's what matters. Does it work for your project and it works, But I think I will go ahead and delete the images out of there just so I have the placeholders and so delete image. And then let's just slide this over slightly, and so that is fine for my second page and I would say table contents. Good to go. The only thing would be doing, actually wanna write table of contents up here? I don't think so. It's pretty obvious what it is. I don't think actually need that in a text. Eso. Then this would get into the individual recipe pages. And so if I were to use this page, the idea would be that this page would be again here. This would be the A recipe name, and then this would be ah, longer write up of the recipe. Or actually, you know what? I think this would be recipe ingredients, So I'm gonna make this the recipe ingredients. So I'm gonna get rid of this block here in a second. But for now, now me. Let me let me undo there. I'm just gonna slide it down for a little bit for a minute. Ah, so recipe name again. So that you always just thinking about what you need with these things. So this year is gonna be my page number, So I would just get rid of everything except for the page number in the corner there. Ah, recipe name. Um, let's see. So that maybe I would grab this text here. Maybe we'll hit control A. And maybe it'll type out, visit the blawg post, and so you can set up text as hyperlinks. So if I select all that now and then I do this hyperlink, I could link out to the actual blood post. Now you'd have to drop this in with each recipe, as you put it in. But by the fall, I could put a placeholder that's just sort of the home page, so that for us, that would be, Let's see, my wife can cook dot com That's just the home page for the food block. So again, ah, do something like that. And that's kind of cool, because if you save your projects out as pdf, any hyperlinks that you have here, they're going to be part of that PDF. And yes, they are gonna be active links, and they will link out to wherever you need to link out. So it's a great way to get people on your site to your resource is ah from just a static PdF, So that is pretty cool. So I'll just make that part of the template, and I will slide that up a little ways than over here. Let me first. I'll grab this. I'll copy this on the slide. That over. I'm gonna make this copy smaller. I'm gonna change it to se ingredients, and I think I'll make it a tiny bit bigger than that. So maybe, like, 21 I will slide it down. So that were lining up with that one over there. Let's see you try that again. Get that spacing just like I want it. That's fine. I think should bring it over this way a little bit. And then this year, I'm gonna do control A and I'm just, like, say, ingredient. And then I'm going to control a control. See to copy that ingredient because I'm just gonna turn this into a list, and I'm just gonna put a couple here and again. These are just placeholders. I will fill this in later as I'm bringing in my recipes with the actual ingredients. So for now, I'm just thinking about things like spacing. How many ingredients from when I need to fit on a page. What size can I make those who, Maybe something like 14. So it's deuce. Make sure it gets all of these and let's change that size of 14. So now I'm just thinking about things like spacing. Do I have the fonts the way I want? Um, is the alignment the way I want it to be, so you can always make changes on the fly as you go. But the idea is, do as much of the work now, so things are pretty ready to go. And so then, once you come in to actually build this, you can room move really fast, have a really quick workflow, and you're saving yourself a lot of time. So it's just a basic recipe page and again, maybe all coming here. And maybe I will take the image out of here, although it's pretty obvious. And also like I look at this, I say, Well, I don't know if I like the white space at the top. I guess it's OK. I might choose to get rid of that, but it's OK for now, so that's very basic. And then this page here would be where actually have my ingredients are not my ingredients , but my instructions. So again I might put the recipe name again. So control a recipe name. And then I will just grab and pull that up to the top. Something like that. And that's about the same distance off this. I think that spacing there so I think I will take this may be a little bit higher. Something like that. That's pretty good image over here is fine. But again, Hall, we'll just throw out the images. So I have that grid there. And then this here. What? See, what fun is that? Glacial and difference. This here is the same again. You don't want to have too many fonts. I would say one or two funds usually is more than enough. Maybe every now and then you'll have 1/3 font. This design sort of has three funds. Um, it's really up to you. I would say less is usually more. Ah, you keep it simple. Keep it to the point. Don't let it become over cluttered. Ah, but these are just graphic design principles that you know. The more you design, the more you realize less is more. So I Maybe I'll just keep this fund for now. But let's see, I will she call this? Ah, I actually want to make sure this is. I'll take that back. I take that back. I'm just gonna grab this year from this page, and I will make a copy and drag it out. And you can drag right it over to the right over to this page. So I will just bring this one down, leave a little bit of space there and instructions, and then that's cool. And then this block here, I don't need any more. This one here. I just want to be that page number, which I think got bumped ever so slightly. Sell me. I can bump it back there. Okay. On in this block here, coming here and both detects. I wish they had numbered list. They don't have numbered list here. Ah, so let's see. So this is just gonna be some basic instructions. So I may actually go to my website and sort of in copy something now that I can bring over just as a placeholder here. And so actually paused for a minute, and I jumped over and I got that some control. A control V. Let's see. All right, let me just drag this up. Now. I just want to separate this out, and I'm just gonna put some line breaks here for myself just so I can have this in a bulleted list and get a feel This is sort of a longer recipe. We don't have super long recipes on our site. So again, I could always have a recipe spill over to a second page. But for the most part, I'm going to try to have all recipes be able to fit on one page like this. So this is why when your template ing, I'm looking at things like, you know, text length and size and things like that. So that's fine. So this is just a very, very basic template, and I think that's gonna work fine so I could do more with it. But I'm not worried about it because I'm just trying to get to that point where it makes a really good starting point. And then, actually, as you I see that I do have this one thing in here were some of my father ended up being a Some of my text ended up being a little bit smaller in there, so let's just make sure that it's all 12.5 Ah, there we go. 12 point text. And so that's cool. And that's good. And again, I can always come in. And as I'm making my recipe, sometimes if I noticed little changes, sometimes we'll save those changes back to my template and then also include those in my recipe. That way, I'm always improving my template. If you see an improvement as you're actually doing a project, go ahead and save that improvement back to your template also. So the next time it will be in there and you're saving that time. So you do that work once, and then it's in there for you next time. All right, so I think we have the basic pages we need. Now we have a recipe page, we have a second recipe. Page has ingredients. This one, of course, has instructions You can drop a picture on each. This one is just our table contents, and this is gonna be our main page here. And of course, I always could do like a thank you page or something at the end. I'll see if I need that. But for now, we do start with these four pages, and I'm gonna show you how you take this. You create a template out of this and then how quickly you can build out a project. 56. 8 - Creating a Recipe Book (or e-Book) - Part 2: Okay, So what I'm gonna do now is I'm actually going to come up here and I'm gonna change my name , and I'm gonna change it from deserts. And I'm going to call it a recipe book template. And I'm adding template to the name just so I know that this is a template. I'm gonna use this as a starting point tow, launch new projects. So I'm gonna do that. And then you can also come over here. And if you have this pro version, I'm gonna go save to folder and you can set up in here a templates folder. So I have some different templates. Voters in here. But if I wanted to create one, that was all new, I could could create new. And I would call this like, um, I'll just call it templates, but you can call it whatever you want. So it's a good idea if you have. If you create templates to create a folder and create all your templates and put all your templates in that one folder So any time you're looking toe launch a project did you do on a regular basis? You go to that templates voter and in there. You're gonna have your starting point now if you do not have paid Kim. But if you have free camera, you may not have to save to folder option, but you will have to design project folders, two folders where you can keep your designs under that free account. And I would recommend maybe using one of those folders strictly for templates. So again, you can stay someone organized and have all those templates in one spot. Okay, so now that the safe I'm gonna close out of this. I'm going to come back to this home page here. I'm gonna jump to those folders where I just created, which I just ah created the new folder and I will find my templates voter in here. So I have all kinds of one in here. But here's that templates one that I just created. And again, even if you have the free account, you can use one of your two folders for your templates. So if I come in here now, I have this templates folder and I have this recipe book template. And now if I click on this, I can edit this and then I'll be editing that template. But what I want to do now is I'm gonna use that template to launch a new project. So I will click, make a copy, and it's gonna launch and remix that project. And so now I'm gonna have that as a starting point. But you can see from the title here copy of recipe books, so I will not be over Be overriding my template. I am now in a different project that is just making use of that template as a starting point. So that is great. Because now, any time I want to create a recipe book, this work is done. And now I can just get to work on creating the asset that's gonna help my business. Okay, Now comes the fun part. We get to build out the project, and this is the magic of Gamba. If you spend that time setting up templates like this, then instead of struggling from the very beginning, when you need to launch that new project, it's gonna be there. You're gonna have that asset ready. The hard work is done. Now you just come in here and you start building. That really is the beauty of camera, But there still are some strategic things you may want to think about as you build out something like this. So I'm just gonna give you a few strategy tips as we go over through here and we start to build this out. Ah, So first, it's a good idea to have your assets organized when you're doing something like this. And so you want to have all those recipe images that you're gonna use Image sort of. Ah, mapped out ahead of time. Don't just come in here and blindly, then go figure out what recipe you want to use. And so you got one. Map it out ahead of time, map out the assets you're going to use. So with that mind, I went ahead and I have a folder here with some of my food blogged pictures uploaded. So what I would do is I would just sort of upload all the photos ahead of time. Once I had mapped out what recipes are one in the book, I would map out what those recipes they're gonna be. I'd probably grab the texts for instructions and texts for the ingredients and have all that radio as well as having, Ah, you know, all the picture assets in a folder, and then you could upload all those pictures. If you're under the pro account, you can upload it to a specific folder. If you're a free account user than you would just upload them all at once. There, as you were building out the project, and so that way you really can just get to work when you're in here. So I'll look for something that I want to bring over as a cover remains. So you could just start drag and stuff over, let it snap into that grid, try out some different images. Of course, you have all your normal tricks where you can come in here. You can reposition that and so just very easily You can just start to get to work on your design here. And if you decide you want to make some changes in here, you can make some changes. I could decide I want this great to be bigger, and I could make this bigger and I could take this and I could drag this up so again, making these little changes here. If I'm doing it, this way. Then I'm making a change just to this particular recipe book. If I wanted to make a change to my actual template, I have to go back to that template file and make a change there. So if I did do something here that I thought I wanted to be part of the template, I'm a jump roll over real quick to that actual Ah, file. That's the template and make the change so that I have that for future. Ah, future projects that I do with that template. Now just hit control Control Z, cause I don't think I'm gonna make that change, just showing that you're not locked into anything here. You can still come in here and make changes. So there's real quickly I would do something like that. And now just a little word of advice. If you're building out something like this with table A table of contents, especially since Campbell does not do that auto page numbering. If you're going to include page numbering here in your table contents, I would not do the table of contents until you build out the recipe pages themselves. Ah, so just let me give you some basic strategy here, and maybe I'll go into page manager here. So just jump into page manager here. And so I could come in here real quickly. And so if I had done my research ahead of time and I realized that I'm I'm going to need, let's just say I'm going to do something that has 10 recipes. So then maybe I would come in here and I would grab these two pages and I would copy only Let me with copy one page at a time. Wanted to try that. Deceive. You would let me copy two pages, but it's only let me copy one page of time. That's fine, because I'll just copy. So that's two recipe pages. 34567 Heat nine 10 And then I need copies of this here. One that's 345 67 Heat Ni 10. Okay, now I do have to do some reordering because I want these two sort of alternate. So let's see. There's let's see, Let's do it this way. Here's the 1st 1 So that's the first combo. This is the second you can is very easily grab and move pages like this in here. So it's not gonna be hard to just come in here and really quickly move around these pages to get this set up the way you want, So boom, boom, Almost there. Boom doom. They're So it took me about 60 seconds, really? To map out all the pages I'm gonna have now, next time I come in and I might actually drop in all the recipe names, and I'd probably write down on the piece of paper ahead of time How I wanted to lay out my book, do a little planning the way you dry a draw wire frame. Before you do a basic design, I would do a little planning where you map out the content so I might map out all the recipes ahead of time. And then I may jump to all these recipe pages next and just fill out the name. And that way I would could take down my page numbers as I did that. And then I could populate the page numbers and then you could go back and say, OK, I have 10 recipes I'm gonna need to table of contents pages. So again, actually count out your your recipes first and figure out how many gonna need. Then you would add that table of contents pages. And so now that's 123 You know, your first recipe starts on page four. This one is on page 68 and you have it all mapped out. So then you can really quickly come in and update those numbers on your table of contents. So it takes a little bit of work, and it would be nice if Canada did have that auto page numbering, but it doesn't. And even if it did, you would still probably have to come back here and add in the page numbers there. So it's not as friendly as it could be. But it still is really easy. And it just takes a little bit of planning, and it's not hard. Okay, I think you get the idea. So I'm not gonna make you watch all this, But let's just walk in to do a few of these pages. So we get an idea of how this works. And of course I could quit out here. Or if you double click on any page, you can jump directly to that page. So here I am of the first table of contents page here. So I would just drag in some images that we're going to act that we're gonna be on the first couple pages enlisted over here. So let me drag and a couple here. And then, of course, you could come in and you could start to fill out your recipe titles. So this one is a cranberry cranberry tort. Then we have some homemade strawberry scream. So we get is called that strawberry stroll very ice cream. And again, if you have something like this where something breaks free of your template And so I would have to make a decision here whether I need it smaller text where I could do something like ungroomed And then I could take this line and I could make it a little longer. And then I have to decide whether that's intruding too far over there on the edge there. And so I would have to make a decision. So you are sometimes gonna have to come up with these ah, decisions strategically, Do I want all these fonts to be smaller, So example, if I go to 14 point, die like that, I probably would want to do that with all of my things. So then you have to ST to strategically come in here and do that. So I'm not gonna worry about it too much right now. I'm just gonna leave it like this closer to the edge, or you could always have it go to the second line also. But you may have to make these little strategic decisions as you get in here if it sort of breaks the mold of what you thought your template was gonna hold. And so that's why when you do lay out your template, try to think out these scenarios. Try to think about how big is this block of text gonna be at most, and so that will save you. Sometimes you get in here. So I would just come in here. I would drop in the page numbers I would drop in these. I'm not gonna do all that right now, but you can just see how easy it is since you have everything laid out just to come in here and find those recipes, pictures and images and just drop things right over, and it's so easy to make a recipe book. Ah, that looks really nice because you're just coming in here. You're just dropping things in your just filling things out like this. So it doesn't take a lot of time, So I'm not going to go through a design All the rest of these pages, I think you get the idea. The hard work is the template ing. But if you put in that work up front, then it's gonna be very easy when you come in here to actually design assets in the future . And that is the magic of template ing. With Camba, it's about saving time in a long run. It's about taking those projects that you do again and again and really creating asset that's just gonna pay you back again and again by saving you time each and every time you use it and help you really create great assets for your business. So the one thing I'll say just to finish up here is then, when you were ready to export this, you would go ahead and you would come down here and you would take this download arrow and you could come in here and of course, you could select some of these pages, or you could select all pages. And one thing that all mentioned is some people I've noticed in forums have mentioned when they downloaded larger camp a project like this, they have sometimes had problems. Now I have not had problems myself. But when I've seen people talk about in the forms, the two solutions they've mentioned are one downloading some of the pages and downloading the rest of the pages separately. So maybe 10 pages and then 10 pages, and you combine those together in a PdF or other people just said, If you close out of your browser and you reopen Gamba, then it seems to work just fine again. I have not had problems downloading these larger projects, but if for some reason you do have a larger file that's like 20 pages, 30 pages, even 50 pages, then maybe just try quitting out of the project, opening the project back up again and then tried downloading again. Or that doesn't work. You could try downloading it in parts, although I have not had this problem, so I don't think you will. But just in case that is a solution. I've heard people talk about. All right. Thanks for joining me in this lesson. And we will move on to the next one. I'll see you there. 57. 8 - Designing a Media Kit from Scratch with Canva: up to this point in this course when creating designs we have started with templates that we found within Camba. Now, that is a great way to save time. But now that you're getting comfortable with these tools, you really are not limited by anything. You're limited only by your imagination. So certainly if you have a project where the designs and camera do not make it starting points, you have to realize that you can create something from scratch on your own. And that's what we're gonna do inside this lesson in this, less somebody we're going to be creating our very own media kid and immediate kid is just a document that provides some information about your business. So what might you include him in the Your media kit will certainly your contact details and then also maybe sort of examples of your work testimonials from your work. Whatever is going to suit your purpose, you have to think about how you want to use your media kid. Do you want to reach out to brands that you want to work with, or do you have brands that reached out to you and you want to be able to give them some initial information to help them decide if you are a good match. So we're gonna sort of customize this ah, couple different ways and then it's gonna be up to you to decide what makes sense for your immediate kid. Who are you trying to work with? What information do brands and potential clients need to immediately know about your business? Those would be good things to put in immediate kit and have it ready so that you don't to create this every time, any time someone reaches out to you where you're trying to reach someone else out to someone else, you have this great asset for your business that's gonna just be ready to go and go out there and work for you. So let's design immediate kit now. Even though I'm starting totally from scratch here in Canada, it doesn't mean I can't take a minute to gather my thoughts to maybe do a simple drawing on a piece of paper on. And that's what I've done here. Someone go ahead to my upload here because I just did something on paper real quick. Took a picture with my phone uploaded to a computer here. And so here is this drawing. I'm just gonna drag it out here on screen. So very simple. This is not great artwork, but the whole idea is just to take a moment, think about those elements. They're gonna be in your project very roughly. Think about how you might want to lay them out, and then you can always make changes on that. But even a very, very simple drawing like this can save you time once you're in Camba and working. So I encourage you to adopt this behavior, if you can, as a habit. Just doing a very simple wire frame. Just a very simple exercise of going through the motions of thinking about what elements are gonna be in your project. Get that down on paper, make a very rough a tap attempt at sort of a wire frame, drawing like this and then proceed with your design. So as I look at this here, I can see some of the different sections and content of what I want to bring in. And I basically see that I'm gonna have about four columns down the page and probably about two columns wide in terms of the things that are gonna be in my project. Now, this is one of those things where Kampe does fall short. A lot of projects, a lot of design software, illustrator, photo shop in design. They have the ability where you can bring up a background great and sort of define exactly how many columns and things like that you want in your project. That is something where camera is a little behind. I suspect that they will make improvements with that in the future. But right now I'm just going to show you some little tricks you can use if you want a layout sort of some spacing and some are rose in your project. Here's a little trick that I use sometimes. So since I know I'm gonna want a little border around my project here, what I'm gonna do is I'm just gonna come over and I'm gonna come under elements, and I'm just gonna go under my shapes here, and I'm gonna click on this rectangle shape here and I'm gonna start to drag down the size . Now you'll notice this. This is new and camera here. As I drag this, I start to see that little with And so it's telling me. And inches, that's 2.3 inches. That's 2.9. That's three inches. And so that's actually very helpful. Remember, this is an 8.5 by 11 project. So what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna drag this down. So I think half an inch and what I want to do is establish these half inch borders on the edge of my documents. Will just let it snapped to the side there and then using the Ault Key as I'm hovering over with my little select their their ault and then grab and slide out with at all key held down and I can start to drag out these little things that are sort of gonna represent the borders. I want my project. And so this one I'll turn this way and again, you see that little helpful guy it again. So I want a 90 degree angles that's perfectly straight. All click to drag one up to the top, and then I will actually create an extra one there by mistake. So let me just go up and grab one of those and delete one this other one here. I'm going to drag down to the bottom and I'll go back to the side here, and I'm gonna drag one of these out just cause I want something position exactly. On that center lines were divide my project. Also, really, All I'm doing here is I want to establish these areas on the edge that I may not have content in just a little bit of white space for the I. And then I also wanted to establish that center line. And so I'm going to do now is I'll just grab all of these and let him come together, and I will group them together. And this is just really a visual aid for me. And so I'm gonna go ahead and I'm gonna take the capacity, and I can take it down if I want. I think only leave it sort of like that so I can see it. But so it's not that obvious, and they never go ahead and use the lock icon toe lock This group, then I cannot move these guides. So what? All this does is just give me a few visual aids and guides. Here is I start to drag things out that are gonna be helpful. Okay. So I can see the sort of the areas I define that I think I might want to be part of this project, so I will just come over to text right now. I'm just gonna go ahead and start clicking text to drag and some headings here. And actually, once I have them in here, I could clean keep hitting headings up here, and it'll create a new heading. Every time I did that, I could also use that all trick where I just ault and drag out Ault and drag out to make copies. And so all I'm doing right now is just very quickly grabbing some sort of headings for the different elements of my project. And then sort of positioning them where I think they're gonna roughly be. We grabbed this one again, move it up just a little bit more here and then come over here, threw himself subheading right below that and again, I can change any of this, and I know positioning. I haven't worried about it too much yet, but it's giving me sort of a rough guy in a good starting place. You could make adjustments as you go here. This heading, for example. I didn't actually want to hitting there, so let me just go ahead and delete that one there. I wanted that to be sort of an image placeholder down there, so I will just come down and I'm gonna go under my elements here. I just want to drag out simple grades. Actually, Just click on that grid there, fills the whole screen by the fault. That's okay, cause I can easily grab these handles and sort of drag that into where I want it and adjust on the fly, and that's just going to sort of be a image place holdover upon a drop in a picture. So at this point, I basically made use of that wire frame image that I drew this, that sort of rough draft image. I don't really need that anymore. So I'm gonna do is come up here and I will try to select that background to delete it. Now I have to unlock this one layer, and that is actually the guide layers. Let me get to the back room layer there, which was my sort of wire frame image. So I select that and get rid of that. See, it's making me unlock that as well. I think I didn't lock that layer as well. So if I delete that now, I can get rid of that out of here, and I'll just drop these back in. So I know how these other guides, but I'm going to turn these way down now. And just so that they're very faintly I need to see them. Ah, but I don't want to distract me too much. You can get rid of those guides to when you need to, but I think I'll keep those for the moment because I'm gonna use them to sort of guide this . I want to bring this actually out to the edge of that. But I don't want to go beyond anything. I'm gonna bring that down a little bit here. This I'm gonna bring down. All right now, I'm going to start working on the other elements of the design here. But you see, just by doing a simple wire frame drawing in at least gave me a start there. Now I could have copied and I should have copied in What? The's headings. We're gonna be before we got rid of that wire frame. But I do remember I wanted this to be sort of about your name, because I'm sort of making this with a blogger and mind sort of as a template media kit template for a blogger. So that could be about you. Could be out about your business that went up there. I made about your name on to make this one be about I get type, get my hands on the right keys about here blogged. Timing is a little bit more difficult here. As I'm recording this, I actually have my microphone in front of me. And so the keyboards a little bit hard to seize services offered. And again, this may be different for you. You're thinking about something that is gonna make sense for you. So whenever you're creating your templates, that's the whole idea. That's the beauty of it. Your ah, customizing something that's gonna be of the most use for you in your business. Ah, so you can start with something else. You start from scratch. Just make sure you end with something that really works for your business up here at the top will call this one. Your log name is gonna be a police hold for that. And the subheading for now, I'm just going to call this maybe something like Media kit Put the date if you wanted to or the year Maybe you're updated it. But I think for now I'm just gonna leave it like that. Now I'm gonna get and I'm starting to think more about the text. What sort of fun choices I want to make. I'm gonna get those thing into things into my design, and then we'll populate in some other things. Just so we want to take this to a point. And whenever you're doing a template you want to think about if it's something you're going to reuse again and again and certainly this template you may Ah, you're doing a media kit. You may lock it in, and then it may be your final document for a while. And then maybe every year you come in and you update that with the most recent information about your business. Ah, your block. Ah, but other documents you're gonna reuse on a weekly basis. So any time you're designing a template, sort of think about how much work you have to put into it to get it to the point where then when you're going to make those changes, you just go drop him in. Obviously, some templates. We're gonna have more things. Feel that we out other ones, they're going to have placeholder images. Ah, so you really want to think about creating those placeholders and getting your template to a point where it's gonna be the most use for you as you go forward with repetitive projects so you can bring it up and then really have a great starting point and save a lot of time? Next thing I want to do is drag out some more background elements, have some rectangles that are gonna show up behind the text here. So I will grab one here. I'm just gonna bring it over. I'm gonna position it so it lines up with that middle margin, but also with the top of my picture there. And then I'm gonna bring it over like that. Ah, I wanna move this around, but let me drag it up for second. Is looking at this text I think that'll do. First is I'm gonna group at this text. So I'm going to use shift, click and group all this text and someone a group that together, and I may even just temporarily lock that eso I locked the positioning of that texas so I don't mess with that for a second. While I'm moving my background elements shape elements around. So I'm gonna go and do that now. And let's see, Next thing I'm gonna do is use my control in my left bracket key. And what I did there was just smooth that layer behind the text layer. So control left bracket key that sense something backwards in the layer stack. So that's why digits now see forward backwards. So again, you can do up here with the position thing or you can also use those keyboard shortcuts. And so now when I drag this down to make a copy of that because I had all the text layers group, I now have all of the background shapes behind those text layers. So when I sent it backwards in the layer stack, it sent it behind that whole group, which is good, because that's what I want. I was gonna go ahead and drag these out again. I'm not worried about getting things perfect at the moment. I just sort of wanna have sort of some background shapes set up here. So we tried to make copies of one more there. Okay, Now, I'm gonna come back to my text here, and I will go ahead and unlock my text and on group, and then I could start to get the text positioning where I want it. So I'm gonna bring this up, and then if I come to the next one, I just want to make sure I get that a line. That line that has my text shows that it's lined up. So I would also take this one here. He's two apps. I'm getting those background margin. So to the point now, where? Since I have this established here and I have the sides established, I don't really need this background layer with those margin guides. So once you've used things and once you've made use of it, you go and get rid of them. So now it's just in the way. I'm gonna get rid of that. What? Did I just get rid off? I'm not sure what I just got rid off. Maybe there's 12 separate lives, But go ahead and get rid of those background layers there. Now, I can work in here without those bothering me. They were helping me before, but then at some point, they become endurance. Something's going ahead and get rid of those. And then I'm gonna position things up here and this element here, I think I'm actually gonna use Altuzarra re sites, The dragon from the center. I actually want this element here to sort of come up on top of this, and I grab this layer and I'll have come down sort of off of it a little bit, too. Something like that. So in Iraq's with the picture, there can sort of making some of these decisions as I go, but that sort of gives me a starting point. Now I want to work with my colors a little bit, so I'm gonna shift click to get these different layers here. Ship click to get those shaped background layers. I might come up here on the color and I think I'll change it to this green here. So ship click. I was able to change all those colors all at once. Um Okay. Now I want my text to be different color. So again, all real quick ship click to grab that text. And then if I come in here, I want to change my text to white text. And as long as I'm in here now, I know that you do not want to use this spot here. I think what I am going to use is I remember this before. This is their robot, too. So if you start to type, something is going to bring up some results there. Well, it should. It's taking its time here. There we go. Roboto, condensed eyes. What I'm gonna use on this and I also want this to be capital letters and maybe doesn't have to be quite that big. So let's take it down to 21 Uh, maybe 20 again when you select tech sizes. That gives you these options here. But if you want something in between, which I think I do, I'm gonna try something like 23. Then you can always mainly type it into backspace. 23 enter and there. Okay, so that's pretty good. But now I just gotta want to come to my individual text elements and that will drag out the box there. And then because I've position him like that, I know that I wanted to be left, aligned, so left aligned, and then drag out, let the lined and drag out. And this one here, this 1 may stay a center line. So I'm gonna all click and drag out from the sides. Can you all click? Something is your re sizing it. Then you're dragging from the center out. Otherwise you're re sizing from the handle that you grabbed. So they grab this handle on re sizing from that. But if I alter, click then re sizes from the center. But for this is fine. Excellent. Like that left aligned this one as well. So we're getting there slowly. Ah, So once I start to do this, I can see that I want to keep these shape elements a little tighter. Someone to drag these up. I'm gonna drag this up. Hoops Control Z, If you accidentally do something you don't want to do control, Z will undo the last little command you did, And that's good. So I think those are all the same size may inch all these texts up a little bit, So if you want very fine movements, you can just use the arrow keys on your keyboard. If you wanted to move something 10 pixels at a time, you can use shift. Plus, you're a rookie. So shift plus a Rocchi's move. Some things, 10 pixels at a time. And remember, just those air keys can move it one pixels that time. If you're not using that chip key eso that's reposition pretty good. I'm going to drop a picture in here. So again, this is where you would upload your picture. But for now, when you're setting up a template, you really just need a place holder. So I'm just gonna jump over two photos. Ah, I may even have something in upload butts just, for example, that when the photos here and I typed in something like, uh, portrait or person, I'm just type portrait and see what it finds so again, slow Internet connection today. So it's going very slow, but so something like this, and then you could just drag something in here as a placeholder, something that you like, since you have to look at this So some of these air kind of wacky but Chinese girl and here and so that's not a perfect image, but it certainly works as a placeholder. Ah, and you could do anything different. Of course, Eventually you want your own image in there, but just something that you like as a placeholder. I have some uploads to ideally again ultimately gonna have your own picture. But for now, just a placeholder image, so that's fine for now. I'm not gonna get carried away. Ah, right now with that part of it again, the idea of template ing is to to get it done. And it is gonna be the thing where you spend the most amount of time cause you're making all those little decisions You're fiddling around. So what? You put the most amount of time into this template ing Ah, and that's good, because then it's going to save you time going forward. The idea is to put in the time up front and that it's going to save you time. Every time you go to redo a project that's the same type of project at the same time. When you're adding placeholder images, you don't think kick, get carried away and spend needless amounts of time. Some was gonna go with that image for right now. Ah, and then I'm gonna work on some of my other text choices in here. I will come up here and I will change this fought as well. And this I want to be nor'wester. I think so. Find that thought again. I just know from doing this before some of the funds, they want other points in time. If you're doing something scratch, you can play around in here and figure out what font you like best. Or you may have brand assets up in your brand kit that you want to use. So I'm gonna do that. And I'm set that little bigger there and again. Just make sure it snaps to the center media kit. Change that Fonda's Well, I think what I want this one to be this one. I think I will use that same I thought that I was using before, so that should show up now under this roboto condensed. Uh, that's fine. Ah, and again making these decisions as you go re sizing as you go and then eventually getting things where you want him, and then you can start the group things together, lock things down so I can see that I want a little bit more space here. So I'm gonna drag and select all of these together and just I'll use my ship. Click now that nudge things down. Ah, sort of 10 pixels at a time and what I think I want. Here's I want some sort of dividing element here just to break things up a little bit from the top to the bottom. So I will go in here under elements. I'm gonna calm and underlines. See, all hell, it's see something like this. Maybe if you're not sure, Just try something out. Ah, so really, I'm just looking for some sort of dividing elements, So let me just sort of center it there. And then again, of course, color. I want my colors to match up. So that's the color and the document there. So something like that starting to bring things together here. Now, about here. These are just gonna be paragraphs here, so I'm gonna start to bring in some placeholder text again. I'm not gonna get everything totally perfect here. I'm just going to set something up that works as a pretty good template so long times what I do. And what designers will do is he'll just drop in dummy text because you really want the I to visually be able to see what the paragraph is gonna look like. At the same time, you don't want to spend time typing out a whole paragraph and have it be something that's gonna be distracting. So ah, Laura Ipsum some ah see only kept locked Florham hips, um, is just the names were for dummy text and there lots of Laura Ipsum generators out there. So here's Lauren if some generator and some of programs now even have a built in. So if you drag out text by default, they'll populate it with this kind of dummy text. That is something again, un improvement that hopefully Camba has in the future, along with things like those grid lines. But we just go ahead and copy that Now again, if you just type in Laura, if some generator you're gonna find lots and lots of places that will generate that dummy text, and so it is helpful when you're working on a project to be some be able to do something like that. So now what I'll do is just text. I'm going to come down here and add some body text. And so I will position this up below here, and I'm gonna come in here and I'm gonna go control A I'm gonna control control V. And now it just piece it in that dummy text that I just copy. Now, again, I don't need all of this, but I'm just gonna size down this text box here. Let's see. Well, let me drag the bottom up here for some reason it's not. So what I'm gonna do is just delete the extra text that I do not need somethingto lead out some of that. And then, of course, I'm dragging in from the site here. I'm just re sizing this so it fits in there and looks like the text is only letting me drag in from the side. So I'm just gonna get rid of the extra stuff because basically, all I want this to be is just some sort of short little paragraph. So something like that, but I need a little bit more in here. I can just copy and a little bit more something like that. And I'll have to think about the speech thing and all of this. And so again, I want this to be just left the line text. So Left line, right, aligned, center lined and camera now even has his ups and option here, which is, Ah, fully justified text. So again, if you do something like that, it's gonna attempt to, ah, line all of the margins, even your right margin. And what how it does that. It's sort of by fooling with words, spacing a little bit. And then sometimes you'll get words that go from one line to the next. Eso center line text can look are fully justified. Text like this can look good in sort of big documents that air full pages and lots and lots of texts. But it doesn't always look good if you're talking about smaller blocks of text. So it's really up to you and your eye to figure out what sort of justification and things like that. What sort of alignment are gonna work best? I think, for this thing, I just won't left the line text like that. That's fine I will also click and drag that down here cause I'm gonna use it again for this body of text here and again. My spacing. If you're not sure, it's nice as I as I drag up and down now it will start to show you. Oops, I did a copy there when I didn't mean to. So let's delete. Ah, So again, as you drag up and down, it starts to show you some of these spacing. I don't know why choose sometimes, and it doesn't show all the time in terms of how much spaces between different elements in your design. So again, Campas made a lot of good. You are improvements. It is really intuitive, dragging out things and snapping into place. But there is still some things that can get even better. Anything. So something like that, it's fine. Ah, think about the text size. I think maybe 12 will be fine. I could go a little bit bigger, but I think that's probably OK so I can write a little paragraph about myself about the Blawg down here where it's ah services offered. I think that's gonna probably just be like a bulleted list. So let me actually copy this block down here. Holt, Walt shipped. Drag it down. But then I'm going to get rid of a lot of this year. This is just gonna be a bulleted list. So let me get towards the beginning here. And I said like this, and then it's gonna have a few different things. So this is just gonna be like services offered. I just want to be the list. Some of the services out here. I could really even get rid of that there on and drag the same here. And I will distract out another one so I can have two columns here. So again, very basic things. I'm just setting up placeholders templates for when I actually go and fill this out. But then, as you fill it out, you can make a few more stylistic changes. And ultimately, it depends on what sort of document you created. You're creating. How many times you gonna reuse that? And the whole goal is to get a reusable asset that's going to save you lots of time. Going forward. Of course. Canvas. Also. Great. If you're doing one time projects like this, were you really gonna spend lots and lots of time to get it right. But ultimately, if you do have repetitive projects, that's where this type of smart template ing can save you loads and loads of time. Who next for Platte? Past clients here. I thought maybe that would just be brands that we've worked with so placeholder for that may just simply be logos or something. So I'll just come up here under elements since I don't have them all right here, Right now, I'm just gonna do a search so logos go in search for that and Cam is gonna bring up something. Actually, I'm under photos. I want to be under elements. I think I think that's where they're gonna have local elements in here. So let me go under here type logo's, and it's gonna bring up a couple of things that I can just start to use as some placeholders. So I would just drag one in here is gonna show up a lot bigger than I want. That's fine. I'm gonna ship to click Ah, shift to constrain the proportions and clicking menaces again were the re sizing where it tells you what size you have so half inch by half inch. That's gonna be helpful as they drag out some other elements here, because then I can resize to the same thing. So doing a couple of different ones here again shipped click half inch. I have pinch Let me do two more just for good measure. Here's another one. So let's resize that down. We get half inch by, have pension. If even if you have something off screen here, you can just resize it down still and then drag it up on screen. And one more this one here, bring that up. She have to reposition slightly. Shift click, drag it down to half inch by half inch. Now if I want to position these, basically, what I want to do is figure out what on what, this one to be roughly over here. I could align it with that age if I wanted to, but somewhere over here in this other one, from aligning to that side, so one line to one side, the other line to this side. Then if I shift, click and drag them all. That's where I can use these positioning to align the tops and to space them evenly, horizontally. So there, that was very easy to do and drag it out like that. Okay, now, the spacing for that is actually a little bit well, more than I want. So I think I'll go ahead and pull this one and a fair amount and pull this one in a little bit as well, and I'll do that again. But see, this is these were these positioning tools really come in handy, allowing you to space things out or if you want. And they like it center under this whole block. I wanted to something like that. Well, just duplicate that by now for now. And that one lined up so something like that. So again, these are all just serving as placeholders. For some reason, that one got out of position. Ah, this is just placeholders for now. So when you're setting up a template like this just doing placeholders if you're working on the final document, that obviously you're working on all the final elements. But when your template in your really just thinking about what's gonna work is that initial template and then as you go forward, you'll drop in things from placeholders. This is actually getting close to being done for just ah, simple starting template. Although I think I'm gonna add a few more elements here and spend a little time just to work on those little details because there's little details that take time. Those are the things you want to repeat every time you do a project. So it's something that's repetitive. So something like a media kit may not be a great example for something where you do a lot of template ing, even though you may update it a couple of times a year. But if it's something like a Pinterest graphic or social media graphic where you're gonna be doing it again and again and that similar format, that's where spend time on the details up front and that templates so that you don't have to do it every time. Ah, for this year, I want to be able to see through slightly to the graphic behind, so I think we'll just lower down the visibility of that to maybe, like, 98% looks good. This text here, I'm gonna make smaller so we'll try 12. That's definitely a little too small. So maybe like 14 let's go ahead and control. Eighth. This is gonna be your name. Let's make that bold. Okay? Your name so bold is there we go and we'll make a little bigger 16. And then we're gonna go ahead and fault to drag down. This one here is gonna be Let's liked all this no longer wanted to be bold. Wanted to be a little bit smaller. Control A We don't want it to be capitalized. We want to be, uh, name no caps name at gmail dot com. So obviously, if you were doing this for yourself, you would probably go ahead and drop in your information, because that's not gonna change. But just that since this is something I may make available to other bloggers, I'm dropping in. What makes the most sense for this template if it's something to share with others, I just want basic placeholders here. If it's something where you're creating something solely for yourself and obviously drop in what makes sense, So this might be like phone number. So let's just put in some random digits. So that might be phone. And you could style eyes this as much as you want. Um, so that and there I think I want a sort of a bounding box within here. Grab all this text and just slide it down slightly. For the moment, I'm gonna put another rectangle within this I think I want, like, it's sort of an inner stroke. So I think for that if I come over to shapes eso, elements, elements, I gotta clear this logo search. And so again, figuring out worth stuff exists in camera Just takes a little bit of time. Actually, Don't want to click that on teams I want don't screen. I wanna see all So again, the more you work in camber or any program, the more comfortable you're going to get. So I want this to see sort of the abounding box within here. The problem is, if I resize this, it's just too thick. So again, if you remember this trick, which I think I went over earlier in the course Ah, if you want to resize the width of the line there, that stroke, that's when you drag in from the corners, right? So dragon from the corners until you get the thickness you want and then drag out from the sides. So when you drag out from the size, it re sizes, but it doesn't affect the thickness of that line. And then when you're dragging from the corners, it does. So I'm just using ship. Plus, my arrows sort of move this up and again, I want to be even thinner or something again. I'm gonna drag from the corners and then sort of hard to grab. Sometimes it's hard to see that that little move their radio area, even in the center. If you're not, if you click on another element, it could be problematic. But just clicking in here lets me grab and move that. So I think I have the thickness, roughly the way I want it now. Now it's just about positioning. So I'm using my arrow keys there, sliding out there, lining up there, This one here roughly like that. I just want that sort of inner stroke there, sort of for a graphic thing. Now I can sort of reposition. He's a little bit better. And with that framing element, um, so it's having having trouble selecting behind this. So what I might do for now, for the moment is lock this now with that locked. Well, take that back. Still can only select that when it's locked. So having trouble getting and selecting this thing behind here. I want us like this text. So this is where we have to remember that keyboard shortcut and actually in Campbell. Now, if you use the tab key on your keyboard, it is thesis Elect. Next thing. So if I do tap now and just start to tap through, I'm gonna get that text eventually. Let's try it again. That's going through all these elements here. Let me just try. I'm trying to get to these texts. Ailments. Course, if you really do foot there, we dio. But so it took a long time to get there. I also could have done this. I also could have taken this box here and since it's only getting psychological, just moved it out of the way for a second. But really, what I'm trying to do is get to the positioning of this text so I can position a little bit better. And I think I do want to make this a little bit bigger, this one here, or maybe come in with this one here and I'm gonna change the color, Maybe make it a little bit of a gray color. Not that great. Just something there just to differentiate a little bit. Ah, this here, the phone number, text drag that up, going to spring all that together. So I have room for some social media. Um, Icahn's there may be we're pushing it a little bit, but again, this is where you can resize all of this and deal with all this differently. I'm not gonna put that back yet since it was being sort of problematic. Sometimes when you get things like this and you and you can't select the things behind, they sort of get in the way a little bit. And you have to use that tacky to select next, or you can even move it out of the way for just a second. Ah, so I want to think about the positioning of all of this first. So let me just take my background rectangle here, and I'm just gonna grab and move this rectangle. I want it sort of center and then maybe, like 50% on a 50% off. So that's pretty reasonable. And I have social media icons And this is where my brand style guy, They do have those over here. So I would just grab a couple. I think I just want four. So, Control, see to copy those. I'm gonna come back over here. I'll use that Control V. It's gonna place those in there. I will drag them down. I will shift click to reposition slightly and again. This is an element that normally I would group together. So think about what you want a group in what you want. Don't wanna groups as long as they have been highlighted right now. Now would be the time to get group and then remember, whenever you do in a group like that And if you want to, uh, feel with something in inside the group, you couldnt group it. But you could also just double click, and then I'm in within on the one element within the group. So I double click that I'm dealing with that, um, my house ready again. So maybe not quite working the way I wanted to. So, actually, I take that back. The double click didn't really work because I on group t 58. 8 - Class Project - Share a Design: welcome to another class project for this project. I just want you to share a design. It can be anything you've created in Canada. So in recent lessons we've looked at how to create a Facebook cover or resume and instagram posts, Pinterest, images, images, clauses, media kits. So it really could be anything at all. Could be one of those or could be something else. You've done some asset you've created for your business. And if you haven't, if you don't have anything, you go ahead and you can take the time. And this is a good chance to go back and create something in Canada and then go ahead and share that final design within the class project section of this course. Just go ahead and download a J pay and then upload it right to the class project selection of this course. And I can't wait to see what you create 59. 9 - Intro: Animation, Audio, Presentation, and Video Editing/Recording: Hey, This is Greg, your course instructor and welcome to this newly updated section of the course. We're gonna talk about the latest and animation within Canada. We're gonna talk about the latest and video recording and video editing. The ability to record yourself, the ability to record your screen, the ability to record voice-over. We'll talk about presentations, stability to give presentations, whether it's a live presentation or maybe it's something that you're going to stream later. Or maybe you just want to do a screen recording and voice-over for a YouTube video. We're gonna talk about all of that. These are all areas where Canva continues to make a lot of updates. I wanted to make sure I jumped back in there and we covered all of the latest features because some of these features are think, are really going to allow you to take your content creation with Canva to the next level. In fact, what you're watching right now, this entire intro was recorded and edited within Canada. I'll show you how you did that. We'll get into all these new features. So let's jump right into it and get you up to speed. 60. 9 - Switching Between the 2 Project Interfaces: In this lesson, I just want to very briefly talk about the two different project design interfaces that you might see when you launch a project in which you start with is going to depend on what type of project you launch. However, there is a little trick. You can switch between those projects interfaces within a project very easily. And it was something that tricked me at first and I miss that it was there. So I just want to make sure you know, it's there as well. Just to show you what I mean, first one, launch a blank video project. When you launch a blank video project, you get this usually interface here. And this is the new video editor in Canada where you get this timeline along the bottom of the screen. If I come in here and I come under templates, I'll just real quick find one that has a few different slides and add one to the channel. If I cancel, let me just grab this here. I'm going to apply these five pages. And you can see that as I do that here, It's gonna take a moment to update. But as I do, each of the different sections here within this video has its own little slide down here at the bottom. And I can just scrub through and see the different parts of this video of my design and with this video editor which I'm going to talk about and one of the upcoming lessons, it just makes it more intuitive for working with video. You can very easily come in here and change the duration of a slide just by dragging. There's some other little tricks you can do. You have an audio track here which you can double-click on to expand, you can easily add more audio tracks. So working with audio and video, this little video editor timeline is very helpful. However, let me just come back to the home screen real quick. If you launch a different format where Canada doesn't think it's natively going to have a video with as part of it. It's going to give you a different user interface. To start. This is the user interface when I'm just launching a poster project. And we'll see that I don't have that video timeline along the bottom now. Now I just have this ad page. And if I add pages, then I can scroll through the different pages of my design sort of vertically, just by scrolling up and down the page. Now, in some of the future lessons, you might hear me say, Hey, if you want that video editor, you need to launch a format at the beginning that Canvas thinks is going to have video or audio, then it'll give you that video timeline. Well, that's actually incorrect. I actually got that wrong. And thanks for a student for pointing this out because this even tripped me up. To begin with, I did not realize that there's this little hidden flyout menu down here, this little triangle which you're gonna see at the bottom of the screen at, at anytime. If you just click on that, it's going to switch you to the other interface. That video timeline just exist down here as this little fly out interface. I can go to my video project now. And I have the same little fly-out timeline down here where I can just close this. And if I close this little triangle here, then suddenly let me just click on it. Then suddenly I'm in this page mode here. You can work in these different modes. If you'd like to vertically be able to scroll through your pages, you can do that. Just be aware that if you wanted, then start using some of those video editing capabilities. If you want to work with multi-track audio, then you're gonna need to use this flyout menu here, because this new video editor here, where you get the slides and you get the timeline is very helpful. Being able to work in his timeline mode just makes it easier when working with audio and video. So just keep that in mind and I'm gonna talk about everything you can do with video, the video editor, and the audio in upcoming lessons. But in this video, I just wanted to make you aware of this little fly out menu. So it doesn't matter what starting project you launched with that is going to affect maybe what you see a first initially, but then you can very easily change between these two different interfaces, the video interface. And then they sort of original interface where you get the vertical scrolling just by using this little fly out triangle at the bottom. So just click on that to either expand or hide that video timeline. I hope that helps and I'll see you in the next lessons when we talk about All About video, all about audio, all about presentations inside of Canada. 61. 9 - Utilizing Animations and Animation Options in Canva: In this lesson, we're going to talk about how you can use some of the pre-existing elements that you can find within Canva. Just to really live in up a design and bring it to life and make it maybe a better piece of content for your audience, for whatever you're trying to do on screen. I just have a very simple Mother's Day graphic here. This was a pre-existing template that I just found here under posters. But right now it's just a static design. It's not gonna do anything. However, we can commit here and we can animate it. And Canada now has this Animate button where you can click on the page itself and click Animate. Or you can click on individual elements, then you have an animate button for the individual elements. So if I were to click on the entire page here and I click on animate, I get all of these options now some of these options with the crown, those are pro options that lets you know you have to have a Pro account to get that option to work for all these other options that don't have that crown, those are available to free users as well. So you can just roll over the different elements here and you can get a preview of what that animation is gonna look like. For example, if I like this pop here, I can click on that and it's going to apply that to every element on the page. And now you can see that suddenly I have this 5 second here to show me that this is going to play for five seconds. And we talked about that in the last lesson, how they're two different interfaces you see based on how you launch your project. Since I started a more traditional static piece of content here just by saying I wanted to poster template. It's giving me this view where I don't have that video timeline, I just have the page timeline, but you can still build this out into a video and it's giving you the page timing up here. Now, if I wanted some of these elements to do something differently and not do that pop, if I click on each one right now and then I go in under Animate by clicking on that and then clicking up here on Animate, you can see that we can come in here and we can set individual elements if I choose a different one. Now suddenly I'm doing a different animation for this. So let me just get a preview of the whole thing real quick. And we can see that this one does something slightly different, I believe there. So let's close that and let me just click on it again and see now it says neon. If I click on this other one, it's just got the animated button because I didn't apply an individual animation to this yet, but it does have that page animation applied to it. I recommend that you either individually do the different elements or you just do the page elements for everything. So if I go ahead and remove this here by clicking on that, and then I can remove animation. It's still should have that page element applied to it. If I do play, will actually this one is static. Now, you have to be a little careful. What I can do right now is if I just select everything and I just come in under page animations, I don't think I had to even select everything, so let me just select. But if I just select the page, it's got the pop applied. I can remove it and then if I reapply it or maybe I choose something different, maybe I'm gonna do this. See what else we have down here. We have baseline. Check these different ones up here. Try to scrapbook. So if I wanted something like that, That's pretty cool. If I could apply that. And now I've applied that to the whole page. So again, I can preview it right here and see what the animation is going to be. Now, let me mention one thing that's very important. Recently Canva has announced an update. What happens right now is actually let me add another page to this. This is going to become more apparent when I add another page here. I'm going to add another page and let's take this design. So let's take this text, maybe Control C on a copy that text control V will paste it on this page and let's write out some texts on this page. Let me just drag this out a little bit. We'll drag it up, position it in the center up top here. And we'll do something like thanks to all of the moms out there. You you are the best. Okay, So this is just for example, how you get add another page to your animation, another course, the other part of animations is you can bring in those pre-built graphics. You have the ability to animate elements. Now, you can animate elements, you can animate text. So if I come under this text here, and I come under here, I have text animation options. If I click on animate, text animate, animate options and you have some slightly different one. You have this Typewriter effects, so I'll choose that. But again, you have to put a same ones you have for the, for the elements themselves on the page, but then you have some slightly different options also that come into play with texts. So maybe I'll choose this first option here. Again, the ones with the crowns are sort of Canva pro elements and then the other ones are available to all users. Now I have this animate option here, but then remember, I can search for some of those pre-built element animations as well. So I could use my backslash magic or excuse me, forward slash magic. So what I did there bring up this search box is just tap the forward slash on my keyboard. And that brings up this search box here. So if I type in something like fireworks animated. And hit Enter. Then suddenly I'm getting all these different animations here. I can scroll down until I find when I like, I like this one, click on that. And then suddenly I can bring that into my design. Again, I could've also searched over here by coming to elements. And if I type something in here, so if I just type in like love or something like that, I can hit Enter. But then if I want to filter that to just animated elements, I can click on this little filter icon, come down here, choose animated. Come back over here. I wanted to digest speed graphics. So again, lots of ways to filter down your search. And then I have these other elements that I can grab and put something in here. So maybe I like these hearts. I wanted to bring that in. Let's just size it down. We're just going to put that up here. Now we've added in a couple of simple animations here to go along with our, with our page animations that we're doing with the Animate button up here. So if I play this whole thing now, we're gonna see it starts with that first page and then it'll cycle after those five seconds. It'll go to the next page and play that animation. Suddenly we've gone from something that was static to something that's like a really cool animation that's going to sort of catch your audience's attention a little bit more. So you definitely want to take advantage of these really easy to implement, implement animation features in Canada. Now, one thing I started to mention before, well, first of all, if I wanted to change the page timings, I can click on a page and I can come up here and I can make this page stay visible for longer. I can make it visible for less, for less. So I can come in here on each page and I can still change the duration that that page is going to appear on screen and my final video. The other thing that I was gonna mention is when you get into these page animations and you get into these element animations. So in other words, on the page or on the element are on the text. You get the Animate button up here somewhere. When you come in here and you apply this right now. Right now it's a little frustrating because sometimes when you're building an animation, you need go from slide to slide. It'll animate both when it comes on the screen and then it'll animate as you leave the screen, there are situations where maybe you only want it to animate as it comes onto the screen. And you don't want that animation to play as it leaves the screen. I just wanted to jump in in the middle this video just with a quick update since I published this update, Canada has gone ahead and added those additional animation options to my user interface. I just thought I'd jump in and show them to you real quick. Here we go. If I click on this flower here and I'm gonna come up here and I'm gonna go under animation. And I have this tumble animation set, but now you have these new options. You can have it animate both on the entrance of the page. Or you can have it just selectively animate when the page loads on Enter or when the page exits on exit. And that's very helpful because you're not always going to want each of these animations to play as the page loads and as the page transitions to the next page. And that was something can be users were given feedback on. And so Canada has listened and Canada has made that update. Now you can have it do one or do both. And then you also have this intensity slider, which is also helpful because this can make the animation play faster or slower. Now I can go ahead and I can drag this intensity up and down. For some of these, it's gonna say speed or it's gonna say scale. It's going to be a little different depending on what sort of animation you have. For example, if I do rise and now I click on this, now suddenly I have the option of direction. Do I want it to come up from the bottom or I don't want it to go down from the top. So suddenly you have speed and direction where before we had intensity and sometimes this is also going to be scale. You're going to get these different options within here. And there. Just very helpful when it comes to doing these little animations to this page. For example, if I do both and we hit Play, now, we're just gonna watch this flower here, since that's what I have it apply to. Now we're gonna see it drops in. It has an animation at the beginning. And then here when it transitions to the next slide, it also plays the animation. However, if I come back and say, Hey, I just want this flower on the page to start with. But then I wanted to animate as the page transitions to the next page, then I could come in here. And instead of both, I could do on exit. And if I wanted to speed to be a little slower, I could drag that slider down. And now if I go in and play this animation again, you notice the flowers just there. It's just static when the page first loads, but then it has a slower transition at the end of the page. I'm not going to talk about anymore about that because it's pretty intuitive. But I just wanted to see you in C. Have you see it in action? Now you have these different options. I will actually give you one more example. I'm gonna talk about this watercolor color example in an upcoming lesson, how you build something like this. But just for example here clicking on this, that you can see how having all these directions can be very helpful. Because right now I'm using it to animate this balloon or to the right across the screen. But maybe I want it to rise up in the air. So now I'm using this to make it rise up. I wanted to go a little faster than Suddenly I can change the intensity is going to be writing rising faster. If I take it slower than suddenly my animation is going to move a little slower. Maybe I wanted to be going down so I could change the direction to down. Then you also have options here. Where if you do this scale option, then suddenly you can change the scale and have it go in and out. So with this, I could actually make it look like the balloon was going backwards, sort of floating towards the mountains. You can get really playful with all these different options and just having this ability to do in, out on the entrance of the page, on the exit of the page, things like scale and direction. All these things are very helpful. I'm just dropping this in here as an update that now when you choose a page animation or an element animation or text animation, you now have these options to tell Canada, hey, I want that to be at the start of this slide or at the end of the slide or both. So very helpful options, make sure you check them out. So take advantage of the pre-made came Canva animations like all of these that you can search for. And then also those page texts and element animations that you can apply easily just by clicking on element, clicking on the page, and then going under that animation menu. Now if I'm clicking back on the page right now, it's giving me, instead of Animate, it's giving me the name of the animation. So just know once you have something applied, you can see what it is by clicking on the element. If there's nothing applied, it's gonna show that animate button. And again, if I come on the page, it's doing the scrapbook. If I wanted to clear that I could come in here, I could remove it entirely. I can search around, I can find another one that I like. And I can use these arrows to make sure I'm seeing all of them. And then again, you can click on a new one and try out a new one if you want to see the whole thing. Hit play up here and you're gonna get to see both pages of your animation. And then when you're ready to go, you can download and you can down this whole thing, download this whole thing in video format. That is sort of animations inside a canvas. The new animation options for texts, for elements on the page or for the page itself. And then also the ability to search for and find animations within Canvas. Huge library of elements. Take advantage of all these features and start to make designs that pop a little bit more by using these animations. I mentioned one other tip I was going to give you. I'm gonna save that for the next video. Just an idea on how you might want to organize things. So if you do have things you'd reuse again and again, you can start to save time. 62. 9 - Organizing Your Favorite Animated Assets: In the prior lesson I told you I will give you an organization strategy for organizing your animated assets in Canvas so you can find them faster and future and save time. So let's do that now. Let's go over that now. So first of all, when you're searching for elements and you bring up this Elements tab, if you ever find elements that you like that are static elements, for example, I have searching for heart here, and I can come down here. And so if I'm going through these and I suddenly decide who I like this graphic here. If you click on these three dots, you'll get this menu here and you can click on this star option. And it started. And if you click View when this pops up, it'll take you to your Start folder. But let me go back and show you where that starred folder is. So I'll just go back under Templates. So if you start to store some of your favorite elements, and then you can come in here and you can scroll down and you'll see this starred option somewhere here, over here on the left on your menu here. And you click on that, and it's going to bring up all those starred icons. So again, if you find graphics photos that you like and you use those three dots, Let's try it with photos. So let's come under photos. Let's say I like this banner here, come in here, click star. Again, I would recommend doing this just with elements you think you're going to use again and again and your marketing. Or if it's something that you want to start temporarily because you're working on a project and you want to have a star and you're gonna be using it in multiple pieces of content. Go ahead and do that. Then when you come down under here and you come under starred, you're gonna see all those elements. Now, that's good news. The bad news is if I come back under elements here. And so let me go under elements and let's bring up something here. Let's just type in fireworks. When I bring up these graphics here, all of these here, I can add these to my favorite. But what happens when I start to come in here and I start to look at the animation. So I'll apply the filters. I click the right thing animated apply filters and I want us to be graphics here, all these animated items now. Now if I try to click these three dots and go in under one does the animations. You'll notice I can't store that. I can't start animated elements. So what do you do then? Well again, you need to decide how often you're gonna be using something. If it's something you really don't think you're going to use more than this one time. Absolutely. Don't worry about it. But if it's something you're like, Hey, I liked this animated fireworks. I could see myself using this again and again in a social media posts. If it's something like thumbs up button or something where you think you're going to use it again and again, then I might recommend creating a different camp of project, a blank project. In that blank project, drag in and store and organize all those favorite elements. Let me show you what I mean. I'm gonna go back under my homepage here and on the homepage if I click on My Your Projects tab. And then from there I can go under my folders. I've created a folder here called favorite animated assets. And if I click on that, I just have one collection here that I created. But you can create a name one. So wherever you see appropriate, maybe you have favorite social media, maybe you have favorite for marketing campaign x or whatever it is you're working on at the time. Whatever works for you, whatever it's going to save time for you. And then within that, I'll go ahead and click to open this up. Now I have just favorite animated assets. And within this particular example project, I went ahead and I created a table content just so I knew what was on each page. And so I have these confetti ones that I like on the first couple of pages, and then I have some fireworks. I have some social media related ones. Here are just some heart related ones. If you set up a project like that, then it's really easy to just come on here or Control C if you have another project that you're working on open. And then I go back over to that page, click on the page, hit Control V, paste it right in. Again. If you set up sort of a file like this, and you store all your favorite social media assets. And again, not just social media, but whatever animated assets you think you're gonna be using in your marketing again and again, and you set up that file, then you can open that file when you're working on a particular project, that particular template. And it's really easy to just control C to copy it. That would be Command, Command C on a Mac and just paste it right over. That's a really easy way to do it. And it gets around that problem of not being able to use the three dot method here in knots and star something. If it's just the graphic or a photo, then you can go ahead under here. Let me clear this filter for a second. Let me clear filter. Clear all. Let me clear those filters. And if it's just a photo like this again, then you can come under here. If it's a static element, you can store it. And then you can use the method of just bringing it up right here. And then it's really easy to add stuff to your project that way. But for videos and for these animated assets that you can't seem to star, you can use that trick of setting up a folder. And within that folder, you can have a project that's just titled whatever's appropriate, favorite animated assets. And then if you open that up, you have an easy way of grabbing something really quickly. Control Z, come to your project that you're working on, Control V to paste it in, move it around, use it however you need to. Okay, That's just a few tips on organizing your assets, especially animated assets. You may need to use this trick of creating a project or multiple projects and organizing whatever assets you need to that you're going to use again and again. Again, I would not put time into this sort of thing. If you don't see yourself, we're using the same assets. But if you do see yourself, we're using assets and you don't have to search every time to find those assets. It might be worth you spending an hour one day and really searching for those assets that you're going to use again and again, put them all in a project. And then you can bring that project up and easily find and access to those elements whenever you need them. Okay? Alright, talked in the next lesson. 63. 9 - Building Smart Templates: Before we go on and talking about the new video editor working with video inside of Canva. Let's talk one more time just about using a templating system and creating a template that's reusable as another way to save time whenever, wherever, whenever you're building out your animated content, whether it be social media or some other platform. For this example, I'm just going to type in Instagram real. So let's pretend like you did a lot of Instagram Reels and you sort of reuse some of the same element. So when I was just searching there, whoops, let me go back for a second. What I accidentally just did was search with this. When you're searching now you can choose from your templates or your projects. I wanted to be searching under templates. I was just under your project. So now if I start to type in Instagram and give it a minute, it's going to have Instagram rail. So I'm just going to choose Instagram real to launch this project. Let's talk about this. Whenever you have content where you're recreating similar content over and over again for your audience. You want to then start to think of a way to have a template built that's reusable where you can just drop in content. Now you can be able to just drop in one thing. Maybe, but maybe you have multiple elements that are going to change each time. But the point is some of the work You're not going to have to redo again and again. So you will save time. I'm just going to start by launching any of these projects. We may come through and just find a different template to start with. That's the first step, is come in here, launched a project, launch a blood-brain plot project. Find a template. But once you're in here, you can search even farther within these templates. If you had something that was specific to your industry, like maybe you were florists and you did all kinds of stuff. With that, you could come in here and you could find a template. Of course I'll choose this one here. Even if you find something that's not in your industry, it may be something where you can still customize it to fit whatever you do. Don't roll something out and use whatever keywords you need to search for and find a starting place. If you don't find a starting place to just start from scratch and start creating a template from scratch. But so let's imagine even if your Instagram real was just one slide like this. Even if it was just one slide where you were going to have a video playing and it was going to give you some giveaway that they can link into some some call to action where they could go to your site and enroll. Even if you were doing something this simple. You still maybe you want to come in here and customize this with brand colors. You have some brand colors or something you could pull up, go in here, and change this color to, let's make that a white. Again. These little changes that you could make in here, just to go ahead and start to make it be something that would be more reusable for you, something that's gonna fit your brand a little bit better. So even if it was as simple as that, Let's make this button white. Free class, whatever. Again, you're coming in here, you're making these little changes. And then just, you can see here this is just a frame, so I could actually detach this video from the frame and we can see that it's just a frame. That's where maybe I would leave it like this as my template because then whenever I'm creating new content, I can find my video, I can drag it in. And then this would be what would become my Instagram real. But again, you're adding in your custom colors any content that's gonna be something that's gonna get re-used each time you use a template. If it's something like this video here, you can detach it and throw it out because you don't need that. You just want the frame there in place. But again, come in here and let me just show you actually I changed the color of this text. This is something that's new and Canada, I don't actually know if I have this feature yet. I just learned about this the other day, but if you come in under text color, I don't see it now, but let me just show you by clicking on this green here of this background. If I come in here and I change this green, I decided I wanted to make this green, this light gray. Actually, let me let me undo that because it's not given me the option they are when I'm working on the background, let me just add a rectangle real quick. I'm gonna hit R to put a rectangle temporarily on screen just because I want to show you an example here now I think it used the same color that's already there, which is good. Because if I was going to come in now and I was gonna click on that, and I was going to change it to this color here. Then suddenly I get this change to all button at the bottom. And I can just click on this once. And it's going to change all instances of this color to this new color. And so it changed all the colors that were in there to that color. I'm going to hit Control Z and undo that because I don't actually want to do that. I just wanted to show you that because I wanted to tell you that that same feature is coming soon to fonts. You may already have it because they're rolling it out to users one-by-one or group by group. So not all users have it yet, but you will get that feature and it's going to work the same way where if you come in here and you make changes to your text, either you go from one font to a next font. So if I suddenly change this to Oswald. Then suddenly, I don't see it here, but you are gonna get that change All button at the bottom. That change All button is coming soon. But just take it back to this. You want to come in here. You want to make sure that you have your brand fonts as part of your template. You might want to go and pull like you're up your logo or something. So I might pull my learning with Greg logo. Just pop that in here, put that somewhere down here. And again, I'm not, I'm not going to fully make this design here, but you get the idea. You can come in here, any brand imagery that you're going to use again and again, of course I didn't mean to drop myself into the frame, so let me just click once and drop myself down here. But the point is, you're gonna put in all these elements, all these elements that make this a template that's just reusable for you. Now, this does not look good yet. So I would work on this a little bit farther. But then once you've done that, and it's totally done, and it's something you see yourself as being able to reuse again and again and you save time, then you can go ahead and save this off as a template. What I would do then is I would come up under this Share option. And you may not see it here, but if you go to this more tab here, you're going to find this share as a template in. So I'm going to click on Template published a team templates. This is just asking me where I want to share it. I could also go into your projects and I could choose any one of my folders under here. So if I come in here, I have all these different things. For now. I'm just going to put it in this brand assets folder. And I'll go ahead and click Add. And it's gonna go ahead and it's going to publish this to brand assets and it's gonna publish it as a template. I said go ahead and design as a template. Continue editing view template. I'll go ahead and view template now. And what I'm gonna do, what It's gonna do now is it's gonna take me into that folder where I just saved it. Here's my brand assets folder. And now I can see in here I have these images, but then I also have templates within this folder. Templates are different from a normal project because when you click on a project, it's opening up that project itself. When you click on a template, it's automatically going to bring up this screen. And you can either go in and edit the original where you're going to make adjustments to your template. Like I wanted to change my font, that's not my brand font. I wanted to add this other image, different logo or something. You're going to make those little changes. But then once you got to the point where you're going to use it again and again. That's when you go to drop in your new video or your new piece of content that fits in that place holder part of your template. And you're going to click Use this template. And the advantage of doing it this way is that every time you do it, it's going to generate a copy of that original item, that a copy of that original project. So if I come in here now and I accidentally deleted this and accidentally deleted that and I didn't mean to do that or this got moved around. That's not going to screw up my original template because that is preserved. I'm not working on my template when I choose uses this template. Now you are working on it. If you choose that edit original option, then you can go in and make adjustments to your template. But if you just launch it from the template and create a new project, then it's just bringing in a copy of that, which is what you want because you're using that template to now generate new content. For now I would come in here and I would go in under my elements here. And I would look for video and I'd come down to video or I would go to upload because it's probably custom video that you upload it. And so then you're dragging over your content. This is just a picture, my daughter there, but you would be dragging in your video or whatever, whatever content you're now going to publish to your audience. But when you use this template method, it just gives you an extra layer of security. And then of course, using the template method when you can do it in a smart way and save time by not having to do work again and again. Then that's when it becomes very powerful. Again, you have to think about what am I business do? I do again and again or what in my marketing do I do it again and again? Because you're not gonna want templates for everything. You're going to have some unique content. But sometimes when you do have things that are similar, a similar style to a similar social media platform, a similar format. Then even if you're only saving a little bit of time, if it's something you do again and again and again, that time is really going to start to stack up. And so it does make sense to put in the effort and set up these templates and then again organize them into a folder or somewhere where you can access them easily whenever you get into that marketing time a year, okay. All right, so I hope that's helpful and I'll see you in the next lesson. 64. 9 - Getting Creative: Watercolor Animation: We've seen how you can easily add animations to your page elements by using the Animate button at the top of your design window and how you can do that with individual elements, with the whole page, everything on the page, or with text elements. But let's just go through a real-world example just to show you how you can get pretty creative with this, I'm just going to click here and create a blank Instagram post. Again, I mentioned how you have the two different interfaces. This is just going to bring up this regular interface and not though Video bar at the bottom. But that's okay because we're not worried about that for this particular animation. What I'm gonna do is I've seen people where they search for watercolor color elements within Canada, and they sort of create a watercolor design. Then the add some sort of animation to it. So this is kind of fun and you could use this for like an anniversary message or any kind of posts you wanted to. Let's just put one together and I don't even know how useful this is in and of itself, but I think it's about the process and the creativity and just understanding that you can get creative when you have ideas like this, you want to see how far you can push Canva. I will come over here to my elements. I'm going to search for watercolor. I'm gonna start by searching for something like landscape. I'm going to go watercolor landscape. And so I'm just going to go through these just trying to sort of pick out one that I think is going to work. So I think this one here actually might work for the type of thing I want to do. I'll bring this into my frame. I think this is gonna be my background elements. So let me just size it up and get it a little bit bigger. Something like that is probably pretty good. Let's see. Something like that. Again, I'm just playing around here, so I'm gonna see what I can do to now add to this and bring some more layers into this. Because then I'm gonna sort of animate those different layers with this Animate button up here, just to show you how very simply you can bring something to life with movement. Okay, So I need some more things in here. So I think I'm going to want watercolor. I'm gonna keep doing that keyword. And I'm gonna search for a couple and see. Let's see. So here's a nice one. Bride and groom. So we could do something like that. One of these couple ones now I want to size it down to fit into my screen. I can play around with these other ones, but it doesn't matter too much. I think I think this is fine for what I'm going for, something like this, because if we're gonna make this like an anniversary thing, I was gonna make an anniversary thing. What I might do is I'll bring in a text element just by tapping T on my keyboard. And I'm gonna come in here. And I want this to be more of a playful fought. Maybe like this. Let's see. Then let's just come in here and hit Control a and type out. If I can get my fingers on the correct keys on my keyboard. There we go. Happy. Well, I take that back. I still can't type there we go. Happy anniversary. Type that out. Why I'm having so much trouble typing. It's kind of hard to look at your screen and type and talk at the same time for me, at least, I don't love this font, so I might keep searching for a different font. That's not, not the point of this exercise, but I won't spend too much time. But let me just, let me just go through a couple ones. I like that one a little bit better. That fits a little bit more with the style of this woodcut watercolor style. I'm not too worried about that yet, but I'm just going to keep this up here. But then I want to come back and keep searching under my elements here because I want some definitely some mountain elements. So let's try watercolor. And then let's try mountains. And let's see what I have here. When, sometimes when I'm creating something like this, sometimes I'll add a page knowing I'm not going to use this page, but I just want to use this, this sort of click over some elements that I might use. So I'm just bringing it over a couple of elements that I might use. Let's go down and I just want to click. So these are only graphics. I don't want those other things. So let's see. There's bringing over some things that I might use here. Going down. Might use that. I think of this here. I'm trying to find the ones that are going to be similar in color, similar in tone. Again, this is just about playing around experimenting. I'm just really looking around, seeing what I can get that. Yeah, I like that one a fair amount. So if I hit Control C on that, and I'm come back up to this top screen and I hit control V. Now, I want these to be able to fit behind my hills. What I think I can do with this layer here, because there is such a clear divide between these green foreground and the background. I think if I come in under Edit Image and I use this background remover, and again, this is a pro feature. But if I use this background removal, I think I can get it to cut out the sky here. And I think it's just gonna keep the foreground. Only way to find out is to test it out. So let's just run that and see what I get there. Yes. Yes. So that's what we wanted. So that's perfect. But now I have my I don't know if you can see, there we go. My mountain was getting lost there for a minute background. But so now I want to do is I want to bring this up and I'm gonna use my Control bracket key shortcut. Just doesn't seem to be working every now and then. The control bracket key is kind of funny, but what I'm trying to do is push this backwards here. You know what, It's not letting me push this backwards because this element here was getting lost from my background. So detach image from background. If you ever have that, sometimes you have to detach it from the background because I don't want this to actually be the background element. I want it to be a foreground element. Let me do this. And then now I have this element which I can position behind here. Now what you see, what I'm trying to start to do is I'm trying to start to have these layers within my design. Now if you start to have multiple images like this and when you get things into position where you want, like I had this where I want it and I can go ahead and lock it. And then if you have trouble with your only selecting that and you can't select this other element. Remember, you can use the Tab key on your keyboard to cycle through and find elements. So there I found this element. Again, I'll move this to where I like it. I want to maybe right there. And then again, I'll lock the position of that too once I get it to where I want. Alright, so now I need some other mountain elements here. So let me keep going down through here and seeing what other elements I have that might fit. Again if I bring something in here. Let me see these recommendations here. I'm trying to find things that are at least somewhat similar in tone, so that's pretty good. I can make that work. So again, I'm gonna take this again with my bracket keys Control and my left bracket. I'm gonna push it back because I'm gonna have this big hobby behind this mountain here. So even farther in the background. Now, this one is an image. So what happens when you're looking at an environment like this? And something is a background element, you start to get his *** at atmospheric case where it's a little harder to see. Let's come in here and let's come under Adjustments. And what happens if it's farther in the background is you're going to have less saturation. And it's gonna be, it's gonna be brighter, more in line with the Highline. So I almost want to take this and I will almost want to reduce the opacity of this. But as I do that, I want to have a sky behind it. Let's look. So we have this foreground, we have this background. But let's come back out of this now. And let's go back under elements. Close that for a minute. And now we're searching for watercolor again. But this time we need a sky because we cut the sky out of our other image because we wanted to be able to have it as a foreground. But if I type in watercolor sky, Let's see what we get. This is interesting, but I don't know if that's, let's see, Let's see what my other options are. I know that I need something else. I need something that's a little wider. It's going to be in the distance because it's got a match scale wise. So let me just scroll down and see. I think too weird. Let's see Something like that. No. Well that's an actual video. Well, that'd be interesting to have a video in the background if the clouds are actually moving in a rainbow. But I think that this is playing too fast. We're going to create the animation or own way here. Let's come back in watercolor sky. Make sure it's just searching for graphics. Let's take a look. I'm just playing around here. We're just coming in here. And maybe one of these first ones will work. I don't know. Let's try. I don't like it. I don't like it. Let's just start pushing it to the background because maybe we can make it work. But let's see, I'm not loving it yet, but I keep sending it back. Control and bracket keys, so push it back. I think what I don't like about this is that maybe it's a little too dark compared to the rest of the image. But again, if I come in here and I just started to take the transparency down because that's going to be in the background. So it's not going to I think that's going to work. So I'll use I'll use this and I'll move that down a fair amount. But then what I want to do is I can probably bring in another cloud layer or two. And this one I'm going to push back. Let's size it down a little bit. And let's push it back. Almost all the way. We don't want it to be behind that last layer, but we do want it to be behind that last mountain. Actually, I think that right there is fine. It might be an frontal one behind the other. That's fine. Like that cloud a lot because of how it's sort of soft at the edges. This one here I feel like styled style wise that wouldn't quite work with the other image here. But let's take the one that we just used and let's maybe copy it. Control c. Then we'll take those, will actually control C, control V to copy it, will put those two together, this one and this one. And we'll group, group these two together. And this is going to be another element up a little higher, something like that. So it's sort of moving over our texts, but that kind of looks, that looks really cool. That's a cool little element here. And now what I want to do is bring in a few more foreground elements. This is where I might play with animation a little bit. So let's say let's just gray watercolor animals. Let's see what may or may not show up. And I'm actually going to click over and I'm going to click on this animated to see what the options are on. So this B is pretty cool. So let's bring him in. And we could have him in the foreground. Would be pretty small, checking out one of these flowers, and I bet we can duplicate him. So Control C, Control V will put him there as well. We've got some other things. We've got this little raccoon, he's kinda cool. I don't know if I want him in here, maybe let's bring him in and see. He's kinda cool. But maybe he would be just in the background a little bit. Some are, some are farther back in our scene here. Somewhere along the way here, I lost my couple, my married couple. I lost track of what I do. I could've possibly push them to the background OPAT I think I just saw them. I'm using my tab key and it's just starting to go through my different elements in there. That must be them there. So let's bring that to the front so I could use my bracket shortcut, but I think I'll just go up the position and I'll go Bring to Front, bring to front. Boom, there they are. We got them back. Let's make sure that we have this fully there, but then we'll size down. There are gonna be right here. Now. I want them to be behind the flowers. I'm gonna make them a little bit bigger. But then I think I'm gonna do is see if I can add another individual flower or something. I can actually be probably take this foreground thing that is locked or unlocked his first, second. And I'm going to hit Control V. Actually control C to copy control V. So I've pasted that entire foreground, but what I'm gonna do is I'm going to make it smaller. And I'm just going to bring in maybe this one flower here, so I'm gonna make it. So I'm just sort of, this may not work the way I'm doing it, but let's see, Let's try this. Let's take this, Let's go position. Let's go actually, let's go flip, flip horizontal. Let's bring that over. Let's put them right in the front desk. That's not going to work. That's not gonna work. Because now I have that green in front of them. But what I need to do, I should have that obviously wasn't going to work. But sometimes you'll try things and you'll forget what works and what doesn't work. But watercolor color flower, I need a flower that's just already clear of the background here. So let's see watercolor flower. And of course I have this animated turned off. I don't need animated for this particular element, so I'll turn that back off. Here we go. Something within here is going to work. I was looking for something similar to this. Maybe if I can find it. But let's go down and see. What is that like a daffodil or something. I don't know, but so let's see. Let's come in here. And sometimes it'll give you suggestions if you click on something, so let's just click and add one that's giving some others exertions. I don't know that this quite works with the other flowers that are in the scene. But we'll bring it in here anyways, just for fun. Because again, we're just playing around. We're just playing around here, so it's okay but just something to be in front of her a couple there. Actually, you know what? It doesn't work. Let's get rid of it. Let's try a couple of other ones. Let's try this one, something that could be growing and I think I want this at an angle. We're just looking for something that could be growing in this field. This looks a little bit better. We'll go with that. A little splash of color there. We've got a couple of cool elements in here. Let's just try one more. Where I go. Butterfly. And then again, let's look at and see what the animated ones are. Animated. Apply filters. So we've got these different ones here. Sure, let's bring in one of these. I will bring in this one. We're going to bring him in. We'll size him down. He might be he might be a way in the background here, so he would be it would be pretty small, but we would put them up there. We're just trying to get some different things here, a little bit of interest. And then a final thing here I want is let's try. Let's try hot air, balloon. Did I get that right as balloon have one or two else? Can I not remember that? Don't laugh at me. Going to **** is actually, but it's not showing up. But let's just go. Hot air balloon. I don't need it to be animated. So that's, so maybe that's, I think that's why I am grammarly is telling me that it is two l's. I had it right the first time. Watercolor, hot air balloon and I turned off my animated filter because I don't need this to be animated. I like, I like this one here a lot. But the one thing I'll say about this is the color is pretty cool. But if I wanted to adjust this color, I could always come in here. And I could go into my adjust and I could play around with the tint and make that be a little different. But you know what, I don't mind it the way it was. It's sort of becomes a focal point when it's a much different color. But what I could do is I could drag down the saturation. I could make it a little bit more of a blue tint. I think brightness wise and needs to be a little brighter. I don't know, just fooling around, but I'll leave it like that. This guy is gonna be soaring in from the background. I think I wanted to come out from behind this tree. So I'm gonna use my Control bracket keys again to move them backwards so he's a little bit behind the clouds and everything there. Again, I just use Control Z to undo that accidental movement. Once I have it here again, if I can't quite click it, gonna have to use that tab keyboard, keyboard shortcut to find it. So tabbing through my layers again, this gets a little bit annoying and this is why I would never suggest that you use a program like Canva to replace something like Photoshop or something that's more suited for this. But this is still a good exercise just to see what is possible. If you work through a couple of these sort of practice projects and examples, then you're going to have a good idea of when to try something and when it's worth your time and when it's not worth your time. This is pretty cool. I'm gonna go ahead and throw away the second page Because at this point I don't care about the second page. I just care about this first page. But what I want to do now is I want to add some animation to this. I have the animation, of course, in a couple of elements that were already animated like these little critters here. But what I'm gonna do is with my balloon here, I want to come in and I want to get on these individual elements. So I'm gonna lock a couple of these down here, but actually, here's a cloud layer. So if I can get on this, I can get on animate. Then I can go in here and I can tell you the one that works best for this, this tectonic can work sometimes but also do weird things. This drift tends to work very well for just some slow, subtle movement. And it's usually a good idea is if you have somebody who's maybe in the foreground and the background. So again, I'll comment under this guy here, I'm gonna go animate and I'm gonna go down to that slide IN, OUT. And again, I'll choose a drift. Maybe one of these B's I'll just have flying along to a new flower or to this flower. So the other guy, I'll leave alone. But for this guy again, I'll come in under Animate and I'll choose the drift. Now I had it for my one set of clouds, but I want to get it from my other set of clouds. So I think that's the clouds right there. Again, coming under Animate. And we're going to go and you can just hover over to sort of get unaffected. So that also tells me I'm on the mountain. I don't want an animation for that. I have one there. I don't want one for there, but I do want one for the clouds. I have to make sure I get on the Cloud. So let me just try tabbing through. There's my balloon. I'm coming back to that balloon in a minute, but right now I'm trying to get to that other large cloud. There we go. I think that is it there. So let's come under Animate. And again, I don't want to only use pop things that wouldn't make any sense at all. But if I come down and I choose that drift again, then the same thing I haven't done my balloon, but let's tap through until I get to that balloon there. Every now and then, tap starts going through everything on the screen, even not in my document, which is kind of a pain, but I will say patient with it here. And I'll go through. And I can always cheat and bringing this down, what is this? This, this is my foreground elements, so it's in the way, but I have nothing below right here so I can drag it down. That's gonna make it way easier to select this balloon. So I'll go ahead, I'll grant animate that. And I'll go in here. And I will again choose this photo. Slide in, out, and I will choose a drift. Now if I actually play this, look at how cool this becomes, I think there was a little glitch there at the beginning that you don't actually see. But look at how cool this row animation is. Now you have to pay attention to some things like this butterfly and this b. They are actually going backwards. So that's not quite what I want for those guys. Well, let's try this, let's close this. Let's come down to this B here. And because the drift is moving left to right, what I'm gonna do with this little guy is I'm gonna come over this little guy and I'm gonna flip them horizontally and will then move them over here because he's going to become in this way, the same thing for our butterfly. Let's flip them and flip horizontally. And so he's flying along there. And so now let's try that again. Now they're moving in a direction that makes it a little bit more sense. And we have this cool movement here. Now if you wanted to, you could even add some sound to this and give this cool ethereal feeling. I'm not going to worry about that because we'll talk about sound editing and one of the future videos here. But you get the idea. You can come in here, you can have fun with these things. I don't know how many practical applications this particular design has, but it's still fun. It's still gives me an idea of playing around, putting different layers together until one design. You really may find that it sparks some creativity and leads you to something that is helpful and is something useful for your business or your marketing or whatever branding it is that you're doing. Now again, I'm not suggesting that you use Canva all the time when another program may just be better suited for something. But I am encouraging you to play around, play around, see what's possible, get a feel for the tools. That way you're going to know when something is a good idea, when it's a fun project, when it might be helpful. And then other times when it's just going to take too long and it's gonna be a pain. When maybe another piece of software is really what you should be using. Alright, have fun, and we'll go through another example of a different type of animation that you might use for your marketing. In the next lesson. 65. 9 - Learning the New Video Editor: Okay, We've talked about how there's a new video, timeline and editor. But let's jump in and actually look at it. So I'm going to create a video project. Actually, here's a video project right here, but you could even create Instagram story. There are other ones in here. I feel like Instagram or anything where it knows there's going to be animation and video is going to bring in by default this new video editor sort of interface style. I'll go ahead and create a blank video project and open it up and we will take a look at this. The difference is instead of getting this sort of page wise, we create new pages. You have these sort of timeline view below and below each slide it's going to show you here the number of seconds that slot slide currently is. And if you have that side slide selected on screen here, you're going to get the number of seconds, but you're never gonna get that vertical strolling page, scrolling page after page, like you get in that older interface. This is a new interface so that we can see that we have one slide here. And so I can do things like add things to this. If I come in here, I can just do the normal things I can do, or I'll give it a new background color and I'll throw in a heading. And so we'll just throw in a heading here. Let's just say this is our title slide. Don't have to do it this way, but I'm just showing you, for example. Now maybe I only wanted just to play for three seconds so I can click on this and I can update the timing up here. Or you can also just drag on any side of the slide down here. And you can change the timing now, because this is just a static page with this slide, it doesn't really matter where I'm dragging from the left side or the right side. Once you start to have a video file or animation, then it is going to matter. So let's go ahead and add another slide. I can do that just by clicking on this add page right here. So now we have the 3 second slide. And by default, when it adds a new slide, I'm calling it a slide, but a new spot on our timeline here. It's going to be five seconds by default, but that will update and change if you drag in content it has a video or animation that is longer than that. So let's just go under our elements here. And let's go down and take a look at video. So I'll click See All under the videos here. And let's just go ahead and add something in. So I'll throw in this video here. So I'm just going to click on it once. And then of course, like you always can, you can resize and reposition it however you want. I'm going to just make it fill the screen here. But you can do all the normal things you would do where you could put it in a frame. You could have multiple videos on one page. But now I have this video in here. So since this is a 11.82 video, actually it says 11.9 there, it is gone and you can see that it has now expanded this slide, this part of the timeline, because it is a longer video. Now if I click on this, I can come in here and I can do things like double-click in here. And I can split wherever my play head is. They would split the clip at that point. I can also grab the ends and then suddenly when I do that, I am cropping off the end of the video. So again, if I get on here now, I wanted to see the rest of that. I can drag it out like that. So again, you can drag from either side of the play head. So you have this play head right here that you can move back and forth. So you see this, this triangle that you're seeing right here. You can grab that and you can move it back and forth and you can move it back to the first slide. And then you can come to the second slide here. And you can start to see on your second slide, you also have this view up here. So something important to know is that you have this percentage down here. You have a Zoom where you can zoom in on your project or you can zoom in on your timeline. You have this little toggle switch right here. If I click on that and then I adjust it, suddenly I am zooming in on this timeline, which is very helpful because sometimes you want to be way zoomed out so you can see your whole timeline. Or sometimes you'll want to zoom in because you want to be making those micro changes and finding the exact timing right here within this video, it's a lot easier to scroll through and find that precise moment when you might want to make a cut compared to if you're zoomed way out like this, then suddenly it's really hard because I'm jumping multiple frames at a time. But when I come in here and I zoom way in, and I can start to go frame by frame in this video and really find the exact point where I want to make a cut or I want to make a change. Now the easiest way if I wanted to sort of transition from right here, would be width the triangle right there on the timeline, I will just right-click and I'm going to select split page. And when I select split page now has made a cut right there at that point of the video. So if I wanted to get rid of the second half, I could go ahead and delete that. Now. I have it cut and I have that smaller portion of video. So now we can see this is only 4.5 seconds long. If I decide, hey, I want that back. Well, I could hit Control Z on my keyboard to undo what I just did. I'm gonna go ahead and redo that. So redo is, I also have buttons up here, so Control Shift Z would be redo, but I also can click this button here. And again it's trimmed it down. But I can still always go in and grab and ratio portions of my video. If I keep going all the way to the right, it'll let me drag out to that full 11.9 seconds again for this video clip, what says 11.8. But I think it's making it 11.9 or whatever it is. So the full size of the video, but again on the play head here. And then if I find somewhere where okay, this is where I want the transition, I can do that split. You can also drag in from the end and drag back to that triangle, but it doesn't always sort of does snap to the triangle. I guess if you go just passed it, you can do it that way or you can split the video clip. One reason for splitting the video clip would be if you knew you wanted the video to continue to play. So let me just show you, I'm going to hit Control Z to undo this. Let's imagine right here, I wanted to have a title come onto the screen. So I'm going to split the right here at this moment. So I'm right-clicking, I'm gonna do split. And then on this new slide right here, I'm gonna grab a text element and I'll add a new heading. I'm not going to name this because it doesn't really matter, but let's just say this is where I wanted a new heading to come into my video. I will change the color real quick and we'll give it a little drop shadow just for fun, just to give it a shadow there. And we want that shadow to be black, of course. So we'll come in under color. We'll change that to black. Let's say I wanted to come in right here and then I could click on that itself. And I could go under the animation feature, features for that. And I just wanted to sort of fade in like that. Now it's going to play through. And then when it gets to that point, then the title is going to come on screen. It's going to play through. And then a title is going to pop on screen. Now to get it to play through, I'm just dragging back and forth. And then I have this Play button here, but I can also just use the space bar. The spacebar is sort of a shortcut key for our play pause button. I've hit the spacebar plays. And if I hit the space bar again, it's kind of pause. So hit the space bar, it's going to play. Anytime I hit it again, it gonna pause. Hopefully you're seeing already that this is just a really smarter way to edit your video than the old interface. So they've made a lot of strides forward. Now I'm not going to pretend that this is like Final Cut Pro or Premier Pro or a professional level, level of video editor. It's not. But for Canada and for a program like this, it still is really, really useful. So other things you can do when you split a slide like this, where you have two slides. You can come in-between the slides and you have this little plus icon and you can add a page or you also have this ad transition. So if I click on that ad transition and suddenly I have the choice between these different animations. And I can just take a look by leaving my cursor over top to see which one I like. Maybe I wanted this slide one here. So if I go ahead and click that, it's going to apply that to the page. And now I have a little transition right here between the two pages. And so if I hit play now it's going to go through and then it's going to have that transition to the next screen. Now at any point in time, if you want to preview your whole video, you can click up here on the play and it's going to go into full screen mode. And again, you're gonna get this preview of your video playing on screen anytime you want to exit out of this, all you got to do is close right here. And it's just that easy. As of course, if you want to keep adding more content, you can just move to the end, hit the plus button again. You can go ahead and bring in more video or whatever. Maybe you're gonna do something that's animated content so it doesn't have to be specific video content and you can just create a normal slide. I'm just going to put in random things here. So I know this doesn't make sense in terms of a cohesive video, but that's okay. The point is just showing you here. I don't even care that this is all messed up on screen and point it's just showing you that you can do whatever. You can just have static content like this. That's not doing anything on screen. You can of course, use the animated button, Animate button to give it an animation. But then of course, for this thing here, It's the same thing. If I click on this, I can see that this is five seconds long. I can adjust the timing up here. Apply to all pages, of course would change the timing of this, which I don't want to do. So I don't want to check this box right here, but I can do it up here or I can just come and hit down here and I can drag out. And as I drag out, I can see in that little black sort of icon above here that I can see that now it's 1.4 seconds. Now I have this weird yellow slide at the end, which of course makes no sense, but we're just learning how to use this video editor. That's it. That's the basics, of course, just like all the other things you can come in through here. And if you wanted to start with a template, you can start through a template. So we can see that this actual video here actually has eight pages. So if I were to go in here and click on this, I can actually see all the ones related to that. So actually let me go back here. One of eight. So if I click on this and get into here, I can actually see the different pages. And so here's this sort of a video montage. So this would take some photographs, slideshow, and turn it into a video, but I could apply all eight pages. Again, it's not going to make sense at the end of this, but then we'll see what we do. Replace all pages with templates. Again, it's asking me if I want to replace my current project. I'm just going to go ahead and do that since we got the field. The other thing. And so again, here is something that's bringing in a video template. And we'll go ahead and we'll play through this real quick. It's 40 seconds long. And again, you can see that it's just using some animated elements for the page elements. But all this is is a static picture show, but you can see how this is an interesting way. You could bring a story to your audience and have a degree of animation without having to have the full video content force. If I wanted to close this and I wanted to come in here and let me just see. Let me just ungroup this for a second. I'm going to jump into this element here. I'm just trying to see if this is an actual frame here. Let's see, replace background. So if I click on that, I was trying to replace the background elements. So it's not an actual frame, but I was just going to show you here that we easily could bring in a rectangular frame. So let's do that. Let's go under my elements here. Get out of videos. We're going to back up and we're just gonna go in under this grid here. You can choose frames. I like to choose this first grid because when you bring in this grid, it has these resize handles on every corner, every side. You really can't make it any shape you want. First, let me just bring it forward. So I'm gonna use my Control bracket keys to bring it forward. Then I'm gonna come in here and I'm going to rotate it so we get the angle we want. And then I'm going to bring it right in here. And of course I could push it behind this frame if I wanted to, just by going like this. But then I want to size it down so that it really is basically just this area here. And then I could just drop in any sort of video. Of course, I need to bring it forward, don't I? Because right now it's behind that, the black element. What does this black element here? Let's delete that. Now. I guess, I guess the whole thing isn't, I guess this, I was thinking that this was two elements, but it's just one element. That's fine. I will just precisely position it here. So that's good. It really position. So we're just that frame. That'll work. And then anytime I wanted to go through my video here, even though I'm at an angle here, you can still go through your video clips. So let me see all these again. I could grab any one of these videos. We're not going to worry about too much which one? And I can just drop it in there. And so then now I have video, a video playing within this slide. So this is a static slide, but now you can still add movement in. I just want to show you you don't have to have your video playing full-screen. You can have it mixed and interplay and have an interplay with these other static elements. And of course, if I play this whole thing again, there it is, it's playing. And it's going to play this whole thing. I can just scrub through a little faster. But so here's this slide where it's also playing. Right here. You can start to mix in that content and really just have fun with it. But there are a lot of these templates that provide great starting points. If you want to come in here, start to add some of your own content or customize it. So it's gonna be something that works for your audience. So a couple of last little things here. This fade up here is just referring to the paging animation that's being applied to that phase is being applied. But I can still see how long this current part of my video timeline is. It's 4.9 seconds. However, I have a video clip on here. If I wanted to get into the timing of this, added an actual video click, but I can click on the video itself. And now I have this little icon here with the scissors and 4.9 seconds, if I click into this, I can see, and I can have a play head and I can pause and it's just like I'm working in another timeline. If the video was down in the timeline here, I would be able to do it in the timeline. But since the video is part of this larger page, I have to come on in through the video and do it this way. Again, all the same things apply. So I could come in here and use this scrubby slider to change the actual part of the video that's going to play. If I wanted to play the ending part of the video instead of the beginning part of video. I will do that. If I wanted to play this part, I would do that. And of course, if I start to come in here and drag this down, then I'm actually changing the length of the slide itself, you see, because I dragged it down. So whatever the length of the video is, that's going to be controlling the length of the slide now. So if I wanted to push it back up to, let's say five seconds, then I would drag it up like this to five seconds and you see my slide timing has changed. And of course maybe I wanted to play this part of the slide. So again, you just come in through the video. Now, as I showed you with the first example that I brought in, if you're actually just adding a video to the whole page like this. If I'm just coming in here and plopping down a video, like boom, then I have a video on my timeline right here. And then I can also come in and scrub through the play head this way. But again, if I wanted to click on this and then actually get into this video, I click on the video itself. And then there that scissors, we see those scissors. Then I can jump in here and I can get in here. Right now the whole video was playing, so it'll whole slide is 11.8 seconds. However, if I wanted to just play a portion of that video, maybe just say 3 second clip. I could do that. And if I wanted to be from the beginning, I could do it there. But if I wanted to start a little later, again, dragging around that way. And then when I'm done, go ahead and click Done. So all this is very intuitive. It just brings so many possibilities into play, working with video inside of Canva. Again, I'm not saying this replaces a professional software that's devoted to video editing, like Final Cut Pro or Premier Pro. But it still is a really nice, too tall. It's intuitive. This user interface is just more friendly. This kind of timeline is the type of thing you really need if you're working with video. So it's good to see that Canada has that as an option now. So get in there, start playing. And I hope you create lots of cool stuff with video inside of Canva. 66. 9 - Working with Audio in Canva: In this lesson, we're now talking about how to incorporate audio into your projects. Now it can be a video project, but you can also just add audio to irregular static project, which we'll talk about in a minute. But first, let's look at this project and talk more about the initial audio options. Now in the last lesson, if you watched that, I didn't even realize that first because there wasn't playing it for me, that there was audio in my file. But I should have realized that because it had this blue bar at the bottom. If you ever see a thin blue bar at the bottom, that is your audio track. Now it's more helpful if you expand this. To expand this, you have to just go right over that bar and just double-click with your mouse. If you get right over it and you double-click, then suddenly it's opening up the audio wave for that file. And suddenly you're in here and you can see this audio track. Now you can also come in here and you can pull this around, I believe, yes. So I can actually change the portion of this song, this track that is playing. For starters, let me just zoom out a little bit. It's going to be more helpful. Again, if I double-click into here, I can then drag along and change the portion that's actually going to play. Because whatever is in that dark blue bar portion, that's the portion that's going to be pulling, going to be playing. But then we see that the song itself is much longer than my current presentation, my current project. I'll take it back to the beginning. And then if I click once to get out of that, I think I was click once or twice, six spans to get this expanded our waveform bar from that thin blue bar we saw before. But then when I accidentally clicked again, I think it went actually into editing that. So again, double-click to get in. And then if you just click, double-click to get out or click somewhere else to get out of there. Now if you want to come back up on your video, you can just come back up here and click on any one of your slides. But then if you're down here and you go into double-click here and you're in this audio form than you're actually editing, what part of that audio is going to play in your track. I'll click out of that again. You have this audio track here. Now when you have this selected, then you're also going to see up here that you now have this audio effects option and you have this adjust option if you click on Audio Effects. Well, first of all, before I even say that, just like you can resize your slide, you can grab your audio. You can resize it. You can make it smaller. So I can make it smaller. I can drag by either end and then I can reposition it anywhere on the track I want. So again, I'll put it all the way back to the beginning and we'll expand it all the way out. And again, if I double-click to get into this, I can just make sure that, whoops, wasn't all the way at the beginning. Now I'm at the beginning of the song. So I'll click out of this again. You have that setup, but then with it selected, you also have audio effects and adjust. If you come under Audio Effects, you can either fade in the song or you can fade out the song. If you're playing like a portion of a song and the video or the project's going to end before the song is actually finished. It might be an abrupt ending if it's at full volume, so you may want to fade it out. You can use this fade slider and drag it out to something like three seconds or whatever you want. And now if I get in and I zoom in a little closer here so we can see that a little bit better. Let me just zoom in a lot and then we'll go to the end of the bar here. Now you can see this little downward triangle here. It's actually starts fading out the volume three seconds before the end so that it doesn't end so abruptly. So I'm gonna go ahead and drag this back and then we'll hit the spacebar to play me Max, and we'll see how it fades it out. Now, having it fade out like that is much better than just having it abruptly end. So for example, I'll just click on this again. We'll come on to these audio effects. And if I take this fade and I just get rid of this, you can hear the difference if I come back now and I play this towards the end. So let me just click somewhere out of this. Let's get my y-axis and it's going to abruptly end. So you can again click on your audio track so that you get these options. And you can use the audio effects where you can fade in and fade out. Now those are the only audio effects they have right now. But you can come under the adjust here. And if I come under adjust, I guess the just is doing the same sort of actually let me zoom out so I can see because I think adjusted same as double-clicking into it. Let's see. Let me, let me zoom out just to try to be sure what this adjusts doing. So good benefit, come back over, adjust. Yeah. So adjust. See now I'm actually coming in here and adjusting which portion is playing. The adjust button is doing the same thing I did when I double-clicked on this track to get in here so that I could reposition and control what is actually going to be the portion of the song that's played. Again, click out of that, and again, double-clicking. Same thing as using this adjust button up here, just to clarify that. But then also you do have volume control on this track. Right now with it's selected, if I go under my volume here I can see it's playing at 100%. Well, I could mute it. And if I'm muted and then play this back now, you'll see that now it doesn't play. But I could come back in here and again, come to my track, make sure it's selected. I'll get the volume button up here. And then suddenly we could bring the volume back up. And so maybe you wanted at 50%, then it's gonna play a little softer. Again, you have that volume control. Now. You can also add multiple tracks to a video. Now this track was just on this template when we opened it. But you can search through the music and pick your own track, and you could even do multiple tracks. So let me come in here and we'll go under elements. And we're going to just scroll down until we find audio and we'll click See All under this audio. And let me just grab a different track here. So let's grab this happy whistling track, and I'll just click it once and it puts it right there on my timeline. So again, I could come in here and I could decide I want this one to play. And then I'll drag this other one here up onto the same part of the timeline. And so now they're playing one and then the other. Now, whoops, I did like computers getting a little upset here. But so let me just drag this a little bit more. I have noticed with the video and audio editing every now and then, if your computer resources are being used, are purchased for whatever reason, it can sometimes get a little finicky. Sometimes if the quit out of a project or close some things on your computer or come back. It can start working a little bit better. So it's sometimes gets a little finicky, but mostly it's pretty good. Here you see I can have two consecutive audio tracks playing. I can do the same adjustments where I fade things in and out, transition between one or the other, but also you can drag them down to their own different parts of your timeline. Now I think I'm having trouble now. There we go. Now they're on different parts of the timeline, so now they're playing. And I could expand them both out. And I could even have them both covering the full portion of this timeline. So I could drag this one all the way to the end. I could get this one here. I could drag it all the way to the end. Now, this may not work too well because a lot of audio tracks, they're not necessarily going to sound great together unless they were designed that way. So these are sort of following the same feed. So it's sort of actually working. But a lot of times it's not going to work. But you can imagine a scenario. You could imagine a scenario where maybe one of the tracks is music, but then you're gonna have a track of your self-talk. And in that case, you would definitely want to be able to adjust that music volume down, right, so that you can hear the talking, emphasize over the music. Those are all the basics of working with audio inside of Canva. Now in the lessons coming up as we get into presentations, I will also show you how you can capture your own audio directly into Canva. So again, we'll get into that in the upcoming lessons. 67. 9 - Creating a Cohesive Marketing Video: In this lesson, we're going to build upon what we've learned in the previous lessons about working with video animations and audio inside of Canva. And we're gonna build out a 30-second marketing video. Now in this video I'm going to just do it for a pretend brands that I come up with. But you can think about what might make sense for you, for your business. And you can come up with your own idea. If you get good at working with these elements together inside the canvas, you really aren't gonna be able to take your marketing game to the next level. So let me just start by showing you what I created here. Basically what I did was I came up with a fictional product. They came up with my own fictional lemonade blood brand. And if you don't have a project that you're immediately working on, It's, there's nothing wrong with this coming up with your own playful practice, practice example, where you come up with a make-believe project. Then when you have a real project, you're going to have the skills practice you're gonna be ready to execute. Let me just show you with this what I've come up with this. So this is just a quick 28 second video. So what I'm gonna do is I'm going to show you the video I created entirely within Canva. And then I'm going to show you the project and we're going to break down sort of how I did it, how you would approach a project like this. So for starters, let me just go ahead and play this on screen. Okay, so that's the video created. It's about 30 seconds long. And now we will jump into the Canvas side of things. We'll look at the project file that made up this video, and I'll walk you through the steps in the thought process. So you have a good idea of how you might want to tackle a project like this, and think of ideas that might work for you in your brand. Okay, so here is my final kinda projects that we just saw, the final video for. So I can scrub through and we can see all those elements we just saw on screen. So let's talk about how you would approach a project like this. Obviously it's gonna be specific to what your goal is and what the marketing message is going to be a good place to start is always just writing out a little bit of a project brief, even if it's just only a couple of sentences for yourself to remind yourself of what is the marketing message, what is the call to action for your viewer? What are you trying to accomplish? And then you're gonna be thinking about things like what's the tone of the message. For example, for this ad here, I'm just really marketing this lemonade. And so I was thinking local, I was thinking fresh, I was thinking refreshing. And so all of those are going into my thought process when I'm thinking about things like color palette, I'm thinking about the music selection. One thing I normally do when I take on a project like this is I will start by just sort of coming up with those key themes, writing that project brief. And then I usually set up a project where I'm gonna go over to another project which is just a copy of this project where I was initially playing around. In that project, I like to stick in some additional slides. Were identities go in through my library. In other words, into my elements, I look at photos, I look at the different elements that I have within Canva, both video elements, animations and static elements. And I try to find ones that I might want to use in my projects. Here I just have some static elements while a little animated elements, but just some graphical elements. And then I also have a slide here where I have some different videos that I thought about incorporating. And then I have a color palette. For my color palette, you can go to a number of different places, but one place you can go to canva.com slash colors. Now, you can't see what I typed into the URL bar there, but I'll put that address right there on screen now. So you can see That's gonna take you to this site here. You can go through a whole bunch of different things in here, but you can generate a color palette. You can look at the color wheel to get harmonious colors, or you can just click on color palette ideas, which is what I did for this particular thing. I think I may have actually typed in lemonade, just something to represent. And then I think this color palette here, this flushes lemonade, is actually the color palette that I ended up using here in my video. So I brought over this color palette. If you're over here on this site, came with outcomes colors, you search for an idea and then it comes up on screen. Basically what you can do is you can click on it. It's gonna take you to this longer thing here. And here you're gonna see the hex codes. If I actually take this hex code here, I can copy that. And then if I go over into Canvas, let me just show you real quick. I'll hit my R key to create another rectangle on screen. And if I come into here and click on the color, I can copy that hex codes or paste that hex code I just copied. It's going to bring up that color. And then boom, I have it in my project. And then suddenly I can reference these colors. And also when I go in under here, under my colors and my project, It's gonna show you those colors which are in my project normally there. Let me just actually X out of this search. It'll show you your document colors. You're going to find it that way. Now another thing you could do is if you're going to be working on an extended project like this, and you've found those colors like I mentioned here, you could take these hex codes and you could come in. And if you're a pro member onto your brand kit, you could actually put in that color palette. That way, anytime you come to select a color in your document, it's gonna show up right here. Really friendly, easy to find. But even if you have a free version, you can just paste in and create the rectangle color palette like this, or just have those hex codes ready on hand. You can copy and paste into a search bar. And any way you do it, you're gonna be able to come up in access those colors very easily. What I did was I came up with this color palette. And then of course, if you go through my presentation here, you'll notice that for my background and for my other elements, I really am paying attention and try to reuse that color palette. Try to use colors that are working with the feel of what I'm going for, and colors that work well together. Really coming up with a color palette for your project is a really, really good idea. And I find that if I don't do this ahead of time, a lot of times I really will struggle coming up with those colors from my project. It's not something that my brain can just intuitively do on the fly. I really need to look at some examples, find something that I feel works with the messaging. I'm going, going for. Coming up with that color palette after you've brainstormed and come up with some of those initial ideas and written out your project brief. That is always a very good first step. First steps that project brief. Again, you can visit this canva.com slash colors or any other site where you can find colors. You can find real-world examples. If you have a magazine or something, you can try to replicate those colors, whatever you want to do to find that color palette. And then also I like to set up a practice projects sometimes or just add some initial of extra pages to my video which I'm going to delete at the end, where I just go through and I look at all the different elements with Canva. And I find things like video elements, static elements, animated elements, all things that I think might work with my particular project. That is a very good starting point. Once I do that, then I will start to hone in a little bit more on my project. And I will start to create additional new slides and new pages for the things I want in here. And then also you're going to want to know how long do you want your video to be. You may have an idea of what you want to create or maybe you have a specific project brief from a client where it has to be a certain length. So knowing that length is a very important thing. And then as you get into that, that's going to guide how many slides do you need to create? And then the other thing that sometimes factors in for me for how many slides I need is the music I'm going to use. So one of my early steps is definitely to come up with that music I'm going to use as a supporting element for this example here, I went in under Elements and then I just came down to this audio tab here. So down to this audio, I clicked Seal, Seal, and then I spent a little time just going through here and finding some different ones that try. And if you click on one, you can do a preview. So I'll just go ahead and click on this. I'll pause that. Now I think I double-click that I accidentally added at a couple of times. So let me just delete these extra trachs out of here. So again, if you just click once up here, it should play while adding products, I double-click, click once and you can go through and listen to some different audio. Something that's helpful as you're doing this is sort of searching by that feeling that you want. So I think maybe for mine, I did things like refreshing and then I may have searched things like airy. So in other words, I was just really trying to think like light bright, I forget what the actual search term was that I use to find this track bright. I think it's actually this right here. This is the track I ended up using this safety net. And so I was just searching for terms like bright area, refreshing things that I knew matched with the tone and the message I wanted for my video, then that's something that I brought into my project. Now, once I brought that into my project, that really guided how many slide transitions in different elements I wanted within my design. Because this particular music had a very distinctive beat to it like a doom. Not exactly like I just did there, but it had a particular beat which I knew I wanted to try to match my slides too. Now you don't always have to have this. Sometimes it's just gonna be underlying track where there's a tone that's being conveyed to your viewer. And it's not necessarily something where you're trying to match the beat to your slide transitions. However, sometimes you can try to match the beat to your slide transitions and that can make it more impactful experience for the viewer. And that's sort of what I tried to do with this video here. Now I don't think I did it perfectly, but I did it well enough that it starts to sort of have some impact. So I'll just play this back again. And you'll notice that as I transition between slides here, it really is matching up with the beat of the music. And if I just zoom in a little bit here on my audio form, you can sort of see this where this waveform is sort of matching up underneath the slide. And so I did that intentionally. Because I wanted that flowing feeling where I wanted my visuals to match up with the underlying music. So I'll just hit play and we'll watch that real quick. Is it really comes in from soft to that boom, that beat on the next part of the music that's really wanted that slide transition to come into play. And so adding to that even farther on these different things under the different elements, I started to use this pop animation that again would just boom, bring them in right on the beat of that music. And so I'm using these combination of elements, the music element, but then also the animation I'm using on my static elements to really try to make it all a cohesive experience for the viewer and all that is supposed to add to the feeling and the message and the effectiveness of the ad I was creating. One of the things you definitely want to do. If you're really trying to precisely match up an audio track like this, is I find that you definitely want to click on this blue sort of sound bar to make sure it expands. Because if you click on this again, sometimes you'll just have this simple. Let me just click out of here for a second. If you click out of their back on your project, it just sort of collapses your audio. You can't see that waveform. And you're really going to want to see that waveform to be able to help visually yourself match up the sound. You can do it just by ear, but definitely seeing that visual also help. So again, just click on that waveform. And then the other thing you can do that is super helpful. Make sure you have this on set to your little filmstrip view. In other words, now I've changed it back to my project for you. I want to set to my film strip my timeline down here. And then you can really crank up the Zoom. Because if you zoom in a lot, and then it's gonna make it a lot easier as you come in here and you start to drag these out to try to really get this to match. In other words, I know that I wanted this to match up with just the very beginning, that wavelength. So I can come back to this other slide. So I can start to pull and say no, I need to push that back, I need to push that back. I need to push to the back, okay, there it's matching up pretty well. And then of course you can always bring this back and hit that spacebar to play. Just still are sort of see if when it comes into the screen, Is it matching that beat? So it's matching the beat. So you can see all these are about 1.4 seconds. That's the other thing. Sometimes you have this rhythmic music where it's gonna be boom, boom, boom on the same duration. And so sometimes you'll find that once you have one, you can sort of set the upcoming slides so that seemed duration and they're gonna stay and match the beat of the music. But again, if you need to make those little adjustments, you can always again come in here, grab the end of one slide and sort of pay attention to really where it's hitting on there. Now the other thing is also sometimes when you have animations on a slide, it tries to put on this thumbnail. So in other words, let me just grab my play head and bring it back here to this one slide. This tree really pops in and you'll notice that it fully pops in. Boom right here, boom, right here. You notice how the visual that they put on the slide of this static element is also meant to correspond in time with when it actually pops into the page with that animation, that transition. All these visuals are things that you can use as you're building out your project. When you're trying to match things up, when you're trying to do things like match your music track or some part of your music track to your video. So all that is very helpful. The rest of this is just basically going through figuring out what are the marketing messages you need, then what the different elements, what sort of transition on that page makes sense? I've chopped this up and I had just a little pop in. I'm adding that pop animation to all these elements just for a consistent feel. And so again, go through then just bringing in the different elements. And then with this here I ended on this track here. But you can see here actually I put in a transition. You can also come in and use this little Plus if you want to come in here and you can add page, but you can also add transitions. So you can see between these two slides, I decided that I would add a transition. So if I click on that transition, we can see where I'm just using a line WIP there. And you can come in and you can change the direction of that. You can change the duration. All these little things are things you can play with. And then you can continue to test by just coming into a portion of the video. They think, again, you're just trying to get cohesion between all these different elements. So it's about thinking about your project brief thinking about that tone. You're going for sort of brainstorming and finding more elements that you need. Both elements that you have that are part of your brand, but then also the supporting elements that you can find within Canva. And then thinking about the overall duration that you want for your video. Think of a music track or supporting elements like that that are going to work and then putting it all together in this cohesive work cohesive way. And of course, you can always preview your video at any point in time. So you can come up here. You can just watch it through and makes sure that it's really matching up. Make sure that it's delivering, be impacted the message that you're going for. Then of course, once you're done, you can close that. You can download by. Actually, if I play that, you can see that there's a download option right within here. I'll hit Escape to exit. You can also just go under share here, which is what I did at the end. And then you can go to download, and you can download the MP4. Make sure you're saving all pages here. If for some reason you didn't save all pages, they would just save the portion of the video that you had selected here. In other words, if I just clicked here on this first slide, it's just gonna save that first portion of the video. I want the whole thing. Once you have the whole video and you've gotten rid of any of your brainstorming slides and other thing and anything like that. And you just have the actual video itself. Then you want to do All Pages and you'll save this off as an MP4 video. That's it. That's how I created this video. I hope you have some inspiration now for how to tackle a project like this. So go out there, be creative and start creating amazing marketing assets for your brand or your business. All right, I'll see you in the next lesson. 68. 9 - Standard Presentation Mode: Okay, In the prior lessons, we learned all about the new video editor inside of Canva. We learned about adding audio tracks and the different audio options you have. Now we're gonna take it even farther and we're going to look at the different presentation modes inside a Canva. These presentation modes I think have a lot of applications from what you might do if you were giving a live presentation, may be streaming online or maybe in-person. Or maybe you just want to record content for YouTube or some other purpose. We're gonna look at all that. We're going to look at how to do voiceover. We're going to look at how to record yourself with your webcam or your camera. We're gonna get into all of that and I think the possibilities are really exciting. So let's dive in and see everything you can do with the presentation modes inside of Canva. Okay, so on-screen I have a presentation document that I've launched here. I was on my home screen and I just chose this presentation option. And I launched this project right here. And then I just chose one of these templates, that was classroom rules. And so if I scroll down through here, it's just some rules for the classroom. So I'm just going to use this as my working example here. It doesn't matter what the content is. You can be creating anything you want. I'm gonna show you how to use the tools and then you can put them to work in the way that suits for you. But I don't want you to watch me create something from scratch. I'm just starting with this pre-built project here, classroom rules. So let's pretend I'm a teacher. I want to record these classroom rules. Maybe I'm presenting them live, or maybe I want to record a presentation where we also have audio. So let's jump in and see how I would do that now. Because I launched a presentation, this document here, you can see now that all my menu up here, I have this present option here. And if I click on it, I have presented record and it's a drop-down here where I have standard, I have autoplay, I Presenter View, and I have presented record. Now we're gonna go through all of these options and we'll take them stepwise. But I also want to mention if you're not seeing this option here also under the Share menu. Now Canva has also redesigned its user interface where there used to be a download option and then a share option. They sort of combined everything all into one menu. Now, you have download options, you have Print Options, and then of course you have all your different sharing options. And then of course in here you're going to find somewhere in here also these present in present and record options. Now let's get into this. Oh, wait, wait. Before we get into this, remember this present option here, I just want to point out that you can go into presentation mode and other documents doesn't have to be a presentation. So for example, here I launched one and this, this portrait instagram story format. This would be Instagram story. But if I wanted to give a presentation on this, again, I'm not going to see that present option here because I didn't come in under that, but all I have to do is go into my Share option. And there it is, present presenting record. So you do not have to be in a specific format in terms of the dimensions of your project. You can present from any Canada document. You can present. I will just come back now to this prior example. And what I'm gonna do is I will start by just going under present. And I'm gonna choose this first option standard. Then you'll notice this standard option also says advanced at your own pace. We'll go ahead and click that. And then we'll click Present. And as soon as you click present, it's going to automatically go into full screen mode. So you can imagine that this sort of mode might be good if you were sharing your screen and doing some sort of live presentation. Or a lot of times if you were at a conference and doing a presentation, a lot of times they would be sharing a monitor, right? So this would be the monitor that would be shared and showing up on the big screen for everybody. But also in today's modern world, you might be doing a conference on Zoom or presentation on Zoom. So if it was your turn to screen-share, you would go into this present mode and that presumably you have some sort of webcam and audio recording automatically via Zoom or whatever the platform is. We'll talk about recording it within Canada in a minute. But you'd have that and you would now be presenting within, within Canva. Canva is your interface. And then you can either advance by clicking with the mouse to go to the next slide, or you can go back by clicking on the other side of the screen. Or you can use your arrow keys, right arrow to advance, left arrow to go back. All pretty common sense. If I go back here to the very beginning here in my classroom rules, like a start my presentation by going into Present mode on the Hello everybody, welcome to classroom roles. We're going to go over class from Rolls today. Remember, please remember to raise your hand. Remember, listen carefully. Please be kind beacon. Go on. You'd go through your presentation using these arrow keys here. And then of course, if you ever want to escape out of it, you would just use the Escape key on your keyboard and you would back out of it and then you're looking at your actual camera document. So just be aware if you're sharing this monitor as part of your presentation, you would probably want to have an n slide and just sort of end on your end slide and stay in that presentation mode, and then quit out of the presentation mode. Once you're done presenting and done sharing your screen, you'd only hit escape and come back to this screen if you really wanted them to see inside of your camera project because once you hit escape your back inside your Canva projects. So again, you're just going over it up under present. You're choosing this standard option and then it's going into autoplay. Actually standard, excuse me, advance your own pace and then go ahead and hit present. And once you hit present, it goes into full screen. And you can just toggle back and forth through your slides at your own pace. You're talking as you're going. So don't forget to throw papers in the band. And then you're going to the next slide at your own pace just by hitting those keys. Now In video coming up, we're gonna get into how you would maybe go into it more advanced presentation mode where you actually would see some notes about your slides as you're presenting. But this is the standard presentation mode. So you can imagine how this would still have a lot of uses. All right, so let me just hit Escape again to escape out of this, I just wanted to show you if I go back over to that other document I had, again, this is the Instagram story document, so I'm just going to populate it with some random one here. Stand with Ukraine. Yes, I support this. Terrible things happening in the world now I hope wherever you are, you're safe and you're well. But we'll go ahead and we'll do presentation mode again with this. Now this just has one slide. So actually let me go back and Let's see. Let's go back and let's look at these templates again. Let's see if I can find one that has multiple slides. If it doesn't, I'll just keep adding pages and I'm just going to put a couple in here. Even though they don't necessarily match up, they're all different. It doesn't matter. This is just, for example, I just wanted to show you that the same thing we have this three-page Instagram story. Same thing I could go under share. I could go into present, and I could choose from the different options again, and choose Standard and choose present. And now it's going into full screen mode. But you can see that I have this Instagram format here, just taking up the center of my screen. If you were sharing the screen, you would just keep in mind that you would have these black borders. But still, if you're doing something on Instagram stories and you really wanted to have it in this sort of this story feel you could present in another format. It doesn't have to be in that presentation mode. Now that presentation mode may make the most sense if you're sharing sort of widescreen and people are going to be watching on all the standard TV screen or monitor, then that presentation would probably make sense. But if you're doing a different format and you feel like maybe people are consuming a different way or might like this, you can do whatever mode you want In the same thing, I'm using my left and right arrow keys to go backwards. Or you can click on the left or on the right, and it will advance this way. And then of course you can have an end screen or whatever. But then when you're done and you want to exit out of this, you can just hit Escape on your keyboard. That is the standard presentation mode inside of Canva certainly could be useful. You could use it for a live presentation in person. You could use it for a live presentation online. Now what if you wanted to record something that you wanted to show later? What if you wanted to record something so that people could click a link and watch it at a later date. We're gonna get into that in some more presentation options in the videos ahead. 69. 9 - Presentation autoplay mode: Okay, In the last video, we looked at the standard presentation mode. And this video, Let's jump in here and let's go to that next presentation mode. So I have the same project open here again. And if I go in our present, instead of standard, I'm choosing autoplay this time. Autoplay. Autoplay is setSpeed to automatically play. On other words, whatever the slide timings you have. So here we have page timing since we're in this page mode here. And whatever the timing is on the page, that is how long the page is going to play. It set to five seconds right now. If I come in here now and I hit Present, and then I go into auto-play and go ahead and hit Present. Then now it's gonna show each slide for five seconds and then it's going to automatically advance to the next slide. This slide should be on screen for five seconds. And then 110002003, one thousand, four hundred thousand, five hundred, ten hundred. And then it goes to the next slide. So each slide is showing for five seconds, and now you can still hit the arrow keys if you want to override that timing and automatically get it to advance. So now it's going forward and backwards really quickly because I'm just tapping the arrow keys on my keyboard. But if I stop whenever I stopped, it's going back to that slide timing. So it's gonna show a slide for five seconds and then it's gonna go to the next slide. Now I'm advancing automatically with the arrow keys again. Just want to show you when it gets to the end of that. So this is the last slide. I'm not going to hit anything. It's gonna show it for five seconds. And then it's going to loop back to the initial slide. So it's going to loop back to the initial slide and this autoplay mode when it gets three end, okay, again, I'll hit Escape to escape out of this. Now, you can imagine that this might be useful if you want to set up your whole presentation in page timings ahead of time, maybe it's something you're just going to place somewhere on a loop. So for example, I'm gonna go to a different one. Now this one here has that sort of standard project mode. You'll remember if you go into video of video project mode or a project that you launched from the home screen where Canvas thinks it's going to be a video or have video content to something like Instagram stories, something like video. For example, I launched this video one here. And here I have a project where now I have the video timeline. If you're going to do something in that autoplay mode, maybe you want to come in here as a starting point in video, a video project, because then you're gonna get this video timeline. Maybe that's a more intuitive way for you to come in here and adjust page timings. Now it works the same way on either one. So I'm going to go back to that one I just had open which was this one here. I could come in here and I could adjust the timing for this slide or I could apply to all pages. So if I come in here and do 1 second applied to all pages and hit enter. Now if I go to the next page and check it, I'll see that yes, it is at 1 second. And now if I go into Present mode and I go to autoplay, choose present, it'll go and it'll show everything for 1 second and I'll very quickly go through them. Maybe not that useful. I'm just showing you that that does work. So we'll hit escape to get out of it again. And now remember if you're in this video timeline, now you're adjusting the time here by either dragging on the sliders here, or once again with a slide timeline, with a slide, excuse me, highlighted down here. You can still go up and click the page timing. You can still make a change here and you can still make sure it applies to all pages. So the key to get it to apply to all pages is just checking that box and then making the update here works the same way. This one here, I've just set up a basic video slideshow. So maybe you can imagine this scenario where you want to slideshow and you're not always gonna be there to monitor it, but people are gonna be filtering in and out of the room. Maybe you want to show slideshow of your latest adventure or whatever it happens to be. And maybe you want to show it on a loop. So you could set up a project here, set it up as a slideshow, and then you can get it to play on a loop. Now I've just dragged in some pictures here to play a simple slideshow. But what you could also do if you want to jazz it up a little bit as you could select them all. So again, I just selected the first one by clicking on it. Then I'm holding down my Shift button and clicking on the last one to select them all. And then with all of them selected, then I'm gonna come under this animate option. Click on animate and I'll choose an option here, and I'll choose this photo zoom option. And because I had them all selected, that photo zoom has been applied on each page. Now if I wanted to do page transitions, I could come into this little spot in-between them. And I could come in here and I could change this transition, and I could add a dissolve. A simple dissolve is already setup. Now I don't think I'm going to try Shift clicking. I don't think I can come in here and apply a transition to all pages, but let's see at transition, so it's got none. So we'll do a dissolve, like come to this next transition here. At transition, I don't think right now there's a way to add a transition to every slide at once. I take the PEC, I take that back. As I'm saying this, as the words are coming out of my mouth right here on this screen. Applied between all pages. So just select the one you want to do here, apply it between all pages. For example, you can also set the duration here. This dissolve takes 0.5 seconds. If I wanted to make it maybe dissolve a little slower, I can drag it up to 1 second. So there's more of a gradual dissolve from one slide to the next. Apply between all pages. It's gonna do that between all pages. Then again, my slide timing here, I see how it's a little different for all these pages. Let me just do this real quick. Let me just come in here. And let's just do five seconds and hit Enter. Now they're all five seconds. They all should have that animation, that photo zoom, and they should all have that fade in-between the slides. And so now I have a Thirty-five seconds little loop, looping slideshow. I don't want to hit play because I've hit play. It's just going to sort of show me a preview in screen here. In other words, if I do play, it's just doing this. That's not what I wanted to do. I want to actually go into Present mode. So share, go into Present mode, choose this autoplay, hit present. And now we're gonna get that 30-second slideshow. Each slide is going to have the slider is going to have that animation that we talked about, that sort of zoom in effect. And then it's going to fade between slides from one to the next. We have that nice fade. And so very simply you can set something up where it's a little bit more eye-catching. It's a little bit more of a dynamic performance because you can add these simple animations. You can add this simple dissolve transition between slides. And then it is something that can play automatically. It can play on its own. You don't have to be there if you're just something where you want it like maybe you were at an open house or something and you wanted to show information, you could just have it play automatically. And then at the end it is going to loop back to the beginning. Again, this is the autoplay mode within Canva when you go into autoplay present mode. And again, you can still use the arrow keys if you want to override your slide timings. As soon as you stop pressing your arrow keys, It's just going to go back into using those slide timings that are set up. And of course, whenever you want escape out, it's just the Escape key again on your keyboard. That is the autoplay mode in Canva, in present mode. And then the next lesson, we'll go over a third option, which is the presenter mode. And so we'll talk about the different options you get if you go into presenter mode. But this autoplay mode, you can imagine how this would be useful for a presentation where you've recorded everything ahead of time. All this slide timings are set up and you just want to hit play and let it go. And also maybe it's something where you want it to play on a loop. Now, I've often wondered, is there a way to not have it play on a loop? Well, let me just look here. If I go in here, I don't think that I can see where there's an option to turn off this play on a loop thing. I don't think there's a way to turn it off from playing on a loop. I'm not positive. So if anybody notices that option that I've missed it, just let me know. But right now I don't think there's a way to stop it from playing on a loop, but that's probably what you're going to want to do in this mode anyways, you want to just let it play on a loop. Otherwise you're going to be there and you're gonna take control over it and you're gonna be able to stop it at the end. That's autoplay mode in present mode in Canva. And I'll see you in the next lesson where we're going to talk about the presenter mode. 70. 9 - Presenter View: Welcome back. This is Greg. We're talking presentation modes in Canada. Now in the prior two videos, we talked about the standard presentation mode and we talked about the autoplay mode. In this lesson, we're gonna talk about the presenter mode and how it could be really helpful if you're doing live presentations, either online streaming or live in-person where you actually in the room with the other people. Or it could be something you use in present in Record mode, which is another mode that we're still going to talk about after this. But let's jump in this and let's see what this presenter view is. Now first I'm going to launch a project. Now remember when you launch a project, it really depends on what user interface you want to see. Do you want to see those vertical pages down the screen where you can scroll downward and go from one page to the next. Or do you like that sort of timeline view that you get with the video editor? The reason why I say that is because if you look at video here, this video, our template that's launching, well, this is 1920 by 1080. This presentation mode here, this presentation template. Well, this is 1920 by 1080, so it's the exact same size project. The only difference that I'm going to get between these two options here is if I go into this video mode, then I'm gonna get that timeline on the bottom. If I go into presenter mode, Then I'm going to get that a different user interface where I have those vertical pages going down the page. Functionally, I'm going to have all the same functionality. Just some things are positioned a little differently. You have to do things slightly differently within a different modes. I would say if you're doing traditional video editing or some sort of video editing, we're going to have to edit the time timing of clips definitely go with this video mode. But for a more content conventional project, you might like this presentation mode. This presentation mode is actually my preference if I just want to edit sort of a presentation. So I'm gonna do this presentation template to start and we're going to let it open up on screen. Now I'm just going to choose a pretty random one here. Simple presentation. There was a classroom rules which I did before. Let's just do something different. I'm just going to choose this geography one because it's got a bunch here. So I'm just going to apply actually, I'm just gonna apply all nine pages. Let me go ahead and apply all nine pages and it should build out my projects. So those page one, page two, page three, and all the way down. So I have this project. Now of course you would start with either a blank template or a template like this. And you're gonna customize it with all your own presentation content, whatever you're doing a presentation on. We're not gonna go through all the steps with that because we covered that in the rest of this class. You know, how to get in here and how to really build your own custom project and start from a template or start from scratch and build up those elements. But in this lesson, we're really talking about the presentation mode and learning about that and how that can be useful. So we've looked at the standard view, the presentation mode, and we've looked at the autoplay mode, we know what those do. In this particular lesson, we're looking at the presenter view. Again, I'm gonna come up here under present. I'm going to go down. And instead of choosing standard or autoplay, I'm gonna choose Presenter View. And so when you choose Presenter View and hit Present, this is what's going to happen. It's going to open up a second window on screen. Then it's going to have this note in here, audience window. This window is what your audience sees. Drag it to the screen. Your audience will be looking at an enter full screen mode, and it has a button here for entering full-screen mode. Now I'm just going to drag this out of the way for a second. The other window is the presenter window. This window is just for you, place it on the screen only you can see such as your laptop or a fallback monitor. And then you can click Got it In, this will close. Okay, so let's talk about this. Let me tell you why this is so important and potentially so useful. I currently am working at a computer setup where I have two monitors. If I was doing a presentation, maybe via Zoom or something, what I could do is this window here, this window, I could drag this to my second monitor. And I could have that be what I'm sharing via Zoom. I could share that monitors con, content and that is what my audience is going to see. I can drag that over to my other window and go full screen here. If I went full-screen here, if I hit full-screen mode, it's going to go full screen right here. I can escape out of it. Because what I want to do is I want to put this over on my other monitor. Now I know when I drag it to my other monitor, you can't see it. But that's the point. You have two monitors. So either you're going to be in a situation where you are at a computer with two monitors, or maybe you have your laptop which is interfacing with another monitor at a presentation. And that other monitor is going to be what is actually projected for the audience to see. But on your laptop, you still have your laptop screen. You have scenarios like this where there are gonna be two monitors. And so you're gonna have a place to have your own window that just you can see. I'll go ahead and hit got it here. And the reason why this is so useful. Is because you can come in here now and you can give yourself reminders and it's like, Don't forget to start with a note about parking. Now let this is obviously ridiculous. I'm just making up stuff here. But the point is you can come in here and you can apply notes, and you'll also have things in here, like you have this stopwatch here. So in other words, if you know you have to talk for 30 minutes and you're trying to hit certain marks by each slide, you can go ahead and add notes so I can jump forward now my presentation to the fifth slide. You also get this nice timeline view at the bottom. So that if you wanted to skip ahead and slides or jump back and forth, you can do that very easily. Now, I'm just going to first, second, drag back. So you can see both onscreen. This is the audience window. Notice as I do things and click things here, actually I need to make this smaller, otherwise you're only going to see this screen. Let me make this one smaller for a second and just talk it up here. Now here's the audience window. I'm going to make the audience windows smaller, but keep it so you can still see. Let me just drag it smaller. Bear with me. Thank you. Now, you'll notice that I can click things here and you're seeing whatever I do in here. So I'm controlling the presentation, it via my screen. But you're seeing it on that audience window. Now if I have some notes in here, like These are my notes about this slide. This is something that only you are gonna see. The audience over here on this screen is not going to see those. So the prevent Presenter View is just very, very helpful because we've probably all wanted that little crib sheet or that cheat card, those little notes. A lot of times people will have index cards if they're presenting. But now you can have it all built-in right here in this display in front of you, along with things like a clock. This ability to type your own notes well ahead of time. This is also very useful way for practicing your presentation. I want to move the audience window out of the waivers second, but you can just give yourself little cues in here and update the notes as maybe you're practicing your presentation on your own so you can go through this. You can practice your presentation and you don't have to get a stopwatch out because you have it right here. So it just gives you a very helpful way of not only practicing, but then when you actually get to that live presentation, you have all these cues and you have all these navigation options. And at the bottom here you can see what slide you're on. And so it's just going to help keep you organized. It's just gonna be something that gives you a lot of tools to help you be prepared and hopefully give a better presentation because that's the whole idea. These camera tools are meant to be there for you to do a better job with presentations. And I think they really have a lot of tools that can be really helpful. So really quickly, let's just go through some of the options in here so I can reset this presentation timer. You're going to restart that presentation time. Are those buttons there. And then you have something here with this little keyboard for magic shortcuts. These magic shortcuts are basically give you some keyboard shortcuts. And they show you what the keyboard letter is for bringing up some sort of animation effects and other things that they would see in the audience window. You're not currently seeing this because it's gonna show in the audience window. So let me just go ahead and again, size down my screen. Let me bring back that audience window for a second. I'm even going to make the presenter window even smaller here. Bear with me. And I'm going to make the audience window a little bigger just so you can see better. These magic shortcuts that I'm going to demonstrate, these are things where you can use the keyboard shortcut or if you forget, you have this keyboard where you can bring it up here. Now 0 through nine is for a timer. So if I hit one on my keyboard, actually this, these numbers here are actually ones. We have to use that number keypad on your thing, I believe. But so there's one. And you see how it brought a timer up on the thing. I'm actually not getting the, let's see. Close out of that 0. There it is. If it hit 0, I get that short time or if I hit one. And so one-minute timer, if I hit two, it's a two minute timer. Three is a three-minute timer. So this is actually working whether I use my regular keyboard or I don't know yet. Some keyboards have the layout where they have the key, the number keys up top, and then also another number keypad on the side. I find that either of those is working. Didn't seem like when I first hit it, it does, but now I can see it is one through nine. They just set a time from one to nine minutes. So imagine if you're given a presentation and you had maybe a five-minute exercise, you can really easily tap five minutes in your keyboard. The audience would see this in the audience window. And everybody knows that's the five-minute countdown for whatever activity you're performing. Now the other ones are certain sort of animations here where some of these I think are kind of silly, but some of them might be a little useful. This blur thing is something that hides the audience screen. Maybe if you were doing something, we're temporarily you, I had to exit your presentation. Well, I guess if you exited your presentation, you might lose your audience window. But if you temporarily realized you had something on screen or do you didn't want to show? If you wanted to blur something out, you do have this be for this blur thing here. If I go Q for quiet, that brings up the little quiet face there. For all of these, if you tap them twice, it'll get rid of them on-screen. So if I tap the timer and then tap it again, it goes away. If I tap the blur, it, it goes away. So if you tap it once it starts the effect, tap it again and gets rid of the effect. We'll just go through them all real quick. Here's the quiet which we just did. You have this bubble effect. So again, some of these are kind of silly. Now I did notice with this bubble fact the other day and it's happening again. There's this bug in Canvas currently where if you hit the bubbles, I can't figure out how to get out of the bubbles. The bubbles will not stop even when I tap this, Let's try O on my keyboard. Now, the bubbles aren't stopping. So I think this is a currently a bug. So I think what I would have to do is just exit out of this presentation for a second. So what I'm gonna do is just hit Escape to exit out of my presentation. But then I'm going to jump right back in there into Presenter View and hit present. And again, we get that audience window. And I'll size down my window just so we can see them both together. There we go. We'll get got it. Enter full-screen mode. Yep, we know that. But actually I want to escape out of full-screen mode because I'm gonna be able to see them both on screen. Sorry about that. So we're back in here. So again, bubbles, some warning. The bubbles for some reason seem like they just keep coming and coming. So they asked the bug for Canvas to workout, but we'll check out the other ones real quick. So here's the confetti. That's kind of cool. Drum moral, the drum roll. I don't know if I'm recording my computer audio right now. But besides the animation, you also can hear the drum roll. If you're making an announcement or something, you could do that. So I am hearing the drum roll. There's this curtain call here where we see, let me get rid of the general curtain call. Basically, close the curtains, opened the curtains. Again, I don't think everybody's going to use all these things. But they're here. This is where you get tomb or you can use these keyboard shortcuts. So I'm just showing you so that they know they're there. These are magic shortcuts. And again, close just takes it away that those are the magic shortcuts. This is the presenter view. It just gives you some tools that are going to make it more helpful for you as a presenter as you're doing a live presentation. Now there also is this Canva live feature, which you'll see in some of the other presentations of the mode. Presentation modes as well, excuse me, where you can click on this and it says Canva live lets your audience joined from any device and crowdsource questions, start new session. Again. I don't know too much about this. This is a newer camera feature, feature where I think it's like going live on YouTube, going live on Facebook. You can now go live on Canva. If you want to learn more about this, you can just click this. Learn More Canva live link that's shown up at the bottom of the screen here. Here now, it's not something I want to cover right now. But if you want to go into that presenter mode, click on this, learn more about Campbell live. You can learn more and more about Campbell live. Let us know what you think. Let us know if you think it's a cool option. That's presenter mode inside of Canva. In the next lesson, we're gonna take it a step further and we're gonna talk about the present and record option under those presentation options inside of Canva. 71. 9 - Voice over audio considerations: Okay, In the previous example, we were looking at how you can do a presentation and you can do live audio, you can record live audio with your presentation. Now in that example, I used my webcam. Of course, there are other options. Whatever device you have hooked up to Canada, microphone phone wise, it'll recognize and you can record. So there are different options. So let's just talk a tiny bit about the options. And I will show you sort of a demonstration. We'll do a test and compare my webcam microphone versus a higher-end microphone. Now, I'm not going to make this a full course obviously about sound quality and microphones. But let's just jump into it a little bit just to give you some basic information. If I go here, we can see that in the last video, I was just recording my example with web, a webcam. So I have like a cheap $60 webcam. It captures high definition video, but then there also is a microphone in here. So it will pick up the ambient noise in the room. It will pick up your voice. It also picks up a lot of distractions. It sort of sounds a little bit like you're an echoed in an echo chamber. It's not the best sound quality, but it's certainly is a reasonable place to start. And if that's what you have, great. Go ahead and get started with that. Now the next level up I would say would be a USB microphone. So this microphone here is the Samson see 01 you pro I think. And this is the first microphone apart. And some of the earlier lessons in the course, some of the older lessons that haven't been updated. I use this microphone while recording audio for those lessons. I believe this is like a $100 a microphone, a 100 US dollars, something like that. All these dollar amounts I'm talking in our US dollars. So you can look up the currency rates for your country and see what it would be and see what options you might have. But a USB microphone is just one That's its plug-and-play. It's really easy. Basically, you just have a USB cable that goes into the bottom of the microphone and that goes directly into the USB port on your computer. Usually that is all the setup you need and you are ready to go. And it definitely represents a big jump in sound quality from a webcam go into the USB microphone because it just cuts back a lot of the other noise and really captures your voice. You want to put it close to your mouth, talk into it. And so that definitely is a good option if you want to make it a little bit of investment. If you start to find yourself doing more audio, do some, do some little research, see what brands and models are popular and what fits your budget, and that's a great place to start. Now, since then I have advanced to this audio technical mike, which is an XLR mic. An XLR mic again, I don't know tons about audio, so I'm not gonna get all technical with you, but basically it doesn't plug directly into your computer. It first goes in into a little mixer box and passes through that before it comes into your computer. Usually you can get sometimes a little higher level of sound with this. But again, sound is a subject all to itself. But, but those are the basics. I would start with a webcam. If you have that. If you want improved quality, you can jump to a USB microphone. And then if you really get into recording audio and doing things with audio, you may someday find yourself getting an XLR mic. But again, start with where your budget is, what works for you and you can advance as appropriate. Now there are some other basic sound tricks to know. One is sound really bounces off surfaces as best, especially hard surfaces. And that comes back to wherever the recording and ends up being interference in background ambient noise and your recording. So obvious things are like turn-off fans, are there noise that you have in the room? You want to have a quiet space. But then the more padding you have in that room like carpets are, are, are soft curtains. Soft. Things like that are gonna help dampen the sound. It's not going to bounce back. And so that is going to be a better recording environment. So you can do little things like that to improve the audio quality that you're getting. That's why sound studios, they have that padding on all the wall and that is just a damp this sounds so it doesn't bounce back, so you don't get that interference. So that's the basic thing. And the other basic thing is a lot of people will use what's called a pop filter. I have one open here. Let me just show you. This is just a blog on whether you need a pop filter or not. It is basically just a little device like this that you're seeing right here that you put either in front or over your microphone. And it just helps out. Some of those helps eliminate some of those high frequency sounds. So when you're making p sounds, popping sounds or teas or things like that. Sometimes they can cause like sort of a unpleasant sound, that's sort of a popping sound and that microphone. So again, this just damp, it's the sound and it will filter out some of those sounds. These are usually really cheap, maybe like $10. And against I've known people that even put socks over the microphone. That's going to work as well. So you can do these little tricks just to help improve that audio quality. That's about all I want to say about microphones. And I'll let you proceed from there. But I will do a quick test right here, just to show you the difference from capturing audio with a webcam versus capturing it with this XLR microphone. Now what you're hearing now is me talking through the XOR mark, but it's been captured via my Camtasia software, which is the software I use for doing the screen capture and audio capture for this course, if you want at the end of this section, when we talk about the screen capture. I'm sort of do a review of software like Camtasia versus what you can do in Canada and how far you can you can push Canada. And what my recommendations are would be there would be with that. But for now, I'm gonna do a live demo where we do the webcam and we do the XOR. We're going to capture it all in Canvas so you're able to hear what these sound like, these different options capturing with the options in Canada, I'm just gonna come under present mode and we'll do present and record and then I'll click Next and go to recording studio. And camera will leave off for now. And microphone right now is set to webcam, so we'll start with that and that will be the first test. So start recording. This is me recording with my webcam. This is me recording with my webcam. I'll go ahead and end at my recording. And then I'm gonna go to that second slide and we'll do another test. So right now I'm just going to hit Save and Exit. When I do, I can see that my recording shows up here. So under my uploads tab under audio now it's going to show with the timestamp. So this is from today at this time, I have this and I can preview this by just hitting play. This is Ni recording with my webcam. This is me recording with my webcam. Now I have this audio clip that I've just recorded right here. Now when you record in this fashion in presenter mode, it's just going to show up here under this audio section. It's not actually added to my presentation yet. If I were to go into present and just go into standard mode or into autoplay. Moses, let's just do auto-play and just to show you that there's no audio with this yet someone hit Play. Slide one, we're getting no audio. Gonna go to slide two, no audio. So it's not actually added to anything yet. So let me hit Escape to escape out of that. Now if I did want to add it to my presentation, what I could do is just grab it over here and drag it on top of my slide. Now notice as I do, I'm getting this little pop-up that says dropped to add your music, you can use one track per design. Now this isn't very important because right now we're stumbling into the differences and the major differences is you can run into between the two sort of user interfaces that you can get based on what type of project you launch. Since I launched the presentation, it's limiting me to this one track per design. However, had I gone and launched something in video mode? Then suddenly I'm going to have a lot more options open to me. I can use multiple audio tracks and they're gonna be a lot easier to work with because of that timeline where I see my video tracks and I'm gonna show you what it means. So if I drop this one right here, then suddenly I can tell you may pause it as it's playing back. Suddenly I can see that I have a recording here and you'll get this little icon down here. Now you can click this and it'll show the audio track up here. If you go into audio effects, you can do things like you can add a fade in, you can add a fade out. You can come over here onto this option here. It keeps, it keeps playing on me there. You can go under this option here and you can lower the sound if you want to help. However, like I said, it's just this one audio clip that I can add to my entire presentation. Now it is there if I go back into this present mode in present, but you'll notice it's just going to play on a loop recording with my webcam. It's playing on a loop. My webcam. This is needed, it's continuing to play on a loop. This is me recording. So even though I just dragged it and added to that second slide, it's just playing on a loop here. No matter what slide I'm on, even when it cycles back in, cycles back through, it's just playing on a loop. And now let me just pause this for a second. Escape out of this presentation so we don't have to hear that audio playing. But so all it's doing when you add that one track is it's playing on a loop. So if I had a slideshow and I was just showing a picture slideshow. And I wanted to do it in this sort of design interface where you have the multiple pages. And that was a better way for me to design. I could do that. I could add a nice little audio track that went with the pictures. It could play on a loop that might work out fine. But if you're doing anything more than that, if you're doing some sort of presenting where you're bringing in multiple voiceover tracks. I definitely would not work in this user interface. I would definitely work within the video interface. So again, if I come back to this home option here, we can see that both the video and the presentation modes, they're both 1920 by 1080 pixels. The exact same in terms of returns, in terms of resolution, but you're getting drastically different results when you get into the user interface. So here is the exact same project we just saw, except this is a video project. And now suddenly you see we have the timeline here. And suddenly if I hit play down here, this is Ni recording with my webcam. Recording with my webcam. I can add that audio track. But if I wanted to add a second audio track. If I could drag it in there again, I have these easy handles where I can come in here and I can adjust and clip the what audio is playing. If I have the play head at a certain point and I come on here and then I want to split the audio. I can split it into multiple things. So you can imagine if you made a mistake in your audio and you wanted to cut it out, you could split it and you could get rid of that part of the clip that has you stumbling over your words or whatever. It's just a lot simpler. So let's go ahead and record the second part of this test, but I just wanted to take that shorter sidebar to explain. You definitely want to be in this sort of video project interface or Instagram Reels or any sort of project that's going to give you this video timeline at the bottom. You definitely want that to be the space you're working in. So I'm gonna go ahead and do the same thing now and I'm going to go ahead and record another option. So again, I'll just come under the share options here. And I will go under this present and record and go to recording studio. Same thing we did before. But this time I'm on their microphone, I'm gonna switch it over to my focus, right? Audio. And that is my audio technical technical microphone. And this focus right audio, as I mentioned with an XLR mic, it has to go through the mixer box. And so that's what this focus, right? Audio is. I'm going to choose that again. I can see it's working because I'm still getting the blue bar. So I'm gonna say, I'm gonna hit start recording. This is my XLR microphone. This is my XLR microphone. So as you can see, you do get a better audio quality if you invest a little bit and a microphone, so you can start with the USB microphone and then you can advance someday, maybe to next well, our microphone. Now I will say that I don't I didn't notice a huge jump in quality when I went from my USB microphone, the Sampson that I showed you earlier to his XLR microphone. If you're worried about saving dollars, definitely feel comfortable starting with a USB microphone. It's still going to be a big jump in quality over just using the audio input from your webcam. I'll go ahead and end the recording, and then we'll see how we can add this to our track. Now remember in that other, so we'll go ahead and hit Save and Exit. Well, you'll remember in that other, that other workspace, that other user interface, we can only add one audio track so we wouldn't be able to do what I'm just about to do, but now I can grab this one. I'm gonna pull it over and drop it in. We'll grab it and pull it up. Now, I do find that this interface sometimes is a little clunky and takes a little while to catch up. Let me just come in here and try to stretch this out. Let's see, Adjust. This does take a little bit of planning playing just to get around in here. If you double-click, you get into it, then you can make sure that it's at the beginning there. And then I want to extend it out so we're getting the whole thing. I think what I think with the problem I'm running into now this is good that this happened is it's only letting the audio extend as far as my video goes, my video clips, he goes here, so I'm trying to explain this audio and won't let me. What I first have to do is grab my video. And that's just a still frame so I can stretch it out as much as I want. Now if I come to my audio, there we go. Let's just go and try and we don't need to hear everything I just said, but we'll just play this back so we can get to here both of them. First, it's going to be that webcam. And if you look at the waveforms here, it's kind of hard to see, but the wave form is a little bit smaller here. I think just because it was a little tougher for the webcam to pick up the audio because it's not quite as close as the XLR microphone, which is sort of right in front of where I'm talking an inch or two in front of me talking. But let's go ahead and play this back and hear the difference. Hit Play. I actually got to get my play head back to the beginning. So you can just grab that and pull it back and go ahead and hit Play. This is Ni recording with my webcam. This is me recording with my webcam. This is my XLR microphone. This is my exhale our microphone. So as you can see, you do get a better audio quality if you invest a little bit and a microphone so you can start with the USB pause that we don't need to hear all of that. But the takeaway from this lesson is you do want to think about the audio quality you're gonna get from whatever input device you're using, whatever microphone or your webcam as you get into recording more audio, the audio options are really cool on Canvas. So I encourage you to take advantage of this voiceover. Just do a little research and start to figure out whether you want to invest in something small like a USB microphone, whatever was going to work for you in your budget. And then also if you start to work with multiple sort of voice-over tracks in one project, know that you're going to have to be in this project where you get to video timeline, that other interface here, where you're in this sort of vertical scrolling interface. It's not going to let you add more than one track and you're going to have a lot of trouble working with that one drag is just going to loop over and over. It's going to make you pull your hair out. So just make sure you're in this video timeline view. And then you have a lot more flexibility. And suddenly you can come in here and you can do things like where you right-click on here. You can split your audio. You have all the other options down here that you're going to have a lot, a lot of trouble finding if you're in that other user interface. So that wraps up this section on audio. We're going to move ahead and we'll look all at all the other options here inside of Canva when it comes to presentations and recording video and all the other good stuff. So I'll see you in those lessons in just a minute. 72. 9 - Present and record: Okay, Let's talk about yet another presentation option you have in Canva, and that is the present and record option. Now we looked at this classroom rules basic example earlier when we were just looking at this and showing how you could, yeah, you could use standard presentation mode. And it goes full screen and you can present this to a live audience. You can present this via Zoom or some other place where you're sharing your screen. But what if you wanted to be able to record and heavy final video so something you could share the link later with an audience that they wanted to watch it later. Or maybe you could share the video later so that multiple people could watch it at a later occasion. Well, this is where these present in record option is going to come into play. Let's imagine that I wanted to maybe, maybe on the principal of the school and I wanted to share this with all the different teachers at the school so they could all have this video to show in their classroom. So I could come up here. And as I went into this, I could go into present. Or again, you could come under the share mode also. And you have this present and records. I'll choose present and record. Now it's gonna give you a link. So what I'm gonna do is copy this link, because this link is going to be a link where someone could go online to see the presentation online, this Canvas space. And you also have the option for downloading the recording. Now actually it has this already because I did this previously and I recorded one. So let me just delete this because you're only going to see what I'm seeing right now after recorded something. So do you want to delete your recording? So I'll just go ahead and click Okay, Yeah, I can get rid of that. And so what you're gonna see initially when you come on representing record is you're going to see this go to recording studio. Once you've recorded something, you're gonna see what I just saw. But for now originally you're going to see this goto recording studio. So we're going to launch that. And anytime you launch your recording studio, the first thing you want to do is set up your microphone and set up your camera. You can record yourself on screen and we're gonna talk about recording yourself in upcoming videos. But in this particular one, I'm only going to record audio. In this particular video. I'm just going to talk about recording audio for both options though you have drop-down menu. So right now it's recording audio through my webcam here. And I can see that it's working because it has this blue bar goes away. When I stopped talking about, when I start talking, I can see that yes, I'm getting a visual representation. So I can see that that is working. But now this is a webcam that's picking up my audio right now. Canada will show any microphones that you have hooked up there. So for example, I can also switch to my focus, right? Usb audio. I can switch to that device. You're gonna choose whatever device you think is going to give you the best sound. Now to show you what I mean, I will do a town's a sound test here. But for starters, I'm going to use this webcam. Because most people might have a webcam. If you just have a webcam, that's fine. Most webcams, they're all going to come with a built-in camera where you can take video of yourself. Just check the resolution of the webcam you're buying. You usually want, at least in HD, which is going to be 1920 by 1080, in terms of the number or number of pixels that it's capturing that standard video. Now if you go for k, that's gonna be high def and even higher definition 4k video. But you don't really need that unless you're doing really, really high-end video stuff. I think any webcam that's going to give you high definition video In 1920 by 1080 is going to be good enough and you can get those for fairly cheap. The webcam I have was $60 or something when I bought it like a year ago or something. Actually, it's probably more than a year ago and it does high-definition video and it also does audio. But like I said, the audio quality you get from that is not going to be the same as a USB or an XLR microphone. And we'll get into those options a little bit as we go forward. But for now, let's just set this to webcam. So we're going to get this webcam here. Again, I can tell it to working and then I'm gonna go ahead and hit start recording. What happens is when I go into start recording, I can then go through my presentation and I can record myself talking over top of my presentation. And that's what's going to be. My final video is going to be, now I think this is gonna be best shown, for example, I'm just going to go through here. And of course this classroom rules is just a silly example, but I'm going to pretend that I'm going over the classroom rules. So here we go. We're gonna go start recording. Hello everyone. Let's review the classroom rules. The first rule is raise your hands. You always want to raise your hand when you have something you want to say a question you want to ask. Next room, listened carefully, listen carefully so you make sure you can hear all instructions, and so you can communicate effectively with your classmates. Next thing is be kind above all else be kind. This, this is for supportive of our environment. So please be kind. Lineup, don't forget the lineup when it's appropriate. Throw papers in the bin. No shouting. Help tidy up. Silence, please. Don't fight. Don't forget to share. Okay, so those are the classroom rules. So of course this is just me being silly going through this presentation just as an example. But I'm still recording. And all of this is going into my final video. And then the moment here, I hit N recording, I can stop now of course, I can also pause. Now anything I'm saying right now, we're not going to hear this in the final video. It's not going to capture this because on pause. As soon as their resume, once again, I am now recording what I'm saying. And this is going into my final video. And now I'm going to stop because when I hit N recording here and nothing else is going to be recorded, recorded. So my video is over now and I'm gonna hit end. As soon as you hit. And you'll see this uploading your recording. And so what it's doing is it's coming up with this link. Here is a link now in your video can be found in this Canvas space. Now this is just a private link. But anybody that you give this link to, we'll be able to see this link. So you see it says no sign-in required. Anybody that has this link. Now nobody is gonna come up with this link because look at how customize it is, but just know it is going up, they're in public space. But again, anybody that you'd give this link to, we'll be able to access this content. So go ahead and copy this link. Then once it's copied, you also can save and exit. Or if you're like, I don't want anything to do with this. I did a really bad job. You can discard it. Or you have the download option where you can download and save to your computer. So all these might be options, Save and Exit if you want to bring it back into Canva, download if you want to download it to your computer. And then this link here is going to let people see it in their browser. What I'm gonna do is I'm gonna go through all these options just so we can see how they all work. I will go ahead and hit Save. So right now, because I hit Save, it's downloading my recording. And so it's going to ask me once it's done downloading here where I want to save this on my machine. So I'll save that to my machine and we'll see what it looks like. But while we're waiting, let see what it looks like here. Live in the Canva web space of hit play. Hello everyone. Let's review the classroom rules. The first rule is raise your hands. You always want to raise your hand when you have something you want to say a question you want to ask. Next rule. Now we're hearing that presentation that I've recorded and the audio quality from my microphone with your classmates. Next thing is be kind above all else be recorded. But I wanted to go here. We just line up, pause it for a second. You can see that it has a little mark. Each time I advanced a slide. Again, I can play this back, but it's also given me the little chapter markers is little mark. Every time I changed the slide you can see I got tired of doing the examples, so I started to speed up here at the end. But anytime I went to a new slide here, it's got a little mark on this. So again, you could share this link to anybody to play. If they wanted to jump around to the different sections, they could jump around to different sections. And then of course, if I go to the end here you remember I was pausing a couple of times and we'll see that it didn't record. So let's just play the very end of this. And now I'm going to stop because when I hit N recording here and nothing else is gonna be recorded, record it. So my video is over now and I'm gonna hit. Okay, so there it is. So that's pretty darn cool that you can very simply record one of your presentations and then share it with an audience. You could, you could create a project on any sort of topic you wanted to inside of Canva, very easily use this present in record option and shared with an audience. Or it could be something as simple as if you're working with the design team. You could be asking questions about a current design, going over that design by showing the different pages in that present mode and asking questions to the other people on your team. I think there are a lot of potential uses of this, and that is pretty cool. Now let's go ahead and see what I got for that other options. So just give me 1 second here and I'll get it up on screen. So I did it into my Downloads folder and then in my Temp folder, if you're like me, the hardest thing is always finding where you put stuff. So here we go. I download, it says Temp folder. This is an MP4 file itself, a one-minute and four seconds, and it's 1.83 gigabytes. Again. If I click that again, we can launch it again. So here it is playing. Hello everyone, Let's result. And here's an MP4 file. If I wanted to hand this out to different people, I could do that as well. I could publish it lots of different places. I could upload it to YouTube. Lots of different options. So again, I think this present a record options just really gives you a lot of opt options in terms of how you could possibly use it. One last thing I mentioned is that you can also of course upload that recording you to recreated. So I went ahead and I did upload media and I uploaded that MP4 that I just showed you. So here it is under my videos. And so for example, maybe I want to use this in another presentation that's kind of Meta presentation within a presentation. But maybe I was doing a presentation on school rules. And so maybe within here I wanted that simple presentation on the classroom rules so I could come in here and I could add a new page. And so let's come in here and take this page here which I accidentally duplicated. So I'll just clear this stuff out of here. Let's change this page color to black, and we'll just come under elements and add a frame. So at a simple grid here, and we'll make this smaller. And then of course I'll come back to my uploads and we'll grab the classroom rules. And then I could load the classroom rule here. It started to play automatically. Let me just hand you always want to pause it here. It's not playing over me. I could add a heading here and drag this up. Let's make sure we have our font color to white. Let's make this classroom rules. Then. There you go. So now if you did another presentation, now you could have a presentation playing within your presentation. Just one note about this is when you add a video to a static page like this, then the page length here becomes the length of this video. So since this is a one-minute and for second video, now you'll now notice when I'm on this page and I click on here, I can now see that timing up here. This slide is going to pay a play for one minute and four seconds. Under this playback, you would see an extended timeline if you have the video timeline. But if you have this older interface here, because you launched a different project type, the presentation project type. Then you'll see up here one minute and four seconds. And so then if you were an autoplay present mode, one-minute and four seconds is how long that particular slide would play back. And of course, if you were in standard present mode, then you'd actually be able to see it on screen and click it and let it play for the duration and then manually advance to the next slide. So just keep all that in mind and that does it for the present and record mode again, I think very, very helpful and lots of different ways you can use it. So get creative. Think about all those different ways you can take advantage of this. And I'll see you in the next lesson. 73. 9 - Present and record with video: Okay, Let's talk about the options for recording video of yourself, either to go along with the presentation or to otherwise use in Canva. We saw before I could do the present and record mode and then get a download link where our link where people could go watch that or you could have it downloaded to yourself where you could share otherwise. And we did that with audio, but you can also do that where you record video of yourself. So we're gonna go to same place. We're gonna go under this present option up here. Or again, you can go to the sheet under the Share menu and you'll find is present in records. So I'm gonna click Present and record. And then we're gonna go to our recording studio. Now when we did this before, we were just capturing audio. But now we're also going to let it access or webcam are also going to let it record video of yourself talking. So we have the drop-down for selecting our microphone and then you also have an option for selecting a camera. It may say no camera, but if you have a camera hooked up, it will be able to find it to income in here. And here I have my webcam hooked up so I can click on that. And when I do, I'm now gonna see a preview of myself. Let me try it again. I'm going to now see a preview of myself talking here in this screen. If I look at the camera, I'm looking at the camera and then if I'm looking down on my screen, so that's something to work on, keeping eye contact with the camera as you get into your presentation. But I'm not going to worry about that quite yet. I just want to talk about a few of the things you may want to consider when you start shooting video. This way, we all probably have our hang-ups about being on screen. Maybe it's something you're comfortable with. Maybe it's something you're not at all comfortable with or somewhere in-between on this spectrum, wherever it is. Let me encourage you. You can do it. I want you to just practice, put yourself out there. And then I want to say what you're going for here is you're not going for perfection. You're going for good enough. You're going for getting it done and putting it out there. And then if you need to level up your quality of your video as you go, I'll give you some tips for things you can work on and then practice is gonna be the biggest thing. But again, we're not going for perfection. So first a couple of things here. You can see behind me that it is a total mess in my office. I actually even have my dog right here. My dog is on the couch behind me. This is probably a situation that most people have where my home office is a shared family space and it's very cluttered a lot of the time. I'm not the best at staying organized, but I'm not gonna let that stop me from recording video. When I need to record video, I'm gonna give you some basic tips you can do. First of all, would just be getting your webcam centered, get yourself centered. Try to be at eye level with your camera centered in the screen like that. Then if you have a really organized or unorganized space like this, you can use a few tricks. For me. I have a paper roll background that you're actually going to see me pull down a little bit just to hide some of this clutter. And then I'll show you farther and post-processing and Canva, how you can sort of crop and even farther and get rid of even more the clutter. But you could have a clean space, maybe you have a clean space. So it's not an issue for you. If you have a laptop, you can reposition your laptop and pointed so you have a clean background or a nicely stylized are organized background or whatever works for you. But for me I have this paper roll, so I'm gonna go pull that down now. So bear with me. This is just a green background. And you would normally shoot for like shooting green screen. I'm not going to worry about lighting it properly to be able to do a good key that you would need for a green screen. I'm just basically using it to declutter my background. The other thing I could do is sort of position myself. So I'm sort of in the center of that. Because then when I crop and later the little bits on the side here that you're seeing, you're not gonna be able to see little things like that. And then the other things would be, what is your lighting situation? So I have a big window in my office here, so I am getting some natural light. That of course that's going to change from day to day. That's my dog shaking back there. If you're that that's gonna change from day to day depending on the weather and things like that. And you might be shooting at night. So you might want to consider getting an artificial light of some sort. Let me just show you what I have here. Just soft camera. I'm gonna pull this on for a second. This is just a basic ring light. See if I can get it centered here. This is just a basic ring light I continuous light. I can turn it on and it's going to stay on and I can get way too much power that I need to. So usually keep this at the lowest setting. Then I can adjust it from sort of a fluorescent light to a white light. I like they'll have a slightly warm tone, but maybe to the white side of that. And then what I do is I just take that and actually position it right in front of my monitor because my webcam is on the top of my monitor. And so this is actually right in front of the screen, but you're not seeing it because my webcam is just shooting right through that. And so all that is doing is just putting a little fill light on my face. I'm not gonna shoot big full screen video. Usually I do screen recording. We're, I'm doing some sort of software tutorial. You don't really need to see my face very often. I don't do tons of video. But if I want to have a little bubble like this, and Canada were among the screen. That's something I can start doing. This kind of setup is going to make it so I can do it really easy again, when I'm ready to talk, I'm going to reposition myself, get my self-centered here in the screen. And then we're gonna go ahead here. And we're gonna go ahead and I'm going to hit the Start Recording button. But so the takeaway is you can do some little things just to improve your video quality incrementally. And again, I want you to have that mantra of make it good enough. Don't try to be a perfectionist because I definitely suffer from that where I think sometimes we're all our worst enemy. We tried to get things perfect and then we just get in our head and then we don't do it because it's going to be too hard to get it perfect. Just do it so it's good enough. Get it out there and then improve as you go. Once you're in this interface and you have your webcam setup or maybe it's your laptop camera or whatever it is. Then you can go ahead and hit start recording. Then this is just gonna be just like present in Record mode was before for us, where I have this presenter view so I can see any notes I have. I can just see the slides. And as I see the slides, I'll just talk over the slides as I go. This is slide too. So I would say something about slide too. Then we're gonna go and this is all stuff we've done before, but now it's also capturing this video of myself. And then of course I've been looking down at my screen. You got to work on looking up here. And this is one of the reasons why I don't usually use this present in record very often. I'll show you in the next video how I would tend to maybe record the presentation by itself, but then capture this video separately and edited in separately and we'll talk about that in the next lesson. But for this lesson, I'll go ahead and end this recording. I'll stop, stop that. So I've stopped it now. In a minute here I'll just show you the final results of what we just recorded and then how to make some edits, again to clean it up so you even have less distractions in the background. So again, you can go visit this link just like before and see that video of yourself again, but nobody's going to get to this link really unless you share that link. So I wouldn't worry about that too much. I would just do it, get it done. But then you can also download this and have it on your computer if you want to have it as an mp4 and your computer. And then also if you choose Save and Exit, it's going to save it and upload it there onto your Canva uploads. So I'm gonna choose Save and Exit. And we'll give it a second and then we'll see if it populates into this file and we'll go from there. Okay, so I chose save and exit. So that video I just recorded, I'm going to find that under uploads and I'm going to find it under the video tab. So this one here then in Record mode, this one up here for us, where I have this participant is the video I just recorded. So again, I can come in here, I can size it down. I can come in here and double-click on it. And if I want to crop in, I can reposition. This is where I said before, you could come in here and you can make it so you could have even less distraction showing you if you wanted to make it as big. Again, the quality of this video, I don't think is over the top. So I don't think Canva is gonna be something for having. I think when it's recording this particular video of you accompanying the presentation, it's not giving you the highest quality and result. So it's not gonna be something to be shown full-screen is going to be shown for something to complement the screen capture that you're doing of your video presentation. But again, you could dress this up with a frame. So if I just come in here, I could drag this back to the full dimensions again just by coming in here, again, double-click to get in when you want to get into this crop mode and then use these handles and then go ahead and do that. And then if I wanted to go under my frames here, so I'll go into elements and I'll just grab a circular frame or grid or something. So we'll come down here to frames. I'll grab this circular frame and I'll drag this, and then I'll drag my video and I'll just plop it in there. And then again, I can come in here, then I can resize and reposition is I need to. So maybe I'll make this a little bit bigger. I'll center a little bit, but then I'll take the whole thing and I'll make it a little smaller. And then I can put it wherever I want in the screen. And then you can always dress this up a little bit more like if you wanted to have sort of a background or something behind this. Again, I've missed and I have some of my green screen not covering. What I shot there. That was maybe something I would need to work on and reposition things a little bit better. Of course, I could also come in here and I can resize things and reposition. But again, it's just the format that it gave me, the particular format at a captured here. It's not quite, I would've needed to reposition myself a little bit better in front of that background. But then again, I was wanted to point out here that I could come in here and I could take this circle here and I'm actually take this circle and I'm just going to fill it with a solid color. So maybe we want to fill it with this color here. And then I will take my video. And I'm gonna actually bring my video to the top. So we use that control in my bracket key. What I just did was to bring this forward. So I brought it forward. So this is on top. And then I'm going to get it centered completely there. And then maybe I'll even take the one frame and all control C Control V to duplicate it. I'm going to grab a different color here. And again, I'll make this. A little bit bigger. Again, I'm going to use Control bracket keys to push it back. And then I'm going to just drag it and position it. So it's again centered with both of those. In other words, you can do everything you want and then you could come in here and you can make these a group. I don't want this classroom texts to be part of the group. Let me just try this again. Let me just move this for a second. Let me grab these elements, make this a group. And now I have this as a group element. And I could put it, maybe I want it to be up there in the upper right, whatever, you get the idea. Once you have this video, you can come in and use it any way you want because you have the video clip under uploads. Now of course, I could have downloaded that whole presentation with me talking over the slides. I would've wanted to actually go through the whole presentation, but then you could do that. And remember you also have that link. I can still get to those by just coming back to the share button here or under present and go to present and record. And if recorded something, it's still gonna be there and I can still download it. If I wanted to see what I'm going to be downloading, I can copy this link. And then of course, if I open that up in my browser, I'm going to see where this exists only Canvas server. So if I hit play now, then in Record mode, here is what I did before. So here's me recording and talking down there I have again the slides and as I see, let me just pause this for a second. The slides is like you can hear me talk. Again. If you're doing the sort of hands-on presentation, maybe you're presenting live streaming or if you're presenting at a conference or something. If you're at a conference in person, this isn't gonna make sense. But if you're presenting live and it's something where you want to be able to make eye contact Tech. Do you want to have a visual presence while still screen-sharing and showing your screen via Zoom or something, you could do something like this where you set up ahead of time. You have a nice clean background behind you. Obviously, you may be want to do a better job than I did about not getting the edges in the frame like that. But then you can have this as part of your presentation. As you record it. You can also download the whole thing and then you'll have that little bubble in here. But if it's the type of thing where you're just going to be working in Canva. And you're gonna be bringing in the video content into Canva and then doing something with it in Canva, then you don't have to worry so much about this because you're going to be editing it anyways, once you get back into Canvas. So that covers the basics of how to use that present in record option in Canada to not only record your presentation, but to also capture video and audio as you're going through your presentation. And then if you do find that you want to go back in and record something else, you can go back in under present in record again, of course, when you get back in here, you're gonna see this option here to download recording. That's the one, you just record it. So if you want, you can go ahead and delete that once you know you don't need that anymore. And then once you delete that, you're still going to have that video that you just recorded that is still going to be hidden here under the video section. You're going to get there. You still have that video you just recorded. But so now if you want to record something new, again, head back over to present and record from under presented and record. You can do it all over again and you can record something new that does it for this lesson. But in the next lesson we're gonna talk about this record yourself option under uploads. We're gonna talk about how it's similar, but a little bit different and actually opens up even more possibilities when recording inside of Canva. 74. 9 - Record Yourself: Okay, So previously prior to this, we had been going up under the Share menu and we had been finding this present and record. Well, there's one more option in Canva and you can come under uploads. And then under uploads you're going to use this record yourself option. Okay, so let's talk about this record yourself option. But before we do, let me just show you that I have a sort of a video project opened on screen, and it just has three slides and I've numbered the slides 123. So that as I go through and record myself, we're gonna be able to see visually what slide them on. Let's talk more now about this record yourself option. How it's similar in some ways, but also gives you some more differences, some more ability, some more things you can do in Canada when you record yourself. Okay, So I will come over to this record yourself option now. And it's going to launch this new studio, which is slightly different from the recording studio we've got before under that present and record. First of all, this is going to have three options up here. It's gonna have a microphone option. It's gonna can't have a camera option, but now it also has this Screenshare option, which is what we're seeing now. You can choose camera only or you can choose screenshare. Okay, so a camera Only mode, it's picking up my webcam here and it's got some other things on screen. I can exit the studio. I just came in here. I don't want to do that. It's got a record button down below and up here, hint, try to read your notes sparingly. In other words, right now I'm looking down on my screen, but off I'm, if I'm looking up at you and making eye contact, you want to be looking at your camera. If you're gonna be capturing video of yourself. Now if you go into screen-share mode, then you can turn the camera off. But first let's just run through an example of this camera only because there is one important difference here. As record is when will say, now if I come in here and there's some filters and things which I'm not gonna get into. You can try some different filters. For example, if you choose fresco or something, if you choose one of these is going to attempt to apply that to your thing down here. And then of course, if you want to turn these filters off, how do I do that? I can just click this reset button at the bottom and it'll turn the filter off again. I'm not a big fan of these, but if you want to try to get creative, you can experiment with these. It's not something I'm going to use, but you can check that out. The other effects here that they have is they have this skin smoothing. Again, I don't think this works very well, but you're welcome to try it and see if it works for you. Works for you. Great. It's not something I'm going to use, so I'm just going to turn that off for now, close that out. But you do have that over here in this little fly out window over here, we're actually is flat windows. Your notes, you have notes here that you can apply if you want to have notes on your design when you're gonna read notes as you go along through your slides. So you can't apply notes here in the studio if that helps you when you're doing little screen recording like this. And then of course here's where I got to the filters. And then you have this other option here, whether you want to just record the whole video or you put it in a frame. Now if you put it in a frame by using this option right here, It's still going to capture the whole video. You'll just have to detach it from the frame if you want to afterwards. So it doesn't matter which of these you choose, but if you know what you want your final result to be, you can go ahead and put it in a frame like this if you want to. Once you're ready, you can go ahead and hit this record button at the bottom. Now we're gonna talk about the screen-sharing options in a second. But first, let's just do this camera only option because there is a difference between doing it this way and using that present and record option. I'm going to hit record. It's gonna give me a countdown so I'll get quiet for a second. Okay, so now I'm recording and I'm talking on slide one. Now I think it's a good idea as you transition from one slide to the next, which you can do with your arrow keys to give yourself a slight pause because I have noticed otherwise it will chop off just a little bit of the end of your video because it's actually going to capture a video for each slide you're on and have those as separate videos. I'm done talking about slide one. Now I'm going to talk about slide two. So now I'm talking about slide to now have advanced the slide three. And so now I'm talking about Slide three, and now that I'm done, I'm gonna click the Done button. Once I hit Done It has everything here. You can trash it if you don't want it. But I'm gonna go ahead and click Save and Exit. And as I click Save and Exit, you're gonna notice up here that it's gonna start loading those video clips. And it's loading not just one, but 23 videos because I captured video from three different slides. It's capturing video for each slide that I talked over. Now I can go through and I can play this back. So let's add it the video automatically to each of the three slides. I'm just going to hit play and we're gonna listen to what we captured. Now, I'm recording and I'm talking on slide one. Now I think it's a good idea as you transition from one slide to the next, which you can do with your arrow keys to give yourself a slight pause because I have noticed otherwise. Okay. So you'll notice it did cut off a little bit of the n there and sometimes those transitions were a little bit glitchy. So that's what that's what I meant when I said it's a good idea to leave a little pause, a little bit of a n space at the end of each slide. And then as you go to a new slide, a little pause before you started speaking again, because that's gonna make those transitions more smooth, more smooth. And it's also going to give you room if you need to go in here and if you need to come in at the end and you need to trim something in, you can come in here. You can set your play head at a particular mark and then you can split the page. And then if you need to throw out that little bit at the end, That's your pause this you messing up. You can trim your slide that way. That's what's going to happen when you use this record yourself and you talk over very slides as you go to the different slides, it's going to record video for each slide you're on. Now, as I mentioned before, you can come in here and even though it's in a frame, you can come in here and you can detach this video if you want to. And you can see that this appears to be a full-screen, sort of normal dimensions where the other video under that present and recorded was just capturing a square format video. So I don't know that the resolution of this is full HD video. I don't know that it's perfect, but you are getting, I think, a better resolution and better quality, I think, than we were getting before. But you'll still want to export this and you'll still want to see what your final results are. And I'm going to hit Control Z just to put it back in the frame control Z to undo there. And of course you can either double-click still and you can still come in here. And you can still do things like resize and reposition in the frame if you want to come in there and do things like that. So all of these normal things that we learned to do in Canada that we've talked about in these prior videos. You can still do all those things, but it is pretty cool that it immediately slices up your video into separate videos and organizes by slide. Because just from an organization organizational standpoint, that sort of makes me happy and I can see how that would be helpful. Now one thing I'll mention is I've noticed sometimes when you play these back in Canvas sort of churning on the video, you get sort of a delay in playback here as Canvas sort of churning with that video. With each of these videos, you have this option here to download locally. So if you download locally, maybe that is a way where you can work with this video and not have it be hung up there. So in other words, if I download this and re-upload the Canva, is that going to make it so it works a little bit more smoothly than when Canva just has processed it and put it here. I don't know, but you can experiment with that. You can download any of these clips by just coming in here and downloading and using this Download button. And then of course, if you want to download this whole project when you're done, once you have everything set up, you can come in here and you can come on a share. And of course you have this download option here and you can download as an MP4 video. But we're going to work through a whole example here. And with this next example, we're going to actually get into screen-sharing with Canva and how you can actually record your screen. 75. 9 - Record Your Screen: In this lesson, we're going over one more recording option in Canada, and that is the ability to record your screen, the ability to do screen capture. This is potentially game changing for anyone that might want to record tutorials of software or other things. Because previously in those present and record options that we looked at under this share of menus here, this present and record. You were only recording your Canva application, your Canva presentation. But now suddenly you have the ability to share and record other things on your computer, and that potentially is game-changing. Let's get into it and look at a few examples. Okay, so once again, under this uploads tab, I'm going to use the record yourself option. And that is again going to take us into this studio, but in his studio now instead of leaving it on camera Only mode where it's just using your camera. I'm gonna go into screen-share mode. Once I get into screen-sharing mode, screen-share mode, I will be able to turn this camera off if I want to or keep it on. But let's go under the options you see in screen-share mode. You have the ability to record your entire screen, which would be anything on a given monitor. So I currently have three monitors open. Three monitors connected as computer, I should say. So I could record any one of those monitors and it would record whatever I'm doing on those monitors. I could also record one of my open windows, so one of my application, so I have this Photoshop application open. I could record just Photoshop. I have a Chrome tab in my browser that I'm using to record now in Canada, I can record any one of my browser tabs. So you have all of these different options. So let's just jump through them and show them each briefly. And then we'll work through a full example for entire screen. If I chose screen one, I'll choose that and I'll go ahead and choose Share. The first thing I'm going to see is it's this weird inception thing because right now I'm sharing the screen, but right now I'm looking at the window that I'm sharing. I'm getting this weird mirror and mirror effect here. But if I were to suddenly click over to a new tab, then suddenly you're gonna see this on your screen and you're not going to get this weird picture in picture. So you can start recording here. And then you would navigate to a new tab once you started recording so that you are seeing that as you record it. That's one option, but let's go back in and look at the other options. First of all, you can turn this camera off once you're in this screen-share mode, so I can have that picture in picture turned off. I'll leave it off for now. You can record accompanying video of yourself talking just like we did before. But for screen capture, you don't have to. You can, if you want to, let's go back in here and look at the options again. So we're gonna go back into Screenshare this time instead of entire screen. I'm going to go under Window mode and show you that you can choose an application. So I have this Photoshop application open on my screen. If I click Share Now, then suddenly I would be sharing and capturing my Photoshop application. If I were to now hit record and then I could go over on that monitor and I could start in that application making edits here. And I could record myself doing a Photoshop tutorial. Within Canva. I could record a Photoshop tutorial, so that's pretty crazy. That's something different than from that present and record option. Now suddenly you can record other software, but we're not gonna do that. Let's look at the other options. The final screen to your option, which I haven't talked about, is just our recording a Chrome tab. So I would not want to do the particular tab I'm on now, this one, because if I choose this one now, there's not gonna be a way to come out of this picture and picture view because I am just stuck in the tab. That's my recording tab. If I do record just a tab, I want it to be a different tab. Then where I've launched this recorder, if that makes sense, I'm gonna come back under screen-share. I am going to choose a Chrome tab, but I'm gonna choose this Happy Easter Facebook posts and I'll go ahead and share that. And so now suddenly this is what I'm sharing. I'm sharing this particular tab, but I have to go back to my other tab here and I have to hit this record button here. I'm going to go ahead and hit record. And when I hit record, what we're gonna do is we're going to record just a little tutorial on be working on his Facebook posts, but I'm going to record a quick tutorial on how you use quick search in Canada when looking for different elements to put in your design. I'm going to hit the record button now. And then once I do, I'm just going to start talking and doing a little tutorial on how to use the quick search and Canva, we're going to see the results that we get. So here we go. I'm going to hit Record, and now it's not gonna be recorded my camera, but it is recording my voice as I talk over and it is recording what I do on my screen. So we're going to hit Record now. Then as I do, I'll jump back over to that browser tab that we're sharing. This beginning part of this, if I need to trim this off, I will put now I'm going to start my tutorial. Hey, in Canvas, did you ever know you can search for elements without ever leaving this screen right here on your design screen, all we have to do on your keyboard, just tap that forward slash on the keyboard. It's going to bring up this magic search bar. You can search for anything you want. So if I search for something like Easter Bunny, then suddenly I can filter my results. And so if I want a photo, I can click here. I can scroll down through the photos. I can find something I like. And then I can go ahead and add something to my design like that. I'm gonna get rid of that. We'll try that again. I'm going again forward slash on your keyboard. Again, you can just type things right in there. And then if you want to come in here and you want to search and you want to filter it. Go ahead and click on what you want. Scroll down, find what you want, and you can add things to your design like just like that. Again, that's the forward slash on your keyboard. It's going to bring up this search box and you can look for elements right here and add them directly to your design without ever having to come to the menus over there. Sometimes this can be a nice little time-saver. That's the end of my little tutorial. And then what I would do is I would come back here, make sure I hit done. And then when I hit Done, I can throw it away if I don't like what I've done. I hit Play here to see it. I don't like it. I can throw it away, but what I'm gonna do is just save and exit. And then that will bring it here into Canvas under this video is tab, we're gonna see it start to upload. It's going to start to play automatically, but I'm going to stop it so I don't have to talk over it, but so it's playing and it's also loading here. So depending on how big of a video, how long of a video you just record it. It is going to take a little while to upload here you're going to see this fill as it's uploading. Just have a little patience with this. I also say that sometimes playing this back, I found it be a little finicky in laggy and sometimes it gets stuck on loading. This is one of those things. If you're doing this sort of recording in Canva, find the computer with the best Internet connection possible. And then even then, you're reliant on Canvas side of things to running smoothly on their end. And I don't think this is something that they have perfectly perfected yet. If you have some bugs, you just come to work through them the best you can. And then hopefully this is something Canada is going to improve and improve more and more because this really is a game changer. If you can start to record video like this way, like this. Now of course I've done a tutorial on Canada here, but from within Canada, I could have recorded a tutorial on Photoshop or anything else I could show on my computer screen. You can capture anything on your computer screen. You can do the voice-over. So now it appears to have fully loaded here, I think are pretty much. So. Let's go ahead now and I'm gonna drag this play head back to the very beginning. We're going to hit play and we're gonna see what we get. And again, we'll see if it trips up here or whether it plays smoothly all the way through. Let's just take a look and listen browser tab that we're sharing. This beginning part of this. If I need to trim this off, I will, but now I'm going to start my tutorial. Hey, in Canvas, did you ever know you can search for elements without ever leaving this screen right here on your design screen, all you have to do on your keyboard, just tap that forward slash on the keyboard. It's going to bring up this, okay, someone to pause because I don't want you to have to listen to the whole thing, but I'll just scrub through here towards the end just to hear a little bit at the end. So we'll pick it up right about here and hit Play again. Now here's the type of thing that is happening. Sometimes when you start to overwork Canvas, you see one psych scrub through and hit Play again. It didn't immediately play. Let's try it again. So every now and then it gets lost. When that happens, what you really need to do is just close out of a couple of windows, maybe try to relaunch your Canva project and get it working again. But I'll hit play again. But they're, sometimes this can be a nice little time-saver. That's the end of my little tutorial and then what I would do. So there we go, It's working now, but sometimes you will have this little glitch, a few little glitches where sometimes Canvas just gets overworked, but if you stay patient, if you work with it, it will come together and it will work. You just have to be a little patient with it. Now that we have this, if I was going to really create this in turn us into YouTube video or a video that was going to upload to a platform like YouTube. I would probably want to do a little bit more like I have some sections at the beginning and the end that I would want to trim off. So let me just come here on my timeline. And if I drag my play head, if you don't see your play head like this, you need to drag your play head. You can always come down here and right now see it's got that little thumbnail view or filmstrip view. If I click on this, then it's back over to my monitor view, which is up here in my project window. I want to be on the thumbnail and then I can always zoom in or out a little bit. So if I zoom out now I can see this. Now I can add new slides. Now I can grab my play head and bring it back. I'm gonna grab my play head. And I'm gonna start by trimming off that initial part that I don't want in my tutorials when I hit play browser tab that we're sharing. And so this beginning part of this, if I need to trim this off, I will. But now I'm going to start my tutorial. Right here is byte about where I want to trim. But if I might have to get precise there, then you can always zoom in more. So see how he zoomed way in now. So it hit play now. Hey, in Canada. Okay, so right back here, hit Play. Hey, and that's perfect. So I want to trim it right there. Now you have a couple of different methods for trimming. Again, I could zoom back out and I can just grab this end and I could pull it to my playhead. That's one option. Now it doesn't well, it's sort of does snap there. When you get close, you see how suddenly it sort of snaps there. So now if I hit play again, hey, in Canada, did you ever say I've trimmed off the beginning for the end part that I want to trim off, I'll show you the other method you could use here when trimming. So again, I'm gonna zoom to about where I think I need to trim this little time-saver. That's the end. Okay. So that was close to where I need to trim a little too far, but again, I'll zoom in closer so I'm using the zoom timeline. Now. I made this mistake here where this time I zoom that my project window. So let me take this back to fit. And then I'm gonna make sure this is on the little filmstrip. And then that's when I went to Zoom. That's what I'm assuming all my timeline. This will switch back and forth if you're not careful. So you want to zoom on your timeline here and not up in your window. But let's see what I have now. Sometimes, again, you can use that space bar instead of having to click Play Every time you can just hit the space bar to play and stop. So I'm gonna drag this back, hit Play elements right here, and add them directly to your design without ever having to come to the menus over there. Sometimes this can be a nice little time-saver. I'm again, use them space-bar to stop and that tie after I say time-saver, That's what I want to stop someone, drag it back again and hit the Spacebar one last time. This can be a nice little time-saver. Space-bar to stop. Now that's where I want to trim this time at the end of this. Now I showed you before where you can just drag the ends. But another trick you could use sometimes is if you have this little 33 dots at the end of your film strip, wherever the playhead is, you can come in and split the clip at that point. If I clip, if I split at that point that I can get rid of this part and then just keep this last part as beginning part. And this should now end at time-saver because that's where I split the eclipse. So let's just see that I'm gonna drag it back and hit my spacebar on there. Sometimes this can be a nice little time-saver. With this clip correctly trimmed, I would then want to add in any other slides, any other elements I want with this? If I was gonna do this for YouTube, maybe I'll put on some sort of intro and then some sort of altro. So again, I'm going to add some more slides here to my video timeline. Now if you can't see this plus icon, then just make sure again that you're on this strip here and you can size down your timeline, so it's a lot smaller and it becomes easier to work with when you're adding new material like this. Sometimes you want to be zoomed in, sometimes you want to be zoomed out. I'm going to add two new pages here. So I'm gonna add a page and then add a page. And I'll just grab this first one and I'll just drag it to the beginning. You can reorder clips that easily on your timeline. And again, when you see that blue rectangle around one of the eclipse, that lets you know that's the highlighted clip. So wherever you have highlighted, That's what you're gonna see on screen. And that is the highlighted clip. You want this highlighted when you're going to add something to that. Under my templates here, I'll just intro from the templates here. And I'll just grab any of these. We're not going to spend too much time on this. And I'll just come in here and I'm just going to type in my tutorial. Again, you would spend more time on this, but I'm just doing something really simple. Just to show you how easily you can use these assets to enhance what you have. See how this little animated intro that's going to play now before you get into your talking part of you tutorial. So insurer would play hay in Canada. Did you ever know you kinda goes until talking part of your tutorial? And then at the end we would just want to add one more thing at the end. So again, same thing, Come on their templates and I'm just going to type into YouTube, subscribe, something like that. I spelled it wrong. Let's try spelling it out. Subscribe left out. So there we go. I'll just grab this one. We'll keep it simple. Then again, your videos would overlay VL plate it to YouTube. You would have videos overlaying. These would actually get rid of the videos themselves. So we're not actually going to need that part of it. That's, you get the basic idea. So here's the basic idea. Just plays the intro, plays your video and please your altro. I'm gonna go ahead now and I'm gonna go ahead and download this. So we're just going to go now. And we're gonna go ahead and we're gonna share this and we're gonna go to Download. And I'm going to download this as an mp4. And we will in a minute playback and see the results of this. I'm going to save this now and then I will show you the results in just a second. And then once this has downloaded here, I'm just going to click on this. And it should open that up here on my screen. And let's take a look at what we have. Now you could imagine I could have added some music over top of this. I haven't done that. But here it is, intro animation. Hey, in Canada, did you ever know you can search for elements without ever leaving this screen now my screen tutu on your design screen, all you have to do on your keyboard is tap that forward slash on the keyboard. It's going to bring up this magic search bar. You can search for anything you want. So if I search for something like Mr. Bonny, then suddenly I can filter my results. And so if I want a photo, I can click here. I can scroll down through the photos, I can find it. This is all pretty cool because this is 100% and done within Canada like that. I'm not using any expensive screen recording software slash on your keyboard. Again, you can just type things right in there. And then if you want to, I didn't want to video of Canvas. Doubt about Canvas from Canvas. But I could have done any other software program, anything else I could have shown anything else from my computer that's the forward slash on your keyboard. It's going to bring up this search box. And you can look for elements right here and add them directly to your design without ever having to come to the menus over there. Sometimes this can be a nice little time-saver. Then it goes into that N screen that I added. So again, I could've added some more music, I could've added some other things. But to be able to do all of this, to be able to do screen capture, to be able to bring in some of those Canada assets that already exists. We know there are lots of great free Canada assets you can use to be able to combine all of that into a video. And then to have this new video editor where you can do things like trimming away those mistakes you made. You know, things like that. You could add video of yourself talking if you wanted to have that little frame within the screen over top of your screen recording or by itself over top of some slides you created. This is all very powerful. I really think Canada has taken it to the next level. And I really encourage you to play with these screen recording options. Play with the screen, capture the ability to share your screen and really see what you can create in Canva, I think you're gonna be really surprised at how much you can do. So I really hope you like these new features in Canva. 76. 9 - Final verdict: Thanks for watching this section of the course on all the new video and presentation features inside of Canva. I told you at the beginning of this section that I would come back at the end and let you know my final verdict or all these new features. While I don't think Canva is ever gonna replace Premiere Pro, Final Cut Pro, the professional video editing software that is out there. I do think all these new features are a slam dunk for content creators. People that don't have the budget to pay for that. Other software, people that don't want to go through the learning curve of learning that other software. Canada just makes it simple and easy. Now, is it perfect? No, I did find some of these features a little buggy when I went to play back my video, when I went to edit my video, there was a little bit of a headache from time to time. There are some days that worked well, but you are limited by your Internet connection and then you're talking to Canva and their server. So there are gonna be some hiccups, I think when working with something as bandwidth heavy as video. But does it work? Does it get the job done? Does it allow you to open up lots of new doors in terms of the content you can create. Absolutely. So I do still think that these features are a slam dunk for content creators. So I encourage you to play around with all these new recording and presentation features in Canva and see what you can come up with and see how they can work for you, for your marketing, for your platform, it or whatever it is you create with Canva. So have fun, enjoy, and I'll see you in the next section of this course. 77. 9 - Class Project - Share a Video: welcome to another class project in this class project that I want you to create and share an animation or video So it could be something. Did you created for instagram stories? It could be anything else. Any camp, a project that includes animation or video. Now, when you go over to the class project section and that create project that green button, you'll notice that you cannot upload videos so you can do two things. You can either just share a J peg and then talk about what you did and how you incorporated video. Or if you do have something that you uploaded to a video service like V Meo or of YouTube, then you can go ahead and paste the link and will be able to see your video that way. 78. 10 -Thinking Creatively: in this lesson. I just want to briefly talk about getting creative within Canada. Of course, like all programs, canvas is gonna have its limitations. But sometimes the most you can get out of Canada is going to really rely on whether you're thinking creatively. You've learned all these tools. Can you think of creative ways to use thes tools together? Now, let me just go through a couple examples will go through a few examples using video. So of course, you can just grab a video in and haven't fill your whole background, and that is cool. You have video playing there, but just don't forget that you have a lot of other options for ways you can get creative when using something like video. So if I scroll down here, also remember you can obviously take a video and you can put it in any sort of frame or grid. So this template here obviously has some frames and grades already in it. So if I'm gonna grab this video, I could make that video be part of any part off this image that has a framer grid so you can get very creative and you can start to put different videos and reposition them wherever you want and have them playing within as different elements like this. So don't limit yourself to Jeff having a video on having it playing right here. You can get very creative in the way you apply different things. Ah, so let me just come down and we'll delete This will go through another example. So I'll delete this. Just have a white background now. So maybe you're even thinking I wanted to show sort of someone with their iPhone so you could come over here to something like photos and search for iPhone, as I've done here. Find a picture of iphone that you think's gonna work for what you're going for. So I'm gonna grab this image here, and I'm just gonna click this one over here. Now, this is what I mean by getting creative. Remember the different tools you have now, if you're a pro user, you have the ability to delete backgrounds with that background removal. So if I take the take this photo year with its selected, I can come and I can use my background, remove, remove or tool. And so it's gonna goto work here. It's gonna try to find the background that exist in this photo, and it's gonna attempt to isolate the main subject from the background. So again, this isn't gonna work perfectly for all photos. But remember in that background remover, lesser less than you saw that this tool does work really, really well. Ah, lot of the time. So we'll give it a minute there, and then when it's done, boom, it's going to get rid of that background so we can drag this around. See that? Yet this has done a pretty good job. Now this edge isn't perfect, so you'd have to decide whether that's good enough for your project. But again, now that you have that you could position this in here and then this is where you start to stack together, different things you've learned. So I have background removal now that I've used on this, and then I'm gonna go back to elements and let's see elements and I'll grab a simple grid and I'll bring that in. Okay, I want to bring that to the front. So I'm gonna do my control bracket key to change the stacking order. Let me just lower down the A pass ity so I can see what I'm working with. And I'm going to drag this out because I want this video toe look like it's gonna be on the phone here. So I'm just dragging this out, and I'm making this grade fit to the phone and drag it up from the bottom. So take your time, beep. As precise as you can be, that's good enough for this example here, and I'll go and bring that capacity back up. So now I have it so I can add a video and I could put it right there so it looks like it's playing on the phone. So let me just come back over to my videos tab and let me just type in something like landscape landscape so we can bring up some sort of scenic video here. And so now with any one of these videos on some of these air pay videos. But that doesn't matter for this example. Here, let's see how we click on this free. Remember, you can filter. We'll just grab a free ones that we can bring it in here for this example. It doesn't really matter, but So let's say we wanted to make it look like this person was at the beach so we could go ahead and drop it there and we could also drop it there, and then we would have this cool video and I'll download this for a second and show you what that's gonna look like. But so it's gonna play in the background and play here and look like this person is actually on the beach, recording the scene so again different ways. You can be creative now. I will download that right now, and I will show you what that looks like. So here it is, playing on screen and look at that. That really is very cool. Okay, so that was a really cool example. Now let's go down. Let's do one more again. I have something here. I'm just gonna delete this and I'll delete this. Now let's talk about if we wanted to put text and sort of use eight the text as a masks for our photo to play within the text. Now, our video to play within a Texas Use me now that does not work perfectly. There's no way to take any font and make it act as a mask. However, if we go under elements here and we go under these frames, see all and then we scroll down here towards the bottom of frames. Give it a minute to catch up here on my computer here. It's take a little while to catch up. So let's just also we could come under here and we could type letters, but let me just scroll to the bottom. There they are there, But you could also search for them. So now that you have these letters, you could start to drag out the letters that you want it. So let's just say something like, I'll drag this a here. I'm gonna resize that and let me bring it down a little bit more. And there's a so let's say, a comeback of year W. And again I worry about the re sizing here to get it exactly right at the end. I can grab this and copy that, cause I'm gonna use that again. Some just type away here using these letters. And so again, I'm not worrying about the position exactly until now. Now, I'm gonna come in here and try to get everything lined up. So the letters are all the same size, so just dragged them, Position them drag until I get those snapping things. Now, last one, get this up here. Do that. Could select them all. Let's look at my position here. Make sure I get things sort of spaced. Okay? It's not doing spacing. They're so I mean, the manually just sort of bring things together a little bit more, So I'll bring my w over. I'll bring this a over because I want this to actually be really close together, even sometimes maybe having these letters almost connecting to each other, so I'll bring that over. Let me just like these three now and is bumping over a little bit more so something like that, I'll grab them all now. Ah, group. Um and I will scale them up. So I have this here and I might combine this maybe with some text. So I just came to my text droppin header. And so we'll add in some sort of tagline like, wanna get away? And so we'll just drag this down and we'll position that over the A and then I'm gonna actually copy that control. See control V to paste it. Drag it down. This is just gonna be my question, Mark. Just since we are asking a question here and I'll just drop this over after here. So this is just gonna be a little thing here. I could come in to put whatever I want in the background, which I worry about in a minute. Ah, but now. So if I came under my videos, you can now place a video in each of these texts. But let me show you one more trick. So let me just get rid of these filters here. Now, if I were to drag this video in here, then I would have to drag it in each of these. Actually, let me find a better example for this particular example. I want to let me find a better video for this example. All right, so I have pulled up some beach photos here, but so my point is that things are always going off the work perfectly, and you need to get creative. So, in other words, if I wanted to drag a video, I can't make this act as one frame and drag the video into it, even with a group that I can Onley individually put a video in each of these letters. But there is a way to make it look like the video is playing across all these letters. And so let me just show you this because sometimes it's just about thinking creatively. So I'll go ahead and I'm going to replace this one here with this beach video. So all drop it in there. And so then what we do is I'm gonna double click on this speech video here because I want to be able to position it and resize it. So what I'll do is I'll drag it over so I get the edge to meet, and then I will drag out here and I will get the edge to meet on that side. Okay, So see how I have it lined up with the bottom, and then I just dragged it all the way out. So that's what I need to remember this orientation because I'm gonna do this for each of these letters with the same video. I'm gonna come back here. I'm gonna dragon in this one. I'm to click on this again. I want to be lined up over here and then we'll just drag it out right to the edge. There doesn't have to be perfect, but pretty much on that age there and so again, Come over here and drag this out and again click again, drag it over all the way. And so sometimes I can't make it all the way until every size it. So I got to resize first and resize again, and then I can make it to this edge here and then drag it out and then let's come down. This last one here again, Same video, Drag it over. Oops. Didn't quite get it in there. So let's try to get it again in there. So again, double click to get in there. I'm gonna change my sides to scale it up right to the edge there and then drag it down. So right, so it meets on the edge there. OK, And now let's take a look at what this is gonna look like. So here it is, and it really does look like that video is playing across all of this text as if it was one layer, so that is really cool. And This was really about just getting creative in figuring out a solution with everything we knew about all the tools. So I really want to encourage you as you get in your videos to just really think about being creative. I'm gonna drag back and says both of these examples which we just talked about in this lesson. So again, things like this, you may not always have the obvious solution in front of you, But if you just think about those tools, figure out ways to get creative, you can find lots of cool things you can do in Canada. Of course. Yes. Like any program. There are limitations, but you can remove some of those limitations just by thinking creatively. All right, I'll see in the next lesson. 79. 10 - Creating an Epic Poster (NEW): Okay, I'm calling this to creative posts or challenge. And I just want to show you how you really can start to push your creativity, learning some of the effects and tricks we've learned. So for this example here, I'm going to use this little poster that I see on my end here. It's a Magic The Gathering poster. So it's for this epic shot looking up a hill. And then just sort of the silhouette of a sort of some sort of fantasy character in the background. I want to try to create something like that. Totally 100% inside of Canva here. So I'm just gonna go ahead and choose poster for my initial option. I'm going to open something like this. And so I want to start first by just searching for the Hill element and they'll have gone ahead and I've found some elements that I should have in my recently used. But when you're looking through these, you just want to type in a search term. So you could type in something like Cliff or a mountain and then start to pay attention to the perspective. So I found this particular hill here. And I like this one just because it does sort of have that looking upward perspective. So you can tell whoever took this picture was sort of way below the hill, looking up a little bit. So that is sort of the camera perspective that I like here. Now of course, I'm going to want to enlarge this a lot so that it's a bigger part of my design here. And I'm also going to come in here and really change some of the photo settings in terms of brightness. I want this to sort of be like a sort of sunset or nighttime twilight shot. So we're going to start first by just getting the hill sort of in the position I want here. So something like this. So then my character is going to be up top as we look up. So that's good starting point for my hill. I'll worry about changing the color settings on this and making it less bright in a minute. Right now I just want to sort of find the, the, the elements I want. So I'm gonna go ahead and add a page here. So I'm thinking about this. I'm thinking about how I do need a sun or a moon, some sort of element behind. And I just want to show you how you, you have to think creatively and you have to understand what you can do. So I found this sun element here. And even though this is just sort of like a vector illustrated artwork, I can make that work. I think for the look, I'm going for because I know I'm going to sort of adjust this and blur this. Now if you have something in Canvas that is sort of vector artwork, you're not going to have this adjust option. You only see this other photos. Now this actually is a photo element. It was brought in, I guess as a photo. But still, I'm still going to export this out as a transparent PNG because even though I have this adjust things sometimes if you just tried to do it straight from the menu here, sometimes it doesn't quite give you the look you want, or sometimes you do get these weird, weird edges that you frame that then ruin the whole look in illusion. So I'm actually going to export this out to be on the safe side. And I'm also going to export out maybe a couple other elements. So let's see what else. I selected this first project. So I also just typed in fantasy character. So I'll just actually do this again just to show you the way you would search here. So I'm gonna type in fantasy character. You can see I searched for that recently and I started to come back with these different options. And so you have to sort of go through here, figure out what is going to work for your particular look. And even though I want this to sort of all blend together when I have a photo element here, I selected this guy here. Because this guy, I think he's going to work fine because I'm basically going to turn this into a silhouette. Remember I'm going for lists, look here. So I just want this to be a silhouette. So I do like the silhouette of this character. Even though the illustrative look isn't really what I'm going for. It's going to be okay as a silhouette. So I'm going to add a page because actually want him to be on his own page. Because right now I'm just going to go ahead and I'm going to download these two elements. So I'll come to my download option. And I just want page two, pages 23. And I want to download those as PNG files with transparency. So I'm gonna go ahead and do that now. Hit download and it'll save those files. Actually already did that before. So I won't click this again, but this is what I did. I just click Download and then I have those elements now which I can use in this project. All right, so let me just go back up to the menu here. Let me go to my uploads and I will show you that here are the two elements right here that I downloaded it and now I have re-upload it back into Canva, sometimes downloading something that like that and then uploading it again, you actually give yourself more options. Just to show you what I mean, this guy right here, I don't have any adjust options for him because he was just a vector artwork here within Canvas. But once I've downloaded him as a PNG, and so I have this option over here. Now I bring in this guy, this is my downloaded version. See now I can come in here and I can start to play with the settings here, which is what I'm gonna do in a minute. So sometimes downloading something like that so you can repurpose it. That is a good trick. So I'm gonna go back to my original here. I'm going to start working on this. Since I have, I think some of the elements I need now just to show you the other elements I've selected this for these projects. Again, these all came from within Canva. So let me find my recent ones seed, is it going to show my recent ones? It will if I get rid of that search bar there, so recently used, so I picked out those elements. I also have this, these birds flying. Let me scroll across. I also have this moon I liked, and then I have a couple of different skies here because I might try two versions of this. Okay, so let's get to work on this. First of all, I'm not going to want this sky, but I figured since there is a lot of contrast between the hillside and then the lighter background in this picture. I think the background remover should work pretty well on this. So I'm going to run that background remover and see if I can knock out the sky from this picture here. So again, this is just using the tools I have within Canva. Now in other lessons I will talk about when you want to step outside of Canvas. So sometimes if you have someone who just can't do it in Canvas or it's not working. You don't want to spend hours on something, but you start to figure out what you can do, what you can't do. So that looks good enough for this. I'm going to hit Apply. That will work. And so now I have my starting point and now with this, I'll come up here under adjust it. Basically, I want to knock all of the brightness out of here as much as I can. And you can also do things like pulling up or down the contrast. So that's pushing it totally the black. I don't want to push it totally the black. So I'm going to bring it back a little bit of those highlights, a little bit of the brighter areas because I wanted to sort of have this nighttime or this sunset back backlit. Look. One thing I'll say is if you get something we can't quite get it to black, then you could always do that download trick where you download it as a PNG. And then when you bring it back in that second time, you would be able to push it to black then. So these are just little workflow trick, so I like that and I think I liked the positioning. So for now I'm just going to lock this background and then I'm going to start to layer in my other elements. Okay, so I have this two different sky things. So let's start with this 1 first. So of course I'm going to want to push this behind everything here, so I'll use my Control bracket keys. And then of course I want to resize this down a lot, so I'm just going to zoom out a lot so I can work a little bit better. I'm going to click and drag that. I had that background locked, which is nice, so I'm not accidentally clicking on that. Let me just drag it out. I just basically want to see the sky. So I don't want to see, I don't want to see like the weird background now that could be camera level, but I think he was shooting lower than that. So you wouldn't really see just the horizon in the background. So I'm going to really pull that out like that. And now I'll go ahead and zoom back in. Let's actually just go to fit here. So now I have the sky element in the background. Now I may have stretched that a little bit more than I wanted to so I could bring back I could change the sizing a little bit. I think it's okay, but I could fill with that if I wanted to. But we're just going to move on for the purposes of this demonstration here. And then let's bring in our main character. So let's go back. And remember under uploads, I have this guy right now. So I'm just going to click on this guy here to bring him in. I'll position them up here. I can resize them up or down. If I needed to. I can change the frame so I don't have all this extra space. Now, he just came in like that because if you put something in a screen on a page like I did and then download them. It's going to download sort of based on the size that you had them when you download it. But so I had them pretty much the size I want. So I'm just going to put them up here like this. You can make them a little smaller, but I'll keep them this size. I gotta think perspective, the reality is, I think with this hill in the background, it's not perfect. He would maybe be even smaller like this, but I'm going to make them, I'm going to make them a little bit bigger. This epic shot here. And then I'll come in here. And again, I'm just adjusting down the brightness, trying to knock out some of that contrast. I can't get them completely to black. So maybe his face really would be in shadow there, but I'm okay with that. He's getting a little reflected light from something, so that's fine. So we'll do that. And so now you can see the look is starting to come together here, but I want him to stand out a little bit more. So this is where I'm going to use this sun elements. So I'll just click the bring this ONE screen. I'll pull in my handles a little bit. And again, one of my favorite tricks is just coming on the adjusts menu and just blurring this. Because I'm really just using this as sort of an element to highlight this guy up here. So I'm gonna put this behind him. So again, position, send back or you could do the Control bracket keys. You can see it's a little too bright now. And of course I wanted to also be behind the mountains, so send a back again. That definitely looks better. I think I want to be a little bit bigger because I wanted to sort of be like gestures like that sunset glow in the sky. So I'm using this just to have sort of another color element in there. But it really does also make him pop out just because of the contrast between him and the other him in the end, the background, excuse me. Now maybe it's a little strong in terms of that yellow. So I can come in here with my transparency chart, adjusted up and down a little bit, something like that. And then if I wanted to add in another element, I think I did have, let's see, I did have other elements. I did bring in these birds also. And so what I did here was I had these maybe not, It wasn't that one. So let me get rid of that one. Again. You have to search around and find the ones that work the best. So I think I tried a couple of different ones. That one was not the one I used. I don't think was it this one? I think it was this one maybe. So I just wanted to have some birds in the sky. So adjust effects. I'd used the background remover again. So again, because the birds are really sort of contrasting from the sky and they have clear edges. This is something where the background remover is probably going to work pretty well. And then the problem with this one is they're so bright that if I come up here, actually I forgot to hit Apply. I think I have to hit Apply first. Actually see if you don't hit Apply. I think when I start to full with this, I'm going to lose and the backgrounds in a comeback, but let's see. So dropping the brightness down, contrasts, sort of pushing that down. Let's see. I bring him up here. Yeah, I don't think that these are going to work unless I take them out of here again. Because really they well, it might work when they're, when they're small enough because I want this just sort of be an element, background element. And maybe i'd, I'd want different ones, but this is just for scale to put something in there. I actually don't love it in this, but I'm going to leave that in there for now. So you get the idea. This is, this is one version of this poster. I obviously could have some text or something. There's some space up here where I could put a title in. I don't know if I love the birds and it's version. So let's just say we wanted to get rid of this one, but let's just say that I did want a title here, so I'm just going to add a heading and put a heading in here. Now this was Magic The Gathering, so you don't have to have a title. But I'm going to show you if I did want to title, maybe I'd come up here and bring something like this. And I'm just going to call this all caps, the gathering. Maybe this is some new movie poster or something, Something that's coming out. And then I can take this here and sort of center it. I want it to overlap slightly with my character, but then if I push it back, so let me get, get it selected and then Control bracket keys to push it back. Some reason that keyboard shortcut fails when I have other stuff going on and sometimes, so I'm just going to use this right here. And I push it back behind him, but then I can also push it back. So it's behind that blurred out SON I put in there and that just gives it a little bit more depth. And then of course I could. It makes it look like it's part of the poster, a little bit more part of the environment. And then look for can get it back and use the tab trick to find it since it's hidden there. And then I could nudge it up a little bit so we can read those words, but have it sort of offset behind his head. So there we go. So that's version one of this. Okay. So if I wanted a second version of this, a lot of the work I'm going to keep the same, but so let me just duplicate this page. Maybe in this version, I'm not going to have the same background though, so let's delete that out. Let's delete this and the title, the title to the sun. I may use again, so I'm going to keep that there. So that's still hidden there. But I'm going to go from my night sky. And this one, this one I want to be sort of a look more like a twilight shot. So let me go back under elements. I had picked out a sky version for this. So let's see if I can find that you're going to go this way. I think it should still be under my recent, but again, just searching. So I think I searched night sky or something I found when I liked, but sometimes you just have to search and look around. So I'll just click this to bring this over. And again I'm going to drop it. So it's behind these other elements. First, let me start to resize it, and now I'm going to drop it. So control and bracket key is working again. So I don't know why that's finicky sometimes. So I may actually make it look like the trees that are in this are sort of on this backside of this hill. I think I can make it sort of looks like that. If I resize it like this and sort of position it, maybe something like that. So that's looking pretty cool. Let me just make sure I have this totally on the corner there. So I like that. And of course we're losing him a little bit, but that's where I do have let me see. I may have lost my son element in here because I need some sort of highlight. Of course, that orange sun color isn't going to be what we want in this, but I can use that same element. I just have to be creative. And selective on how I apply it. So just to show you what I mean, I'm gonna come back, I'm going to add this same element. Actually, I don't know if this is the one I did. Mine is under uploads. I want the one that I brought in. So here's the one I brought in. So again, I'll drag this in a little bit because I'm not going to need all of this. But then I will go to a just once again blur. Again, I love to use this blur. And then of course you can scale it up. So maybe something like this. I'm going to bring it up here. Once again, I'm going to push it behind him. I'm going to push it behind the mountain. But of course is not going to work as yellow. That's not what you would see at nighttime. I need this more to be more of a cool blue now with something let's that much yellow. The tinting isn't really going to work. I could drag that to blue, but it's still coming out as yellow. So what I need to do is if I just drag down the saturation, I think it's just going to work. And then of course, if I also lower the transparency, then you're getting that blue behind it. But I want it to be bright enough. Maybe I will leave it all the way bright, but that saturation dropping that, that's what's gonna make it sort of blend more and make it look like this is a nighttime nighttime image. So sort of that Twilight or nighttime look, maybe a full moon night. I could have the moon itself in here, but I don't, it's going to work like this. So I'm gonna go with this. Again, we're not going for perfect. So let me just select off of this on something and let me just go back to my elements. Because the last thing we'll try those birds once again, just to see if I can make them work in this image. So I use this version, I think so Again, course, let's go. I don't know if these are the ones I used. Well, we'll try we'll try him. And it weighs these aren't working perfectly, but so we'll go effect. So we'll go background removal, again, background remover. We're gonna go ahead and knock out the background from these birds. We know this works because I did it once before. And then of course, we'll go ahead and hit Apply. And then we'll come under adjustments. Again, knock out the brightness. Take the contrast, play with it this way and that way. I gotta bring it up here just so my darks to get darker. We're going to make this way smaller. And we want to be a background element just for a little added scale to make this seem like more of a grants, grants seen. And I've pushed this backwards now. So let's drag it up. It's behind him. I could push it. That's too far. It's gotta be in front of this element so we can see it. But then I'll just bring it way, way down, position it, maybe up here. So it's partly in the shadow coming into the light. So that's kinda cool. I kinda like it in this version. And of course I could come in here and I could do things like, you're not going to notice if you're seeing through a little bit lower that transparency slightly just so they're a little bit more. I will leave it, leave it like that. So anyways, this is my second version here and I could add the title of I wanted to, but I think I'll just leave it as is. And so this is my first version. So that's how you can go in here. You can get creative and you can take these elements within Canva and you can sort of repurposing them. So have fun with this play around. I'd love to see what you create, what you come up with. The one thing I'll caution you as if further on in this course we're gonna talk about when you might want to step out and use other tools that do things that Canvas can't do. So if you run into something where you're just trying something and you just clearly are spending too much time or you can't get a good result, then maybe that's not something you should be doing in Canada, there are times the step outside of Canvas, but there are also times like this where you can get pretty creative and just within candle 100%, you can do some pretty cool things. Alright, thanks for watching. I'll see you in the next lesson. 80. 10 - Getting Creative with the Effects Menu (NEW): In this lesson, I want to show you how when working with photos and Canva, you can use the Effects menu in those third party in Canvas apps that will work within Canva to really just extend your creative possibilities. So let's work through an example so you can see what I'm talking about and you can see how this works. So I just have a blank project here. I'm going to come in under elements and I'm just gonna grab a photo. So I'll just grab this photo here, put this on screen. Now. This would be great is just this workout photos. So if you were doing something and you wanted to use the photo like this, that's fine. But maybe under a different project, you wanted to do something more creative. And you want to know what all the options are within Canva. That's where sometimes coming into these effects menu, you can find some pretty creative sort of effects filters that you can apply automatically. So with photos selected, you nav Effects menu, I'm going to come under Effects. And now you can see all of these options here. So all of these menus are sort of third party apps I've connected with. And so now I'm seeing the options here. Now, if you scroll down here, you may have ones like this where you know, you don't see the option yet because you haven't connected with that particular one yet. So again, if I were to want to connect with this one here, color mix, apply some different color combinations. So then I could go ahead and just click Connect. If you want to learn more about photo mash or to the company behind his third party app. You can click there and that link and follow that. But I'm just gonna hit Connect. And then once you hit Connect, it's going to show up, up here as an option with options in this menu, in this Effects menu. And if you click See All, it'll expand that particular one. And then you can see that there are all these different options here for repolarizing this photo. So if I wanted to make it more vivid, could choose one of these options. It's going to apply that over here. If I wanted to sort of cool it off and come up with sort of a cooler, softer color tones. I could try that one here. Here's some warm, warmer color tones. So it's just coming in here and it's automatically applying these effects. You can see there are lots of them here. Again, if you don't like anything, you can just come up here, you can throw it out. Let's go into a different one here. So I'm gonna leave this photogenic and come back here. So here is one where I can apply frames. So you have frames which exists under the Elements tab, right? If you come down here and go back to All, you have frames, you're probably familiar with these frames, but sometimes it's hard to find particular frames. And if you just want some quick creative frames under this affects, you can also connect with the frame sort of app here. And if I see all these options here with my photo selected, I could easily make this an iPhone frame. I could give it one of these neon frames. And then sometimes when you're applying one of these sort of app filters or whatever you want to call them, these effects. You will have settings in here that you can adjust. Now the frames just apply the frame. They do not have settings, but I'm gonna show you in a minute how some of them do have settings that you can adjust. But for now, let me just try this circular frame here, this flower frame, that's kinda cool. Now when you apply this, it's important that you do hit this Apply button down here. Otherwise you are going to lose that effect when you come out of this menu. But I'll hit apply. So I have now applied that and I want to show you how you can stack affects here. So if I come in here and I've applied this flower frame, and now I decide I want to turn this into a duo, duo, duo tone. Excuse me. If I come up here and click See All under the Options here, then suddenly I'm going to be able to apply the duotone effect to this photo as well. And it's going to stack over top of these flowers. So these flowers will get the duotone effect as well. So again, I'll click cherry and see what that looks like. And so now it's applied that effect and not just to the photo but to the frame also that, so that's pretty cool. I'm now stacking effects. And I mentioned before some of the effects do have setting. So if you see this little icon here, these sliders, and you just click on that, then you will find that some of these do have effects. You can come in here and adjust. So for this, I can adjust the intensity if I wanted to come in and change the colors that were being applied to the shadow or highlights. I could do that here. And then go ahead and click Apply again once you're done. And now I have stacked these two effects on top of each other. Now the stacking order matters because I did the frame and then the duotone, if I had done this in reverse. So let me just show you again if I do this in reverse. So I'll just come now. And I'm going to just click back on screen here. I want to come back under my photos. I'm just going to add that photo again. This time, I'm going to reverse the order. So again, I'll go under effects and I will choose first the duotone. So under duotone here I'm going to do the same thing. Apply that cherry duotone effect, hit Apply. And now I will come in here and I will use my frames. I'll choose that same frame. And I will come down. Sometimes it can take a little bit to load, a little while to load, so you have to be patient sometimes. There we go and then boom, the frame effect. Now because I reverse the order, I'll click Apply because I reverse the order. So now I'm getting a different look because in this one I applied to do a tone over top of the frame. And this time I did a duotone and then the frame, and so now the flowers are not getting that underlying duotone effect. So when you're using filters, when you're stacking filters is keep in mind that that stacking order does matter. But you can see how these look here is completely different from that original photo. So you're really do open up some creative, more creative avenues with these filters, with these effects. Some of them are gonna be over the top. Some of them you may never use other ones you might really like and use a lot. It sort of comes down to your personal preference, what works for the project you're working on. So I'm not going to show you all of these, but let me just go to a new page and I'll just show you a few more. So I'm going to add that, that same photo back again. Now we get these effects menu here. So let's just see a few more of the options here. So smart mockups, if you do Smartmockups, if you were working on a branding campaign or something and you wanted to see what this photo would look like just on a screen, you have all these different screen choices here, where it's going to take your design, it's automatically going to put it inside of that picture and go ahead and scale it so it proportionately, it looks what it looks good, so that's pretty cool. So again, you have things like greeting cards, you have the different mobile screens, you have computer screens. You have some clothing options down here. So again, book covers. So there's a book cover option. And then we'll go down and look at some of the clothing options. So this is kinda cool. So this could be helpful if you just were doing some sort of branding thing, you wanted to see what something would look like on these different options here. So again, like I mentioned before, sometimes you do have settings. So if you were putting this here clothing, then you come in here and you can choose whether you want it to fill, whether you want to do some sort of habit fit, you could do a custom thing. So I'll just go fill then again the object color. So if I wanted to object color to be white, see what this look like on a white shirt. I don't think it's adjusting. Let's see. There we go. So again, the color of the t-shirt there because well, because I have all that on my photo, it's not looking quite the way I want, I think because I'm used to doing this maybe with something that's already been removed from the background. So let's just actually do that real quick just to show you this, this mock-up here. So if I brought this in here first, and then maybe I wanted to come in here and use this effect. And again, this is sort of like stacking affects the background, removal, remove, or is sort of like using these different apps on things to make creative adjustments to your original photo. So I'm gonna go ahead and remove the background. It should work fairly well with this image because it's a pretty simple background. So let's go ahead and do that first. It's taking a moment here, it's thinking about it, but then it's caught her out from the background. Again, same thing with that. You've got to hit that Apply button first. And now if I come in here and I jump back into that smart mockups, I'm going to come in under the Smartmockups here. And I will go back down to the clothing options here. So again, let's imagine we were going to turn the picture of this person and we wanted to see what it was going to look like on a t-shirt. We were thinking about ordering this on a t-shirt. So again, you'd probably have a full design as part of this, but I'm just showing you now you can see it on there. And now this makes a little bit more sense with the lot of the shirt showing through and just her as a cutout where I could come in here and I could change things like the object color. So if I come down here and I wanted this to be a red shirt and see what it looked like. Here's what it looks like as a black shirt here. And so just another cool creative option in here that you get. Now if I hit cancel, I can cancel out of this and not have that effect applied. Maybe I want to do something like this style transfer one here. And I could come under here and click See All. And these are just some crazy styles that you can apply. So again, some of these are a little over the top, right. Some of these can be a little in your face. So they may not be perfect for every project of course, but you may find some creative scenarios. Will you do like some of these? And then other ones that are used, you might say I'm never going to use this and that's fine. You don't have to connect to it, you don't have to use it, but they are options within Canvas. So if you see these new choices show up on this menu. So if I come back here and sometimes you notice some new options under here, just go ahead and read about it, see if you think it's something that you might like that might benefit you and your workflow. So I'll go ahead and hit Cancel now to not apply that one, I'm not gonna go through all of these, but you can experiment around, you can see the different options. And of course curved. I talked in one of the lessons in here about shadows. You can do drop shadows, you're your own way, but now they do have this shadows in-app here. So now this is another way to do shadows within Canva. And so I'm not going to share how this is going to, uh, work on with the cut-out here, Let's just try. So let's just do a drop shadow and you see it does apply a drop shadow and you can't, can't come in here and change things like the offset. You can change the angle a little bit. All right. Some of these look a little weird. I still don't think it's that shadows work perfectly inside of Canva. But you now do have this option with this shadow effects menu, which you did not previously have, and Canva, sometimes you can still do it your own way. So let's just slide her down. So there's an option there. Let me just show you what I mean by you can do it your own way. So I'm just actually going to throw out this one here. Delete again, I do teach this in another lesson, but since we're being creative, let me just show you right here with this one here. So maybe I want to save this page. So what I'm gonna do is I'm going to download and I am going to save this particular thing as a PNG. Actually first, let me make sure I'm just choosing page 2. On page 2. Actually, this is page 1. Page 1. And I want to save this as a PNG with transparency. And I'll go ahead and click Download. And what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna go ahead and download this. And I'll show you why in a minute, why I'm downloading this as a PNG. So untitled design three, that's fine. I will find that. So it's downloading now to my machine. So then of course I jump over to Uploads. I'm gonna upload. And you can see where I did this experiment once before, knowing I was going to do this tutorial. But let me just jump in here and I will upload it again just to be thorough. So here's the one I just downloaded. That's fine. We're gonna open it back up. Why? If I tun the exact same thing that we already have in here, just because sometimes things behave differently. And if you saw my one thing about creating your own more realistic drop shadows, you know that you can come in here and you can really play around with things like the blur settings here under this adjusts menu. And you can also things like they take the brightness down, take the contrast, and push that. So now it's basically just black. And so now if I blur it out, I'm getting this drop shadow effect and then of course I would use my positioning. So I just did control backspace there and I push that behind. So now I'm doing my own version just by using Canva hack with the adjustment. And again, it's just how you can be creative and put these different effects together. Now, I might decide that I really want that to be color and not black. So again, you just have this creative freedom. I could come in here and I could play around with the brightness, just getting that up. And then of course, once I play with the brightness, I could play around with the tint and get some really pretty cool effects going on in here. So think of that original photo we started with, right? So let me just jump back here and bring that photo backup for a second that is totally different from what we have on screen now. So just continue to be creative. Don't limit yourself. Learn all the options so you have as many possibilities open to you. And then of course there'll be some things that you just saw me do in Canada. Maybe you still do in another software. But no, everything that is possible within Canva get a feel for the workflow. And if it's something where you can do it efficiently and it makes sense for your projects, then by all means do it. Okay, so that's the Effects menu within Canva. Just how to get creative. And then also we a reminder about how you create those drop shadows. Just using the just and blur when you bring in sort of a PNG file like that. Alright, thanks for watching. I'll see you in the next lesson. 81. 10 - Don't be Afraid to use Other Tools: okay. We saw in the last video how Camba has lots of different frames, and they even have these letter frames. And so you can pull out these letter frames and use them to spell words. And then there are even tricks you can use to make it look like a video is playing behind the entire word as one video. I think some of the results you can get a really cool, but I just want to offer you this word of caution. If you ever find yourself spending lots and lots of time trying to achieve a certain effect with Camba, you really have to ask yourself, Is it worth it? Is the amount of time you're putting in worth the end result, and in some cases, maybe it is, and that's great. But in other cases, if you feel like the effort is just really too much for the results you get, I think you need to take a step back. Invariably with any software, there are gonna be things it's not optimized for, and even some things that just can't do well. That's okay. One of the things I love about Canada is that it keeps it really simple. And this allows you to really streamline your workflow and work really quickly in this dragon drop fashion. If they tried to make camp a do everything, then it would just become a model interface and you really would not have the same program . You would not have that same quick workflow that you can have now. It would just be you would just get bogged down with all the tools. So they're trying to find this balance, and you have to realize that and you can't expect canvas to be everything for all things. Now I think they're gonna continue with improve the software and give you Maura and more options, which is great, but at the same time is about finding that balance. So be careful what you wish for, because if suddenly they give you everything, then for new users and even for you, it may be tough to just maintain that workflow and be able to work efficiently. So the reason why I'm up on the soapbox now giving you the speech is just because one I want to caution you trying to spend too much time to achieve that fact, that effect that Camba really isn't optimized for so just as an example, you can build words here with ease letter frames, but it is limiting because you just have this one font face and you have to manly put together each letter and then each letter of the word is really a frame unto itself. So you have to these tricks to make it look like the videos playing behind all the letters as one video. If that's what you're trying to do, there are better ways to do this. If you get into other software, it would be very easy to go into a program like Photo Shop and knock out the background of any font, and then use that as something where you can see the video through. If you bring that PNG with transparency into Canada and there are other free, lot free tools that will do this as well. So don't be afraid to look around, and I'll just work through an example in this video here where I just show you free online tool where I could knock out the background of something like that and then come and use it here in Canada. So this is really about thinking creatively and then also realizing when maybe can, but is not the tool. So it's gonna be the tool for lots of things. It's great for working efficiently, but some advanced task. You may have to go outside of Canada. So here's what I'm gonna deal. I'm going to come up in here under text. I will just add a cell petting and I'm gonna type reveal your true okay. And so that's gonna be my main heading there or myself heading. And then under here, this part here, I'm gonna type out colors, colors, Okay. And then this colors here I will size it up so that it's roughly underneath there. Not for this example. Not worried about getting perfect. I just want you to see this workflow and to get an idea of the fact that you're not always just limited by canvas. Sometimes you have to realize you may need to go outside of Camba to achieve the results you want. And so I will take all of this and I will just shift it down a little bit. So this is the basic design I'm gonna want here. Just this little message here. But so what I'm gonna do now is at a new page below this. Actually, I will copy this page, and then I'm gonna get rid of this part here because the colors, the word colors is the those are the letters I want to knock out. Now, I didn't use the frame that we the front letter frames within Cam because I just wanted to knock it out all at once and be able to use whatever fine I want. And I'm showing you that there are other tools and there are other ways to do this. So what I'll do now is I do want to save this off, because this is gonna be what I'm gonna use to knock out these letters. So I will come up here and I will download this, and I'm just gonna call it P and G and I would just download that. I still actually download Ph too. Download. Okay. And so it's saving that off now. And so I will just say this off as colors one. That's fine. Safe. Okay, now I have that saved. So we're going to do now is I'm gonna bring up another online tool. This is just a free website. And all I did was search for, you know, different websites that would extract backgrounds and allow you to choose colors. So I'm gonna bring that over now into this window and bring that up, and Okay, so let me refresh this page. This was another example I was working through here. And so this is just this all nine PNG tools. So I will show you the link to this. So here it is, all nine ph in PNG tools, and then I'm in under the create transparent PNG. I'll try to put a link to a couple of resource is like this along with this lesson in this course. But there are lots and lots of free sites out there like this. So even if you don't have photo shop, don't be afraid to just look and see what free options are available to you. There are lots of tools out there. Lots of things are open source, and so usually there is an option. Now, if you do have something like photo shop and you know that, well, then that's great. You haven't even better. More professional solution that might give you even better results. But there usually are gonna be options. And sometimes it's just about playing around a little bit. And then you may find something that gives you more options in canvas and see if you time. So under this tool here, well, basically, what you do is you just come in here and you tell it what color you want to knock out. So I'm gonna knock out the black, and you can make this work to varying degrees. So if you wanted to knock out just the black, you could set this percentage to really low. If you wanted to knock out a whole range of colors, you would start to raise up this percentage. So I just have that black and white image. So I know I can just pump this up to something like 90% because all I really want to do is knock out that black and I'm gonna keep the white because the white is going to be part of my design. So now I'm just gonna import that file that I just did. Which is this Colors one. And so I opened that up, and then over here, it gives you this little preview and you see that it's knocking out this colors here. So the black here is actually what it's knocking out, and then the white is it's keeping that white background. So then you can just choose save as, and it's going to go ahead and give you a chance to download that. And so and it has this little thing here. But I will just go ahead and I'll just name We'll just rename this two colors. Ah, to since we did colors one before. And I will go ahead and say that. Okay, now jumping back over to Canada, I'm just gonna add a new page here, and then I'll go under uploads, and what I will do is upload that colors to that. I just did. So here's colors one hears colors to, and you can see that what this is is a knockout of what I just did. So now if I take this year and I bring this over on screen, so I get this, you can't tell what's there. But if I come and I, like, change my background for a second to just black, you can see that Ah it is just this white space with the colors text knocked out. And so now if I come back to my text and I will just add back that subheading so remember I was gonna do something like, Ah, let's see Reveal your true Of course, this is now have my caps lock on So here, hold on. Second hit Let's get this the black See, Even I fumble around and canvas some things You just gonna fumbled around a little bit but just stay with it And so control a cap slack was on Let's turn that on and Alex type reveal your true okay. And then to get this spacing right, I will just take this. I will line it up basically with that side, and then I will drag it in with this here. Okay, so that's good enough for this example. Okay, So what I want to do next is I want to jump over to this video's tap. I will do a search for something like color, and I get these results. I'm gonna grab this video here, which is this is a free video, so all click to bring it over. And of course, I want to position this behind this. And so Ah, now you see what we're gonna dio. I want to make this a little smaller, and then I'm gonna nudge it down and over a little bit. Like like I want to actually be within here so I can then come and make my background fully white just to make this whole look like a cohesive whole design here. And so then now we just tapped through so we can see this thing play. So here, play and weaken, scrub through to the beginning and you'll see. Look at this. This is pretty cool. So now this is not something we could have done within Camba itself. Unless we limited ourselves to those frame the letters, which is just the one fund, and we would have had to individually drag them out, and then we would have had to individually position the video behind them. And so this was just about finding another way by thinking creatively. And look at the cool result we got because of this, that I could download this as a video. I could use it on social media. I could resize this for Instagram, so There are a lot of cool potential applications, and all I had to do was think creatively realize that. Hey, it was a time to step outside of Canberra because trying to do this sort of thing in Just Can va was gonna be a little to cut time consuming and a little too limiting. So reveal your true colors. And don't be afraid to step outside of Canada and find other tools that are just gonna age . You in your camp. A workflow. All right. Thanks for Listen to this soap box style speech. I hope you found it useful, and I'll see you in the next lesson. 82. 10 - Creating a Photo Frame Pop-out Effect: in this lesson, I will be showing you how you create this photo pop out effect here. Worked. Sort of looks like the photo is popping out of the frame, so we'll go over how to do that in them. And I'll show you some variations you can do on this. And this is really just all about knowing the tools that you have at your disposal and then just thinking creatively and working to get some interesting results. Okay, so I will just add a new page so we can work on something from scratch. We just go ahead and get rid of this color for now, we'll just set it back toe white, and then what I'm gonna need to start with this is I'm going to need a photo. And so I was gonna go under photo, and I would just type something like fashion, and we will type in fashion and get the results. And so here is the image I had that I used before. So I will use that again for this example. And then to do this fact affect, you are going to need to extract this from the background. So you're gonna either have to have the pro account where you used to this background removal, or you're gonna have to have an element, an element that you extract the background and other software, or you bring an element that doesn't have this background. So I'm gonna go under effects here, and I will choose this. Background removal will give that a few seconds toe work, and then once it extracts the subject, we will move on from there, and I will show you how to create this result. So there we go. It has finished extracting that from the background. And so one thing I want to do now is I'm just going to sample the color here because I'm gonna reuse this color of my design. So I have shown you in some other lessons where you can install a little sort of little browser plug in there that sits up on top, where you just come down and you can select a color directly from your design like that. So I will grab that. I will choose that, and then I will come up to my background here and I'm just going to search for that. It will find a hex code, and I want to use that as my background color. Now you can tweet that if needed, or you can sample another color. But I'm just going to go with that. So once we have that, we have the background. We have this element. What we really need now is a frame element to go around are subject here. So for that simple rectangle tools gonna work now, I could go grab it under here, but you can also just use the keyboard shortcut are and it's gonna automatically add a rectangle when you tap are. And so I will use that keyboard shortcut to save some time. And I'm just gonna change this toe white. And what I'm gonna do now is just start to build that frame and you'll just spearmint around until you find the size you want here. But I'm gonna make this pretty small like this, and then I'm gonna drag this up here and position this as one side of my frame. I will drag out a copy hoops. Try that again. So click on an all to drag the drag out a copy shift when I'm dragging out just to keep my proportions and then I'm gonna come in here and again, all drag another one. This time, I'll need to rotate it 90 degrees. That's gonna be the bottom of my frame. And I'm not worrying about yet whether I get these exactly positioned or size the way I want. I'm just getting the basics. So everything rotated the way it needs to again dragging on a copy. Now I can reposition as needed and decide what size I want my friend to be. So the bottom one here I will drag in from the sides so that we snapped there. And if you want the bottom toe, look a little bit larger the way it would on a Polaroid, you can drag that out something like that in the top of my frame. And I want the wit to sort of be equivalent to what I have on the side there. So I need to drag that in a little bit more. Let me just drag it down so it's not snapping, and I'll get it the way I want. I'll put it back up here and I'll just dragging my sides. So you're just experimenting around here until you get the frame size you want. Now this frame looks like maybe it's a little taller than I want, so maybe I'll just come and drag it down. Maybe I want my frame to be more like that, so I'll do something like that. So then I gotta pull these in on the sides. So this is just the work to get the frame you want. And now, once you have this, it's just really about putting the elements that you want behind your subject. So, for example, this frame here on the left side and then also this one and this one here these are the ones that I really want to move backwards to the back and then everything else here, this one I want in front. So it's just really is that simple to get this cool look here in the course, I could select everything, get positioned better on the page, and I have this really dynamic element where it looks like the photo is popping out of the frame. Now, in this other version I have up here, I have the initial background behind there, and I kind of like the way that makes it look like it's actually popping right out of the actual photo itself. So you could, of course, add that back in. So I wouldn't need another copy of the original here, so I will just click to bring that back on screen. And then I'm just gonna again use my control plus bracket keys, troll plus bracket keys to move it backwards and get it. So it is behind that front of the frame. Not needed to be, ah, behind the other one there. So let me just keep moving it backwards. And so then I would have it in the position I wanted there. And so then it's just about getting it lined up here. So let's bring it up and over and get it down into position. And then, of course, just to hide it here, I would just bring these things in so that they're behind there and behind there and because now I have that background layer, which is making for that. But I have the extracted layer also which I can put in front of the guides here. It really gives this cool look where it looks like. This lady is just popping out of the photo. And these are the types of things you can do if you just think creatively within Canada and understand the tools you have at your disposal. And of course, you can get creative and can try variation. So I could just copy this page and then this one here in this one, let's say I want to get rid of So let's say we want to keep this when we just slide this for a second so I can get this one here. I'll delete that because in in this version here, maybe this version is just going to be the subject. And I'm not gonna have the background. And then again, I could have another version. So if I copy this page here, maybe I want another version where I have something like ingredient behind this girl here. And so I would come under my elements Tab and I will search for Grady INTs. So radiance this type radiant. Let it bring apps ingredients on screen there, and let's try this one here and see if it's gonna let me do what I want. So this one is going to be a square, and I can't resize other than that square, so that's not gonna quite cover or work. So let me get rid of that one. Let me try this one. So again, you may have to experiment around to find something that's gonna fit so again, this one here is gonna come beyond. But you can make this work. Sometimes you just have to be creative and think about ways you could make it work. So let me actually get rid of this one and go back to that pretty prior want, because I could make this work too. So again, sometimes you have to sort of think about what are the limitations of the tool. One thing you're using. In other words, this one's not letting me size. But besides the square, I can't make it like a differently shaped rectangle. But I can still make this work. So let me just position it something like there. I'll make it cover everything there and then I will use my control bracket keys. I'm gonna push it to the back so it's behind everything Now I know it's sticking out side there, but I'll take care of that in a second and of course I want to come in here and I want to actually change these colors so I will select the grading again. Let's try this again. So I'm getting my photo again and not disc radiant. So use the tab key just to make sure I'm finding that radiant there. Now I have that greedy int. And then once I have it, I'll choose that color that we're using there and then for the next color, let me just actually grab this and come in here and see what this is. And copy that because I want my other color to be very close to that. And so I'm gonna grab this color here, but then I'll go in here, I'll paste this and I don't want to the exact same color cause I do want a color change, but so this is where I'll just come in here. It'll slide that. So we're starting to get that radiant from one side to the next. And that looks pretty cool. And then, of course, to get rid of this, I would have to use a trick, So I'm not seeing that, But I could just dragging another rectangle and make it my background color. Let me just bring in a rectangle and resize it. So bring it over here. I'll bring it over here. There's making sure it's gonna hide those areas that we don't want to see. And then I would just make it that background color. And I would need another copy of that so all and I'll rotate it. They need to hide this little bit up top here, and that works. Of course, I have to send all these to the back. So position to the back and then positioned. Well, I didn't want to send it all the way to the exit. I'm not to go bring it forward a little bit. So it's in front of that. Grady in So boom there. Same thing on this side. I'll just use my control bracket keys to push it back. So it's behind the frame and there you go. So it's just about experimenting and playing around, and you can get these interesting framed effects and other special effects like this just by understanding the tools. And then if you reach those limitations, think from Is there a way for me to get around this? Or is it something I'm just gonna have to go to other software for 83. 10 - Creating Realistic Drop Shadows (Part 1): in the previous lesson, we saw how to create this cool pop out frame effect in this lesson. I'm gonna teach you how to do a drop shadow. Now a lot of people will tell you Drop shadows cannot be done in Camba. That is not true. You just have to think creatively, and I'm gonna show you how to do it here. Now, first, let me show you. By the fall, a lot of people would do a drop shadow quote unquote drop, shatter like this. It put in a rectangle, they change it to black cell pull of black. We're gonna send it to the back. Sobel size it down once we send it to the back so we'll send it to the back. So it's behind all the pertinent elements, and then they would size it down something like this. And so this is how they would be creating that drop shadow look. And so boom, something like that. So you can create something like that. And of course, then with that rectangle, you could come in there and you could start to lower down the passage of you want until you can create a drop shadow like that. But that's not what I want to teach you. I'm gonna teach you a better way. Ah, more realistic way. Now, obviously, you can do this sort of thing in other software, but I'm all about teaching you in this class what you can do in Canada Now, I've said before, if there's a way, you can go do it outside of canvas and it's gonna be faster, that absolutely step outside of Canada. But it can't is Campbell If camp is what you know and you're looking for a way to do things in Camba, I'm gonna show you how to create a more realistic drop shadow. And there's nothing wrong with this. This is a nice graphic element here. So you can certainly use something like this in your design. If you're going for a clean, modern looks, something like this actually might be pretty cool. But for a realistic drop shadow, you're obviously gonna have more of a feather to the edge. There's gonna be a more off a fall off as the shadow gets farther away from the subject and I'm gonna show you how you can do that now, in Canada, so before I show you, I'm gonna do something else real quick, and this is really to give you a hint as to how you're going to do it. And also, I want to stress that sometimes if you want achieve a certain effect, you really have to start to understand how some of the tools are working within Canada. So watch this. I'm gonna go into photos, and I'll just search for dark photos and I'll start by adding in this one here, that's just this Black photo. Now, if I come under my just menu, I have this blur setting hint. Hint. This blur setting is going to be crucial to creating a more realistic drop shadow. But if I drag it out to the right, nothing's really happening now. If I go to the left, I can see that it does start to get more crispy. You can start to see noise and stuff like that in the photo, but when I go to the Blur side, nothing. And that's because for this blur setting toe work, you really need areas of contrast and edges within the photo. You don't really have that here, so I throw this one out and let me just come down and dragging this photo. Now, look at this photo within this photo, you have a clear edge here. That's a different color than the darker edge here. So you have that clear edge in contrast within the photo. And now if we come under that same adjustment, you and we drag up, learn. Now look at what is happening now. Now you really are really are seeing how these hard edges within the photo are becoming feathered. Now it's maintaining the color information, but it's feathering those edges. So that's your clue. Have you figured out how we're gonna do this? We'll show you. Let's just get rid of that. Or, you know, we can just leave this. We'll give it will come back to this page. Okay, so I have this rectangle here roughly in the position that I'm gonna want it. Ah, to create this fact. But let me just copy this page. So we have this blank page here. Actually, I want a new blank page. So let me just control Z to undo that. This time, I'll just do a blank page. It's gonna bring over that color, but I want to grab this rectangle control, See? And then if I highlight this page control V, it should pace it in the same position. So that's roughly where I'm gonna want it to be right here. And I'm even going to make it a little bigger because it's going to be something I may want to re position a little bit and so we'll make it a little bigger just because I have a little leeway and I'll explain why, as we get into it, But I'm making it bigger. But I'm holding down the shift because I do want to maintain proportions, so I'll make it a little bit bigger like this. And then what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna save this whole thing off. Has A P and G or J pay. So we'll come to download. And this is page five. So only one Page five and I will click that and come up here and I'll change this to PNG and you can save it. Call it whatever you want. It's all download that, and I'm just gonna call it test something like that. That's fine. And I'll go ahead and save that off Okay, so this does take an extra step, but I'll show you the result we can get with this. So let's take this one here and let's copy this page. And remember, we're gonna get rid of this here, so we get rid of that. So here's our other example. This drop shadow people try to create in camera, and here's we're gonna create that new drop shadow. But so let's go toe uploads and let's upload that test image that we just created. So I have that down in here right here. Test open. And so now what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna bring this sand so I'll just click this once. It loads here loading here. So then I'll just click that to bring it in and now watch. I'm gonna come under. I just I'm gonna take this blur setting start to blur it up. So you get that feather edge like that now are you seeing? Of course. Now we have to position it in our layer stack. So with that selected, I'll use my control plus bracket keys to start to push that backwards. Now I think it's not letting me do that, cause I'm still under this adjustment. You so come out under that adjust menu and now start to push it back. And so we'll get it. So it's behind everything except for that. And now look at that Now it's just about sizing it up a little bit and the reason why I meet it a little bit bigger before it's because invariably it's gonna come in. Here is a different sizes. You're gonna have to size it up. And I don't like it to be exactly the size of the background because Senate tens of snap to the background. So then I'll just drag it up to get to where I want on it pretty much like that. And then look at that. So compare drop shadows. You have this drop shadow here with this hard, hard edge, which is not realistic at all. And then you have something like this, and of course, this with this one here, you can still go in here, and you can play with that transparency and make that a subtle or as pronounced as you want . And so it's just a much more realistic way to create a drop shadow in Canada. So I hope you like that technique. Play around with it, see what kind of drop shadows you can create in Canada. And I just encourage you to play around in general because sometimes that really is the best way for unlocking techniques that are really useful. All right, I'll see in the next lesson. 84. 10 - Creating Realistic Drop Shadows (Part 2): in the last ice when we talked about how to create a realistic drop shadow like this. And we did that by understanding how the Blur tool works. And we were able to use a rectangle shape a black rectangle and get this realistic drop shadow behind this image here. But what if we wanted to do this on a nonconventional shape? Or what if we even wanted to do it on a photo cut out? What? I'm gonna show you how to do that in this lesson and applies the same technique. It just involves one more step, and it's all about just understanding the tools in Canada and what you need to do to get the effect you want. So I'm gonna grab this girl here. We're just gonna move her down out of the way for a second, cause I'm just gonna grab everything else and get rid of all these other elements here that I will bring the girl back and let me position her size or up a little bit. We'll get her more in the center. Okay, So with the last technique, we were able to start with a black rectangle cause it was a shape and we could change it to whatever color we wanted. But so if we need that edge for that contrast and we need a black person is girl, how do we go about that? So what I'm gonna do is come come in here under the adjust menu, which you can access whenever you're working on a photo, I'll drag down the brightness all the way. I'll drag down the contrast and will drag down the saturation. Now, that does not get us all the way there. But we're getting there. And so what I'm gonna do next is I'll just come back out here on the set this toe white because I'm gonna save this off with transparency. And so saving something off with transparency is a pro feature. So you will need a pro feature to do the method I'm doing right here in this lesson. Okay, so then I'm gonna come to download this, and I want a PNG, and I do want transparent from my background. And then I will go ahead and click download. So give it a moment to prepare by design, and I'll save this Whatever. I'm just gonna call this a and I'll click, Save. And then once you've done that, you're gonna go over to upload and you're gonna upload that image that you just did. So here is this A and I will go ahead and open that now I'm in here still. So I'm just gonna hit control Z to back out to this version where I still have the regular image because I'm gonna want that. Ah, and then I'm gonna come in here and we see how Well, now we have this image here that I can add on screen now, it isn't that black version that we want yet. However, if you come under a just now and now you drag down the brightness. Look at that. With the second past, you're able to get it all the way to a fully black image. Now, you might think that OK, we can go ahead and we can resize this as needed, and then we can go ahead and do our blur effect now. But here's the problem. If I do the blur effect now, you start to get this weird sort of ah effect where the shape really starts to change a little more more than you want, so you can do this. Let me just push this to the back so they re sizes down a little bit. Actually, just so we're not Ah, come out of here because I don't want to snap to the background. So me, just position it behind me and move it over a little bit so you can go ahead and you can use it like this and you're starting to get a decent result. But it's just not quite what I want, because if I try to blur it more, I feel like I start to lose my shape a little bit. And that's the same reason why, in the last lesson, we didn't just do the rectangle we saved off the whole background. So here's what I want you to do instead. So I'm just gonna bring this back to the front for a second just a week so we can see better. So I'm under a just now, so I have to come out before I can bring my layer back to the front. So let me select on it, bring it back to the front, and it's to see what we have. I'll bring this back up. I'll go back under the adjust menu, and I'm gonna reset this to the brightness. I went down, but I'm a reset this blur. 20 Okay, so now we have this again. But this time I will position it exactly so that it takes up and snaps over that photo. And now this is the virgin. I want to save off now, but I want to save it awful with this red background. So here's what we're gonna do. We gonna come up here again, and this time I will go ahead. And I will save this off as a PNG again. Not worried about transparency now, because we want to keep that red background, someone a download this version and we'll call this version. Be safe. Okay, Now, we can throw out this one in here because this has the active adjust filter being applied. Ah, so let's just get rid of, uh, Well, actually, this is just the shape. So let's get rid of that. And then they were gonna upload what we just did. So this be version, and then we're gonna bring that into our scene. And so now watch If we come under a just now and now we start to blur, See how it maintains to shape a lot better. It's just aim or realistic effect than we were getting before. So I'm gonna go ahead and apply that blur. You can adjust that later, but and you may want to even have the Blur not applied yet. So I just said it back to zero. I'll drag this up so we basically have it into position. But then I'm gonna shift and move in a little bit this way, move a little bit down, But then to see what's going on, we want to move this to the background behind that image. So you're gonna position that blur where you want it orbit where we're based on where your light source is gonna be, Where is where you want your shadow? So I'll just start with something like that. And then you come to that just menu and you'll start to drag out that blur. And then, of course, what's really going to bring this home? It's just coming in here and taking that transparency down fair amount. But so there you go, just like we did in the last lesson, you can come in and start to add this drop shadow. That's a much more realistic than if you just try a different technique. So it's all about knowing the techniques and knowing what it's possible inside of Canada, and you can get these really cool effects. So let me just expand on this farther if you knew you would have other elements in the scene. So let me just bring this image, which we did before back in, we'll bring it up so that snapping toe where the girl is gonna be and say You knew you were gonna have some sort of headline up here. So what is our headline text gonna be? Let's just add a heading. Doesn't really matter for the example Here, we're just gonna grab any heading and we're gonna put it up here. So even this is fine. Let's just say you know you're gonna have that the scene. So if I came in here and I changed this to black, so let me just make this text color black and I've lost that other image. So let me just go back now under my uploads and let me bring this back. I don't know why I lost this before, but so I'll bring this back and all size it up so that it's right like that. And so now if I were to save this off here, and so I will go under downloads and I will again PNG download. We'll just call this one, see my very creative naming here, save that off, and then I'm just gonna hit control Z a couple times to get back before and I still have this act of text in here. Of course, I wanted this text now to be back toe white and I have the other drop shadow in there that we created before. Let's just get rid of that for a second. And then if we uploaded this other version, which you just did here, I'll give that a moment, the load, and then we will bring that in as he bring that in a weakened position, that into place and we can nudge it a little bit this way and a little bit down where we want to drop shadow the B. And now we come up here under a just and we apply that blur and then I want to also bring this down in the layer stack to its behind my cut out again. So let's see. Position backward. There we go. Now it's behind that. And then, of course, I wanna lower down this a fair amount. But so now you're applying that drop shadow, too? Not just your subject down here, but also you're heading. So it's just about thinking about where that endpoint is one of the tools available, and then you do have the ability to create some of these effects. You just have to think about what tools they're gonna let you get there. And as you learn the tools and play around, you may find even more ways to make use of the tools with other creative effects. There's one example here that blur we just did to make the drop shadow. I am also using that same technique here to create this lighting effect of this scene. And so I have just taken the shape here, which I created and brought in as a background here. So they also have the red there. And then when I apply the Blur here, I get this nice window light effect So if we go to this, we can see if I drop down the blur. That, yes, this is just that basic shape with the blur applied. So again, learn the tools. Play around half, son and see what you can come up with. All right. I'll see you the next lesson. 85. 10 - Class Project - Share a Cool Visual Effect Made with Canva: for this class project. I want you to incorporate a cool visual effect into one of your designs. In recent lessons, we talked about how to do this photo pop out effect. And we also talked about how to create realistic drop shadows like you see here. So if you want, you can do one of those effects on one of your own designs to practice that technique. Or you can do any visual effect of your own that you just want to show off. So what you're gonna do is go ahead and create a design and then download a J Pagan uploaded to the class project section of this course so we can check out what you've done. I look forward to seeing what you come up with. 86. 11 - Download and Export Options for your Finished Designs: okay. Lets just very quickly review the download options you have once you're finished creating a design. So here, if you have a single slide in your design, that when you go under this download option here, you can choose file typing you again. You have P and G J Pake PF. Pdf pdf Print A video animation? Of course, that depends. If you have multiple slides, then you'd be able to do with the animation option and here video again. It depends on what you have. Any video in here. This would just be a still image. There's nothing moving inherently in here. And then, of course, that crown for animation means that that would be Onley that is only available for the camp a pro, so you don't have the animation option under the free Camba. But so you choose all those options. And then, of course, if you have the pro account, you can choose to ah, size up your options so you can have two extra resolution. You can have up to three extra resolution, but again, that is on Lee for the pro canvas. So if you're free Campbell, you could start with a larger file size if you thought you needed them. And then if you're downloading a PNG and it does have transparency, which this one does not. But if you had elements that does have transparency, that is another pro feature you can turn on, as is the ability to compress the file size. So all pretty straightforward and you will sometimes get slightly different. Options are based on what you're downloading. For example, J pegs you set sort of the size and the quality so you can compress. Ah, PdF. So that's pretty standard. Pdf print. Then you can add in things like crop marks and believe marks. And then these other options here, video and animation. They're not really going to come into play if you don't have that in built into here. Uh, well, I should say video will not. You can animate anything that's gonna be multiple slides. It's not really gonna work for a single slide. Ah, but so let me jump over, then to another one, that is, Let's see, I clicked on the wrong screen there. Let me bring back up this, and so I will jump over to this other project. And so this is a multi page project here. And so just to show you when it's multi page, you are gonna have a few more options here. So let's see if I come down now and I'm downloading as a PdF, then it's gonna let me select which pages I wanna download. So Canelo Tamal or I can just check these boxes and download some of them. So that is different when you have a multi paged document like that. And, of course, if I chose something like animation, which is a pro feature again, then you can come in here and you can set what transitions you want and then your file format you whether you want it to be in and before or a Jeff. And so you do have different options, depending on the type of file, without seeing a single page or multi page. And then you have different options, depending on what you're downloading, whether it's an animation, whether it's a pdf for the judge, a pay PNG, those are the standard options, so it's all pretty self explanatory that is exporting files within Canada. It's not hard. Just play around. You're very quickly get the hang of it. All right. I'll see you in the next lesson and the next last number. Just gonna talk about the some of the other publishing options you have year, and we'll also talk about the share option. So I think next lesson I'll talk about share options and then we'll talk about some of these publishing options. 87. 11 - Sharing your Canva Designs: this'll s when we're talking about the different share options you have when you want to share one of your projects within Canada. Okay, So what I will do is come up here to this menu bar because when you have a project, you have download options here on the right. If you want to download a file assets and just to the left of that up here on this bar, you have this share option the share button here, this is we're going to go if you want to share your project, so I will click that open. Ah, If you type someone's name up here, then you can share a link where they can edit. Or they can just view that file and then this next option. Here we have this circle here. Ah, and you have these options here. This is if you actually have a team within camera so you can set up a team within Campbell where you have up to. I can't remember how many 10. 20 team members just know that if you set up a team that way in Camba, you will get charged for each team member you have, so wherever owns that account is gonna pay that monthly fee. And so you have two team members. It's gonna be two times that monthly fee that you pay. If it's three, then three times that of that monthly fee. Now it still makes a really good way. If you work in a team to share files very easily, because when you have team members than and with any project, you can come in under that team member's name and you can set up any particular file so they could edit it so they can view it, or so that it's not shared. So that is, if you work in a team environment and you want to really have easy ability to share and edit files. However, even if you do not want to pay that extra monthly fee and you just have the one account and you do not have team members, that does not mean you cannot share files. You can still share files. So as I mentioned to start, you can share files just by typing an email here, and then when you do that, you can give them the ability to edit or view, or you can also just generate the link yourself and then send the link or post the link somewhere. And that's with these options down here. So share a link to edit. You could actually drop down this menu here and the three choices you have our share a link to edit share a link to use as a template or share a link to view. Now, these are pretty self explanatory, but we're still going to go through each of these real quick and just so we can understand exactly what's happening here just to make sure we understand. And just note that this share a link to use as a template that does have this crown icon here because this one is a paid option, you have to have paid Camba to share a link to use as a template the other two shearling to edit share link to view. You can do those also under the free account. So what I'm gonna do now is actually have free files open. Ah, this is share a link to view. I call this one share link to edit, and this one share as a template. So we're gonna generate one of these links for each of these, just so we can test these three different options. So I will do that now. So again, this one here is share link to view. So I'll come under share, and I'm just going to share a link to view. And I will copy that link. I have a little note pad file open. So this is share a link to view. I'm gonna piece that in, jump back over. I'll go to the second file. This is where I'm gonna share a link to edit. So share, share a link to edit. Copy that link. Jump over here, paste that in and one more time. Sherry link as a template. Jump back to Canada. I'm gonna share a link to use as a template. So I will grab this share. I will come down and sherry link to use as a template and copy the link. So very easy to generate these links. You have those three options. If you're in paid Camba free. Campbell, you just have the two options. Okay, So what I'm gonna do now is I'm gonna go ahead and I will log in under a different account . So we contest thes three options and see what the link results in. Okay, so here I am Now, I log out of the one account and I have logged in. Now, under another count, this is just a free account. I have. So I am under a different account, and now I'm going to check those three different links that generated so first share a link to view this was three share a link to view. So I will control. See to copy that his jump back over here. You can. But I'm just gonna paste it right up here into my your l field. And so we will see share a link to view. So with share a link to view a get this document here, and I can see the design, but there's no option for me to edit this design. I could expand a full screen. I think if I do this here, I can share and I can copy a link. So I consented to someone else if I want them to view it. But there are no edit capabilities. That makes sense. Of course, because that was just share a link to view. So you can guess what's gonna happen here if I come in and share a link to edit? This was the link to edit. So I will copy this one. I'm gonna jump back over here. I'll just start a new window so we can have another window here, and I will pace that in. And so this time since this was share a link to edit Ah, I'm going to see the project here. Just bear in mind that if I come in here now and I make edits, what's gonna happen is that that document is gonna be changed in that original file under my other account. So just to demonstrate that I will go ahead and change this color of this year to indicate that I've made it edit. Now we're gonna come back to this in a second, cause I'm gonna open it back up in my other project under my other Ah, excuse me under my other account and we'll see that Yes, this change has come through on. We'll talk about what you have to watch out for when you share a link to edit, and we'll talk about that in just a second. But first, before we do that. Let's just take a look at this final option. So share a link is a template template. I'm gonna copy that one and jumped back over here. One more window. I will hit Control V and I will hit. Enter. Okay. And when you do this option, it says a template was created by Greg and was shared with you. Start designing now, use as template. So you have this option here. If you do that camp, it is a little remix and you'll notice now that I have a copy of share Test three a copy. That's very important because this is a copy that has been remixed for you because you shares a template. So now this person can come in and they could make changes. So again, if I went here and change the color, I can make changes in this, But this is not going toe effect that original document created by the other owner and shared with me because they shared it as a template. So that is a very important difference between sharing something where someone can edit and sharing it as a template. And again, this template option is only available under the paid account. So I'm going to do with, um, a log out now. And we're just gonna peak back at that original count just to see that. Yes. In fact, I could make changes here, and it didn't affect the original. But under this edit one, that change is gonna come back through. Okay, so here I am, back under my original account where I shared the links from. So this was that 1st 1 remember, Share a link to view. I shared it. They were able to view it, but they were not able to make edits the share test to note that, yes, that the change in color has come through because the other person was shared a link where they could edit the original. And I'm also getting this warning that the other person is currently editing the this design you may still edit, but there's a chance one of you could lose your changes. So that's very important, because if you share a link toe edit Ah, if you guys both open the file at the same time and you're both making edits than invariably, somebody's edits are gonna overwrite the other person's edits and it's gonna be a mess. So if you use the sherry linked to edit, you do have to be careful. And you do have to make sure you've mapped out who is working on the file when and then, yes, you can work on the same project and you can go back and forth and each contribute. But just make sure you're paying attention, because if you try to edit at the same time, you do have the potential of losing work. Now we'll give you this warning, but it is something. Just be aware off and make sure you're cautious about that. That's why this third option here, if you want to just share something as a template, so you give someone a starting point and then they can work on the project. You can do this and you notice the color did not change here because this is the original and they were working on a copy of this share three and so that they could work on the project, and there's no chance they were going to overwrite my original template. So those are the three ways you can share Ah link in Camba, you can share it for someone of you. Someone to edit. And then if you have paid Camba, you can share as a template. So those were sharing options in Canada, and I will see you in the next lesson. 88. 11 - Sharing and Scheduling to Social Media (NEW): In this video, we're going to look at how you can share your post directly from Canvas to a lot of the major social media platforms. And also if you have the pro version of Canva, you can schedule them to publish on those platforms at a future time and date. So let's look at this real quick. So I have just created a simple square design here. And I now want to schedule this out across some of the different platforms, social media platforms. And so this is just an example where, where you can create something if you wanted to, you could use that magic resize. So you'd have things well suited for the different platforms. I'm not going to worry about the sizing in this video so much, but I'm gonna show you how you can share these now directly to social media platforms. You're not going to use the share thing here you are going to come over where you usually find the upload or the share options here under this final option in the upper-right menu. And if you come down here, you can share. And if you go down here, you see that if you click See All, you can share to lots of different platforms. So you have Twitter, you have Facebook groups. You can send it directly to create a new Facebook ad. You can do Facebook posts, you can send it to Google Drive dropbox, but then you have all your social media is Pinterest. You have Tumblr, you have slack. Instagram's on here or Instagram personal Instagram business. And then because I'm under a Pro account, I also have this schedule option. So let me just start by just sharing this directly. And I have had a little bit of trouble setting up my Instagram business integration. So normally when you choose one of these at first you have to go through whatever steps you need to on the platform to integrate the channel. I haven't had a little trouble with Instagram, but let's just try it here, sharing this directly to a Facebook page. So whenever you do this for the first time, it'll have you set up that page and make sure you have the permissions and the connection needed. I've done this here for this Facebook page. So now I can just directly choose this, choose how I want to share it. So if it was a gift for a video, I could share it as that on the platform. I'm just going to share this as a PNG and I'm just going to type something like shared directly from Canva from candle. Try that again. And then I can go ahead and choose Publish now or again, I have this little calendar. If I want to do it at a later time, I'm just gonna choose Publish now says preparing your design. So you see this whenever you save off a design, it's preparing your design, but then it should go ahead and it should publish that for me directly to your page. So you go to your homepage here. So if I click this here, it's going to go over, actually that went to my Canva homepage. But if I go over to my Facebook page, I already had this loaded up. Let's see what happens if I refresh this page right now. So I hit refresh and give it a second here. And it has not worked. And there we go, it has worked now. So invariably whenever you showing off something, it doesn't work, but I just had to refresh the page a couple of times and so it just took a minute to publish there. So there was a slight delay with this, but it did work. You can see sheriff directly from Canvas. That's what I typed. Here's my graphic and you can see Facebook has this little published by Canva. And of course, if I go over the question mark, only people who managed this page can see that so far everybody else is just going to show up from a normal post. But that is pretty cool because I created this in Canvas. I did not even have to leave the clamp a platform, and I could just share it directly to my Facebook page. So now that we see that this does work, Let's just jump back over into Canva and let's play around with that scheduler so we know this works. So I'm gonna do a couple things here for them is gonna come in here. I'm going to change the color just so we can see that it's something different just so we can see that this is a different test. And also note that this is an animation here. So if I, if I play this because I think I opened this as the Instagram, I open a template that had animation built-in. So if I hit play here, you're just gonna get that simple animation. That's not much of an animation, but it is something we can test to see if we can publish as not a PNG, but we're going to publish this as a GIF or a MP4. This time when we share and we schedule, we're gonna do a different format, but we're also going to use the scheduled tool so we can publish it for sometime in the future instead of publishing it directly to the platform. So same thing when I go in there, these three dots here. This time instead of just going directly to Facebook, we're going to use this schedule option here and we're going to have it set for today. So in other words, you can't choose days in the future. You could go forward to another month and schedule out way in the future, but I'm just going to keep it on today. And then under here, you would come in and set the time. So this is an hour from now. I'm just gonna change this to something slightly in the future. Just set it for like 10 minutes from now, so 322. And I'm gonna go ahead and click Next, and then select the channel again, I'm selecting that Facebook page. This time I will share the GIF instead of just sharing the the PNG, the static graphics. So this time I'm going to choose gifts. So I have the motion included in the image and I'm going to put something like scheduled from Canva, something simple. This is just a test and I will go ahead and choose schedule posts. Now you also have to save draft option, which I'll talk about in a minute. But for now, I'm going to choose scheduled post. So I get this preparing your design. So we'll let that finish. And it says your design is scheduled. Now I can make a copy and I'd wanna make a copy if I was going to, again, publishes to a different platform because once you have it scheduled, it's sort of locked in on the schedule scheduler, so it gets paused. The scheduler gets paused for this particular item if you come back to edit it, but I can go under the content plane are now. And so you see this link here in your home menu. If you're on the pro account, you have this content planner. And so here it says, here's the scheduled one. Let me just close out of this for a second, just so we see we have the content planner. So in other words, I'm on my homepage here, I see this content planar. And if I look at today the fourth, I can see both the one I published at 236 and then I can see that scheduled for 322. I now have this other option. Now I can click on either one of these. If I click on this one, it just shows me this was published. I can see that up here with this icon here, but I could go in edit and make a copy if I want to go back and find those old posts that I scheduled and scheduled them out again. And if I want to do something in the future and make adjustments, I could click on that. And I could come in here and I could adjust this time so I could come in here. I could delete this like a change that they in time, but I'm going to leave it alone because I do want this to go ahead and publish. So I'm gonna pause the video now and then we're going to see whether that does publish a few minutes from now. So what time is this scheduled for? 322. So I will pause for eight minutes here and we will see how that publishing works. Okay, moment of truth here by my watch, it is now 326 and that should have published it 322. So let's jump back over to that Facebook page and we can see, yes, it has published and it is there and that GIF format. So the animation came through. So that worked. And if we come up here, we can check the information, see yes, it did publish at 322. So everything scheduled in worked perfectly. So this is really cool in a game changer in terms of the ability to schedule, post to all your social media platforms. The relative. So social media platforms all from within Canvas. Now let's look at this scheduler, this content planner a little bit more now, because now from the homepage, now that we've scheduled a couple of things, we see that we have this content planar. And if I look at today's okay, I can see here the post from today that have published and gone out. So I can click on those and see the information for those. But I can also come anywhere in a future here. I can even go and do something next month, but let me just go later in the month. Like let's go down here. Let's hit the plus icon. And when you hit the plus icon, then you can immediately schedule any of your recent posts. So up top here it's just showing the, all the recent stuff I worked on. And of course, I'm always experimenting. So I have all these recent designs in here. So I could grab any one of these. I could grab this post right here and just click on it. I could come in here, I could select that channel, I could write a caption. So I'm just gonna write tests because we're not going to worry about that too much right now. I probably will not actually publish this and see 427 is the time. So I think by default it's coming up with something an hour in the future, but you can change that time. But so now that's scheduled for the 24th at 427. And let's do this again. Let's say I wanted something on the next day. Well, you can also come into your library using this icon here. And so then if you, again, if you're under the pro account, you have a whole bunch of folders on the personal free account, I think you're limited to two folders, but still you can organize your things. You can also search by name. So if you knew something began with an N, You could start searching with that. Of course I'm not coming up with anything, but if I type in Canvas, so you have to sort of, so if I started typing Canvas here, something on Canvas, keyboard shortcuts I created a while ago. So if you know the name, you can type it that way, but a lot easier would be just to organize by folder. So as I test, I just created a folder called June marketing. And so now I can just come in here and I can see all of my June marketing. I can see this one is scheduled, right? So I scheduled that one, but I can grab this one. And I maybe I want to schedule this one. And again, I'm just showing you the face, but it's book example here, but you can connect up Pinterest, you can connect up Instagram, you can connect up, you know, Tumblr or Twitter, I should say, and all the relative social media channels. And I think more and more stuff is going to be integrated with Canva as we go on. So there are a lot of great options right now, and I think all the major ones are covered, but more and more stuff is likely to be added through this in the future. So you connect up your channels and you can choose them from here. Again, you just write what your recaption is. So for this one, free versus pro Canvas, what are the differences? Again? So you can just take some time one day and just go through and schedule this. And then you have this visual representation on this content planar. And you can come up and say, Oh, June, June is covered. I have all the marketing I want scheduled for June. And again, as you're creating your designs, think about, you know, intentionally about your marketing. Create marketing for all your different ones that are calendar. But then when you come to June next year, if you're doing seasonal things that are going to be the same, just pull up that same folder and come in here and schedule the same thing for next year. Scheduled out again, you can jump through the calendar month, so I can jump that here's June, but I can jump forward to July. Let's see, how do I jumped to July? What is this here? Okay, So there we go. So today. Okay. So jump to July. I just come down here so we have a click down here. So can I get to July well, I can obviously scheduled for July 1st here, but maybe I can only go so many days into the future. I was under the impression here. I know that you can using the scheduler, but maybe let's see today. Okay, so there we go. Okay, how was confused there for a second but these little arrows up top let you jump. I was confused because it said today, but if I go through here, I am jumping through the months of the year. Let's see, does it limit how far I can go forward? Okay, Now I am a year into the future and you could go on and on. It's already gone farther than I think you'd want to schedule out your social media, but you can schedule way into the future here with this content planner. Flushes, get back to this year. And then as you scheduled out, you have this nice visual representation. It's very clean. It just takes the headaches out of social media. So because you're going to be creating a lot of your graphics within Canada anyways, to be able to just directly schedule them here within Canada, within this platform, I really think this is going to save a ton of people, a ton of time. Maybe you're one of those people. So that is the new content planner inside of Canva. Check it out. Again, it is under the pro account, but this might be worth it. So this could be one of the major reasons why you might want to think about upgrading if you're on the free account. But that's for you to consider. Everybody's budget is different, so I'll leave that decision up to you. But this is the content planner and what is possible with the content planner inside of Canvas. 89. 11 - Publishing your Canva Project to Various Platforms: okay. In the previous lessons, we talked about share options. We talked about our download options. Let's just look in this lesson at this final option here, which are your publishing options. So how would you like the publish? You can do a little search up here. If I type in like something like Facebook, it's gonna bring up options. And you can also just scroll down here. And you can also just, ah, bring up more options like that by show more. You can see all of these. So I'm not gonna go into each and every one of these Some of these air pretty self explanatory, but I'll just walk through some of these quickly now presentation. We saw that in a previous lesson, So let's step back and watch that lesson lesson on creating presentations in Gambia, and you'll see that one download that's pretty obviously just does the same thing. Is this option right here? Share link that does the same as the share here. If you share a link, it's just going to share a link or anybody can view Ah, so those are the same options. Their website, this is in beta. You can actually take something and then turn it into a mini website, so I may do a lesson on that check and see. We may have a less. Somehow you create a mini website with camera. Ah, and then other options. Microsoft Power Point in Bed Link. If you do in a bed link, you can embed a design in your website email. You consent it as an email attachment. Animation. Of course, we've talked about in other lessons, and then you can share it across all these different platforms. Ah, slack linked, linked in you can public directly to Facebook and with any of the social media or other platforms. If you click on that, it's gonna make sure you connect your account first. And then when it's once it's connected, you'll be able to publish directly to that platform. All right, I'll just x out of that. So we see some of the other options. So these air social media things you can send it to Dropbox. You can send it the Microsoft one drive Google drive, so that's all cool. You can put it over to mail chimp again. You can published pinchers and other platforms and then the last option is you. If you have something where you're actually ordering through, can va You can order one of their business cards, posters, flyers, one of their products. You can order directly here from the camera interface. So that's really cool. Inconvenient. You create your design and then instantly you can print it onto whatever you want. So those are all really cool options down the video again. We talked about that sort of thing in another on other tutorials. So a lot of use we've covered. And then the other ones are publishing the social media platforms. So I'll just do a couple of these real quick. This is a test. I'm not gonna go through mall. But, for example, I would just do Microsoft Power Point. I will download that real quick. That's gonna prepare my design and then office. Go ahead and save this here. So I'm just going to say this inside this can, of course, folder. And I'll just call this power point so we can see that one save again. I will go through all these but this in bed link, for example. If I do this year, it's going to invade your design on medium WordPress or on your own website. So if I click in bed than what you're gonna do is it's going to give me this. You're in bed, links have been created. And so then you can copy this HTML code or this code here, and you can place that right inside your Web page and have that designing your Web site. So that is pretty cool. And let's see other options here. I've covered most of these website. This is in beta website style presentation. Scrolling. Ah, so let's just show you an example scrolling. So if I took this one and I did this and then I click open, what it's actually going to do is it's gonna spawn a website on Canada. So what you need to know about the website option is at this point time, it doesn't give you something to publish on your own platform. It's just creating this little website on Canada, but it is this cool scrolling website, and you could take this link then and you could send it out to other people. So it's kind of a cool way to create a landing page. If you have an event or something like that, or you just want to show this off. So again, that is another option. Okay, so I think you get the idea. There are a lot of cool options for publishing here, publishing from Camba. Make sure you check them out real quick. All tissue that that power point we created. That was one of the things I just published. And so if I Oh, if I click on that now and open that you see, Yes. Campbell went ahead and created a nice Power Point presentation based on the slides I put in there. So we had another lesson in this course on presentations, and we talked about how if use canvas presentation mode, you may want to have a backup, and so this would be a really easy way. If you have power point tow, launch something in power point. So just one of the many, many published options you have on canvas. Okay, I think that's all the options on the cover, but full around here realize you can publish to a lot of different social media platforms. They're getting more and more stuff connected up with Camba. So it is really cool. And you do have a lot of published options. All right. Thanks for your joining me in this lesson, and I will see you in the next one. 90. 11 - Organizational Strategies: since we just talked about all the export options you have when exporting off assets from Camba. And we've seen throughout this course all the great things you can create from Canada. I wanted to take at least a moment to talk about the organizational structure you use when you save your assets from Cama. Now, this could be what you use on your own computer or maybe saving the Google drive, maybe saving the Dropbox. Either way, it makes sense, since we've talked about again and again about saving time that we employ a smart strategy member saving off our final assets. So I'm gonna show you just a example of the way you can do it. Of course, you can tweak this to whatever works for you, but I'm gonna recommend that you have one main folder which you used to store all your canvas assets and so you could call it something like my canvas assets. And then within that you may have stuff like ah, my client assets. If you do work for clients, you may keep that in one separate folder and you could put everything within their so within there you could have different folders for different clients, something like that. And then above that in a different folder, maybe all of the art marketing assets there for you, for your business. Maybe you keep those within their own fillers. And within that folder, you might set up one as like your brand assets. So images of you things that airport part of your brand that you use again and again, and then the other one you may use for your different marketing channels. And so you may have things like Facebook instagram pincers. But whatever your marketing platforms are, the different channels that you promote on have a different folder structure for each one and then within those you could organize by month. So if I, for example, had Instagram and I planned out and batch doubt all my instagram pins for January, I could just put him all my January folder same for February, March and so on. And so if you store your assets in a smart way like this and get in the habit of doing this every time you export, then really your content marketing is just gonna be so much easier because things are going to be set up for you. You're gonna build everything out in a way that it's there. You know where to find it. And when it's time to plan out and do your actual promotion, all your assets right there. Excuse me. All your assets were right there. So I really encourage you to think about what are the channels in which you promote yourself is a business. What are those Different marketing channels. And go ahead and set up a folder structure that is gonna goto work for you and it's going to save you time. So this may depend a lot on whether you do client work or whether you do work for yourself . But either way, think about a smart structure, because then it's going to save you time and the reason why I recommend having sort of one parent folder have toe hold everything. So I have this Mike and the Assets folder, which holds everything that way it's gonna be really easy to back up. And I always stressed the people back up your work. And so if I just take this one photo here and I copied it and I move it over to another drive that I know. I have. It backed up. So think about the structure. Set it up in a way that's gonna make sense for you away. That's going to save you. Time. Ah, wait. It's gonna go to work for you. In a way that's gonna be easy to back up. Okay, So that's just me getting up on my soapbox and talking just a little bit about some smart organizational strategies you might want to employ. All right, I'll see you in the next lesson. 91. 12 - Extending Canva with Photopea - Intro (NEW): In this video we're talking about photocopy, so photo p.com, maybe it's pronounced Futopia. I don't want to pronounce it however you want to. But we're looking at this software because what I did was basically I wanted to find a piece of free software for Canvas users on a budget that really filled in the gap for a lot of those things that Canva is not good at. So sort of working with layers more easily, the ability to do some masking, to do some different filters, to do some different blending modes. These are all things you can do inside if Utopia that you can't really do within Canva. So I did some exploring and basically I was looking for what's, what's the closest to Photoshop. Now Futopia is not going to do everything Photoshop does, but it is a very good sort of lightweight version. And also within here they really try to mimic a lot of what you're going to see in Photoshop. So this really is for free software. It really does let you do a lot of cool things. And this is going to let you take your Canvas skills, but then add on this other piece of software that really let you take your designs farther. And when you start doing things like photo compositing, creating sort of more complex designs that blend different images together. If you want to do masking and layering this a little bit more advanced. This is where photo p is really going to let you extend your skills and it's going to save you a lot of time. Sometimes I see people inside a Canva trying these really complex techniques that require just step after step after step after step. And that's not a great use of your time if there's another tool out here in a free tool in this case, that's going to let you take things even further. So let's fit this video. Let's just go over the basics of photocopy. Where is it, how to get to it? How do you install it if you want to install it? And then we'll look at some basic layout items in here, sort of the user interface. So I met photo p.com, so this exist online, you just have to go to photo p.com and you will get to this window. Now if you want to come in here and go under this more tab, you can hit this. Well, actually I think it's because I've installed it already. I'm not seeing that. So let's just see. Oh, yes. So it's grayed out here because it can tell that I have already installed photocopy. But if you want to hit this install photocopy button, when you hit this, you're not gonna see anything happen. Because basically what it does is I think it's basically install sort of like a shortcut on your computer that will then launch this sort of web application. And so it's basically the same thing. But now, since I've done this, if I go under my sort of program menu and I start typing in photocopy, or actually can see this piece of software installed. It's like an app on my computer. Now if I click it, it's going to bring up a window here. And let me just, you're not seeing all this because I'm losing the top bar here inside of my record window. But basically what it's done is it is installed, basically the same thing here. So whether you're working in the installed version or the online version, it's basically when you launch the installed version, it's basically just launching a browser window. But it gets rid of a little, a bit of a tabbed area up top. So maybe it's a little helpful, saves a little time, but I don't think it matters which version you use. You're basically working on their online server and you have access to this photo P software so you can install it. You can just go to photo p.com, whatever works for you. But it's going to be a great tool to help you take things even further. So let's jump into the layout a little bit. Okay, Let's talk about the photocopy user interface. So when you launch it, you'll have this menu here where you can create new projects, open it from your computer. You can start with some templates and some other things down here. Then of course you have menu bar up top, you have tools to the left, and you have more expandable menu options here, over here on the right, which you can use these little arrows to collapse or expand. And as you collapse and expand and you can go through the different tabbed options. So there really are a lot of options in here. It just gives you more tools and you're going to find in something like Canva when it comes to sort of working with images, editing images. Up top here we have this account options. So let's go ahead and click on this. You can see that the free option has all the features. I mean, that's what is so great here that even in, under the free account, you have all the features. Now I'm seeing all these ads to the right and you will see these if you're under the free options. If you want to go ahead and pay for something, then you can get rid of these, these options here. And you can see it says for a single user for 30 days and $9.90 dollars, ninety days, $10. I'm not sure why you would get 30 days if he can get 90 days for a dollar more, and then for a year it's $40. So just to give you an idea, if you've got the full version of Photoshop, I think it's 1999 a month. Although through Adobe, I can almost always find a deal where you get it once a year. There's a sale. We can get Photoshop basically for $10 a month. So if you're gonna start paying for something, that's when I would almost recommend just to learn Photoshop, get Photoshop. It has more options in this, even though this is a good lightweight version and this really does have a lot of the features you do have in Photoshop. There are things that go beyond this with Photoshop and then Photoshop's installed on your own computer is really going to leverage the power of your machine. If you have a powerful, powerful computer that's going to work faster. So there are definitely advantages to Photoshop over this, but for a free tool, this is really fantastic. So I would not recommend going to any of these options you can if you want to get rid of the ads. But I sort of use this as a quick, lightweight tool just to let me extend the power of Canva. So if you want to learn Photoshop, That's great. I love Photoshop and so I use Photoshop, so I don't really use photo P and my own workflow. But when teaching Canva, I really come in here because this is a great free tool for Canvas users that aren't ready to make that Photoshop leap yet, or maybe you're on a budget. So this is a great tool. So I'm going to go through this too much, but you have this little count option. And so under the free option, you do have these ads that exist over to the right. But just to have a pretty good workspace here, tick up in here and do stuff. So again, we're going to jump into these as we get into the lessons. I'm not going to go over everything now, just know that these are your tool options over here. And when you have a little right triangle appear on the bottom right, you can click on that and you can see all the options. So under this year I have my lasso, but they also have polygon or lasso, Magnetic Lasso those. So when you ever, you see the little triangle here, there are other options in there. And if you click on that little triangle, You'll see the different options within there. Okay? So menus to the left, and then over here you have all these expandable menus. So that's the basic layout. As we go along here in this little section of the course, I'm going to show you what I think are the most important tools to really leverage within here. So I'm not going to get into every single option within here. You can experiment, you can learn more than that goes beyond this course, but I'm going to show you what comes from 20 years of Photoshop experience, basically two decades of Photoshop experience, 90 photo P is not Photoshop, but they really built this software to work like Photoshop. It has lots of the same tools that uses the same keyboard shortcuts. I mean, they really mimicked a lot of this stuff. Which is why I think it really is a great free option for people that just want to have something to extend the power of Canva. So this is the layout. In the lessons ahead, we're going to start walking through some tasks where I show you basically, what are the things that you can do within here that are really important when it comes to working with images that you just can't do within Canva. And it's not really a knock on Canva. No software can do everything. So Canva is built with all those templates, great starting points. You can publish a social media. There's a lot of great stuff right within there that you're not going find with inside of Photoshop necessarily. But each software sort of fills its own niche. It has its own set of tools, and it's great for a certain tasks. So as a user, you really need to figure out what are the options that you need to learn to accomplish what you want to accomplish, and then what's the best workflow? What are the different tools you want to use to accomplish that? So let's jump right into the next lesson and we will learn how to use photocopy to really take your skills above and beyond what you can do with candle or maybe there's something you're doing within Canva That's just not the smartest workflow that you're going to build to do a heck of a lot faster now, okay, Let's go ahead and launch a project here and photocopy. So I'll go ahead and choose this new project option. Now a lot of times you might be opening sort of a JPEG or a PNG or some other image that you bring it over from Canva or somewhere else using this option. But for now we're just going to use the new project option. And when you do that, you get this window here and you can choose from a starting template here. But this is something where I think Canvas is better. You're a Canvas user if you're watching this class, Canva is better with templates. So I don't think you're really going to get into using these templates. They have different options here we can come under and choose Print Options, which gives you some standard print sizes. Some other options for mobile, if you're creating something for your phone. There are other options down here. You can experiment with social options here. But for us here, this doesn't matter so much because I don't think you're really going to be launching a lot of programs with from here. So usually you probably won't be using this new project window, but if you need to, just some basic options around here, you can learn to get around. Here's a width and height. I can switch those. So now I have 1920 pixels by 1080. So I'm just gonna go ahead and choose one of these options here. I'll choose this option here. And I'm going to launch this template. Again, I don't think you're going to be using templates much within here. You're probably do your own templates within Canva. But this is just to sort of go over the basics of the interface here and some basic options before we move on to some, to some projects. So. When I launch here, remember you have these expandable windows. So if you expand this one here, if it doesn't, if it's not expanded already, go ahead and expand it here. And then the Layers panel here is one of the most important windows you're going to want to have open a lot of the times. And basically, this is showing you your different layers you have within your project. Now, visibly on screen you can see your layers. And with Canva you can see your layers. But Campbell does not have sort of a visual display of your layers here, which is one of the tricky things about working with Canvas. It's very nice. But if you start to get a project with lots of layers, you sorta have to click around and go find those layers. Right here. If I click on the different options, I can immediately go around and find these options right here. And then up here on the left I have a Move tool. So if I have this text selected and then I just want to move it around, you can go ahead and move it around. If I want to click on the other one, I can move it around. Some of the words. I'm, I'm not clicking directly on the screen itself. Although if you do, if you have this auto select Selected, then when you click, it's going to automatically select those layers. You'll see the bounding box behind those layers. If you have this auto select checked on, which can be helpful, but sometimes this can cause problems too, just so just know what this auto select does here. When you have this move tool selected, you can click on your different layers. You can also just come over here and click here within the menu bar. And you're actually seeing things and you can move around. Now, if you take a layer here in you lower down in the stacking order. So if I take this before you go texts and I drop it below my background, then suddenly I can't see it. It's still there in the project. And now if I were to click off this, let's just say that my background, I don't even know that that's there. And that's sort of a problem which you run into sometimes in Canada where you can lose a layer behind something else and you're not going to see it and you have no visual indicator that it's there. Well, here I can see that I do have this text layer. All I have to do is drag it back up. So that's something that's going to be easier here within photocopy. So just other layer basics. Let's just go over some other layer basics real quick with any layer selected here, it has an opacity. So you have this slider here where you can lower and raise the opacity. Now fill is a little different than opacity, but I'm not going to get into all the specific differences. It's going to work the same way, your slits showing in your hiding that layer. So we're not going to get into totally how it's different. I'll just say this though. This for example, let me go down to this, wake me up text here. If I were to come down here, and I'm going to give this a layer style. So if I come down here, you have these different layer styles. And if I were to give this, let's just give this a stroke. And I'm not going to get into in this course all the options within photo P because it would be a course onto itself. But I'll just come in here and I'll give this a sort of a black stroke. And I'll go ahead and close my color picker and we'll make this just something ridiculous and big. I'll just give this okay. Different color. Okay. So I just want to show you how Phil is a little different. So with this, wake me up text here, if I were to come now and I were to take this opacity slider and is drop it all the way down, everything disappears. However, if I take the fill down, what I, what it does now then is that it hides the initial layer, but it does not hide the layer style. So just know that fill does work slightly different than the opacity. Okay, so you also have the ability down here to lock the transparency. That means I cannot come over in, overwrite those pixels. It's sort of like that lock icon within Canvas, except here I can still move things around. I'm just locking the transparency. You have other options here. I'm not going to get into everything. Here's that layer lock so that I can't really interact with this layer at all. You can turn that off right here, you just locking the transparency, okay, so you have these different options. You're going to have to slowly learn some of these things. But for most things, we can learn a few basic menu items here. And you're going to be a common here and do some things that are just going to really let you take your Canva ability to the next layer, to the next level just by filling in some of those gaps that give you a lot more option, options when working with images. So the basic things I want you to know and take away from this are just the stacking order, right? You can stack and you can move things around. You can come in here and you can adjust the opacity. And then also in future lessons we're going to get into layer masking is really important. We're going to get into some blending modes that can be really important. And I'm just gonna show you how to make some selections to select particular parts of layers or images that are going to be really important. So when you get those things in the layers, we're gonna get into those things in the lessons ahead. But this is just the basics of sort of getting around here within photocopy and starting to learn these tools that are gonna let you take your design gain to the next level. 92. 12 - Photopea - Intro to Selections & Masking (NEW): In this lesson, I want to go over the basics of Selections and Masking within photo P here because Selections and Masking, that is something that Canva really isn't great at. It doesn't give you great options. You have to use those grades if you want to sort of hide part of the background or contain your image within a particular part of the screen. But Selections and Masking is inside a photo P, which works a lot like Photoshop, is just going to be much easier and you're going to have much more flexibility in many more options, which just really gives you that many more creative, you know, options for you as you make your designs. So here I am in a empty, blank document. It just has this white background layer, which if I turn off and you see that checkerboard, that just tells me nothing's there. If you see that checkerboard, that just means nothing's there. It's just showing that pattern to show you. That's just an empty part of the screen. So I'll turn my background back on. And then I'm going to come down here and this little icon at the bottom you can use to create new layers. I'm just gonna go Edit and I'm gonna go fill. And we'll fill that with just gray filled with gray. You have these options here. I'm just going to choose gray. You could choose Custom and choose your own color, but I'm going to go gray and click. Okay. And now I have this gray layer. So I could come up here and choose a selection tool. So you have these basic selection tools here we have rectangles, ellipses below that you have some lasso is where you can make some different shapes. And then these are those with a little few differences. This is going to be rectangle. And this one's going to sort of try to snap to the edges of things. I'm not going to get into all the tools here because some of them you're just not going to use. Then. Now here you have these magic wands, which lets you make selections a different way. I'll get into some of this, the ones I think are most important, but I'm not going to cover all of it. But for now I'm just going to make a basic selection, a rectangle selection on screen here, and show you that if I hit the Delete key on my keyboard, I can just knock out that selected area. Now anytime you make a selection up here. So you can make a selection on screen, you're going to see these marching ants that just shows you that's the active area of the screen that you're now working with. So if I were to come in here now and just let me just grab this brush tool and switch to black by tried to paint with black out here. I can't. But if I go over this, then suddenly I can paint within that area. So you're just working with that area of the screen. So selections let you control what area of the screen you're actually working with. Now, control Z, undoes your last keystroke. That's a very important shortcut. Keys, remember that control Z for undoing your last keyboard command. Okay, so again, I can knock it out by using that selection tool with hitting Delete. But you don't always want to throw away pixels and be destructive that way sometimes you do. But what if you want the options of maybe keeping some of those pixels are bringing him back in the future. That's where layer masking comes into play. I'm just gonna hit Control Z again, just to step back a few times. Let's see. How many times can you step back here? Well, I was able to step back, so I don't know what how many history steps you can come back. You can see your history here in this little menu here. And you can step back using that control Z. There is a limit to how many times you can step back, but you can go backwards through your commands. Okay, so same thing. I'm just going to do a selection on screen, but this time instead of just hitting Delete to knock that out, I'm going to come down and create a layer mask. And this is the Layer Mask icon down here. And basically what it does is now I had my selection. I hit the Layer Mask tool. And so the area that I had selected, it kept everything else it hid from me. Now, you see to the right of your layer here. Here's our layer. We now have this layer mass symbol. This layer mask symbol is sort of a visual representation of your layer mask. So you can see there's a little white square there inside this black rectangle or a shortage, excuse me, a white rectangle. I guess it is a square within this larger black area. Now if you want to just see the layer mass which you can do is hold down alter option on keyboard and click on this. Now it's going to show you the layer mask. Here's what you need to know about a Layer Mask. Everything black is going to be hidden on your layer. So this is a gray layer. So if I come back by all clicking on this layer, everything that's black, you'll notice it's white on the screen because we're seeing the white background. All the gray is being hidden. The little white area is what's being preserved and that's the gray rectangle, right? So if I click over, we can see white is what you see. Black is hidden. But here's where it gets really interesting if you come in here. And so I'm going to find my gradient tool here. So let me see right here. Here's my gradient tool. If I look up here, it's doing. A background to foreground or foreground to background linear gradient. So it's going to go black to white. If I click and drag out this gradient now, black to white, then suddenly I have this black to white gradient with all these gray in between. So what am I going to see now if I Alt click back to show my layer again, it's showing where there's white, it's hiding where there's black and all those areas of gray in between or semi-transparent. The closer it is to white, the more shows through, the closer it is to black, the more it becomes hidden. So that's what I want you to take away from layer masking. You can come in here, so let me just click on this. I'm on this now, but I don't have to do that All click on doing that alt click trick. Just to show you you can actually see your Layer Mask. But if I Alt click back here, and then I just come over here, now you see the way I can move this rectangle back and forth. So I can move over my layer mask without actually seeing the visual representation. But now watch what happens if I come in here. I'll switch my foreground background by clicking right there. So now I have white. I'm going to grab a brush. So I'm going to be painting with white. I'm going to use my bracket keys to make my brush larger or smaller. So you can use your bracket keys on your keyboard to change the size of your brush. You could also come up here under the brush option and change the size this way, right? And I'm going to come in here and now I'm painting with white. Remember white shows. And as I do that, I can just paint back my layer. The other important thing here to know about your Layer Mask here, if you come into a brush size, let's just lower the hardness basically. Does your brush have a hard edge or does it slowly fade from visible to non-visible, sort of a soft edge. If you paint with a soft edge, look at how different that is. Because now some of these areas are getting that semi-transparent effect. And what I'm doing here is when I do this, I'm just painting directly on my mask, right? Directly on my mask. So that is sort of the power of layer masking and selections inside of a program like Futopia or Photoshop. It's going to let you just really, really make complex selections. And we'll go over some of the other tools in terms of making Selections and Masking. Masking as we get in here into these projects. But the ability to make selections, the ability to see your layers and work with your layers and have Layer Mask. It's really going to let you up your game and take your design and sort of photo compositing game to the next level. So let's jump into sort of some real-world projects and try some different special effects. And hopefully as we do that, we're going to start to go over some of these repeated task in terms of how do you make selections, how do you do Layer Mask? And some other things we'll get into like blending modes and some other really cool things that are just really going to help you a lot in sort of open up a whole new world of possibility. 93. 12 - Photopea - Basic Selection Tools (NEW): Being able to make accurate selections can be very important. So in this lesson, we're just gonna go over some of the basic selection tools, but I'm gonna give you a few helpful keyboard shortcuts and additional tricks that are just going to really make your life easier when making basic selections. So we're going to start up here. We're just not look at these basic rectangle, an ellipse selection tools to start with. And so if you do a rectangle tool, you're just dragging out a rectangle and you start from the upper left, or actually wherever you start from the direction you drag out, it's going to drag out a selection from your cursor. So if I were to start up here, I could drag out from this top. And it's going to create a selection. Once you release your mouse button, it's going to finalize that selection. Now I can hit control D to unselect this. That would be Command D on a Mac, but I could do the same thing from the bottom. I just click on the bottom and I drag out. Now, I'm not getting my shape perfectly every time. So let me give you a few additional tricks. I'll hit control D to delete. If you're dragging out and you notice she didn't start it quite where you want it to with your mouse buttons still held down. You can also hold down the space bar, and then you can actually drag that selection around and reposition it. When you have it positioned where you want, you can release the space bar but keep your mouse button down. And all you've done is changed that anchor point, but you can still go ahead and add two and modify that selection. So once you have it the way you want, you can release and then it finalizes the selection. Now this is a rectangle here. So I was dragging that out, sort of changing the width and the height as I needed to. I'll hit Control D, something like this, that's a square. You can actually hold down Shift as you drag it out and it will constrain to one-to-one proportions. So then it makes it a little easier if you're selecting something that you know is a square. Now you can also do the same thing with a circle. So I'm gonna hit Control D. I'll switch over to my ellipse tool. And if I drag out on this ellipse, of course I would not hold down shift, but I'm probably going to need to use the space bar as I go just to make sure I can position that exactly as I want to. Then hit release again control D because it will do this again. Now with the circle. I, if I held down shift, I can constrain it to a circle. And then I can use the space bar to reposition. And then I'll hit Control D. But sometimes with a circle, it's easier to start your selection and build outward. The problem is I can't really do that unless I use another keyboard modifier. So in this case you're going to use the alter option key. And then you also do is gonna use the Shift key. So again alter option. And I'm dragging out from the center. And then if I add the Shift, I'm still holding down Alt or Option, but now I'm also holding down the Shift key and then suddenly I can reposition that as needed. Now if I try to do the Space bar, I've noticed that in here it goes up to do some sort of shortcut up here. So sometimes you have those keyboard combinations that does work in Photoshop, but here it sort of goes to the File menu. So that one is not working for me, but I can still drag it out and do shift. And then if I get it precisely where I need to and I just release, I can still, as long as I have this selection tool still selected, I can use the keyboard shortcuts and nudge that selection. Afterwards I'm just using my keyboard arrows to nudge that selection. I could also use Shift on my keyboard shortcuts to move that 10 pixels at a time instead of one pixel at a time. So you're probably familiar with those keyboard shortcuts from Canada. They work and a lot of different programs. Now, let me hit Control D just to delete that selection. If you have more complex shapes like this, you can add to an existing selection on screen. So you have this menu up here, and by default, it's usually set to the three place, which means if I drag out a selection and then I drag out another selection, it's just going to not do anything. It just keeps the one selection on screen. Well, actually, you know what That's because it did not switch up here. Let me hit Control D. Here is this, it's switching back. I don't know why it's jumping back here to the default. It's hex like I have alter option held down, so I'm not sure what's going on here, some sort of bug here. But let me just show you using keyboard shortcuts. So usually, there we go. So now it's working, now it's back in it's honest to replace. I don't know why I got stuck for a second over here on subtract. But so usually when you drag a selection and then you do another selection, it's just going to create a new selection. However, you have these options up here where you can unite. And so if you now if you're using unite, let me just click over to you nine, then it's adding to the selection. So every time you do that, you're adding to the selection. If you go over here to subtract, then suddenly you're taking away from selection and the final option is intersect. So it's going to find the intersection of those two selections and make that your new selection. These can all be helpful. So if I wanted to select this complicated shape down here, I could use all these keyboard shortcuts plus this menu we know up now. And so I'll just start with my rectangle marquee. And so I can see that I have a rectangle here. So I'll just start by positioning over that. And then I'm going to make sure now that I'm on Unite so I can add to that. I have this larger rectangle here, so I'll drag out this shape. I'll do this quickly so I might not get it perfect, but again, I'm just using that unite option to make sure I add to the existing selection. So let me grab this one down here. And let me grab this one here. And again, sometimes I can still use that space bar and there's other keyboard shortcuts if I need to. So let's get this one. And then I have to switch over to my ellipse now, so I'll switch to ellipse selection. I do want to add in this ellipse down here at the bottom. So I'm just going to use the space bar. I have unite selected. If I go a little beyond in this upper corner, then I can come back and I can get rid of that. So let's just do this and something like that. Now, whoops, I had it on a different setting. So if you do something like this and you're like, oh, well lost all my work. Just hit control Z can go back. So I brought back that selection, but it was selected over here. I want it to be on this Unite option. So I clicked over there up top again, dragging out spacebar, position it as I need to, then release. So I sort of have it down here. I missed a little bit. I'm not going to worry about it, but I would want to get rid of that corner. So I would just come back to actual comeback to that in a second. First, I'm going to go to subtract and I'm going to try to get this part up here. So again, using that space bar trick, just because I want to position it precisely there. Boom. Again, I'm not getting this absolutely perfect, but you get the idea. And again, if I wanted to switch back to that rectangle, make sure that is set on, subtract and just knock out that little corner that I added in there. I could do that easily. So you get the idea of how you can do complex selections. Now of course, there are other tools in here that make it. So you might not use these basic selection tools as often, but I think it's still helpful to know these modifier keys. But just to give you an example of these other selection tools, and while you might not have to do all that work, I just did you have this magic wand tool. And so this here, if you click on a particular color pixel based on the layer that you're on. So let me see, for some reason, it's not selecting 0 because I had it selected already. So deselect. And now if I just click on a color, so if I click on a gray, it's selecting the particular gray. So what it's doing is it's looking at the color I selected, and it's trying to find all other instances of that color. Now let me put a gradient in here real quick. So I'm just gonna do a group black to gray gradient real quick across the screen. But actually it did it within my selection there, which is fine. So actually all able, I will come down here. Let me just make a selection here. And I'm going to use that gradient tool and I'm going to put a gradient just across this year. Because when you're using these magic wand tool, you have to know that it has this tolerance setting here. So if this is set to 0 and I click on a color, it is just actually, let's make it one. I may have to be at least one. So if I say I have it set to a really low number, then it's looking just for that thin bands. So it's looking exactly for that color. But if suddenly I come in here and I start to raise the tolerance, there are 255 levels of gray on the color ramp in software like this. So if I set this to 255 and then I clicked on this, I don't think I hit Enter there. Is it can de-select. And so now when I click, it's selecting the whole screen because it's finding everything. But I could narrow this down. So if I said it's something to like 45, and then I click on here. Make sure it, make sure I hit the Select first Control D. Now you can see it's selecting even more. Because what you're doing with that tolerance is you're basically saying, how wide of a range of color do you want it to look for? Now the other thing is, if you remember when we had it set, clicking on this gray, It's just finding the gray here. And then since it's hitting the white, even though I have a high tolerance because that white is far away on the color ramp from that gray. It's not selecting any of that. However, I'm gonna hit control D to de-select. The last thing you have to know in here is this contiguous? Contiguous means? Does it have to be exactly touching that next color, or is it going to go out in the document and find colors that aren't even touching. So if I uncheck contiguous, then suddenly now when I click on a gray, it's selecting all of the different grays. If I just wanted to stay within that one contiguous area, then I'm gonna have to have that checked. And then when I click on a gray, It's just finding that gray area. So you have these sorts of artificial intelligence tools within Photoshop, within your selections that can be very helpful. So another one I'll just mention here is this object selection tool. If you grab this, you can just then draw a rectangle around something and it's going to attempt to select everything within that area. So the cross should be here. Let's, let's try that again. So Object Selection and you're dragging around the box and the idea is that, that crosshair in the center is That's going to be on your subject roughly and you're drawing a rectangle around the entire area. And then when you release it, it's just going to attempt to find that that shape. So because when I did this one, the cross was on that center part. It found that, however, if I position this a little differently, so that cross hair was all that gray. It's gonna do a little bit of better attempts to find the gray part of that. So again, this is just another case of it using the artificial intelligence in the program to attempt to make an automatic selection. Of course, you can still all do your other tools. So you can use this tool. And then you can come back up here and say I'm going to use this tool to subtract from it. And so all the other selection tricks that you know, they still work. So this is my subtract that was adding to it. So everything works. You can use all these tools in combination with themselves. I'm not going to mention all the different tools in here because some of them you'll use more than others. But you can feel free to experiment around and check out the different selection tools that exist within here. These top three menus are really where you're going to find most of them. But in the next lesson, I'm also going to talk about the Pen tool because the pen tool is another method of selection that's can be very helpful. And then really quickly I'm going to talk about selecting by color range. So in our next lesson pen tool, then we'll talk about selecting by color range. And then you really are going to have just a great arsenal of selection tools that can really help you make complex selections. 94. 12 - Photopea - the Pen Tool (NEW): Okay, in this video, I'm going to teach you about another important selection tool, and that is the Pen tool. The Pen tool is just going to help you select those complex shapes that you can't really select with those simple selection tools. Now the one thing I mentioned is let me just zoom in here we have this picture of a car on screen that was going to grab my zoom tool and just zoom in a little bit. Now again, it's set to minus up here so I can switch it to plus. And for some reason it did not switch. If for some reason you haven't had trouble, you also have those Alt Shift keys here, so I can use those keyboard shortcuts again and zoom in. I'm not sure why it wasn't switching back. I think there we go. Sometimes it gets a little buggy. Okay. So I switched back here and then I'll just come back. And so I could try things like my object selection tool. And we learned about that in the last lesson. So if I get it to switch to the opposite object selection tool, I can come in here and I can drag all the way around this car. And then you can see it does a pretty good job, but it also brings in the shadow. And I could try doing something like keeping the Quick Selection Tool using that alt option trick for subtracting from a selection and try to drag around sort of that shadow area and see if it would remove it out and it couldn't quite do it. So sometimes these artificial intelligence tools aren't going to be perfect. And you may just want to come in here and make the selection yourself. But how do you select a complex shape like this? Well, that's where we're going to turn to this pen tool down here. So I'll select it down here in the menu. And this takes a little practice. First of all, we have this selected. Any tool that you have selected, you're going to see an Options bar up here that's specific to the tool you have selected. So you'll notice we have these options when I had a regular selection become down here, the options are going to change. So the first option here is just to know that you can use the pen tool to create actual like shapes on screen. So those would be vector shapes. But a lot of times you're just going to want to set it to a path when you're making a selection. And then a path you can make a shape, you can make a selection. We just want this to make a selection. Anti-alias just means it's going to smooth out that edge. So I'm not gonna go over all the options here. But you can learn about these as participants are experimenting around. But I just want to show you how you use the pen tool. So first of all, with the pen tool, you're just going to start clicking. So if I click here, you're going to see, it's kinda hard to see, but it put down that blue dot. And then if I do another click, every time I click it's laying down a new DOD. And so you go all the way around, you make whatever sort of shape you want. And then when you click on that final dot again, you can complete your path. And then once you have a path, you can hit use Control Enter or Command Enter on your keyboard. And it will convert your path into a selection. So that's how you make selections. Of course, all I was doing there was drawing straight lines, so that wasn't that helpful. But with the pen tool, once you click, once, I'm going to do it down here so we can see a little bit better. Maybe. First of all, if you have a path and you want to get rid of it, just come over here and get this work path. I'm going to throw that in the trash. So now I'm going to make a brand new selection. So I'm just coming back on my layers and now I have my pen tool. So I'm just going to start clicking. And let's say, let's say I click here, and then I click. When I make the next point, I want you to hold down your mouse button and then start to drag. And as you do you see these control handles come out and you can almost think about those as magnets. So the more I drag out to a direction, the longer sort of I make that control handle and that little magnet, we're calling it a magnet. But that anchor point there, that control handle is basically pulling the line and curving the line and allowing you to change the shape. Now, at any point in time, if I want to do that, I can do that. If I were to click once, then suddenly I would get a flat point again. Now I'm going to hit Control Z just to step back through this and start again. A couple more tips I'm gonna give you. Let's say I'm click 1 and then for the next point I drag it out because I want to be a smooth point. But then I wanted to change directly. I like the curve here, but let's say I wanted this side of the lines just become a straight line. I can hold down alter option and I can click on that point. And then suddenly I've changed and got rid of the control handle this side. So now suddenly I do have that flat line coming out of there. Again, if I want a curve point, I'm just going to hold down as I do it and then curve it in any direction I want. All right, so I'm just going to use Control Z and just show you, going back to the beginning here how you can use this to sort of select around a complex shape like this. So I'm gonna do this really quickly. So it's not going to be perfect. But you can take the time that you need in the more you practice with the pen tool, the better you will get. So I'm just going to start down here. I'm just gonna drag out like this. And so you sort of get a feel for when you just wanna do a single clip, click, excuse me, a single click because the direction is going to abruptly change. And then when you have a smooth part of the path, you're holding down and you're dragging out those little anchor points and you start just find the bend of the curve. And the more you use this, you get a feel for where you need to put down on your next point. Now you can see right now I'm using that space bar trick again. So I have not released my mouse button. I still have my mouse buttons still held down, but I'm also holding down the space bar. So that lets me sort of position on the fly to really get this point where I want it to be. So again, clicking and holding, I'm adding points using that space bar as I need to. So you can start to see as, as you learn keyboard shortcuts in here, they really sorta do build on each other and you can use them across different tools. So I'm just clicking and putting down these points using the space bar as I need to moving things around. And then remember, you can always come back and modify selection later using those tricks we learned in the previous lessons. So again, if this point here, let's say I wanted to get rid of this control handle so I could use that little Alt Option trick. Add another point real close in here. And again, I'm not trying to make this perfect. I'm just going really quickly. But take your time. And you're just laying out the points here. Again, when you single click and don't hold down and pull out, then you're just getting that abrupt change of direction. But as you hold down, you get those sort of magnet type control handles. And again right here I want this, whoops, let me hit Control Z or Control Z to set back when you get points like this and you know, you do want to change direction abruptly. And you don't want this anchor magnet type point that come into play, just use that trick. Drag it out. And then the more you do this, the better you're going to get. And you'll find that you can use it to make really accurate selections. So does certainly take a bit of practice. But if you do a lot of design work where you're doing photo compositing and you really want to be accurate. Sometimes the other tools let you down, but the Pen tool will become your friend if you just practice with it and get really good at it. So again, I'm not going for perfection here. And their thing is remembered software like this is so easy to come back after the fact and make adjustments and add to something. So if you don't get it exactly right, that's okay. But the more you practice, the better you will become. And I'll just finish by clicking there and then remember Control Enter. So I have made a fairly accurate selection around that car in a quick amount of time. And so now if I did something like add a mass to this, suddenly have a car element that I can use all by itself. So that is the pen tool. If you practice with this tool, you're going to get better and better. Remember those tricks you have the Alt Option keyboard shortcut, really helpful for changing what type of points you have. If you click and hold out, you're dragging out those sort of control handles The change the curve of the line. And then remember spacebar let you move the points on the fly as you're putting them down, as long as you're still holding down the mouse button. These are all super, super helpful and this is a tool that can really help you create complex selections. Okay, one more selection section in this course. Next, I just want to show you how you can also select by things like color. 95. 12 - Photopea - Making Selections by Color (NEW): Okay, The last little less than I wanted to do on selections, and here is just making selections by color. Now I can't cover everything in Futopia here within these lessons, but I wanted to cover enough just to really start to make you realize how powerful this set of tools is and how it really can let you just do things that you can't do within Canva, this is sort of a bridge to even more and more creativity. So take it, experiment with it, learn some other stuff within here. And if you watch any Photoshop tutorials, even if you're not using Photoshop or paying for showed up Photoshop if you're using Futopia here, a lot of those Photoshop tutorials are going to translate because photoshop, photophobia attempts to emulate Photoshop really in the design, the layout. Now there may be some features like Photoshop has a video timeline where you can work with frames and keyframes. There's some other things within sight of Photoshop which you don't have in here, but a lot of Photoshop videos, tutorials that you're gonna look up that's going to help you learn even more about Futopia if that's the tool you are using. And of course, if you ever want to make the jump to Photoshop, that's great too. But let's just talk about selecting by color range. So selection here, I can come up and I can choose Select Color Range. And then by default you can choose between shadows, highlights, midtones, or you can do sampled colors. I'm going to start by choosing sampled colors. So once I choose that on-screen, this is basically, if you remember, mask were white is what's selected. Black is not selected. So right now everything except these Center color ramps are selected. But if I click on one of these gradients because it's sampled colors. So if I just click on this orange, for example, then you can see how this shifts and it chooses this orange range here, in the orange range here. And if I click on blue, you can see how that shifts. Now when you make a selection, you just click on screen to change the sample area. But you have this fuzziness slider. We're basically how tolerant, how much of a range you want. And so this fuzziness sort of expands the range and it also sort of fades it out more at the edge to think of that soft edge. So if I bring this fuzziness way down, we have a pretty hard edge and a limited range. But as I come in here and I expand the range, then suddenly I'm bringing in more and more colors at the edge, but it's fading out at that age, it has a soft edge. Now remember when we made selections and we could shift and add to our selection or Alt and subtract. Well, you have the same thing down here. Now it's in replace mode, but let's say I wanted to select the blue, but I also want to bring in some of this yellow. I could choose this plus icon. I could come over to yellow and suddenly I'm adding more into the range. Maybe I want to add in some of this at the end here so I can add into the range. And then as I do it, I can still bring down the fuzziness. Just know that when you're bringing down this fuzziness here, it's applying that fuzziness to all those different color ranges you've selected. But again, you can use this plus and minus and you can use sampled colors like that. So just know that you have this select by color option, which can be another helpful way of making selections in here. I'm going to close this for a second. Let's just look at another example real quick. So here I just have a photograph. How would you use something like this on a photograph? Well, again, you can do Select Color Range. And it can be very helpful to not only do colors. So I could come down and say, I want to select this red shirt. So if I click on the replace mode here and I click down on her shirt. And then I could play with this fuzziness slider. And this might be a good way to try to get in there and select her shirt. Now because of the color tones and her shirt in the wall, in the background, or in the skin tones, I should say it might be tough to make a really good selection, but just experiment around with this leg by color range. I could also try to select the background. And again, there are other multiple tools for this, but you can experiment around and you can see that I can get a decent selection around here. But again, experiment around because for different techniques, this licked by color range might work pretty well for you. Now. You also might sometimes think do things like shadows. So if you do shadows, now it's selecting the darkest areas in your photo. Again. So the dark of her hair, you can see down here where there's some shadow areas in our shirt. And the more you play with this fuzziness, the more it's going to select. But you can also, with this shadows highlight, let me drag it down. You can come down here and you can play with the Min and max. And so if I really bring this down, I can reduce the range even farther. And so let me try to click Course. You can also type a number in here. So let me try typing in something like 10. Hit Enter. And so now I have this really subtle selection. Maybe I'll bring the fuzziness up a little bit now and go ahead and click. Okay. So now I have this area that I've selected. And so maybe I'll do something like I could come in and add a curves layer. Let me just show you that if I hit Mask, you can see what is actually selected. I'm going to undo that mass just with Control Z. But so anytime you have something selected and then you do something like click the mask, it's automatically going to apply that selection when creating the mass. The same if I come in here and with that selection, I go and do something like a curves layer. I can hit Control D Now to get rid of my selection because if I look at this curves layer by Alt Option, clicking on it, I can see that it's selected basically the darkest areas based on that select by color range. So what I could do now is that I could come in with this curves histogram here. I could just create something at the center point here, start to drag down. And it's subtle onscreen. But I did dark in that area and I'll see you when I check it on and off, you can see the way I darken those shadows even farther. So again, sometimes you'll want to be subtle with your adjustments, but if you want to make selections that are a little bit more complex, that are going to blend a little better things. You're not going to build a do in Canvas. You can do that inside a photophobia. 96. 12 - Photopea - Gradients (NEW): In this lesson, I'm going to talk about creating gradients and photophobia because if you worked in Canvas II know that gradients can just be frustrating. Sometimes you want a gradient behind your design, but looking for a gradient that feeds the transparency or one that has the sorta subtle color adjustments that you want. You just spent a lot of time searching. It doesn't work that well. And there are some hacks and tricks for creating gradients by doing things like blurring photos in Canva, you can do stuff like that, but it's just going to be way easier in Futopia. So let's look at creating Grody gradients here in Futopia. So first of all, you're going to find the gradient tool down here. And if I see that right here, it also is the G keyboard shortcut. I use the paint bucket tool. I'm not gonna talk about that. I'm just gonna talk about this gradient tool once you select the gradient tool. So right now I have an image which I just cut out info. I actually cut this out in Canvas. So I used the background remover and Canva, but I have this image and I want to put a gradient behind it. So let me just start by first just creating a new blank layer. And I will come in here. And actually it's going to go ahead and fill this with white. So I'll do a Control Backspace to fill with my background color and that's filled with white. Now I'm gonna put a layer in-between for my gradient. So and I have another layer in between these. And then I have this gradient tool selected down here. So as you have a tool selected up here in the Options bar changes up here. So here are my options for my gradient, folks at CU. So right now by default it comes up as linear. So think of a line, this is just going to be a gradient that follows a straight line. So we have linear, you also have radial angle reflected in diamond, and we'll go through all of these. But you can experiment with these, but we're going to start by looking just at linear and radial gradients. So linear gradient, this is where yes, like the kind of gradient, we're not going to worry about blend mode or these other things right now. We're just going to look at linear and we're going to look over here where we actually see our gradient. And we look at this drop-down. You can see by default, you have these choices here and you can come in here. And if I go to thumbnail list few, Let's see. So you can change the way the display is. So by default you have things like foreground and background. A foreground to transparent black to white. Then you have some funky ones down here. But so you can come in here and you can change what type of gradient you're putting down and what the colors are. So if I just come in here and do foreground and background, right now it's black to white. So I could drag out a black to white gradient. Now that wouldn't be too exciting. So let's change this color here to something. Once you select that I can choose down here. So something that's more in line with their clothing. But let me lighten it up a little bit. Go ahead and click Okay, so now you can see it goes from my foreground color to white. So if I start dragging on screen now it's going to put down that gradient. So when you start dragging, that is the very beginning of your ramp. So if I start dragging here on the screen, then everything to the left of that point, If I'm dragging left to right, is going to be that foreground color. So I can start dragging here. And then when I stop, this is my intolerant tire color ramp, that area of my line on screen. That means everything to the right is just going to stay white. So you see how I did that there? If I wanted to blue color to extend farther. Let's say I wanted to be totally blew right up to her hair. Then I would just start dragging here. And I want it to be a slow fade and I want to start being totally white rate here. Of course I can come in here and I could change the angle, so I could do it this way. Maybe I wanted to just be a slow fade from the top corner all the way to the bottom. So then the entire ramp of the color is across the whole thing. So just experiment around. You want to reverse the direction I could come to this side and drag out on this side. So that's the linear gradient, radial gradient. You can probably figure that out. So I'm just gonna go into radial. When you do the radial, again, foreground and background, I'm going to start and basically you're defining the center point and then you're dragging outwards. So now you see your foreground color is at the center of that. And then as I drag it out, you get that slow fade, right? So this is a radial gradient. Maybe I want it positioned right behind her head. So I could come up here and experiment around until I get something that feels about right. And then of course, I could still come in here and reposition this if I go to my move tool, now suddenly I can reposition that exactly where I want it. So I'm really highlighting it behind her head. So these are gradients. Now, you can get way more complicated than this, because if I go on a gradient, of course you have some funky options down here. So you can find different gradients and you can put something really funky on your design courses is a radial that might look better as a linear gradient. So let's do something like that. So you can create these cool effects here, but you can also just come in and double-click on a gradient and get into the gradient editor. Now, as you're in the gradient editor here, I can come down and I can adjust my color points. So here's blue. I can double-click on that blue. I could say I actually wanted to start as white. Okay. This yellow, I don't want that to be yellow. I'll double-click on that. I'm going to come in here, go up and now my color ramp, choose something specific over here on the change that the green, blue, I can leave blue. What if you want to get rid of a point altogether? Well, maybe this blue, I want actually to start way closer to the green. I wanted to be abrupt change. I can do that. You can actually come in here and just add new points by just clicking somewhere along the line. And it's putting down new points. If you want to come in here and change the color, again, double-click, choose something, double-click, choose a color. So again, you can create really funky things in here, and you can come in here and you can fool around with all these different settings. You can make your own specific gradients. Okay? So that's pretty funky. I'm not going to get into it too much farther because I want you to just experimental route around yourself. But just know that you have all these different gradient tools. And they can be very helpful. And it's way easier than doing it in Canvas, right? Because Canada is a little tricky with gradients and you have the search around. You can't really find what you want. So let's just go back to something more simple here because I can't look at this on screen without going a little crazy. So I'm just going to go back to a simple radial gradient. And I'm going to choose something like that foreground the background. And I will just drag it out like that. And that is a little bit more pleasing. Now you can still do all the same stuff you can do. So if I put this gradient on a layer, I could come in here and say, but actually I want to take this and I want to drag out my circle here and position it like that. And that's where I want this gradient to be. So I could still do something like add a mask and then of course, I don't want that hard edge. So I would come up here and with a mass selected, go to your Properties, go to that mask, start to feather out the edge and control it that way. So I showed these extra things sometimes just because, you know, you're using one tool, but just know everything works in concert. You can stack all these things together. Once you get comfortable in a program like this, you really just have all these creative tools and you understand how to use them. So it just opens up more options. So that's gradients inside a Futopia. I'll see you in the next lesson. 97. 12 - Photopea - Blending (NEW): Let's talk a little bit about blending and blend modes. Now we've seen how you can create complex selections and mass 2, that can be a great way to blend images together. But there are also just wastes. Use automatic blending modes or blending based on the brightness values of pixels within a layer. That are things that are going to extend your creativity, things that are not going to be things you can do within Canva. So actually let me just jump open, jump back into Canvas and open a Canva window for a second. I just want to give you an idea and show you how the options are much better sometimes when you step out a candidate for certain things. All right, so here I am back over in Canvas. Sometimes a comparison like this. I think it's going to drive home the point. So let me grab these two images which I just had open in Futopia. So I had this picture here, and then I had a texture image here. So here's what the texture image looks like. I'll just put it on screen for a second, but then I'll hide it for seconds. So I'm just going to delete it for a second. So I could do things here in Canva. The background removal or remover usually works really well. So I could do things like that. But if I wanted to sort of start to play with this photo to get creative, to add texture, to add sort of layering. I want to do a better job stepping over in Futopia just because I know those tools have many more options, just let me give you example. The only way to really add texture in here inside of Canva is sort of the heavy-handed approach of coming in here and putting a layer on top, you start to play with the transparency. So I can start to give this a little bit of a textured look, but then how do I mask it to just her? You know, it, it starts to get tricky. It starts to really have a limited number of options. Let's just jump over into Futopia again and we'll see that you just have way more options. So same two things. I have this picture of her and then I have this background image on top. Okay, so first of all, inside of Futopia, layers have blending modes. I haven't talked about blending mode yet, but blending modes basically will automatically try to blend two layers together, the layer and the layer below it, based on sort of brightness values within the different images. So by default, all the layers are settled normal. But if I come down here, we can see here we have all these different blend modes. So I'm not going to talk about exactly mathematically what each of these sets is doing. But just to know that these usually are working based on the dark, darkness of images. And so it'll choose the darker color, these, some of these will choose a lighter color. And then you have all these different ones that are just mixing based on the values, the brightness values, and other things within your image. But the best way to learn is just to play around. So if I click on Normal here and then have it highlighted, I can actually just use the arrow keys now on my keyboard to start to go through and I can start to see, okay, on this dark and mode, it's finding whatever pixels are darkest between the two layers. And so I can just go through here and just already, already looked at this. I mean, look at what we have here. Just with one little click on my keyboard and how much more dynamic this is, then something like over on Canvas where we're just trying to do this opacity effect. So this is where Futopia is just going to win. You just have more options. So instantly you can come in here and you can play with these blend modes and you can get these really dynamic effects. Now keep in mind everything else still applies. So I could come in here, I could add a rectangle or any, any sort of selection over top of this and I could decide, okay, I'm just going to mask out that area of the screen. Okay, maybe I want that mass to fade out. So I'm going to come here and I'm going to just come on my mask and sort of really feather those edges. So you have all these creed of options that you don't have within Canva. I love Canva. It's great for so many things. You're creating that simple marketing material, you're publishing a social media. There's great features in there. But just understand when you start to spend lots and lots of time on something that doesn't really work for really well and a piece of software. And then you have another piece of software, especially free software, where you can do it better and you can do it quicker, then it's time to expand your horizons and step over into the other software. So again, I'm just going to disable this mask right now, but you have all these different ones. Again, if you select something in the menu, you can then use your arrow keys and go up and down and sort of find that creative look that works for you. So this I think is really cool. So I'm going to keep that Hard Light blend mode, but then I might do something to make her stand out a little bit from the background. And this is just where you can layer different effects together. So I'm going to grab the Lasso Tool one-off, We've talked about that yet, but the last new tool, you basically just dragged out a free form selection. And I've shown you on the mask how you can feather the edge and make a softer edge. You can also, as you drag out a selection, you can set a feather right here. So I might set something like a 100 pixel feather by just typing a 100 right up into that. And then I'm going to use this Lasso tool right here. And I'm going to just drag out a shape that basically goes around her. I don't have to worry about being precise at all because of that feather. Just finish it off right there. It's gonna make that selection. And then we're going to do is with that selection active, I'll go ahead and add a curves layer. And so right now if I did that, it's going to act on everything that's selected. I actually like her. I want the background to be a little softer. So what I can do is come under Select and do inverse. You can also hit Control or Command Shift I, that's the keyboard shortcut. So now I see actually have the background selected. So now if I come under my adjustment layers here, again, I love to use this curves adjustment layer, just an easy way with this histogram to drop the sort of brightness up or down. So I'll do, I'll do a section on curves if I haven't already, you can check that out. But so I'm just going to drag the background down and make it darker, something like that. I'll go ahead and collapse that. I'll hit Control D, just so I can see on screen actually I want to collapse this one Control D so I can see on screen, then it's just making it pop out more. And again, if I wanted to come in here and adjust anything and let me expand my layers back out. Actually, what I want to do is get rid of this little Properties menu here. So here's menu expanded this menu I want to get rid of. Okay, there we go. And so again, I can't come in here and fool around with this feathering even more if I still want to feather it farther, again, select the layer. You'll notice this little Properties menu up here. Come up here, make sure that I'm on the mask itself. And then just come in and I can pull with this feather to make it feather even more. So. Let's take a little while to adjust, but there you go. So you can just come in here and you can play with all these different effects. But look it out very quickly. We've done something that's super, super cool, something that you just would not be able to do in Canvas. So let me just throw away this curves layer for now. I can actually just drag it right down to the Trash Can. I just want to show you one other way you can blend here in Canvas. I'm just going to set this layer back to normal. I'm actually going to switch the order and drag her on top. Now, you can also blend in Canvas or excuse me, photocopy. One other way you can blend it, photocopy, It's just by double-clicking here on a layer. You're going to bring up this layer styles Window. Now I'm not going to go over everything in this layer styles, but we're going to pay attention to this blend if slider at the bottom. So it said in as set as Blend If Gray, and you can also go into the individual color channels. That's a little bit beyond what we're going to get into now, but just blend if gray and then you have a color ramp for the current layer and the background layer, just a Brightness, the brightness value so dark all the way to the highlights, white. Same thing for the background layer. So on this current layer, if I only wanted the dark areas of her to show and not the brighter part of this image. I could start grabbing this slide reached here. And I'm going to start to make the background show through. And I'm only keeping the darker areas of her. Now, it sort of has this hard edge to it. But if you see how each of these triangles sort of has a double triangle. If you hold the Alt or Option key down and then it click right on that you can actually split the triangle. And what you're doing when you split that, the farther apart you move them, the softer of an edge, the more subtle the blend is going to be at the edge. And so you can slowly have a transition. So just like that, I can come in there and I can decide which brightness values of her I want to show through. And then everything else is going to be that background layer. And the same thing also on the background. You could, you could use this slider, so it doesn't matter which of these sliders you want to use. The words I could come down on the background and I can start to play around with these sliders and that's going to change it as well. But you can work on the current layer and you can control what shows through. So in other words, if I wanted to bring back just a little bit of our highlights, I could do something like this, I can save that. So I have basically just the background showing through except for her darker areas. I could also then just copy that copy that make another copy of that layer. I just used Control J on my keyboard to make a copy. The same thing if I come in here, this is using that same slider, if I can reset that. And now for this current layer, since I already have all the dark values, I can say, okay, for this layer, I want to bring back some of the bright values. Now, I might want to get rid of that purple background entirely. So let me just drag it way down. And then again, actually I could go all the way to this side and then use my alt option to split that C and then slowly start to bring it back by using again using that alt click and splitting that and is bringing back a little bit of the highlights, something like this. So again, I'm not going to keep doing this, but I just, I didn't click Okay, so we have lost that last change. But the point is yet another way to very click quickly, do some complex blending, which opens up a whole avenue of creativity that you don't have in that Canvas software. So Canvas, great for what it's great for. But then when you need some of these advanced techniques, you start to learn this tool. You'll start to learn when you can jump back and forth between these two programs and really just up your creativity. So that is blending and blend modes and photophobia. And I'll see you in the next lesson. 98. 12 - Photopea - Adjustment Layers (NEW): In this lesson, we're going to talk about adjustment layers very briefly again, it'll have time to cover everything about Futopia, but it really does have tons and tons of options. So I just want you to understand some of those. So you really can leverage this additional tool so you can take your designs to the next level. Okay, So adjustment layers, you're just going to find down here, this little icon right here, you can add an adjustment layer. So let's just look at some of these were really quick. So you can do color fills. And if you do a Color Fill, which is going to put a solid color layer. So we'll just go ahead and do that real quick and click Okay, and it's just added a color fill layer. Now become down and they're just more layers. You have the same thing for gradients and patterns. I'm not going to do those, but you can add those layers as well. These next layers, brightness, brightness levels, curves, exposure. I'm just going to talk about curves because really with curves, you can do everything you can do in more than you can in these other ones here. So if you choose curves, you're basically going to see a histogram here. And this little chart basically represents your image, all the different tonal values. So these values here are the shadow areas. These on the right side of the chart, or the brightest areas, the highlights. And then everything in between are all the ranges of midtones. So these spikes here are where we have lots of midtones and then we have less shadows in the images. So the spike is a little lower on this side because her dress is pretty bright, the background's pretty right. We also have a spike on the right side of the image. So what can you do with this? Well, you can come in here and click these control points at the end or add a new one. And you can change sort of the brightness values of this. So all the way to the top is going to go to pure white. So if we were to take the blacks here on the left and just click on that, I can take my black value and tell Photoshop or photo peaks. Use me that I want that to be brighter and I can move it up all the way to white force. You wouldn't make it disappear like that. But I'm just showing you that as an example. And again, I could take the brighter areas and I could click on that little control point on the left and I can make the brighter areas darker. Now a lot of the times you're going to be adding a point somewhere else on the curve. And so one of the simple things I will do sometimes is I will just come in here and you'll see me do this in some of my other lessons where I have a selection, maybe a certain part of the image and I just want to make it a little brighter. So I'll just point to put 1 on the midtones and I'll drag it up a little bit to make it a little brighter, or I'll drag it down a little bit to make it a little darker. So again, subtle and small adjustments is usually the way to go in here. If you start putting a whole bunch of dots and going here, you can get really crazy really quickly. And so there's some creativity in there you could use, but usually you don't wanna get too heavy handed. Of course, if you do something like this, you can always just reset. There are also some other options in here. Not actually sure what the sketch is doing. I think it's attempting to add its own styling by doing some weird things in here. So you can fool around with that if you want to get creative again, I don't really fall with that. I leave it in this spline mode. And again, just subtle changes are usually going to be what you want. You don't need to go too crazy. Now if you did want to add a couple of points because you wanted to, Let's say, I want to make my darks darker. I might want to leave black as pure black. So I might not want to do something like this where I'm changing the actual value of black. But so maybe I'm going to say, I want to make this point here. So sort of in that darker range. And I wanna make that a little darker the same time it starts to darken the whole image because it's pulling the whole line here. So what you can do is just click another point to put a control point on and then just bring that down really close. So you're keeping that line pretty straight. And so then you're sort of affecting this area here. Again, when you start to drag it around up or down, you might see that the line above it starts to react. So again, just make the changes you want to make in that darker range. And then again, just put another control point and drag it down and keep the line pretty straight there. And then of course with two points there, this point right on the other side of this one, then as you adjust this, you're not going to affect that line above as much now a mainly affecting the lower the lower area. So those darker tones, but again, subtle is good in here. I just want you to understand curves and how curves work because they can be really powerful. And you can come in here and go in the different color channels. I'm not going to get that detailed in this tutorial for you, but that is something you can do. So I'm gonna turn it off right now and then I'll just look at the other options really quick. All these ones in the middle are basically for fooling with colors within your image. And then there's some creative ones down here. I'm not gonna get into the bottom ones, but so the color ones, just to give example, if you pull up vibrance, vibrance and saturation sliders. Now if you drag, drag the saturation slider, you really can't oversaturated and get skin tones and things like that to look really weird. Vibrates, on the other hand, is pumping up the saturation of your sort of less saturated colors, but it's not leaving those colors that are already saturated. It's not pushing those. So in other words, there's a little bit of a restraint on this vibrance. So a lot of times vibrance is the way to go because you're not going to get that over the top. It's, it's popped, making the image pop more. But the colors, it is already saturated. It's not pushing those any farther because if you do stuff like this can happen. So that's vibrance and saturation. There are other ones under here. You cannot change it to a black and white and fool around with that hue saturation. Let me just show you hue saturation. I'm not gonna show you all these but hue saturation. If you come in under hue saturation, I'll turn that vibrance off. But you can come in here under hue saturation. And you can start to full with things like the color. And you also have this range picker here. So click and drag in image to change saturation. So if I actually click on this and then I click on a particular color tone here, it's actually selecting a color range. And you can see in this sliders the color range it has selected. So now if I come in here and I start to fall with the lightness or the, the brightness of those tones, or the saturation or some like that. I am now doing it based on this color range and not the entire image. So this is kind of a health that helpful tool. And you just have to know that you have this master channel where if you do something you're affecting the whole image. But then if you come in under an individual channel, you're just affecting that channel itself. So this would be the reds in my image. But you can also just reset at any point in time. And if you're not quite sure what color you're choosing here, use this little picker here. So in other words, if I use this picker here and I come click somewhere on that pink background, then it's gone to the red channel. It's isolated the range here. And now suddenly I can come in here and I can just start to fewer fuller around and change the color there. Now it's also getting her skin. So I've maybe I would then want to mask this out and masker out so she's not changing the way the background color is changing. But just so know you have all these options in here. And there are some pretty cool options. So fool around with these tools, get to know them. And really with these adjustment layers, just again, another layer of creativity and other great set of tools to take your designs to the next level. 99. 12 - Photopea - Layer styles (NEW): Okay, One last thing I want to talk about inside the photo P, our layer styles. I'm not going to cover this in depth, but again, I just want to give you a general idea of some of the different things you have available in here. And so in this, I've just brought in this woman here that I just found this photo inside of Canva and use the background removal remove remover. So she's removed from the background and then there is just a solid gray layer behind her. So with the layer selected that I want to add a style to, I can just go down to this layer effect Layer Style menu. It's just got to EFF icon down here. If I click on that, then I can see all these different layer style options. Now blending modes are talked about in a different video so you can check that out, but you have all these options, so I could just choose one, so I'll just choose Stroke. And once you choose one, you get this whole menu come up here and you can check on, and you can turn on different ones and you can stack these together. You can use multiple ones here. So right now if I change the fill color of this stroke to blue or something different that we're going to see. Go and click. Okay, now I have this blue stroke. I can do things like I can come in here and I can adjust that size of that stroke, make it bigger, make it smaller. I can change the blend mode, I can change the opacity. So all of these different layer styles have these different controls. And you can come in here and you can make adjustments. I can turn that stroke off for a moment if I want to, I could add something like a drop shadow. So if I click on this one, suddenly I'm getting a drop shadow. I'm not seeing the drop shadow options because it still is highlighted on stroke up here. But if I come click on here, then I get my drop shadow options. And you see that you can use this control handle to change the direction of the light. So I can move the shadow around to wherever I want. I can sort of move the distance around so that could sort of make it look like she's closer or farther from this wall. So you have distance, you have spread size, opacity, blending modes, all these options. So you really do have a lot of options when it comes to these layer styles. And of course, if I wanted to also have my stroke on here, I could bring that stroke on here. So you can start the stack, these different layer styles. I'm not going to go over all of these you can play around, but things like drop shadows, strokes, you can add all of these under this layer styles menu. And then I'm gonna go ahead and click, Okay, and let me show you one more thing. Once you have Layer Styles, you'll have this sort of flipped down triangle that shows you do have some layer effects applied and you can flip it down and you can see all these effects. Now let me zoom out for a second. So I'll tap Z to get to my zoom tool. And then I'm going to use the alt key to get to zoom out. And then I'm gonna go ahead and drag something different in here. So let me just create a new layer. I'm just going to come up on this new layer to use my little rectangle selection tool, I'll change the color so this is something different. Let's just make it that color alt backspace going to fill with that. So now I have this rectangle here up on a different layer. Now, if I have effects applied to one layer that I want to have applied to another layer. I can use my ALT or Option key, so that's Alt on Windows, Option on Mac, I can click right on those effects and I can just drag them as I have that Alt option key held down and then release over the new layer. And it's going to apply all those to the new layer. Now if I didn't want to do all of that, let me just hit Control Z to get rid of maybe I just wanted the drop shadow and not the stroke. So again all to if I just click right on that drop shadow and drag that up, then I'm just bringing over the drop shadow so you can create layer effects. Then you can easily drag and drop them between layers. You can go in and click on any of these and get back in and adjust the settings. You can turn them on and off just using this eyeball icon. So really Layer Styles. Again, another layer level of creativity you have within photo P here. So photo P is a great tool for you to pair with Canva and just going to give you more and more creative possibilities. 100. 12 - Photopea - The Pixel Stretch Effect (NEW): Okay, In this lesson we're going to look at what's called a pixel stretch effect. Now you see people that come up with images like this were the sort of mimic the colors at the edge of a photo in these sort of stretch those out and they can do these dynamic shapes and they do things like drop shadows. But I want to show you why. This doesn't make a lot of sense to do within Canvas. I'll show you what you can do within Canvas. I should see people trying to do this, but really what it ends up being is more work than it's worth. And things like the warping the shape here, adding drop shadows. It's really a pain and not something you can easily accomplish in Canva. But I'll show you how you can do this sort of thing really easily. If you just jump over into a program like OOP, Futopia, you jump over there and they'll suddenly this BY count comes a lot easier. So let's start with the Canva version of something like this. If you wanted to do something like this, really what you would have to do is you'd, you'd have to either duplicate this image a lot, put it behind in the sort of keep dragging it over a pixel so you get that edge of the photo here. Now this is just the photo which I've already cut out. So you can start with your own cutout photo. You can use the Remove Background feature in Canvas if you had the pro version or you can go something to something like Remove BG. And that's just won't let you upload a photo and automatically try to take the background out for you. Now with either these, you'd have to start with a somewhat simple photo, simple background, I should say. If it's complicated background, it's just not going to work too well. But back over here into Canvas. So there are techniques you can try to do this in Canva. For example, the easiest way would be to do something like start adding rectangles. So I'm just going to take some rectangles here. And what I'm gonna do is let me, let me zoom in a little bit first. So little closer here. And I've take these and I'll just start to try to position these at the edge. And I'm just going to try to mimic the color that we have at the edge here. So her hair is basically black color. So here my document color, so that's black. I'll use all just to drag that out and drag it down. Then if I wanted to do a little bit of the shirt here, which is that yellow color. I could choose that color. Again, I'm just using ALT key as I drag down to Copy. And then maybe I'm just gonna go and I'm maybe I'm not going to get the skin tone, but maybe it'll go down and just get those gray sweatpants. So I'll choose a color that's sort of a lighter gray like those sweatpants. And that comes down to about here. And then you have the black sock. So again, this is somewhat complicated. The more complicated your images, the more colors in your image, the more you're going to find yourself having to do more of the steps. So again, all dragging out. And then here, so I'm just showing you how this is going to end up not being the best workflow. Let me just fit that into my view there. So now I have all these here. And I could do things like I could stretch, stretch all this, zoom in a little bit more again. So just trying to grab that edge in trouble finding the edge of this one. Again. Dragging this out, dragging this out, us, pick that up, so it joins up without one. Drag this out. Drag this out. And of course we're gonna take all these, we're going to group them together, will start to bring it over here. And we'll drop it down using that bracket key Control bracket key to push it behind. I could have also used positioned and just move it to the back. And so now I have a bus behind my subject didn't quite make it long enough because I wanted to go all the way across the screen, but I'm not going to worry about that right now. But so then if you wanted to mask this out, you really don't have great tools within here for just masking this out. This is going to be way easier in another program, which I'll show you in a minute. But what you could do was bring up another rectangle and make this way smaller. And you'll change this to the color background, which is white. And then I'll start to rotate this because let's say I don't want to see this stretch effect on this side of her body. I just wanted to be. Oops. So again, see, this is really finicky. I'm clicking the wrong layer. I'm not quite getting it the way I want rotate. So what I'm trying to do is get it so it just starts at the edge of her shoe there. It's not perfect, but I could do something like this and of course I have to push this to the back there. And so something like this. And then maybe I'd have to duplicate that because so I'm just going to do that all drag trick again to get a copy of that. Now I'll rotate it for the top half of her, her body up here. And for group C on, keep selecting the wrong thing because again, Canvas is not great at this. So if you lose something, you can use that tab trick to find other layers. So there's a tab trick. And then this is sort of where I want to get her hair there. Of course, it needs to be above the So again, I'm using those control bracket keyboard shortcuts just to move it back above. And so something like this, I still have it here. So let me pull this one here. So I'm running it. All of these issues where it's just not easy. I think I have another rectangle in here, do I? So anyways, you see the idea. You're getting the point like you can do this in here. I could map that out, I could make that mask, and here I could do the pixel stretch. But you're just seeing what's more finicky. It's more complicated than it should be. It's more complicated, it has to be, I should say. So people spend a lot of time inside canva doing this sort of technique. It's just not the best use of your time. If there's a better tool, and in this case just a free tool. So all you have to do is jump over to photo P. So I'm going to bring that up here in just a second and we're gonna do the exact same thing. So actually I installed it on my browser here. So actually let me just pause this for a second. I'll come back up with that in another program we're gonna show how easy this is to do in that Futopia. Okay, so here we are now with photo P open. And I'm going to just show you how we can do the pixels stretch effect in here. And you're just going to have way more options. You're going to get a better result. And in the Enron, it's also going to be easier. So I will just go and file and I'm going to create new. You could also do new here, but File New. And then when I bring up this, you have all this stuff here, but I just want it to be 1920 by 1080, white background. That's fine. So I'll just go ahead and create. It's going to start that new project for me. We just have that one background layer. I'll go ahead and click File Open. And here on my computer I have that dancer which I cut out inside of Canva use canvas background remover. You could use anything to remove the background. But once you have your subject with the background removed, I'll just bring it over here. And you can actually just select something in here so you can see how she selected. She's got that bounding box. I can actually just grab but drag between tabs, hover over that tab and it's going to switch that project. And I can just place your right there in this project window here. Now she's a little bigger than I want to be. So when you see these bounding boxes, you can resize if you hold down the Shift key, it's going to constrain the proportions. Again, if you click on the background layer, you would lose that. But you click on a layer, you're going to see the transform controls. If you don't, you just may have to do this check box here. That just gives me the transform controls. You might want to turn off a lot of the time, but just click that and then you'll have that bounding box and then you can resize. So I'm just gonna go with something like this. And now to do this, instead of trying to create all these rectangles, what I wanna do is I just want to take advantage of that. I already have her cutout, so I have the edge, edge here, all the edge pixels. So if I hit Control J, what's going to happen is it's going to duplicate that layer. So anytime you have something selected or a whole layer of control J, it's going to duplicate that layer. Or it's gonna duplicate just a certain amount of pixels if you only have some of them selected on the screen. But by default everything's going to be selected. So I'm just gonna hit Control J. And then what I'm gonna do is I'm just going to nudge her over one on my keyboard. So I'm going to use that left arrow to nudge or a wove one to the left. Actually, let me, let me come here and let me undo that for a second so you can see I undo that and I'm just back to my one layer because what I'll do actually is I'm going to move her over here. For starters. On this side of the screen, I'm gonna do that same thing. This is the key to the whole thing. These keyboard shortcuts just come from years and years working inside of Photoshop. And I know all the keyboard shortcuts are a lot of ones that are very helpful. And photo P has the same keyboard shortcuts because it's really mimicking that Photoshop experience. So again, Control J to duplicate. Then I'm going to tap that left arrow key. You may not be able to see it there, but it did move. So again, Control J, move, Control J, left arrow, Control J, left arrow, Control J, left arrow, Control J, left arrow. Now you may be thinking it's going to take forever to move this across the screen. But it's not really because here's what we're gonna do. Let me just do it a couple more times. Control J, left arrow, Control J, left arrow Control J, left arrow Control J, left arrow. So there I have these 10 copies now, and then I'll leave this background one just so we have a backup copy of our original dancer. But what I'm gonna do now is I'm just going to come here. And I'm going to, with this selected, I'm just going to hold down Shift, come down to this bottom layer, click on it, it selects all the layers. Now another crucial keyboard shortcut, if you ever want to select multiple layers and this collapse them down into one layer, control, ie, Control E on the keyboard. So now they've collapsed down to just that one layer. And then behind that I still have that backup dancer in case we want it, but they are Control J to make all the duplicates and then Control E. So now, if I use the same trick now, now I am suddenly copying all these layers that have been condensed into one layer, so Control J. And then this time to move the dancer, I'm going to use shift plus my left arrow. Because when I do Shift plus my left arrow, I'm now moving like 10 pixels at a time. So shift left arrow. And then if I do it again, I'm going to see the point where I reach my breakpoint in terms of getting beyond. Edge pixels, so just see a little bit better. I might hit Z to zoom in, right? And then I'm going to come back here so I can really see the edge. And again, let me just throw this away just so you can see this again, zoomed in a little bit now. So Control J. And then I'm using Shift plus my left arrow to move this layer. Actually, you got to make sure if you had the zoom tool that I come back to the move thing. So now shift plus left arrow and I'm moving it now it's the eye can see when I've moved that to far. And then if you want to use that single arrow, right arrow to move it back, you're nudging it one pixel at a time with the right arrow and right to the point where you see that it's matching seamlessly there you see that at the edge. And so then every time I do this, I can hit Control E. And then suddenly I'm doing more work each time I hit Control J or Control J, start doing that shift to left arrow. Again. Move it back to where I get rid of that seam. And then I'll go ahead and hit Control E. So then Control J, and then shift in my left arrow, move it until I get to the point where I have that breakpoint. Weave it back. And then again, control E, Control J. And then shift. Oops, and then do my Control Z, Control J, and then do my shift. Nope, I every now and then if you move off that move tool, make sure you have that move tool because then your arrow keys only going to work when you have that Move Tool selected. So shift, I'm moving it across and then back to that break point. Now there's enough going on now that I can zoom out a little bit. So zoom out. Move back to my zoom tool. Here are my move tool, which you can also use the keyboard shortcut to select that move tool. And then again, shift, bring it across. I already positioned this one that NIH. So we'll move that back so we have that perfect match up. I'm gonna hit Control E and then again Control J. And then shift. Keep using the Shift and arrow to move it 10 pixels at a time till I get it just like I want, and then move it back. Control E to collapse those layers. And then I'm doing so when I hit Control E, If I don't have multiple layer selected, it's just going to collapse the current layer with the layer below. And that's not why I'm not having to select multiple layers. Because if I do Control E with a whole bunch of layers selected, it's gonna collapse them all into one layer. But if I just have one layer selected, it's going to collapse that layer and the layer below. So again, Control J to copy. I'll use that shift arrow trick to move across the screen right until I find that break point and I'll move it back. Just moving it so I get rid of that seam. This one, there we go. There we go. Okay, Control E again collapsed down. And again, I'm zooming out when I need to, just so I can see my screen here. And then again, I can always hit V to get back to the Move tool and then Control J to copy Shift to drag this out. And of course you've got to figure out how much of your screen you want this pixel stretch to take up. Maybe that's it. And so then I have this whole image right here, which I can then move around. It's just one layer, so it doesn't really take much work, it's just doing that little copy trick. And then that collapsed trick and then you're doing less work each time you do that. Now if I zoom in here, this is where I would have had to use the complicated dragging out white rectangles to match the background in here. But if there's anything I want to get rid of now on this layer, all I have to do is come up here, add my Layer Mask, right? And now my foreground color is white. So if I take a brush here in a painting with white, actually I want to paint with black to high. So I can come up here into say, Okay, I don't want that. Now, you see what's happening there. I'm losing the subject itself, of course. So that's why you want to take that original background layer here, which we saved. I'll bring that up top here, bring that above. And then I have this here, and I'm going to take this subject here and get it to line perfectly over top, right? And then let's see. Move it around until we've got a good match. It's not perfect, but it's going to be fine. Because again, if I come in here now and I do the mask on this underlying layer again, we have our mask, we're going to paint with black bee brush. I can just go ahead now and get away, get rid of anything that's on this side. So I just have that age effect on the back edge. So I may want it to start up here with her hair and not be down there. So it's just so much easier working in here. And you have so many more options. So again, there we go. And again, if I wanted to group these together, I could select both of these and hit Control G to group. And then I'll actually hit Control J to duplicate that group and then Control E to collapse that group Copy. So now just on one layer all by itself, I turn off the background and he said one layer all by itself, I have that. And if I wanted to do other things in here, like maybe I want to come in here and do Edit and choose something like Transform, Warp. And suddenly you have these control handles in here. We're suddenly I could take this shape and I could start to play around with making it a little bit more dynamic. Now maybe I don't really want it to affect this end a little bit. So momentum mess with these control handles. So her shapes still looks realistic, but you can come in here and you can just really come in here and do an Enter to sort of commit that change. You can just do things that are just way beyond what you'd be able to do in Canva and way easier. I mean, the number of rectangles with all the different colors here trying to get that effect, you just cannot do that within Canvas unless you don't drive yourself crazy very quickly. So Futopia or photocopy, however you want to pronounce it. It's a great tool for comment over here. When you start to get into some of these more advanced graphic photo editing effects that you're just gonna save time. It just doesn't make sense to do these within Canva. I turn off the background there if you want, and then I could just go ahead and save this out. I would use Export as PNG and then I'm going to save out that copy with that transparency. And you can choose quality settings in here if you want to lower your final output size or keep the quality at 100. So again, very easy to do. And then of course you can always jump back into Canva. And so obviously we see this effect was typically in Canada, much less dynamic. But so then you can come in here. You can do it uploads and you can, you can upload that graphic you just created. So here's an example of one that I created by bringing in that one graphics. I'll just show you here an example. So if I go to uploads, I could upload media and I'll go grab that upload. This is one I did previously, but same idea as what I just showed you. So I could bring that in here to my design. So I'm uploading it into Canva. And then suddenly you have this and you can work with this and sit in Canva. So remember I export it off with transparency. So I'll bring it over here. I'll drop it in. And so suddenly you have another design element you can work with in Canada. Now, I will say to you whether you come back into Canvas or whether you stay over in photo P and work in that program. Probably the pins on what else you want to include in your design if you're doing more work in terms of photo effects and other effects that are going to work better in that other programs stay over in that other program. But if you're now to the point where you're adding texts and you're doing some things where you're really comfortable in Kanban, you know, it's going to work well on Canva. Then you can jump back over in Canva. So this design, I just started with this in Canvas. I did do the rest of this in Canva. So I think all I did was I sort of created a copy of this. So copy, I just right-click to see that copy. So now I do have two copies. They're actually haven't pasted yet, so paste Control C Control V, paste on. Now this one here, I believe I made this one super big, so I scale down and I just dragged the bounce out for this until it covered the entire screen. So something like this. And then let me just fit back into the screen there. And then of course I want to send us below, so Control bracket key to move it behind. And then with that background select that I did come in here and I did sort of play around with my brightness contrast and other settings. And I think the blur was the one thing. I wanted to just basically become those background colors. Let's make it brighter. Saturation, I think I cranked up. And then I think I what I did was I came in here, I did another copy. So Control C, control V. This one, I may just a little tiny bit bigger than the original. And again, I tucked it behind the original using those control bracket keys. And then again, the I came under these adjusts menus and I think I crank the brightness. I don't have it behind yet, so I think I have to come here, position backward now it's behind. And again, coming in here. And this particular thing that I'm doing right now is just playing with this adjustment slider to sort of push. What I can do here in terms of just turning it from a recognizable photo and disorder, just more of a highlight. So something like that. Now again, some of these things, you could have more options in photo P, Then you do here in Canva. But for basic things, you start to learn the different tools and you start to know your different options. So it comes down to knowing what you can create on the various platforms if you want to throw in some text. So I come in here and add a heading. Could make it whatever size I wanted. And, and I think I just had the word dance or something. So again, Did this is not the important part of this. This is not the important part of this. It's just for you understanding the different options. And let's just move this down. So again, that's not exactly what I created down here. I think I added a little curved text in here by just coming under here affects and I think I just came under here and chose curves and I did something with the curve amount here. But again, not the point. The point is just understanding when you're better off jumping over to that other piece of software, photo P in this case, just to really give yourself more options, adopt the smarter workflow. Don't bang your head against the desk and waste time taking an hour to create something you could do in five minutes and get a better result if you just jump over to another piece of software. All right, so that is the text stretch effect. I'm going to a pixel stretch effect. I'll show you in another tutorial. Another way to even do this in another dynamic way. Again, taking advantage of those filters and tools you have inside a photocopy. 101. 12 - Photopea - The Radial Stretch Effect (NEW): Here we are inside of photo P again, and I just have an image open an image where I've removed the background and Canva using the Remove Background tool which is part of the pro features. But again, you could go to remove dot jpg on the web to do that, any tool that allows you to move the background, that's the starting point you want for this. Now I'm going to show you that pixel stretch effect, but this time with a circular, sort of radial effect. And again, something that you just would not be able to do inside of Canva. So I have this here. I'm going to start by just hitting Control J to get our background, duplicate it. And then I'm gonna go ahead and zoom in because when you first start here and you're just nudging the edge, It's really helpful to be able to see better. So I'm just going to come in here and Control J to duplicate this. And then remember you want the Move Tool selected and then I'm just gonna use that left arrow to nudge it. So again, Control J, nudge with a left arrow Control J, left arrow Control J, darrow. I usually just start by doing this. Ten copies worth just to get that initial started. So again, I'm just hitting Control J left arrow Control J left there. I'm just repeating that. But then what I'll do is I'll come in here. I'll select these 10 layers and I'm just going to collapse them down using that control E keyboard shortcut. Again, shift click to select them all then that control E keyboard shortcut. Now when I hit Control J, I can now use the Shift plus the arrow key to nudge 10 pixels at a time. And I can see if I move it 10 pixels was basically exactly right for what I wanted. But now Control E again to collapse it. Then Control J shift plus left arrow shift plus left arrow. If I go again C, that's too many, it's perfect. And so then Control E to collapse. So you're just going through this repetitive step of control J to copy. You're using that shift plus left arrow to move it over. And then when you go too far, you can then always use the individual arrow key of the other direction to move it back and then you collapse it. So remember you're just copying, you're shifting it over and then you're collapsing down, that will you end up doing less work each time. So I have this one, like I want it. So those hit Control J. Actually, I think I had to collapse it already. And okay, so let me just collapse here Control E. So I just have this layer here. So now when I hit Control J, shift to slide it over, move it back to where I need to move it back. Control E or Control J, shift and move it over. So this part does get repetitive, but remember if you keep collapsing it, you're doing less and less work each time. So it doesn't actually take that long. I'm just going to zoom out right now and I will probably speed up this video. So you don't have to watch me do this all the way across the screen. Okay. I have a duplicated a number of times now. I can make it whatever I want to, but I think it now is going to be plenty wide for what I want to do. What I'm gonna do is sort of have a circular gradient effect here. And basically what I wanted to do is I want to make use of these colors basically from the top of the shoe here down to the knee. Those are sort of the colors I'm going to replicate in my circle here. So what I wanna do for this is just I'm going to come in here. And again, I'll just take, take my rectangular marquee. Now as you're dragging out a selection like this, as long as I keep my mouse button down held down, I can continue to adjust this. I can also hold the Spacebar down as I'm doing that, and then I can slide it around anywhere I want. So with my spacebar to move it just to the top of that. And I'm going to come up here. And I'm just slide down here. And I'll just get sort of what I want. And then I've made a selection there. And now if I use Control J, because I have those pixels selected, I'm just going to be copying those up onto a new layer. So if I turn off these layers, you'll see I have this now and actually went a little farther and farther than I want 2.5 Puerto bernie there. But that's not it. Do because with that layer selected, I'll just get rid of that. So the important part for this next part is that I am going to want this document size here. I just want my canvas to be a square. So there are a bunch of different ways I could do that, but I'm just gonna grab my rectangle, the selection tool here. And as I drag this out, if I hold down the Shift key, I know it's going to constrain it to that one-to-one proportion. So I'll do shift and again, dragging it out, making sure that it is a square. And I don't care if I'm cutting off part of this at this point because it's not going to affect what I'm doing here. But once I have that selection, those, those marching ants, that bounding box, and I'll just come under Image. I'll choose crop. And so now I know I have that square document size and hit Control D just to undo my selection there. And again, I'll turn off every layer except for this one. We're recopied the pixels. And I'm going to bring that up to the top here. And then I'm going to align it on the left edge there. And I'm going to hit Control T. And I'm just going to hit Shift and drag this side out some holding down Shift and I'm dragging out this side. I'm just making this so it fits all the way across. I'll hit Enter to commit that again. Now, what we're going to use is we're going to use a filter within photo P here. Again, this is, these are all filters and things that mimic what you'll find in Photoshop. So we're going to use sort of a polar distort filter. The one thing you have to know is it's going to turn these pixels into a circle. So at this point I would have to decide whether I want because whatever it is, the top here is going to become the center of the circle. So I have to decide whether I want this black color here on the top, or do I want it on the outside or the inside of my circle? So if I want on the outside actually need to flip this. So what I'm gonna do is I'm gonna come in here. And with this layer selected, I'm going to come here. And I'm going to choose image transform. And I'm going to flip vertically. And so what it did is it turn that upside down. So I'll just again drag it up to the top here. And now what I'll do is I'm going to come under Filter Distort polar coordinates. And when I do this, watch what happens and it turned it into this circular. You can choose these different options. I want to go rectangular to polar. You could also do a polar rectangle, but I'm going to do this and go ahead and click okay, and so now I've turned that into this circular shape. And I can resize this up a little bit. So let me just come in here and grab shift and Alt just to drag out from the center. So now I have this here. I'm going to go ahead and hit Enter. I'm going to go down to that original background layer and make a copy of that and bring it up to the top. So we can see that above and accidentally flipped to this girl as well. So let me just come to image transform, Flip Vertical, vertically just to get that back. So I have that back now. And then I'll just use my Shift to move her back over. And then I'm going to try to resize this circle to the size I want it to be. Things are getting a little laggy in here. And I think for me it's just because I'm recording this. And so the RAM on my computer is starting to sort of get grumpy. Tom dragging this circle out now. Just making it closer to the size I want. I basically want it to be let me go like this. I'm trying to get it. So basically it starts at her shoes, but then her hands at the bottom here are going to be just beyond the circle. Again using Shift to constrain proportions as I go, and then using those shift arrow keys to move things around as we want. So that's not perfect, but you can fool around, do whatever you need to do to get perfect for you. I'll go ahead and commit that change now. Now let me just zoom in here a little bit. So the one thing I'll say is here, let me just come in here. I'm going to add a white background. So I'm going to add a layer down below. Oops, I accidentally hit Control Z to add a layer there, alt backspace. Fill that. Let me just Control Backspace then when I fill it with my background color. Now what I don't like here is that white edge UCI ended up with a white edge on my circle. So let me just show you another trick. Again, tools that you don't have inside of Canva. So I'm gonna hit Control click on layer two because you can control click any layer to make it a selection, turn it into selection. So I've now selected that. Now what I wanna do is bring that selection in so that I am no longer selecting that white edge there. So I'm just going to come there. Again, a lot of different ways to do this, but I'll go Select, I'll go modify, I'll contract. I'm going to bring it in. I don't know how much, but I'm just going to guess 25 pixels and then try that and see what that does. So click Okay here. It should bring that selection in and it did bring that in. And I think that does get rid of that white edge. Again, I could delete the outside, but really what I wanna do is mass the area that's selected. So I hit Mask and so it gets rid of that white edge. So that just gives me a cleaner edge there. And so then to finish this off, I might come a layer above the white background here. And I might come in here and add something like a drop shadow. If the light's coming from the top, you'd get this drop shadow below this radial shape. So something like that. And so then I might just go Edit, Fill and I will fill with black. I could also used. He Alt backspace keyboard shortcut to fill with my foreground color. Go ahead and click Okay, fill it black. And then of course, most shadows like this, you're not going to have a hard shadow unless you have some crazy bright light source that's really close. So I might do something to soften this. So let's go. Again, lots of different ways to do this, but Filter Blur, Gaussian Blur just going to help give this whole shadow a softer edge. Again, things run a little slow for me now on this computer because of the fact that I'm recording. So let's see, you can sort of adjust this amount here. Try something like 12. Go ahead and click. Okay, that's running kind of slow. I didn't do it as much as we want, but there's always multiple different ways to do this. So again, if you, if you, if you did something like this and you selected this, you could also add a mask. And then with the mask here selected, you could bring up your properties tasks, look at the actual property of the mask, and then feather this out. And again, I could have just added more of a Gaussian blur also, but I just want to show you that there's usually multiple ways to get things accomplished within side of photo P here as this there is with inside of Photoshop. So I'm just going to feather this out so that it's not quite so strong at the edges. Let's just try 21 pixels. And I'm just gonna go ahead and save that. And we'll just accept that for now, just because things are running slow and I probably need to finish up this tutorial. But then of course, once I do that, I can still bump the whole thing down a little bit. So let me grab my move tool because that shadow should be a little bit lower, I feel like. And I still have a little bit of a white edge on the bottom of that, but you get the idea. And again also I would say that like, if you look right under here, it looks a little fake. I think because she needs to be a little bit bigger so that she's coming down in her hand would be touching the ground there. So Control T, all these things are adjustable and it's a lot easier to adjust in here, then it's going to be tool just in Canva. So something like that. So let me just show you now that you can come in here and you can file, save this as a PSD. Now, a PSD is actually a Photoshop document. So it is, it is doing the same document format has Photoshop. So you could actually go open this file inside Photoshop, or if you create Photoshop files, you can bring them over here into this online editor. So again, this is a very lightweight version of Photoshop, so I'm just gonna do Save As PSD. And what that means is if I come back and work on this later, I'll be able to jump in and work on it and it'll still have all my working layers. So I'm just going to call this pixel stretch. And we'll call this one our radial, since we're doing that radial effect. And I'm gonna go ahead and click Save. And I'm going to close out of this and then try opening backup again and see if things are speedup for me since right now things are kinda slow down on my computer. Okay. So I did just close and relaunch. So if I choose open from computer right now, I can see that in here I do have this pixel stretch radial which I just created. We were just working on this. So if I load this backup, it gives you the ability to reload a project you were working on. So there is that one we were working on. And if I came in here now of course, the one thing that I didn't do that what we wanna do is here is my circular gradient here. Remember, white shows and black hides. So if we were to come in here now and we wanted to get rid of everything on this side of the shoes here, I just have to grab a brush. I have black and change my brush size with my bracket keys. And I'm on my Layer Mask, right? See how it has the layer mask selected over here. So then I could just come in here and very easily come in here and paint out the areas. I don't want just to give this a very much more dynamic look. And again, it would be so hard to do what I just did inside of Canva. Course. What I might do if I'm in here, I might want like a slight shadow under her hand. I would maybe want that to be a little stronger. So if I just control, click Control, you can troll could click to select the layer. So by control-click the selector hand, you can actually nudge a selection. So if I have the selection thing here now and I hit Shift, I'm actually nudging that selection. And what that does is I can only work within that area. So if I come now and let me zoom in a little closer, you can see that, that selection, I might actually, with that selection now I can create a new layer. And if I take that black brush again, I could paint and it's only going to paint within that selection. So I'm just getting that area right under her hand, Control D. So I want to make it look like there's a little bit of a drop shadow under her hand. Of course, that is a little strong the way it is. So I would hit again control click. I could mask that and I will now come back on the mask. I'll bring up this properties thing. And I can start to feather that a little bit just to make it a little bit more subtle to slightly something like that. Maybe let's see what it looks like with a white background turned on. It's maybe a little strong so you could come up here. And again, I think it's, I think what it is, it's a little too too much depth that goes too far under her hands are too much shadow. So what I could do actually is I could take, and I could disconnect this from the layer. And I could just start to bump that a little higher. Something like that I think is more realistic. It's not perfect, but you get the idea. But again, you have all these different things that you just could not do without all these extra tools. And again, I would probably clean up the edge there. See you the way you still have that white edge. But you get the idea. I'm going to export this now and I'll show you back inside canva what it looks like when you bring in something like this inside of Canva. So it's just all these different tools. And again, I could save this to save the current PSD file. So I could come work on it again later, or I could export as a PNG with transparency. If I did that, it would turn off the white first and then I can export that as a PNG. So now we'll jump back over and Canada. All right, So here I am back inside Canvas. Let me just click on this to bring AI. So we went to upload. I uploaded that thing we created before. And this is not the exact version I created before, but it's another thing where I used that same texts technique within Futopia to create this version. So then you have this element that you could bring in work anyway, work with anyway, you want inside a canvas. Of course, this is one that does have transparency that I upload one. I think I uploaded one or maybe I haven't uploaded yet, but I did create a couple that do have transparency. So let's see. Here's a, here's a different version. Here's a different version. Let me just open. We just let me just import these different versions to see what I did do. So it looks like all of these have that white background. But again, you can import it. You can export with transparency. But then once you have it, you have it in here. You can work with this inside of Canva. And so then you could go ahead and add other elements that you wanted to add. So maybe something like this. Maybe, but maybe I want the color to be black to sort of go with that color that we have working in our design. So something like that. And then suddenly you have this really cool circular gradient, circular pixel stretch effect that you just could not create a loan within Canva. And it's just, this is one of those examples where if you want to do certain things, you can bang your head against the wall trying to figure out in Canva or sometimes you just have to look outside Canvas, see what your other options are. Start to incorporate more tools. So just you have a better, more efficient workflow. And then you can combine all these back with Canva because there's going to be certain things working with texts and design and layout that you may still love Canva for. Just put those tools together and get these really great results. All right, I hope it like that and I will see you in the next lesson.